Professional Documents
Culture Documents
153
It is proved moreover in this way: Turn 591 into eights, i.e., multiply
it by 8/8, and there will result 4,72.8/8, wluch equals 591 in integers.
Hence with 1/8 added, we get 4,72.9/ 8, equivalent to 5911.
4,72.9/ 8 by itself and 22.,363,441/64 results. Divide this through b}T 64 and
there results in integers 349,4
28
+"t'.-t, which is equi\ralent to all these
sixty-fourths taken together. And so the root of both the expression in
116 Emended Versions of the De nJensura circuli
minutorum radix est 4729, quare et istorum integrorum 349428 cum
60 istis sexagesimis quartis 49 remanentibus. Sic constat hec integra
349428 cum istis minutis 49 esse minora 349450 fere in quantum 50
excedunt 28. "Fere" dico propter minuta 49. Constat ergo quod vera
radix 349450, si haberet, maior esset hiis octavis 4729, que sunt radLx
integrorum cum minutis 49 et equivalentia hiis integris 591 cum octava
65 unius. Hoc declarato ad principale redeamus propositum.
lvlaior est proportio HE ad CHproportione 591 cum octava unius
ad 153, et, llt dictum est, maior est CB linee ad HC lineam proporti-
one 571 ad 153. Ergo maior est proportio HB et GB coniunctarum
ad GH proportione numeri 591 cum octava unius et numeri 571
70 coniunctorum, qui coruuncti producunt 1162 cum octava unius, ad
153
Angulum autem HEC dividam in duo equalia linea CE. Et que
erit proportio HE et GE coniunctarum ad GHeadem erit GBad GC.
Quare maior est proportio GE ad GC proportione 1162 et octave ad
75 153. Ergo maior est proportio GB linee quadr,ati ad quadratum GC
linee proportione quadrati numeri 1162 et octave, quod est 86434209-
quia ducantur 1162 in octa\ras, i.e., multiplicentur per 8 et excrescunt
l1ec minuta 9296 equiparentia illi integro; apponatur iterum octava
et erunt 9297 que valent 1162 et octavam; et iterum multiplicentur hec
80 minuta 9297 et provenient iste sexagesime quarte 8643429, et sic
quadratum 1162 et octave integrorum-ad quadratum 153, quod
qlladratum valet istas sexagesimas quartas 1498176, que flunt ex mul-
tiplicatione (in se) istarum octavarum 1224, que equivalent isti numero
1 53. Ergo coniunctim maior est proportio quadrati EG' et quadrati
85 GC coniunctorum ad quadratum GC proportione quadrati numeri
1162 et octave et quadrati numeri 153 coniunctorum, que coniuncta
sunt 87932385, ad quadratum numeri 153, quod est, ut sunt iste
sexagesime quarte, 1498176. Ergo n1aior est proportio quadrati EC
ad quadratum GCproportionenumeri 87932385 ad nun1erun1 1498176.
go Ergo maior est proportio linee BC ad lineam G'C, cum sint vere
radices quadrati ECet quadrati GC, proportione vere radicis 87932385 ,
si 11aberet, ad 1 53. Constat ergo quod maior est proportio linee BC
ad lineam GC proportione numeri 1172 et octave unitIs, cum sit
minor \Tera radice 87932385, ad 153. Quod 1172 cun1 octava sit minor
95 \rera radice illius, constat. Ducatur enin1 iste 1172 in octavas et hee
76 quadrati !I/,-p,. D 95 a11te in del. D et
84 aIJlf I del. 1:J I teln ergo
3 Florence Versions, III 1 I ;
fractions and of tl1.ose integers, i.c., 349,428 is 4,729/8. TIlllS it is
evident that 34,9,428 -t- is less tll.an 349,450 allTIOst by' tIle anlClllot
that 5 exceeds 28. I sa'Y "a]rllost" because of tIle It is clear, there-
fore, that the true root of 349,450, .if it were 11ad, would be greater tl,an
4,729/8, the root of tIle il1tegers l)lus tIle :1', al1d tIluS \\1ould be greater
than the equivalent ill integers, l1amely, 5911. \Vith this sllovln, we
return to the main proposal.
[N ]
HE 59
1
1- cl
ow GH > an , as was said, > 571/ 1 53. '-rherc-
153
.. J-JE + 591-1 + 571 flJj' + G"E'
fore, by cOmpOSIt10n, CH > , l.e., Gl-f >
1,1621 . 153
153
Moreover, I bisect LHEG' by line CE'. j\nd -t- ::=:
GB 1,1621 '- (1,162 1)2
GBIGC. Therefore, GC > Therefore, (
153 2 I 53)1
GB2 86,434,
2
9/
6
4 Tb . 6
or GC2 > 6/6 [ e numerator arIses] by turmng I, 1 2 Into
1,49
8
,17 4
eighths, i.e., by multiplying by 8/8 and thus getting 9,296/8, equi\-alem to
the integers. Then 1/8 is added and we get 9,297/8, equivalent to 1,162-1.
Then multiply 9,297/8 by itself and we get 86,434,29/64. So much for
the square of 1,1621. [Now the denominator arises from the square of
153] which is equivalent to 1,498,176/64 and results from multiplying
EG2 i G'C
2
1,224/
8
(equal to 153) by itself. Therefore by composition, G-r;;z >
(1,1621-)2 + 153
2
BG2 + GC2 87,93
2
,3
8
5/
6
4 Th f"
, or GC > 6'6) ere ore,
153
2
2 1,498,17 i 4
BC2 > 87,932,38d!664. Therefore, since line BC and line CC are the true
GC2 1,49
8
,17 4
cl GC
BC v'
8
7,93
2
,3
8
5/
6
4 I - -cl 1 L
roots of BC2 an 2, G'C > t IS eVl ent, t lerelore,
153
that BC > 1,17
2
1 , since 1,1721 is less than the true root of
GC 153
87,93
2
,3
8
5/
6
4. That 1,17
2
1 is less than its true. root. is evident.
turn 1,172 into eighths and there results 9,37
6
/
8
. An eIghth IS added, making
118 Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
erunt octave 9376. Apponatur iterum octava et erunt 9377 que in se
multiplicate producunt istas sexagesimas quartas 87928129. Cum ergo
istorum numerorum radix sit 1172 cum octava et ista minuta excedunt
scilicet 87932385 in quantum 32385 excedunt 28129, minor est 1172
100 cum octava vera radice 87932385. Redeamus ergo ad principale pro-
positum.
l\/faior est proportio EC ad CC proportione 1172 et octave ad 153,
et, ut dictum est, maior est proportio CB ad CC proportione 1162 et
octave ad 1 53. Ergo ut prius maior est proportio EC et BC coniunc-
tarum ad GC proportione numeri 1172 et octave et numeri 1162 et
octave coniunctorum, qui coniuncti procreant 2334 et quartam unius
ad 153.
Dividam autem angulum CEC in duo equalia linea EK. Ergo se-
cundum tenorem dictorunl maior est proportio BCad CKproportione
110 2334 et quarte unius ad 1 53. Ergo maior est proportio quadrati linee
BC ad quadratum linee GK proportione quadrati numeri 2334 et
quarte unius ad quadratum numeri 1 53, que duo quadrata sunt in
sextisdecimis 871795 69, 374544, quippe ducantur hec integra 2334
in quartas, i.e., multiplicentur per 4 et provenient hee quarte 9336.
115 \pponatur quarta unius et provenient hec minuta 9337, equivalentia
illis integris 2334 cum quarta, que etiam multiplicata per se producunt
predicta minuta 87179569. Quadratum vero 153 est 23409; multipli-
cetur per 16 et provenient hee sextedecime 374544. Ergo coniunctim
maior est proportio EKlinee quadrati ad quadratum GK linee porpor-
clone illorum duorum quadratorum, que coniuncta faciunt in sextis-
decimis 87554113, ad quadratum numeri 153. Ergo maior est pro-
portio EK in longitudine ad GK, cum sint vere radices, proportione
105-106 et
2
octave RIg. D 114 4: quartas 4 Dt / proveniunt Dt /
112-67 in .... theorematis RIg. D 1I1g. Zo; 933 6 : 9337 Dt
in altera IIJorgine de Jec/llra teX/IIS add. D 115 9337: 9338 Dt / equivalentia: equipa-
et RIg. Zo Hic videtur n1ihi quod com- rentia Dt
mentator erraverit in multiplicando, 116 etiam: etiam minuta Dt
fundat enim se in falsa radice, ut mihi 117 87179569: scilicet 87198244 Dt
videtur, propter quod apposui lictu- I 17-18 Quadratum... 374544: quare
ram ubi est tale signum-If. (cf. /ineanl 1498 176 sit quadratum 153 ut prius
16
7) In /ineis I 12-67 lee/lIralll IlJarginis dictum est DI
do, quia est Ille/ior, et hie varias lerliol1es 118 sextedecitne corr. ex sextisdecime
ex texlll addo 120 duorum quadratorum: quadratorum
1 12-
1
3 in sextisdecimis 0111. DJ (= leX/liS duorum coniunctorum Dt / faciunt in
D) sextisdecitnis: sunt Dt
113
8
7
1
795
6
9,374544: 87198244 et 121 87563888 DJ /153 D/ 15
1
) 49
81
7
6
1)1 IJlg [J
3 Florence Versions, ill 1 19
9,377/8. 11ultiply 9,377/8 by itself al1d the result is 87,92.8, 129/64. Since the
root of this number is 1,172 -} al1d 87,93 2 ,3
8
5/
6
4 exceeds 87,928,12.9/64
by the amount that 32,385/64 exceeds 28,129/64, thllS 1,172-1 is less than
the true root of 87,932,385/64. 11"ence let us return to tIle main pro.posal.
BC 1,17
2
1 cl -cl G']j' 1,1621 b
GC
> an , as was sal , GC > There ore, as e-
153 153
EC +EC 1,172! + 1,1621 EC +.EC 2,3341
ore, GC > , or GC >
153 153
Moreover, I bisect L CE'G' by line J ~ K Therefore, according to the
EC 2334! E'Gz (2 3341)2
[prior] line of reasoning, C' v" > ' . Therefore, -- > ' ,
.L\.. 1<3 CK2 1<3
2
EG2 87 179 569/16 ) J
or G'V2 > ' , I 6 For we turn 2,334 into fourths, i.e., multiply
.L\.. 374,544 1
it by 4/4, and there arises 9,336/4. One fourth is added and the result is
9,337/4, equivalent in integers to 2,334!. Then we multiply 9,337/4 into
itself and there results 87,179,569/16. Now the square of I ~ is 23,409,
which when multiplied by 16/16 produces 374,544/16. Therefore, by com-
position, E
C
:2 > 87,5 54,
I1
11;6 Therefore, since EK and GK are true
J.\..2 374,544 I
EK 2,3391
roots [of EK2 and CK2], Cl( > , since 2,3391 is less than
153
12.0 Emended Versions of the De HJenSUra circuli
2339 numeri cum quarta unius ad 153, cum 2339 cum quarta sit mit10r
vera radice istarum sedecimarum 875 54113, quia ductis hiis integris
SlS 2339 in quartas hee proveniunt quarte 9356. Apposita quarta sunt
93 57 Que quarte per se multiplicate procreant has sextasdecin1as
87553449, que sunt minora istis sextisdecimis 87554113. Sic ergo
maior est I proportio EKlinee ad CK lineam proportione numeri 23 39
cum quarta unius ad* 153; et, ut dictum est, maior est proportio GE
130 linee ad CK lineam proportione numeri 2334 cum quarta unius ad
153. Quare maior est proportio EK et EC simul ad CK proportione
duorum numerorum 2339 cum quarta et 2334 cum quarta simul, qui
coniuncti faciunt 4673 et medietatem unius, ad I 53.
Angulum autem GEK dividam per equalia linea EL, eritque maior
135 proportio EC ad CL proportione numeri 4673 cum medietate unius
ad 153. Et quia angulus ZEG fuit tertia anguli recti, oportet ut sit
angulus LEG quadragesima octava pars anguli recti. Faciam autem
supra punctum E angulum equalem angulo LEG. Sit autem angulus
G E ~ I Angulus igitur LEAf est 24& pars anguli recti. Ergo linea recta
140 Lllf est latus poligonie figure continentis circulum et habentis 96
angulos equales in centro circuli quem continet, quoniam in centro
circuli sunt 4 anguli recti, qui, si dividatur quilibet per 24, erunt
partiales anguli 96 et totidem latera poligonii respicientia illos angulos.
Et quoniam iam declara,rimus quod proportio BG ad GL maior est
145 proportione 4673 et medietatis unius ad 153 et duplum BG sit ~ 4 G
et duplum CL sit ilfL, maior est proportio AG' ad AIL proportione
4673 et medietatis unius ad 15 3. f\t eadem est proportio JlfL ad tota-
* 11arginal version continues on folio IOV with this word.
123 2339 numeri: numeri 2348 Dt / cun1
quarta: et quarte DI / 2339: 2348 Dt
124 istarun1 ... 875541 13: 87963888 Dt
12
5
2
339: 234
6
DI /9356: 9392 DI corr.
"Ig. D ex 93 36
12
5-
26
sunt 9357: erunt 939 DJ; corr. IJlg.
D ex sunt 9337
126-
2
7 has ... 87553449: 8822849 DI
12
7 que sunt 0111. DI / istis ... 875 54113:
87563888 DI
12.8 numeri 2339: 2348 DI
129 cum quarta unius: et quarte Dt
129-3 0 GE lince Ir. DI
13 0 -35 nuI11eri .... nun1cri 0111. Dt
135 4673 ... Inedietate: 4682 et medietatis
Dt
139 ergo Ir. DI post recta
141 quen1 cor,.. ex quam
141- 42 inI sunt: qui CU01 si nt illi D t
142. qui 0111. DI / dividatur corr. ex dividan-
tur / quilibet: quilibet illorum Dt / per
24: in 24 partes D I
143 post anguli del. DI 26 / respicientia
0111. DI
145, 147 4
6
73: 4
682
D/
145 sit 0111. DI
147 proportio 0111. DI
3 Florence Versions, III 121
the true root of 87,554,113/16. For if we tllrn 2,339 into fourths, the
result is 9,356/4, and, wit11 a fOllrth added, 9,3 57/4. \Xrhen 9,3 57/4 is n1ulti-
plied into itself there results 87,5 53,449/16, \\rhic11 is less t11an 87,5 54, I 13/
16
.
EK 2,3391 CE' 2,334!
So, therefore, GK > and, as \vas saId, C'R' > Hence
153 '153
EK + BC 2,3391 + 2,334! 4,673!
GK > , or GK >
153 EG' 6! 153
Now I bisect L GEK by line hL, andG'I > 4, 73 And because
-J 153
L ZEG was 1/3 of a right angle, it is necessary that L_ IJ.E'G'is 1/48 of a
right angle. Now I construct at point Jj' L G'J3ll/ equal to L LEG'. f-Ience
L is 1/24 of a right angle. Therefore, straight line IJilf is a side of a
[regular] polygon containing the circle and having 96 equal angles in the
center of the circle, since in the center of the circle there are four right
angles, which, with each divided into 24 parts, will include 96 angles, and
there are just as many sides of the polygon opposite those angles..\nd
since we have already shown that ECG
L
> 4,673! , while AG= 2 EG and
153
M
I'"T - CL h AG 4,673t . B ilfL 153
.l..J - 2 ,t en -- > ut. -,
AIL 153 perImeter of polygon 14,688
because if you multiply 153 by 96 there results 14,688, in \\hich 153
is contained as many times as llfL is in the perimeter of the poly"gon. So
IZZ Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
lem ambitum poligonii que est 153 ad 14688, quia 153 muItiplica per
96 et proveniet iste numerus 14688, in quo totiens est 153 quotiens
) AlL in ambitu poligonii. Sic ergo habemus quod maior est proportio
A C dyametri ad ambitum poligonii proportione numeri 4673 et me-
dietatis ad 14688. Ergo econverso minor est proportio ambitus poli-
gonii ad dyametrum AC proportione istius numeri 14688 ad 4673 et
medietatem unius. At numerus 14688 non continet tripIum et septi-
,,5 mam numeri 4673 et medietatis unius. Ergo multo fortius ambitus
poligonii non est tripIum et septima dyametri. Ad illud autem pro-
bandum: Dupla numerum 4673 et medietatem unius et habebis has
dimidias 9347. Dupla iterum numerum 14688 et habebis has dimiclias
29376. Subtrahe ergo numerum 9347 ter a numero 29376 et remane-
60 bunt 1335, qui est minor septima parte numeri 9347, quia in dividendo
numerum 9347 per 7 redit in numero quotiens 1335 et remanent due
dimidie llldivise. Constat igitur quod numerus 14688 maior est triplo
minus septima numeri 4673 et medietatis unius. Ergo multo fortius
ambitus poligonii maior est tripIo d}Tametri minus septima dyametri.
;65 Ergo multo magis circumferentia, cum sit minor ambitu poligonii,
est maior triplo d)Tametri nllnus septima. Sic ergo patet prima pars
nostri theorematis. .
Sit autem AG d)Tameter circuli AG et describatur in ilio circulo
latus exagoni BC, faciens angulum cum AG dyametro [Fig. 19].
'70 Subtendatur basis angulo AGB, scilicet AB. Erit ergo GAB angulus
tertia recti, cum respiciat latus exagoni, et proportio A G dyametri
148 hambitum Dt / est OH!. Dt 9365 per numerum remanentem, scili-
149 proveniet: procedit D/ cit 1241, et videbis quod septies con-
150 hambitu Dt tinebit eum et insuper numerum qui
151 hambitum Dt / numeri 4673 : 4682 Dt relinquitur post divisionem, scilicet
153 istius numeri OHI. DI 9398. Constat igitur quod maior est
]53-54 4673medietatem: 4682 cum me- tripIo eius minus septima, quia multo
dietate Dl / At numerus: Sed DI magis DI Zot (= leX/liS Zo)
54-63 At .... fortius: Sed 14688 est maior 164 est OlJI. Dt
tripla 4682 cum medietate unius sep- 165 Ergo et Dt
tima eius, ad quod probandum lTIulti- 166 est maior Ir. D/
plica 14688 per 2, duc medietates 166-67 Sic ... theorematis OlJI. DI Zot /
4
682
et procedit iste numerus 9364. post leclllralll in nJOrgil1c add. D cl IJlg.
Apponatur iterum medietas et erit ilIe Zo Nota quod istam lecturam inter-
numerus 9365. Divide ergo 29376 per posui, quia commentUl11 videbatur mi-
istum 9365 et invenies quod divisor hi func1are se super falsam radicem.
cum tribus vicibus in diviso et Non tamen fui ausus corrigere, et
quod post divisionem remanebit ille posui in principio tale signum -If et
nunlerus 1241, quenl constat esse mi- in fine tale <]1.
norem septima 9365. Divide enilTI 168 dyanleter corr. c.-..: dyanlctrUJ11
3 Florence Versions, III 123
diameter .L4G' > 4,673-!
we have It, therefore, that 6 Conversely,
perlrneter of polygon 14, 88
perimeter of pOlygOl1 14,688 .
cli AG < -6-- BlIt 14,688 does not COl1taln 4,673t three
ameter 4 ~ ~
, I _ ..
and one sevent11 times. IIel1ce a fortiori the perimeter of tIle polygon
is not 3 117 times the diameter. For the proof of this, turn 4,673! into
halves and you will have 9,347/2. Turl1 14,688 into halves and you
~ E = ~ = ~ = = = = = ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ J A
E
Fig. 19
Note: I l1ave added the prime sign to E'.
will have 29,37
6
/
2
. Hence subtract 9,347/2 three times from 29,376/2 and
there will remain 1,335/2 , which number is less than 1/7 of 9,347/2. For
if you divide 9,347/ 2 by 7, the quotient will be 1,335/2 plus an undivided
remainder of 2 halves. It is evident, therefore, that 14,688 is more than
three times 4,673! by an amount less than 1/7 of 4,673!. Therefore,
:a fortiori the perimeter of the polygon is more than three times the dia-
meter by an amount less than 1/7 of the diameter. And still further, the
circumference, since it is less than the perimeter of the polygon, is more
than three times the diameter by an amount less than 1/7 of the diameter.
Thus the first part of our theorem is evident.
Now let AG be the diameter of circle AG and let BG be the side of a
hexagon described in that circle and making an angle with diameter AG
[see Fig. 19]. Let side AB subtend L AGB. Therefore, L GAB will be
one third of a right angle, since it is opposite the side of a hexagon. And
the ratio of diameter AG to its half, namely, GB, is as 1,560 to its half,
12
4
Emended Versions of the De flJensura circuli
195
19
ad suum subduplum, scilicet GB, que 1560 ad 780, suum subduplum.
Constat ergo si diviseris 1560 per duo relinqui numerum 780. Quare est
medietas eius. Ergo minor est proportio AB ad GB proportione 135 I
175 ad 780. Hec conclusio sic constat:
Sume'quadratum 1560, quod est 2433600; sume iterum quadratum
numeri 780, quod est 608400. Subtrahe ergo 608400 a quadrato
243360 et remanebit numerus equalis quadrato AB, scilicet 1825 200.
Cum 2433600 sit quadratum AG linee respicientis rectum angulum,
180 quia radix ipsius, scilicet 1560, et 608400 sit quadratum BC linee,
est quasi AB linea 13 51. Item quere radicem huius numeri, scilicet
1825 200; si diligenter inspicis, videbis, quod totus numerus superior
consumptus erit antequam prima figura numeri suppositi per se ipsam
multiplicetur, quia vel erit supra primam scilicet 1 residuum, ,reI et
185 ille erit nun1erus suppositus 2700. Quare non deest aliquid superiori
numero ad habendam veram radicem nisi 1. Dupla ergo 135 1 et postea
divide istum numerum 2702 per duo et habebis radicem quadrati
n1aioris, scilicet 135 1. Cum ergo 1825 200 valeat quadratumABlinee et
numerus 135 1 sit maior vera raclice eius, minor est proportio
cum sit vera radLx quadrati J.4B, ad GB proportione 1351 ad 780
numerum suum quasi lineam BC.
Di,ridam iterum angulum C..:4B in duo media lineaAH. Ergo minor
est proportio ad BZ proportione 2911 ad 780; [quia, quoniam]
quecunque sit proportio AG ad CB eadem sit 1560 ad 780 et minor
_-4 B ad CB proportione 135 1 ad 780, maior est proportio nun1eri
1560 et numeri 1351 coniunctorum, qui coniuncti sunt 2911, ad 780
proportione AGet J.r1B coruunctarum ad BC, et que est illarum con-
iunctarum ad BC eadem est ./1B ad BZ, ut sepe probatum est; maio!
ergo proportio 2911 ad 780 proportione ...A.B ad BZ. Subtende ergo
200 basim angulo G./1/-f, scilicet HG, et erunt trianguli isti similes ABZ,
AHG, quia .. 4BZ angulus et ... angulus sint recti, quia uterque
supra circumferentiam, et angulus equalis angulo G./-1H ex
ypothesi; ergo tertius tertio, scilicet ./'1ZB equalis .r1 G'H. Constat
ergo quod latera continentia angulos equales sunt proportionalia.
179 aIJte Cum de/evi linee
180-81 608400 ... 135 I corr. ex est quasi
AB linea 135 I, et 608400 sit quadra-
turn BG linee
181 I 35I D
184 veil: (?) fJ nihi} Z0 I ve}2: (ubi ?)
Zo
185 2700 (or,.. ex. 2701
186 VeralTI corr. ex vera I 135 I IlIg. D et
ill lextll habet 1; cJ. Zo 135 1.1
192 minor corr. ex maior
196 qui coniuncti COlT. c.'< que coniuncta
201 et AI-IG (orr. IJ e.">: et AHG (el
habet Zo I-I et Al-IG)
3 Florence Versions, III I 1
780. Fo! if you divide 1,560 by 2 you will e\ridently get 780; \vherefore,
it is half of it. I-Ience ./4B/GB < 1,351/780. 1
1
111S c()nclllsion is eV'ident as
follows:
Take the square of 1,560, which is 2,433,600. Further, take the square (If
780, which is 608,40. Then subtract 608,400 from 2,433,600 and a number
equal to .L4B2 will remain, namely, 1, 82 5,200. Witll opposite a rigllt
angle, if it is equal to 1,560 and its square is 2,433,600 and 608,400 equals
BG2, .L4B is almost 1,351. For seek the root of this number, i.e., 1,825,200.
*If you diligently consider it, you will see that the whole superior number
(1,
82
5,200) will be consumed before tIle first figure of the supposed
number (1,35 I) is multiplied by itself, lJecause [if the supposed number is
multiplied by itself the square of] it (1,825,201) exceeds the first number
(1,
82
5,200) by 1, while if the supposed number [were 1,35, its square
(1,822,5
00
) would be exceeded by 1,825,200 by] 2,700. Therefore, the
superior number lacks only I of having a true root. Therefore, double
1,35 1 and afterwards divide this number 2702 by 2, and y'ou will ha\re the
root of the [next] larger square, namely, the root 1,351.* Therefore,
1, 825,200 equals AB2,and 1,351 is greater than its true root. Since
is the true root of AB2 and GB is as 780, hence .:L1B/G'B < 1,351/780.
Again I bisect L GAB by line AH. Therefore, BZ < 2,911/780.
For AG/GB = 1,560/780; AB/GB < 1,35
1
/7
80
; (1,5
60
+ 1,351)/780 >
(AG + AB)/BG, or 2,911/780 > (AG + AB)/BG; (.4G + ==
AB/BZ, as has often been proved; and therefore, 2,911/780 > BZ.
Therefore, subtend side HG to L GAH. Then these triangles
and AHG will be similar. For angles ABZ and AHG are right angles
since each is inscribed in a semicircle, and L is equal to L G..4H
by hypothesis; therefore, the third L AZB is equal to the third L AGH.
It is evident, therefore, that the sides containing equal angles are pro-
*... * This whole passage appears to be corrupt; see the Commentary, lines 181-88.
126 Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
203 Quare que est proportio ABlinee ad BZ eadem est AHad HG. Ergo
maior est proportio 2911 ad 780 proportione AHlinee ad GHlineam.
Ergo maior est proportio quadrati 2911, quod est 8473921, ad quadra-
turn numeri 780, quod est 608400, proportione quadrati AH ad
quadratum HG. Ergo maior est proportio illorum numerorum con-
210 iunctorum, qui coniuncti sunt 9082321, ad 608400 proportione quadra-
torum linearum coniunctarum ad quadratum He linee; quare maior
proportione quadrati AG linee ad quadratum He. Ergo maior est
proportio vere radicis 9082321, si 11aberet, ad 780 proportione ~ 4 G
linee ad He. Ergo cum 3013 cum medietate et cum quarta sit maior
vera radice / eius, maior est proportio 3013 et meclietatis et quarte
216 (ad) 780 proportione AG ad HG.
Quod maior sit vera radice eius sic habetur: Due 313 in quartas)
i.e., per quatuor multiplica, et proveniunt 11ec minuta 1252, que
quarte sunt. Iterum hiis quartis acliunge meclietatem unius et quartam,
220 que sunt tres quarte, et l1abebis hec minuta 125 5. 11ultiplicaiterumhec
minuta (per se) et habebis has sextasdecimas 14532325, quas iterum
si dividas per suam denominationem, scilicet 16, habebis hec integra
982689; nee relinquitur post clivisionem de minutis his que una
sola sexagesima, scilicet 1. Constat ergo, cum 982689 sit n1aior
225 9082321, cum 3013 cum medietate et cum quarta sit radix l1uius nUll1eri
982689 cum una sextadecima, quod maior sit vera radice numeri
huius 982321. Insistamus igitur principali proposito.
:l\1aior est proportio 313 et medietatis et quarte ad 780 proportione
linee .. 4 G ad HG. Ergo maior est proportio 5924 et nledietatis et
230 quarte, cum sit coniunctus ex 2911 et 313 et medietate et quartu, ad
780 proportione ./1G et _4/-1 coniunctarunl ad HG.
Dividam ergo angulum G..,,1Hin duo n1edia linea AT, et sllbtendalll
basim CT. Ergo n1aior est 592 4 et medietatis et quarte ad 780 pro-
portione AI-I linee ad E' H lineam. Ergo /1HE' et ~ l GT triangulo-
235 rum simultudine minor est proportio AT ad C'T proportiol1e 5924
et medietatis et quarte ad 780. Causa brevitatis SUlllantur nunleri
nunores se 11abentes in eadelll proportione, scilicet I 823, 240. Quod
se l1alJeant in eadenl proportione sic probabis: Due maximum in
minimun1 et unun1 reliquorum in reliquum. Et si idem numerus pro-
:24 \renerit, hinc inde erunt proportionales. Cum ergo ita \rerUlll sit, minor
est prol)ortio A,iT ad TC' proportione 1823 ad 240. Ergo minor est
proportio quadrati ",,/IT lil1ee ad qlladratunl TG' linee pro!)ortione
Zl5 huius nUlneri corr. ex huiusmodi z41 240/Jlg. D
3 Florence Versio:i1S, III 12.7
portio
nal
. Hence AB/BZ = .All/1--!G. Therefore, 2,9
II
/780 > AH/G'}!.
Therefore, 2,9
1
l
z
/780
2
>_AFI2/HGz, or 8,473,921/608,400 > /1H2/F1G1..
Therefore, by composition, 9,082,321/608,400 > (/IHz -I- HG'2)/HG2.
y V9,082,3 21
Therefore, 9,082,321/608,400 > _4G'z/HGz. Therefore, >
780
Hence, since 3,
01
3+t + i is greater than the true root of
HG 3,01 3+!+i AG'
9,082.,32.1, 780 > HG
That 3,01 3+t +1 is greater than that true root is proved as follows.
Turn 3,01 3 into fourths, i.e., multiply it by 4/4, and there results 12,052/4.
Add 1/2 and 1/4, i.e., 3/4, to these fourths, making altogether 12,055/4.
Multiply 12,055/4 by itself and you will have 145,323,025/16. Reduced to
integers by dividing through by the denominator 16, you will have, after
division, in integers 9,082,689 + 1\. It is clear, therefore, that, since
9,082.,689 is greater than 9,082,321, then 3,013 +l + 1, the root of
9,082.,689n-, is greater than the true root of 9,082,321. Let us press on to
the principal proposal.
3,oI3+l+1 AC Th b 5,9
z
4-r-!-i...!
Now 8 > HC ere ore, y composItIon, - >
7 780
AC+AH .
HC ' Slnce 5,9
2
4+i+i = 2,9
I1
+ 3,
01
3+!+ 1
Hence I bisect L CAH by line AT and I draw side CT. Therefore,
5,9
2
4+! +1 >Er;HH Therefore, because of the similarity of triangles
780
AHE' and ACT, ACT
T
< 5,9
2
4+1+ 1. For the sake of brevity, smaller
780
numbers in the same ratio are assumed, namely, the numbers 1,823
and 240. That these numbers are related in the same ratio you will
prove as follows: Cross multiply the four numbers and, if the products
are the same, the numbers will be proportional. Hence, since such is true,
ATjTC < 1,823/240. Hence, AT2JTC2 < 1,8232/2402, or AT2/TG2 <
128 Emended Versions of the De HJenSJlra circuli
quadrati numen 182.3, quod est 3323329, ad quadratum 240, quod est
57600. Ergo minor est proportio quadrati A G ad quadratum GT linee
245 proportione numeri coniuncti ex 1823, 240 quadratis, qui numerus est
338929 ad 57600. Ergo minor est A.G ad GTproportione vere radicis
338929, si haberet, ad 240, cum sit vera radix 57600. At numerus
1838 cumnovem undecimis unius est maior vera radice eius, si haberet,
quod sic constat:
250 Due 1838 in undecimas, que undecime cum novem undecimis erunt
hee 20227 equivalentes 1838 cum novem undecimis. Has iterum mul-
tiplica per se et habebis has centesimas vicesimas primas 49131529.
Has iterum divide per suam denominationem et habebis hec integra
3381252, et post divisionem remanebunt hec minuta 37. Cum ergo
255 constat quod iste numerus 33 812 52 sit maior 338929, constat etiam
quod maior est 1838 cum novem ul1decimis vera radice 338929. Sic
ergo habemus quod minor est proportio A G ad GT proportione
1838 cunl novem undecimis ad 240. Ergo minor est <proportio> G
et coniunctarum ad GT proportione 3661 cum novem undecimis,
260 quia coniunctus est ex 1838 cum novem undecimis et 1823, ad 240.
Dividam ergo angulum GAT in duo media linea AK. Ergo ut
prius nUnor est proportio AKad GKproportione 3661 cum novem un-
decimis ad 240, et hoc est sicut 1007 ad 66. l\d hoc probandunl debes
ducere 3661 in undecimas, hoc est multiplicare per 1I, et postea minu-
265 ris modo provenientibus aclicere novem undecimas, et erunt l1ee
40280; multiplicantur gratia consorcii 66 per 1I et habebis 726, iterum
1007 et provenient minuta 1177; 240 multiplica per 11 et erunt hec
minuta 2640. Cum ergo ex multiplicatione maximi in minimUlTI, scili-
cet 40280, 726, provenit iste nunlerus 29243280, et ex multiplicatione
270 1177 in 2640 proveniat idenl, erul1t predicti numeri proportionales.
j\Iinor ergo est proportio _AA" ad j(G' proportione 1007 ad 66. Ergo
minor est proportio quadrati Al( ad quadratunl KG' proportione
quadrati 1007, quod est 101449 ad quadraturn 66, quod est 4356.
Ergo nunor est proportio /1G quadrati ad quadratum GKproportione
illorumduorum numerorunl coniunctoruffi, qui coniuncti sunt 1018405
ad 4356. Ergo cum 1009 cum sexta sit vera radix eius vel maior, minor
est proportio ./lG ad KG proportione 1009 cun1 sexta ad 66.
246-47 Ergo ... 57600 0111. Zo
25) I 838 IJlg. D
Z 55 3; 812 52 corr. D ex 338929
257 1l1inor "'g. D
260 et nJg..D
266 multiplicantur COl.,.. ex nlultiplicave-
runt (?)
27 I, 273 177 co,.,.. ex 11007
3 Florence 'Versions III
,
12
9
3,32.3,32.9157,600, and so [by composition], /IG2/TC
2
< 3,3
80
,9
2
9,'51,600.
Therefore, since 2.40 equals the true root of 57 600 ,lG '\13,3
80
,9
2
9.
, 240
But 1,83
8
iT is greater than the true root of 3,3
80
,9
2
9, which is evident
as follows:
1,83
8
into elevenths, which, with 9/
11
added, will equal 20,22.7/
11
,
equIvalent to 1,83
8
.\. Again, multiply 20,227/
11
by itself and you will
49,13
1
,52.9/
12
1. Divide by the denominator and you will have in
mtegers 3,3
81
,2.52. + IVr. Since, therefore, this number 3,3
81
,252. is
greater than 3,3
80
,9
2
9, it is evident also that 1,83
8
i'i is greater than the
true root of 3,380,929. And so we have it, therefore that
AG
< __
) G']' 240
Th
AG +AT 3,661-(" .
ere ore GT < 2.4
0
-- , since 3,66
1
tr = 1,838-i'r + 1,823'
Hence I bisect L GAT by line AK. Therefore, as before,
AK 3,66ItT
G
'v < , or AKjKG < 1,007/66. To prove the identity of
.L\.. 240
3,
661
1'r and 1,007/66, turn 3,661 into elevenths, i.e., multiply by 11/1 I,
24
and, adding 9/11 to the result, there will be 40,2801I I. For the sake of
obtaining common fractions, multiply 66 by I III I and you have
726/11. Do the same to 1,007 and there will be 11,07711 I; and multiply
240 by I1 and you will have 2,640/ 11 . Therefore, since 40 ,280 X 76 ==
29,243,280 = 11,077 X 2,640 , the aforesaid numbers will be propor-
tional. Therefore, AK/KG < 1,007/66. Hence AK2/KG2 < 1,007
2
/
662
,
or AK2/KG2 < 1,014,49/4,356. Therefore) /-tG2/KG2 <
Therefore, since 1,009; is the true root or [actually] is more than the
AG 1,0091
true root of 1,018,405, KG < 66
130 Emended Versions of the De nJcnsura circuli
Quod sit maior vera radice sic probatur: Due 1009 in sextas et
hiis que proveniunt appone sextam et erunt hee 655. Has in se
g80 multiplica et proveniunt hec minuta 3666325. Divide iterum hec
minuta per suam denominationem et hec habebis integra 1018417 cunl
JOV hiis minutis remanentibus 13. I Cum istorum integrorum cun1 istis
minutis vera radLx sit 1009 cum sexta, et illa integra sunt maiora
istis 101845, maior est vera radice 101845. Redeamus ergo ad pro-
positum.
l\linor est proportio ... ad GK proportione 1009 et sexte ad 66,
et, ut dictum est, minor est proportio AK ad KG 1007 ad 66.
Ergo minor est proportio et AK coniunctarum ad RYC pro-
portione 2016 cum sexta, cum sit coniunctus ex illis duobus numeris,
ggo ad 66.
Dividam ergo GAK angulum in duo media linea AL. Ergo si
priorum memineris, minor est proportio AL ad LC proportione 2016
cum sexta ad 66. Ergo minor est proportio quadrati AL linee ad
quadratum LG linee proportione quadrati 2016 cum sexta ad quadra-
turn numeri 66. Ergo minor (est) proportio quadrati AG linee ad
quadratum CL proportione quadratorum illorum numerorum con-
iunctorum ad quadratum numeri 66. Ergo minor est proportio _,'lG
a.d LG proportione vere radicis numeri coniuncti ad 66. Ergo CUll1
2017 cum quarta sit n1aior ,Tera radice numeri coniuncti, minor est
300 proportio AG ad GL proportione 2017 cum quarta ad 66.
Ad probandum quod 2017 cum quarta sit maior vera radice numeri
produe in sextas 2016 et sextis illis adiunge unam sextam et erunt 11ee
sexte 12097 equiparentes integris cum sexta. Postea multiplica per se
et habebis tricesimas sextas has 14633749. Item quadratum 66, quod
est 4356, duc in tricesimas sextas, i.e., multiplica per 36, et proveniunt
hec minuta 1 56816. r\cliunge iterun1 11ec minuta prioribus, scilicet
146337409, et provenient hec minuta 146494225, que sunt tricesinle
sexte, et valent numerum coniunctum ex quadrato numeri 2016 cun1
sexta et ex quadrato numeri 11Uius 66. Divide postea ultima minuta
SIO per suam denominationem et habebis l1ec integra 469284, una sola
tricesima sexta scilicet remanente post divisionem; que integra cum
ilio remanente valent eadem nUnuta, scilicet 146494225. Cum 110c
feceris, duc 2017 in quartas et quartis illis postea adiunge quartan1 et
hee erunt quarte 8069. Has statim per se n1l11tiplica et provenient ex
28
4 1018405 corr. D ex 1018417 295 post linee add. !J'g. D et quadrati GL
sin1ul
3 Florence Versions, III 1 _' I
Tllat 1,0091 is greater thal1 the true root of 1,01 8,45 is prc),ed as
follows: Turn 1,009 into sixtlls, and, adding 1/6, there \\rill reslI1r 6,05 5/6.
6,055/6 by itself al1d the result is 36,663,0251,6. Coolpletc t11c
division by the denominator and you will have in integers
Since the true root of is 1,009-k and 1,018,417 is greater than
1,018,45, so 1,009-1- is greater than t11c true root of 1,018,45. I.let us
return to that which was proposed.
N
AG I,009l cl -d /IL ... /66 'Th
ow, GK < 66 an, as was sal , ./ L\. L\. . < 1,007 .. ere-
AG +AK 2,0161 _
fore, KG < 66 ' sInce 2,OI6A = I,009A + 1,007
Hence I bisect L G/lK by line I-fence, if you keep in mind the
d ...4 2,0161 h AJ-J
2
(z,016A)2
prlOr proce ures, LG < 66 T ere ore LG2 < 66
2
There-
, AG2 (2,0161)2 +66
2
H v' (z,016k)2 + 66
2
ore, GL2 < 66
2
ence LG < 66
Hence, since 2,0171 is greater than the true root of 66
2
],
AG 2,0171
GL < 66
To prove that 2,0171 is greater than the true root [as noted abo\"e],
turn 2,016 into sixths, and, with the addition of 1/6, there \\-ill result
12,097/6, equivalent to 2,0161. Afterwards multiply 12,097/6 b}- itself
and you will have 146,337,49/36. Also turn 66
2
, i.e., 4,356, into thirty-
sixths, i.e., multiply by 36/36, and 156,816/36 results. .i\dd this latter
fraction to the former, evidently, 146,337,409/36, and the result is
146,494,225/36. This is equivalent to the sum: (2,016i)2 + 66
2
Com-
plete the division of the last fraction by dividing through b}T the deno-
minator and you will have in integers 4,069,284 + equi\ralent to
146,494,225/36. When this is completed, turn 2,017 into fourths, and with
the addition of 1/4 you will have 8,069/4. Immediately multiply 8,069/4
I 3z Emended Versions of the De l1JCnSUra circuli
315 ilIa multiplicatione hee sextedecime 65108761, que iterum divide per
suam denominationem. Hec procreabunt integra 4069297; residua
erunt hec minuta 9 post divisionem. Constat ergo, cum hec integra
sint maiora hiis 4069284, quod 2017 cum quarta maior vera raclice
numeri coniuncti ex quadratis duorum numerorum predictorum. Igi-
320 tur redeamus ad propositum principale.
Minor est proportio .r1G ad CL proportione 2017 cum quarta ad
66. Ergo maior est proportio CL ad AGproportione 66 ad 2017 cum
quarta. At CL est latus poligonii circumscripti circulo et nonaginta
sex angulorum, quia, cum angulus GAL sit 48a pars anguli recti et
325 angulus GEL sit duplus ad ipsum, quia cum sit extrinsecus est equalis
istis duobus equalibus EAL, ALE, est ergo GEL 24
a
pars anguli
recti. At constat, [quod] si diviseris quemlibet quatuor istorum angu-
lorum reetorum in 24 partes, habebis nonaginta sex angulos et totidem
latera poligonii respicientia illos angulos. Postea multipliea 66 per 96
330 et proeedit iste numerus 6336, in quo totiens est 66 quotiens GL in
alnbitu poligonii. Cum ergo maior sit proportio GL ad A G propor-
tione 66 ad 2017 cum quarta et eadem sit CL ad ambitum poligonii
et 66 ad 6336, ergo maior est proportio ambitus poligonii ad AG
dyametrum proportione 6336 ad 2017 cum quarta. At 6336 continet
335 ter ilium et plus 10 partibus 71 partium 2017 cun1 quarta.
Ad hoc probandum due 6336 in quartas, que sunt hee 25344. Postea
due 2017 in quartas et illis appone quartam, que sunt hee 8069. Divide
25344 per 8069 et videbis quod ter continet ilIum et remanebunt hee
quarte post divisionem 1I 37. Postea due 8069 in septuagesimas primas,
340 i.e., n1ultipliea per 71, et erunt hee 572899. Constat ergo numerus
8069 est septuagesima prima pars huius numeri 572899, quia n1ulti-
plieatur per 71 <et) procreat ilIum. 1fultiplica iterum 8069 per 10 et
habebis numerum qui est 10 septuagesime prime huius 572899, qui
est 80690. Divide postea 80690 per 71 et reduces in has quartas 1136,
3-15 remanentibus MS mil1utis 34 l)ost divisionem. Cum ergo hee quarte
I 137 sint plures hiis I 136 cun1 l1iis minutis remanentibus, scilicet 34,
in quantum deest hiis minutis ad constituendam quartan1, constat ergo
6336 continet ter 2017 cum quarta et plus 10, 71 partibus partium
eius. Quare etiam multo magis linea ambiens poligonium addit sllper
350 triplum dyanletri plus 10, 71 partibus l)artium dyanletri. Ergo et multo
magis linea continens circulum est maior triplo d)Tanletri exceSSll qui
3
2
4 quia rorr. ex qui I 480. rorr. ex 48
3
26
24 (0''''. ex 24
338 quod co,.,.. ~ quia
349 Quare co,"'. ex lluia
3 Florence Versions) III I .' 3
by itself, and the result of this multiplication is 65,108,7
61
/
16
. You again
divide through by t11e denominator and tllcre rcslllts in integers
4,
06
9,297 + fa-. It is evident, hence, that since 4,
06
9,297 is greater than
4,
06
9, 284, so 20171 is greater than the true root of 66
2
].
h
1 ."G' 2,
01
7 1- .
Hence let us return to t e malO proposa Now, G'L < 66 Hence
CL
C
> 66 . But CL is the side of a [regular] polygon circum-
A 2,
01
71
scribed by the circle and havil1g 96 angles. For since is 1/48 of a
right angle and L CEJ-J == 2 G'./l-l-J (because being extrinsic is
equal to the two equal angles E
Y
.,1L and therefore is 1/24
of a right angle. But it is evident that if you divide each of the four right
angles [at the center] into 24 parts, you will have 96 angles and as many
sides of the polygon opposite those angles. Then 66 X 96 == 6,336; 66 is
contained in 6,336 as many times as CL is in the perimeter of the poly-gone
. CL 66 CL 66
SInce, therefore, -- > and. ,
AG 2,0171 perln1eter of polygon 6,336
perimeter of polygon 6 336 .
then AC di >'. But 6,33
6
contams 2,OI7!
ameter 2,0171
three times and in addition more than 10/17 of 2,017t.
To prove this, turn 6,336 into fourths and there results 25,344/4. Then
turn 2,017 into fourths, and with the addition of 1/4 you will have 8,069/4.
Divide 25,344 by 8,069 and you will see that the former contains the latter
three times plus 1,137/8,069. Afterwards turn 8,069 into sevent)r-first
parts, i.e., multiply it by 71/71 and there results 572,899/71. It is clear,
therefore, that 8,069 is 1/71 of 572.,899, for the latter is produced by
multiplying 8,069 by 71. Multiply 8,069 by 10 and the result is 80,690,
which is 10/71 of 572.,899. Then divide 80,690 by 71 and it becomes 1,136
+ 34/71. Since 1,137 is greater than I,I36r} by the amount that the
fraction 34/71 is less than I, it is evident that 6,336 contains 2,0171
three times and in addition more than 10/71 of it. Therefore, a fortiori
the perimeter of the polygon exceeds triple the diameter by more than
10/71 of the diameter. Therefore, even more does the circumference
exceed triple the diameter by an excess which is greater than 10/71 of the
134 Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
est maior 10, 71 partibus partium dyametri. Constat ergo quod linea
continens circulum addit super triplum dyametri minus septima et
plus 10, 71 partibus partium d)Tametri. Et hoc est quod voluimus
355 probare.
3 Florence Versions, III "I;
diameter. It is evident, therefore, that the circumferel1ce exceeds triple
the diameter by an amount less than 1/7 and more tllan 10/7I of the
dialneter. And this is \vhat \ve wished to prove.
COMMENTARY
F.ll\
2 "orthogonio triangulo." This is tIle order of words found in Traclition11
of the Gerard of Cremona translation.
7-37 In connection with the first half of the proof the scribe of D lists in
the margin (12r) [cf. Zo, 156r] the following citations of Euclid's
Elements in the Adelard II-Campanus Version:
- per 6.41.e (per sextam quarti Euclidis, i.e. I\r.6)
- per 41.pl.e (1.41)
(
, ?)_I-- per I.Io1.e (X.I)
2 .1. I
- per 18. pl.e (I. 18)
- per 41. pi.e (l.4I)
- per I.secundi.e (lI. I)
15-16 "Quare ...circuli." I give my reconstruction of the meaning of this
sentence in the translation. I am not at all happy with the reconstruction,
since it involved substituting minores in line 16 for what may be majores
in the manuscript. I am, however, at a loss to explain its meaning in
any other way.
24 "alkaydem." This is a transliteration of the Arabic word al-qa'idat,
meaning "base." We find it used extensively in the so-called Adelard I
translation of the Elements of Euclid; see IvI. Clagett, "The 1Iedieval
Latin Translations from the Arabic of the Elements of Euclid," !sis,
vol. 44 (1953), p. 20.
. 28 "primam decimi Euclidis." See page 60, note I, above.
31-34 "Ducta ...trianguli." The Latin of this passage is very awkward,
but the meaning as reflected in my translation is clear.
38-69 In connection with the second half of the proof the scribe of D
adds in the margin (1 2r) as a unit, without specifying to which passages
they refer, the following citations to the Elements of Euclid in the
Adelard II-Campanus version [cf. Z0, 1 56v] :
Emended Versions of the De nJe11SUra circuli
Proposition 11
74-77 "Proportio ... GD2." Note tIle sin1ilarity to Gerard, lines 69-73.
74-
8
5 For Proposition 11, t11e scribe of D (I 2r, top rig11t) adds tIle follo\ving
nlarginal citations (cf. Zo, I57r).
3 \rersions, 11, F.lE
l)Cr I.scxti.e (\!T. I)
per prcn1issatl1
per 4I .pl.e (I.41)
The citation per prcIJJisSt/IJ/ probably refers to tl1C assun1ption tllat
is one seventh of (line 77).
77 Notice that tile cOffil11el1tator l1as otnittecl frool the Gerard translation
the statement that triangle ./.J is to triangle ..1 eT'D as 3 is to I.
80-81 "per priorem propositionen1." Ollr COlnmentator substitutes this for
the longer clause of the Gerarcl translation: "quoniam... circuli"
(lines 78-80).
82-85 "Attende ... propositionem" is a COlnment reflecting the phrase
"quoniam est plus triplo diametri ipsius et septima diametri fere"
in the Gerard translation (lines 80-8 I).
F.IB
1-4 "Circulum... circulo." In the introduction to the texts of the Florence
versions I have commented on the fact that F.IB abandons the
wording of the Gerard translation in favor of a paraphrase. i'ote that
the author of F.IB fails to say that the sides of the triangle \<,;hich are
equal to the circumference and radius are those sides including the
right angle.
9 "sextam quarti." In the Adelard 11 translation British
Add. 34018, 16r) this proposition runs: "Intra datum circulum
quadratum describere." "prima decimi." See page 60, note I, abo\'"e.
10 "relinquendo." This term with this author became the technical term
for the process of taking a series of divisions in which in each step
more than half of the remainder is cut away. To maintain the spirit
of the Latin I have translated it by "remaindering."
14, 21, 29 "4
Iam
primi." See the Commentary to the Cambridge Version,
line 33
26 "secundam secundi." See the Adelard 11 translation of the Elen/en/s,
which reads (ms. cit., 8r): "Si fuerit linea in partes divisa, illud quod
fit ex ductu totius linee in se ipsam equum erit hiis que fiunt ex
ductu eiusdem in omnes partes."
33 "septimam quarti." See Adelard 11 translation of the Elements, which
reads (ms. cit., 16r): "Circapropositurn circulum quadratum designare."
39-40 "primam decimi." See page 60, note I, of this chapter.
45 "primamsexti." See the Commentary to the Cambridge Version, line 70.
46-47 "quartum librum." This is probably a wrong reference. That two
I 38 Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
tangents drawn to a circle from a common point are equal is proved
in the course of the penultimate proposition of Book Ill. In the
Campanus version (111.35, Venice, 1482) we read: "Nota etiam quod si
a quolibet puncto extra circulum signato due linee contingentes ad
circulum ipsum ducantur, ipse erunt adinvicem equales."
48 "penultimam primi." See the Commentary to the Cambridge Version,
line 25.
56 "ultimam secundi." See the Commentary to the Cambridge Version,
line 82.
Proposition III
4-167 The scribe of D gives t11e following marginal citations (Ior) for
the first half of the proposition (cf. Zo, I 52V); the citations, it is
clear, are from the Adelard 1I-Campanus version of the Elements
of Euclid:
1- per illud quod probatumest in 16 primi euclidis (1.16)
1
1_ per correlariurn q.pl.e (Cor. 1.15)
- per 17. 3
1
e (Ill. 17 === Gr. Ill. 18)
'1_ per 5 quarti.e (IV5)
- per 32. primi.e (1.32)
1- per ultimam sexti.e (Vl.33)
1- per conversam 3
0
3
1
.
e
(Il1.30 = Gr. Ill. 3I)
,- per diffinitionem diametri
1- per correlarium 15 quarti (Cor. IV.15)
- per 9.pl.e (1.9) -I
I
- per 3
61
.
e
(VI.3) i
P
. - per 165
1
e (V.16) -l
i
rIma pars- I (V G V )
- per 13.5.e .13 === r. .12 --I
- per penultirnarn pl.e (1.46 = Gr. 1.47) -1- quotiens
1- per ?rirnarn partern 85
1
e
(V.8) -I oportet
,- per Interposltam I
1
- per 185
1
e I
1
- per 3 interpositam 5
1
e (Campan. -
cornrn. V. clef. 3) -I
, - per 15. quinti e (V. 15)
per I. interpositam 51.e (Campan.
comn1. V. clef. I)
per conversan1 diffinitionis minoris inproportiona-
Ijtatis
3 Florence Versions, lIT I 39
Tl1e principal difficulty il1 tllis list lies with tIle l)rc)per idel1tification of
the three items w11ich Il.ave il/lerposita/)J in tI1cm. I ha,re taken tllenl to 11c
references to the COn11TICllts of Caml)anus to tIle definitit)ns ()fBo()k \r,
but I am not sure I see tile 1)crtincl1ce of tllose COJll01ents to tIle
specific steps in the r\rcllitnedcan proof, UJld so perllaps some otllcr
explanation should be sougllt. Incidentall)r, in connection \\tith tIle
practice of citillg tIle "converse" of dcfil1iti()11S, j\[r. writes
by
T
letter: al111otator reflects the grc)\ving concern (from the
tllirteenth century) with tile logical structllrc of l:uclidian definitions.
They take, as did some j\rabs lJcfore thCll1, to l,avc set do\\tn
'if...then' assertions in definitions, etc., rather than 'if and only' if'
assertions (as he certainly intel1ded). l-Ience the necessity' of filling in
the imagined logical gaps by reference to COIl verses of definitions and
first principles." The qtlotiefJS oportet simply means that these propo-
sitions are to be used as many tilnes as is necessary in the various
di\risions of the angle.
4 "(dyameter circuli I\G)." I have added this phrase not on1)T because at
this point the commentator is quoting the Gerard of Cremona trans-
lation where the phrase is found, but also because of its presence in
line 168. I have accordingly rejected the marginal addition of"continens
circulum."
6-12 "Ergo... .ZE." This is an elaboration of the marginal comment
found in manuscripts PL of the Gerard translation (see \'ariant read-
ings of Gerard translation, line 89). It is quite different from the
comment of Eutocius (ed. of J. L. Heiberg, Ji4rchimedis opera omnia,
vol. J (Leipzig, 191 5), from p. 23 2 , line 20, to p. 234, line 6).
I 5 "tertium... geometrie." In the Adelard 11 translation the appropriate
first part ofVI.3 runs (ms. cit., 2zr): "Si ab aliquo angulorum trianguli
linea adducta [ad basim] angulumiliumper equalia dividat, in (! omit?)
duas partes ipsius basis reliquis eiusdem trianguli lateribus proportio-
nales esse ... necesse comprobatur." This is the only specific citation
to a theorem of the Elements in Proposition III and similarly Eutocius
only cites this one proposition (cd. cit., 234, lines 18-20).
21-36 "Quod.... 1 53." Compare this commentary with that of Eutocius
(cd. cit., from p. 234, line 17, to p. 236, line 7).
31 "careat vera radice." Throughout the commentary this author speaks
of the "true root" (vera radix) of numbers that are lacking exact roots.
He often uses the expression "si veram haberet" (e.g., line 35) in
connection with such roots. The Greek commentary of Eutocius in
Emended Versions of the De lnC11SJlra circuli
these similar places says that the squares of these approximate roots
are less than the "exact" squares (Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 234, lines 14-15;
p. 236, lines 15-16; p. 238, lines 16-17).
37-65 "Ergo .... propositum." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 236, lines 8-19.
The technique of reducing mixed numbers to fractions of the same
denominator before beginning operations which is used by the Latin
commentator is, as I have said, different from the procedure of
Eutocius in which the mixed numbers tllemselves are manipulated
with.
5I "denominationis." This word was used in the algorist tradition to
distinguish fractions by their numerical denominators, as in "thirds,"
"fifths," etc. See Clagett, Giovanni lV/or/iani and Latc ltfcdicva/ Physics
(New York, 1941), p. 15 5. I point this out only because there is a
connected but more subtle use of the term in medieval tracts on
proportion where the term expresses the essential aspect of a ratio
even where the ratio is between incommensurable quantities and the
ratio is said to be "denominated" only "mediately" by numbers
rather than "immediately." See E. Grant, "Nicole Oresme and his
Dc proportiol1ibllS proportion/I"l." ]sis, vol. J I (1960), p. 301.
66-75 ~ f a i o r I 53." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 23 6, line 20, to p. 23 8, line 9
75-101 "Ergo propositum." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 238, lines 10-18.
102-110 ~ a i o r 153." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 240, lines 1-11.
"E " Cf E d li I 10-29 ~ rgo.... 153. . utoclUS, c . CIf., p. 240, nes 12-18.
129-36 "et 153." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 242, lines 1-14.
136-67 "Et theorenlatis." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., from p. 242, line 15, to
p. 244, line 29
147-67 "At .... theorematis." r\ fragment at tIle end of codex D (57V)
includes part of a different version of Proposition Ill: "Et illud,
scilicet 14688, est plus triplo 4673 et medietatis in 667 et medietate
et istius proportio ad 4673 et medietatem est minor septima. Gportet
ergo ut sit linea figure poligonie continentis circulum filinor tril)lo
dyametri et eius septima, et hoc ideo quia dyameter ./1G' est maior
4673 et medietate. CUll1 ergo linea figure poligonie non contineat
4673 et medietatem (ter) et insuper eius septin1anl, nlulto nlinus
continebit dyametrun1 ter et insllper eius sel)tilnan1. Sed linea figure
poligonie est nlaior circumferentia circllli. Ergo nee circumferentia
circuli dyametrun1 ter et eius septil11am. Et linea figure poligonic est
plus diminutione linee eonti11entis eireulll1TI a triplo dyamctri eius et
septill1a, i.e., eUlll linea contillens circulun1 dilllil1uat a trir)}o dyal11etri
3 Florence Versions, III 141
eius et septima; linea figure 11oligol1ie l11inus climinllit quia ipsa est
maior circumferentia circuli. l ~ l o est l1eccssarill111 in 1\rc11itTIcnicle."
168-352 The scribe ofD adds in the margin (10\') for tlle secol1d l,art ()f tIle
proof the followil1g citations frC)nl l ~ u l i d (cf. Zo, I 53r):
!- per 15.41.e (IV.Ij)
- per secundanl partern 30. tertii.e
(111.30 === (ir. 111.3 I)
-- per 32. pl.C (1.32)
- per ultimam sexti (Vr33)
--- per correlarium I5.41.e (Cor. IV.I5)
- per penultimam pl.e (1.46 ==: Gr. 1.47)
- per primam partern 8.5
1
C -
(V.S)
-- per 9.pi.e (1.9)
per interpositam
- per 3.61.e (VI.3)
cl
- per 165
1
e (V.I6) -
secun a pars -. ;
- per prtmam partem 30. 3
1
e
-I .
(III.30.= Gr. Ill. 3I) ~ 1--- quotlens oportet
- per 4. sextl.e (VI.4) ---I
- per 3. interpositam 5
1
e
-I
(Campan. cOtnm. V clef. 3?) -,
- per penultimam pl.e (1.46 -1
= Gr. 1.47) -I
- per secundam partern --I
20.7
1
e (VII.zo==Gr. VII.I9)-
- per I. interpositam 51.e (Campan. comm. V
, clef. I?)
- per 3z.pl.e (1.32)
- per cliffinitionem maioris inproportionalitatis
See the Commentary, lines 4-167 above.
168-91 "Sit .... BG." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., from p. 2.44, line 30, to p. 246,
line 19.
I 81-88 "Item.... 135 I." There appears to be something wrong with the
text here. As mv translation indicates, I believe that the commentator
is merely trying to show that the next largest perfect square beyond
1825200, namely, 182520I, yields a much better approximate root
(135I) than does the next smaller square. But the Latin text beginning
Emended Versions of the De 1J1C1zsura circuli
withquia inline 184and ending with "2700" in line 185 by no means says
this clearly. Furthermore, I am not confident of my reading of vel
as it appears twice in line 184. Also puzzling is the sentence "Dupia ...
1351" (lines 186-188). The "1351" in line 186 has been added from
the margin, but as the sentence stands it makes little sense. I attempted
to connect it with the known methods of extracting square roots in
the :rvliddle Ages but without success.
192- 227 "Dividam.... proposito." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., from p. 248,
line 1, to p. 250, line 4.
2.2.8-5 8 "lvIaior .... 240." Cf. Eutocius, ed. cit., from p. 250, line 5, to p. 25 2,
line 10.
2.5 8- 84 "Ergo propositum." Cf. Eutocius, ed. cit., p. 254, lines 1-18.
2.86-3 20 "11inor principale." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 256, lines 1-14.
321-5 2 dyametri." Cf. Eutocius, cd. cit., p. 258, lines 1-14.
4. The Version of Gordanus
At some unspecified time during or not long after the late tlurteenth
century still another effort was made to expand r\rclumedes' proof of
Proposition I of the De fIle/IS/Ira circuli. This appeared in an omnibus
astronomical and geometrical work entitled, in a fifteenth-century man-
uscript of the Vatican (Pal. late 13 89, 11S X), COIJJpilacio ql10rllndalJJ
canon/1nl ill practicis astronollJic et geonJctrie. The author, whose l1alne is
merely given as Gordanus-and this in a hand later tl1an that in which the
manuscript is written-is ul1known to me. Needless to say, I 11ad consider-
ed the possibility of Gordanus being tIle celebrated mathematician Jor-
danus de Nemore, but the calendaric tables tllat precede tl1e work and
yet appear to be part of tIle work seenl to preclude t11is identificatioll. The
first table (9\'), whicl1 is for finding tIle j\rabic year whe1l the CI1ristian
year is given, goes from 1232 to 1440; a second table (lor) giving tIle
number of days in the Christian years and a third table (I lr)
j\rabic to Christian years botll go fron1 1260 to 1468. Furthermore, on
folio lzr there is another cOl1version table wI1ich runs fronl 1272 to 1292.
At tIle bottom of tIus page we read: "potest tabula extendi ad placitllln,"
wllic11 I take to mean that tIle table is good for the few years after t11e
time of its conlposition but t!1at it can be easily eXl)a11ded if one \,ris11es.
4 Version of Gordan.us 143
j\nother note on this same folio tells us "al1flUS L\rabll111 689 incipit feria
sexta." The present tense iflCipit flla)T h.ave SOIllC siglliflcance for tlle tinlC
of composition of the table. j\ccording to tIle tal)lc, tIle] slamic year 689
overlaps the Christian years 1290-129I. I Fc)llowing tl,ese tables tile
Com.pilacio proper begins and is in tIle sa111C l1and. Of course, the C'OlllpiltlCio
could be earlier than the preceding tables, [()r it could ha\re beel1 copied
from an earlier manuscript and added to the talJles, or it could have been
very much later.
2
Fortunately we can place a later limit of 1390 on the
tract, for the part on quadrature was copied intact as a part of a geometrical
treatise appearing in a Viennese codex almost certainly written and
composed by the Franciscan Wigandus Durnheimer (1\15 Fa in the Sigla
below). This geometry is the- first work in the Durnheimer codex, which
also includes an arithmetic and an optics. Two items of the codex bear the
name of Wigandus and the date 1390; and the very last item was completed
at Paris in that year.
3
The section of the Compilacio that concerns us here occurs within the
eighth part of the work devoted to "In mensura figurarum." It is Chapter
23 and bears the title: "Circulum demonstrati\re quadrare." The intro-
duction to the chapter is of some interest. It tells us that the purpose of the
chapter is "to treat of and explain further the proof of .r\rchimedes."
This is in accordance with an earlier promise in Chapter 18 ("Circuli aream
concludere").4
I On folio Ior at the top appears the
date 1324 twice, but I am not sure in what
connection this date is given. Interest-
ingly, following the preface to the C01l/-
pilacio, which begins on folio 13r, there is
a table ad la/ittldinem 48 gradtlum, which is
about the latitude of Munich or Vienna.
2 At the close of the eighth part of the
Compilacio (I 17r), which contains the chap-
ter of interest to us, 'appears in what I
judge to be the same bold hand as the
rest of the part: "Et hec de mensura figu-
rarum sufficiant 1461 ." I assume that
this is the date of copying. On folio 157
r
there is scribbled in another hand the date
1482.
3 There is little doubt that the geomet-
rical treatise that occupies folios Ir-
8
9
v
of Vienna, Nat.-bibl. 5257, was composed
(and probably written) by Wigandu.s Durn-
heimer. In style, form, and temunology
it is completel y like the remaining parts of
the codex, which bear the name of \X'igan-
dus Durnheimer. A second treatise on
arithmetical subjects has this colophon
(f. I 18v): "Perfectus est iste libellus et
compilatus a fratre wigando durnheimer
ordinis minorum anno domini 1390, die
22 mai, indictione 12&, luna I la. Deo
gratias. Explicit." The last treatise ends
as follows: "Perfectus est iste liber a fratre
wigando durnheimer ordinis minorum Pa-
risius anno domini I 390 ....' I
4 On folio I07r we read: "Probatio
huius talis est: concesso quod linea curva
sit equalis recte fiat circulus super centrum
C, protrahatur semidyameter CC, item
ex puncto F per 16 tertii Euclidis ducatur
linea ad ipsum in
puncto. Igltur hec linea sit equalis cir-
cumferentie. Deinde ducta E F claudatur
triangulus ortogonius, quod secundum
144 Emended Versions of the De lJlenSUra circuli
In fulfilling his purpose, Gordanus gives a proof that is even more
elaborate than those of the emended versions we have discussed so far.
As in the case of tile preceding versions, the author leans lleavily on
Euclid's Elen/ell/s, citing it some thirty times, although many ofthe citations
are to the same propositions. Thus every step is proved by a proper
citation to the Elen/ents. A case in point occurs when tIle author proves in a
detailed and obvious manner that the four triangles formed by the corner
angles of the circumscribed square and the appropriate sides of the cir-
cumscribed octagon are more than half of the space between the circum-
ference of the circle and the sides of the square (see lines I 56-77). The
author's attempt to reduce a geometrical argument to numbers (lines 68-72)
is another example of his tendency to elaborate the obvious.
There are a good many points of similarity between the Version of
Gordanus and the other versions already discussed. It is for tllis reason
that we suspect that Gordanus, if 11e did not consult directly the translation
of Gerard of Cremona, had as his model one or more of the various emend-
ed versions of the Gerard translation. Like these otller versions, Gordanus
specifically makes X. I of the Elements the central point of his proof. He
too makes a literal specification of the quantity by wllich the circle is said
to exceed or to be less than the triangle. He assumes this quantity to be
triangular in shape, as is tIle case of the drawing accompanying the Corpus
Christi Version, treated below. The reader will recall tllat in the Cambridge
Version it was stated that the form of tllis excess quantity is of no concern
(see lines 17-18). In the Naples Version the form is not specified, although
it is represented in the drawing as a small curled figure (see Fig. I I).
Similarly, in Florence Version F.IA its shape is unspecified in tIle text
but is drawn as a rectangle (see Fig. 13), wllile in F.IB it is mentioned as a
square (line 16). .r\s in the case of all the emended versions, Gordanus
stops his exhaustion process with tIle inscription and circumscription of
regular octagons. I-Ie states that lle is doing this "for the sake of brevity,
lest tIle oppression (pressura) of many lines ilTIpede the demonstration"
(see lines 64-66). Like F.ll\ of Florellce, our alltllor explicitly reminds lIS
of the logical structure of the argulnent by reduction to absurdity, as,
for example, when 11e says toward tIle end of tile first half of the proof
Archilnenidem equalis est circulo; sed
huius trianguli area ex precedentibus est
nota, ergo area circuli est nota. Quod
autem iste triangulus sit equatis isti circlllo
inferius den10nstrative probatur ubi cir-
culi quadratura docetur. Est autenl pro-
positio quanl Archimenides probat: taIis
onlnis trigonus ortogonius contentus semi-
dyametro circuli et linea recta equali perife-
rie illius circuli, que due linee faciullt ilium
rectum angulllnl illius trianguli ortogonii
equalis est circulo .... "
4 Version of Gorclanus 145
(lines 13-15): "This lTIOrCOVer is false and inlpossil
1
le. also
[false and impossible is] that from \v'hicll it f()llo\vs, namely, tl,at the octagon
is greater than the product of tIle radius and l1a1 the circllnlfcrcnce."
Immediately after this statetnent lIe adds anotller explicit COlTIlnellt on
his n1ethod of reasoning (lines 106-110): "By the same litle of reasol1ing it
would follow that, if OT \vere multiplied by the eight sides of the octagon,
the product would be greater than the .prodllct of the radills and tIle whole
circumference, which constitutes tlle sa111e contradiction. For it is implied
that any chord is greater thatl its arc, which again is im.possible." Inciden-
tally, at the end of tllis statement, wllcn l,c remarks on the impossibility of
the chord being greater than its arc, 11c puts in form the postulate
gi\Ten in the Cambridge and Corpus Christi versions. j\ further point of
similarity with the Corpus Cllristi Version is the author's use of the word
portiul1Ctlla. This word replaces the more common flint/la both for the small
segments formed by the circumference of t11e circle and the perimeter of the
inscribed octagon and for the mixed triangular figures formed by the
circumference and the perimeter of the circumscribed octagon...:-\ctually',
the author of the Corpus Christi Version uses portit/nC1Jla only for the
segments of the circle and not for the mixed triangular figures. The
Version of Gordanus also resembles a number of the other bv
J
noting that the right triangle found to be equal to the circle must be
converted to a square by using Proposition 11.14 of the Elements of Euclid.
One interesting feature can be remarked concerning the author's use
of letters to designate geometrical magnitudes. If the author is talking
about two quantities that have a common point, such as the two sides
HA and AB of the octagon, he writes in the Greek manner H ..4B;
similarly for triangles HOA and OAB, which have a common side _40,
he writes HOAB. In the case of each of the many instances of such usage
I have altered the manuscript readings to the modern form, although I
have, of course, given the original readings in the variant readings. This
practice of syncopation has not been followed in any other version.
Incidentally, the letters used by Gordanus are quite different from those
found in the other versions.
It should be clear from my discussion that Gordanus concerns himself
with Proposition I only. He does assume a value of n equivalent to 3'
but without discussing Proposition 111.5
5 The value of 3' for 1C is implied in
Chapters 2.0 and 24, as follows: (I07V)
"Circuli maiuraturam (?) cognoscere.
Cam 20. Dyameter ducatur in se; pro-
ductum multiplicetur per zz. Et summa
excrescens clividatur per 7. Quantitas
146 Emended Versions of the De mensura circuli
Little need be said about my text of the Gordanus Version. It
depends almost exclusively on MS X, although some variant readings
have been added from Durnheimer's copy (MS Fa). Actually, Durnheimer
has added a number of citations to other chapters of his own treatise.
These I have not attempted to include in the variant readings. Nor have
I noted the numerous word transpositions of Fa, the occasional ortho-
graphic variations, the frequent substitution of isfo for illo, igitur for ergo,
and so on. Fa reads the letter designating the excess of the triangle over
the circle (and vice versa) as n, while X has what I read to be H, but which
perhaps could be a capital 1\7. I have retained tIle very common medieval
spelling paralellogralHuHJ, since in the cases where it is \vritten out in both
manuscripts tllis form is followed. 110st of tIle time the scribe of X has
written senlidyamcter but occasionally has sClJlidialJletcr. I have retained
both spellings, according to the use of tIle scribe. The drawings are clear
and accurate in both X and Fa. TIle marginal folio numbers are from X.
Sigla of ilIa/lt/scripts
X = Vatican, Pal. late 1389, 108r-IIIV, 15C.
Fa = \Tienna, Nat.-bibl. cod. 52 57, 67r- 69r, 1390.
exiens docebit circuli nlaiuraturam que
proprie est quadrupla ad areaJTI ipsius.
Vel aliter ducatur dyameter in circumfe-
rentiam et habebitur proposituJn. Hoc
probatur ratione numeri, ut si dyanleter
est 7, maiuratura erit 154.... (I I 1v) Qua-
drati circulationem assignare. Cam 24
ffi
And BE2 = 23,409. Hence, GE2 > 349,45. l-lcnce, line GB > 59
1
1.
170 The Verba ftliorum
Et secundum exemplum quod narravimus declaratur quod pro-
60 portio linee GB ad EU est maior proportione mille et centum et sexa-
ginta duorum et octave unius ad centum et quinquaginta tria. Et cum
fuerit BU centum et quinquaginta tria, erit GB plus mille et centum
et sexaginta duobus et octava unius. Et quadratum GB erit plus mille
millibus et trecentis et quinquaginta millibus et quingentis et triginta
65 quattuor et quarta. Et quadratum BUerit viginti tria millia et quadrin-
genta et novem. Et quadratum GU erit plus mille millibus et trecentis
et septuaginta tribus millibus et nongentis et quadraginta tribus et
quarta. Ergo linea CU est plus mille et centum et septuaginta duobus
et octava unius.
70 Et secundum hoc exemplum quod narravimus declaratur quod
proportio GB ad BD est maior proportione duorum millium et tre-
centorum et triginta quattuor et quarte unius ad centum et quinqua-
ginta tria. Cum ergo fuerit linea BD centum et quinquaginta tria, erit
CB plus duobus millibus et trecentis et triginta quattuor et quarta
75 unius. Et quadratumGB erit plus quinque mille millibus et quadringen-
tis et quadraginta octo millibus et septingentis et viginti tribus. Et
quadratum BD viginti tria millia et quaclringenta et novem. Ergo
quadratum GD erit plus quinquies mille millibus et quadringentis et
septuaginta duobus millibus et centum et triginta duobus. Ergo linea
80 GD est plus duobus millibus et trecentis triginta novem et quarta
unlUS.
Et secundum hoc exemplum quod narravimus declaratur quod pro-
portio GB ad BH est maior proportione quattuor millium et sexcen-
torum et septuaginta trium et medietatis unius ad centum et qUlllqua-
85 ginta tria. Cum ergo fuerit linea 1-1B centum et quinquaginta tria,
erit linea GB plus quattuor millibus et sexcentis et septuaginta tribus
et medietate unius. Et hec quidem est proportio lateris figure habentis
nonaginta sex latera continentis circulllm ad diametrum. Ergo pro-
63-64 mille ... quinquaginta: 100000 (I)
et 300 et ~ 1-1
66-67 tnille ... millibus: 100000 (I) et 300
et 7300 ]-1
7 ~ 7 6 quinque ... lnillibus 5000000 et 400
48000 )-/
77 quadringenta et novem: 40 et 9 J-[
78-79 quadringentis ... millibus: 400 72000
]-1
83-84 quattuor ... sexcentorum: 4000600 H
8~ linea 0/1/. 1.. 1
86 quattuor ... sexcentis: 4000 600/-1
87 de proportio ser. P J ~ g . et ZII' supra (et
add..ilIa aI/le proportio): vel mensura
of the BanG i\Iiisa
And by using the example hav'e clescribc<.i, it is sho\\rn that
B
GU
B
> 1,162,i . And when BU = GB> 1,1621. i\nd GB2 ==
153 .
1,35,5341- And BUz = 23,409. i\nd > 1,373,9431. line
GU > 1,17
2
1.
And by using the example we ha"\re described it is ShOWl1 that
GB 2.,3341 Wh li B '
BD
> en ne D== 153, therefore GB>2,334! [\nd
153
GB2 > 5,448,723- And BD2 == 23,409. 1-11.creforc, G-'Dz >
Therefore, line CD > 2,3391-
And by using the example we have described it is shown that
GB > 4,6731
BH 153 When HB = 153, therefore GB > 4,673t And this
'9 quod narravimus: (that)
63-65 mille ... quattuor: \ Y' 0 Y' t (13,534)
But it should be 1,350,534. The Paris
Arabic manuscript appears to have
135,534, although there may be a dot
between the two fives, and if so it is
then correct.))
65 et quarta 0111. Ar.
66 GU: -. [. - (GB)
67-68 et quarta 0111. Ar.
70, 82 quod narravimus: (that)
95
100
C.I
10
5
110
272. The Verba ftliorum
portio diametri ad omnia latera figure habentis nonaginta sex latera
continentis circulum est maior proportione quattuor millium et sex-
centorum et septuaginta trium et medietatis ad quattuordecim millia
et sexcenta et octoginta octo. lam ergo ostensum est quod proportio
omnium laterum figure habentis nonaginta sex latera ad diametrurn
est minor tribus et septima unius.
Amplius protraham in circulo ATB cordam sexte, que sit linea
TB [Fig. 40]. Et protraham AT. Et dividam angulum TAB in duo
media per lineam A1\!. Et protraham cordam NB et dividam angulum
BAf\l in duo media per linean1 AK. Et protraham cordam KB. Et
dividam angulum KA B in duo media cum linea AL. Et protraham
cordam LB et dividam angulum LAB in duo media per lineam Ail!.
Et protrahan1 cordam jlfB. Ergo manifestum est quod corda 1l1B est
latus figure habentis nonaginta sex / latera quam continet circulus.
Deinde ponam lineam AB mille et quingenta et sexaginta propter
facilitatem usus huius numeri in eo quod volumus. Ergo erit corda TB
septingenta et octoginta. Et erit quadratum AB duo mille millia et
quadringenta et triginta tria millia et sexcenta. Et quadratum BT
sexcentum et octo millia et quadringenta. Et erit quadratum ATmille
millia et octingenta et vigintiquinque millia et ducenta. Ergo linea
TA est minus mille et trecentis et quinquaginta uno. Sed proportio
duarum linearum AB coruunctarum ad TB est sicut proportio
/iT ad TQ. Et proportio AT ad TQ est sicut proportio ANad NB.
Et due linee -:4T, AB agregate sunt minus duobus millibus et non-
gentis et undecim. Et linea TB per hanc quantitatem est septingenta
91 ad: et J-/
97 cordam PilJaZ,JI lineam H
14 huius OIJI. /-1
105 septingenta et octoginta: 70 et 80/-1
15-106 duo ... nlillia: 20000 et 400 et
3000 H
106 BT: TB H
17 sexcentum... nlillia: 6000 et 80000
J-1
92-94 laIn ... est: ( ... this is)
97 AN: - I - (_AY',) In Arabic text
(l?) appears wherever Gerard has N; I
note no more instances of it.
14 in ... volunlus 0/11 ..:1r.
108 octingenta et vigintiquinque millia:
800 et 25000 H
110 TA: TQ rI
111 ATI .. NB : AT et TQ est sicut pro-
portio AT ad TB, TQ est sicut pro-
portio ad NB /-[
I I I de TQ... NB ser. P 1Jlg. et Z,JI IJlg. in
alia, est sicut proportio AT ad TB
I 13, I 15, I 16 septingenta: septuaginta H
I I I TQ: - t ok - (Note: Arabic text has t.
\vherever Gerard has Q.) / Et ... est
Ihis is)
I 13 per ... quantitatem OJJI .rir.
of the BanG Musa 27J
indeed is tlle ratio of a side of a figure Cl1ntainin.g the circle and
6
cl h d- Th c diameter 4,673
h
9 SI es to t e lameter. ereIOre, 1 6 'd > 6 w
1-,erlffi l)() Y9 SI es 14, 88
Therefore. it has now been demonstrated that perim 9
6
sides < 31 .
dlalneter 7
Further, I shall draw in circle -:/JT11 a cl10rd Sllbtcntiing 1/6 [of tIle
circle] and this chord is line TB [sec Fig. 40]. I shall draw IT and bisect
L TAB by line ./1N. T11en I shall draw chord /\.78 and bisect L B./'IL\'
A
by line AK. Then I shall draw chord KB and bisect L KAB by line AL.
Then I shall draw chord LB and bisect L LAB by line Then I
shall draw chord MB. Therefore, it is evident that chord iVlB is the side
of a figure having 96 sides which the circle contains. Then I shall assume
line AB = 1,560 because of the facile utility of this number for what
we wish. Therefore, chord TB = 7
80
. And AB2 = 2,433,600. And
BT2 = 608,400. And AT2 = 1,
82
5,200. Therefore, line TA < 1,351.
But (TA + AB)jTB = ATjTQ. And ATjTQ = AN/NB, and
(AT + AB) < 2,9II, and, by this quantity, TB = 780. Therefore,
174 The Verba ftliorum
et octoginta. Ergo proportio ANad NB est minor proportione duo-
rum millium et nongentorum et undecim ad septingenta et octoginta.
Cum ergo fuerit linea NB septingenta et octoginta, erit linea 4.4Nmi-
nus duobus millibus et nongentis et undecim. Ergo quadratum A.LV
erit minus octo mille millibus et quadringentis et septuaginta tribus
millibus et nongentis et viginti uno. Et quadratum NB erit sexcentum
I!lO et octo millia et quadringenta. Ergo quadratum AB erit minus novem
mille millibus et octoginta duobus millibus et trecentis et viginti uno.
Ergo linea AB erit minus tribus millibus et tredecim et tribus quartis
unlUS.
Et secundum exemplum quod narravimus declarabitur quod pro-
125 portio AK ad KB est minor proportione quinque millium et nongen-
torum et viginti quattuor et trium quartarum unius ad septingenta et
octoginta. Cum ergo fuerit linea KB septingenta et octoginta, erit
linea AK minus quinque millibus et nongentis et viginti quattuor et
tribus quartis unius. Et proportio quinque millium et nongentorum
130 et viginti quattuor et trium quartarum unius ad septingenta et octo-
ginta est sicut proportio mille et octingentorum et viginti trium ad
ducenta et quadraginta. Ergo cum sit KB ducenta et quadraginta, erit
oL4K minus mille et octingentis et viginti tribus. Et quadratun1 _4K
erit minus tribus mille millibus et trecentis et viginti tribus rnillibus
135 et trecentis et viginti novem. Et quadratum KB erit quinquaginta
septem millia et sexcenta. Ergo quadratum AB erit minus tribus mille
millibus et trecentis et octoginta millibus et nongentis et viginti
novem. Ergo linea AB erit minus mille et octingentis et triginta octo
et novem partibus undecimis unius.
140 Et secundum exernplum illius quod narravin1US declaratur quod
proportio AL ad LB est minor proportione triun1 nullium et sexcen-
c. 2 torum et sexaginta unius et novem partium undecimarum unius I ad
ducenta et quadraginta. Et proportio trium millium et sexcentorum
114 minor ZIIIRJ-1, eorr. "Ig. P ex sicut
I 16 Cum: si J-! I de NB ser. P IIlg. et Z,II IJlg.
in alia TB I de AN ser. P IIJg cl Z,JI Illg.
in alia AN (I)
1 17-18 duobus .... lninus OIIJ. 1-1
1 17 de AN ser. P !IJg. cl ZIIJ IIJg. in alia AB
119 uno 0111. H I Et: ergo J-I I de NB
ser. ]) nJg. el ZIIJ supra in alio TB
120 erit: est J-I
121 et
J
0/11. I-J / octoginta: octingenta Z,II
126, 127, 130 septingenta: septuaginta if
127
1
, 2, 130 octuaginta 1-1
I 31 de proportio ser. ]) /lJg. et Z'JI supra
vel nlensura
137 octuaginta ]-1
] 38 et octo J-I
141- 42 sexccnta 11
143 trium: j\N 11
of the Banu Mlisa
(AN/l\7"B) < (Z,9I1/780).l-IcnceJ \-v11en Ji11e =--= 780, line
Therefore, /1.i\T2 < 8,473,921. i\11d I\.rlJ2 ::::.":. 608,40. <:
9,082,3 21 . Therefore, line./1B <
And by using the example \\rrtich we 11ave described it \vill be sllown
that < Therefore, when KB = 780, line .AK < 5,924i.
5,9341 I 82 3 r
And 8 --. Therefore, wIlel1 K B == 240, K < 1,8z3. i\nd
7 0 24
0
AK2 < 3,323,329. And KBz == 57,600. T'11crcf()re, _/1B2 < 3,380,929.
Therefore, line ./'1B < 1,83 .
And by using tIle example which we l1ave described it is sho\vn that
AL 3,661 iQi And 3,661 1,7 . Th C h LB - 66
LB
< 66 erelore, 'W en -,
240 240
1 14-15 Ergo... octoginta om. Ar.
124, 140, 152 quod narravimus: (that)
128, 133 AK: The MSS on which the
printed text was based omitted AK,
but it is in the Paris Arabic MS.
13 2 Ergo ... quadraginta 0111. AT.
I3J-36 quinquaginta ... sexcenta: vv,.
(7760) This is erroneous; itis correctly
given in Paris MS.))
58r
c. I
276 The Verba ftliorum
et sexaginta unius et novem partium undecimarum unius ad ducenta
145 et quadraginta est sicut proportio mille et septem ad sexaginta sex.
Cum ergo fuerit linea LB sexaginta sex, erit linea AL minus mille
et septem. Ergo quadratum AL erit minus mille millibus et quattuor-
decim millibus et quadraginta novem. Et quadratum LB erit quattuor
millia et trecenta et quinquaginta sex. Ergo quadratum AB erit minus
150 mille millibus et decem et octo millibus et quadringentis et quinque.
Ergo linea AB erit minus mille et novem et sexta unius.
Et secundum exemplum quod narravimus declaratur quod propor-
tio All! ad i)./B est minor proportione duorum millium et sedecim et
sexte unius ad sexaginta sex. Cum ergo fuerit .!vIB sexaginta sex, erit
155 ..:4.L1I nunor duobus millibus et sedecim et sexta. Et quadratum AM
erit minus quattuor mille millibus et sexaginta quattuor millibus et
nongentis et viginti octo. Et quadratum AlB erit quattuor millia et
trecenta et quinquaginta sex. Ergo quadratum AB erit minus quat-
tuor mille millibus et sexaginta novem millibus et ducentis et octoginta
160 quattuor. Ergo linea AB erit minus duobus millibus et decem et
septem et quarta unius. Sed linea AfB per hanc quantitatem est sexa-
ginta sex. Et linea . J . ~ 1 B est latus figure habentis nonaginta sex latera
que continetur a circulo. Ergo proportio cliametri ad latera figure
l1abentis nonaginta sex latera quam continet circulus est nunor pro-
165 portione duum rnillium et decem et septem et quarte unius ad sex
rnillia et trecenta et triginta sex. lam ergo ostensum est quod proportio
omnium laterum figure habentis nonaginta sex latera quam continet
circulus ad diametrurn est maior pro/portione trium et decem partium
de septuaginta et una partibus ad unum. Et linea continens circlllum
170 est longior omnibus lateribus figure habentis nonaginta sex latera
quam continet circulus et bre,rior on1nibus lateribus figure habentis
nonaginta sex latera que continet circulum. lam ergo manifestum est
ex eo quod narravimus, quod proportio linee continentis circulum ad
diametrum eius est maior proportione trium et decem partium de
175 septuaginta et una partibus ad unum et minor proportione trium et
148 LB: l\L (AB?) /-1
149 de quinquaginta ser. ]) !JJg. el ZJJJ sllpra
in alio, non est hie
154 sexte corr. ex sexta in PZJJJJ-IJv!a
159 octuaginta 1-/
160 quatuor ...I\la duobus ])Z'JJ in alio"
lluattuor !Jlg. ]) et ZIIJ supra in alio
quatuor oetuaginta /-1
161 Sed: et I-I
166 de triginta ser. ]:J JJJg el Z,JJ sllpra in
alio, sexaginta
174 de: et [-I
175 et
2
: est 1-/
175-76 de triun1 et septitne ser. }) I I J ~ el Z/JJ
sllpra in alio, deceln partiun1 de sep-
tuaginta
of the Banii Miisa
I I
AL < 1,007. Therefore, /1L2 < 1,01 4,049. l\nd LB2 4,356. PT'llere-
fore, AB2 < 1,018,40 5. l'herefore, Ijl1e ./-IB < I,009l.
And by using the exanlple \.Vllicll \VC have described it is sho\vn that
AA! 1.,oI6i .
ly/B < 66 Therefore. when lIfE = 66. Ail! < 2.016&. i\nd
Ailf2 < 4,
06
4,9
28
. And llfBz == 4,35 6. 1-(}lerefore, 4,069,284.
Therefore, line ..rlB < 2,0171. But, by this qual1tity, line .illB = 66.
And line hlB is the side of a polygon havil1g 9
6
sides which is contained
diameter 2017!
bv the cucle. Hence. 1 . <' Hence. it has now
rI perlm po Y96 sIdes 6,3 36
perim poly 96 sides 3!O
been demonstrated that. > 11 i\nd the circum-
dIameter I
ference of the circle is longer than the perimeter of the polygc)n ha\:ing 96
sides which is contained by the circle and shorter than the perimeter of
the polygon having 96 sides which contains the circle. Hence, it has
3 circumference 3;
nowbecome evident from our narratIve that ----<. < ---
I diameter I
278 The Verba ftlioruIlI
septime ad unum. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus. Et hec est
forma figure.
Et iam potest, qui querit, raciocinari proportionem linee circum-
flexe ad diametrum ut perveniat ex propinquitate numeri, cum quo
180 raciocinatur ad veritatem proportionis unius earum ad alteram ad
quemcunque finem voluerit, secundum quod narravimus, propter
hunc eundem modum quem fecit Arcllimenides.
[VII.] VOLO OSTENDERE QUOD, CUM ACCIPITUR SUPER-
FLUITAS 1\1EDIETATIS 01\1NIU1tI LATERU11 Ol\1NIS TRli\N-
GULl SUPER UNUMQUODQUE LATERUM EIUS, TUNC SI
MULTIPLICATUR UNA TRIU11 SUPERFLUITATUl\1 IN ALI-
5 i\l\'1 EARU1f, DEINDE 1\1ULTIPLICATUR ILLUD QUOD
AGREGATUR IN TERTIi\M, POSTEA MULTIPLICATUR ID
QUODAGREGATURINMEDIETATE110MNIUMLATERUNI
TRlANGULI, TUNC ILLUD QUOD r\GREGr\TUR INDE EST
EQUALE J\fULTIPLICr\TIONI EMBADI FIGURE IN SE.
10 Verbi gratia, sit triangulus ABC[Fig. 41]. Dico ergo quod quando
accipitur superfluitas medietatis linearumAB, BC, CA coniunctarum
super unamquamque linearum AB, BC, CA, deinde multiplicatur
superfluitas medietatis linearum trium agregatarum super AB in
superfluitatem medietatis earum super BC, postea multiplicatur illud
176 septime: septem (?) H / post unum
add. S non igitur trium et septime ad
unum sed minor / declarare: demon-
strare H
176-77 Et
2
figure PZHIMa onl. HS
178 Et om. H / Et ... potest: sed S / post
raciocinari add. PS eum .red del. P /
proportionem: proportio AJa, et aIJte
el/H' habet Ma RIg. 9 et del. ])ZII' per
179-8z ex .... Archimenides : ad illum
propinquum veritati sicud voluerit,
ita quod non erit error nisi in minus
minuto si voluerit et minus secunda si
voluerit et minus tertio si ,roluerit
(tj. lineas 13-19). Hanc probant sicud
facit Archimenides ostendendo prin1a
quod proportio omnium laterum
superficiei habentis 96 latera conti-
nentis circulum ad dran1etruI11 est
n1inor tribus et septin1a" unius, deinde
quod proportio ol11niul11 lateruI11 fi-
gure habentis 96 latera quam continet
circulus ad dyametrum est maior
proportione trium et 10 partium de 71
partibus ad unum. Igitur linea con-
tinens circulum est longior omnibus
lateribus figure 11abentis 96 latera
quam continet circulus et brevior
omnibus lateribus figure habentis 96
latera que continet circulum et probat
illud eodem modo sicud Archimeni-
des. S
181-82 propter hunc: per H
182 Archimenides ZII/H.A1a Archemides
p
1 Vola ... quod 0111. S
3 eius 0111. j-I
4 n1ultiplicetur ]-1
quod 011/. ]-1
6 id 01)/. I]
8 indc OIJ/. 11
J 4 earun1 /r. 1-/ /J0,rl BC;
of the BanG MGsa 279
And this is wllat wc wisl1ed to ShO\'T. i\lld here is the form l1f the figllre
[Figs. 39 and 40 ].
And now anyone who wislles can calculate the ratio of a curvilinear line
[i.e., an arc] to tIle diameter, arriving at all approxitnatc onumber vlhich
can be reckoned by tIle same 111et110d that J\rchimedesused as close as is
wished to the true ratio, just as we have explained it.
[VII.] I WISH TO T, IF TI-IE
OF ONE HALF OF THE OF TRII\NGLE
OVER EACH OF ITS SIDES IS '-rAKt:N, f\ND IF ONE OF TI-IE
THREE EXCESSES IS TIPLIED BY l-'HE SECOND I\ND
THEN THAT PRODUCT IS BY Tt-lE: THIRD EX-
CESS, AND FURTHER IF THE PRODUCT OF THE TI-IREE
EXCESSES IS 11ULTIPLIED BY ONE J-IALF OF THE
OF THE TRIANGLE, THEN THE FINAL PRODUCT IS EQUL\.L
TO THE AREA OF THE TRIANGLE SQUARED.
For example, let there be a 6 .L4BC [see Fig. 41]. I say, therefore, that,
assuming the excess of 1/2 (AB + BC + CA) over each of the sides
AB,BC, CA, then [1/2 (AB +BG+ CA) -AB][I/2(AB+BG+G..A)
/(
T
Fig. 41
H
176 declarare 0111. Ar.
'176-77 Et figure 0111. Ar.
178-82 Et Archimenides: '.JI
.:,. .)I
J
cS
I
JI '4!
J..J' I.l.. J:i.c:J'
(And it is possible with this same methoa
to arrive at any limit of approximation in
this oplration.)
1 Vola ... quod om. Ar.
9 embadi: (measure or magnitlle)
See Arabic variant for Proposition I,
line 2 I. The usual word translated by
6mbadu1IJ is L...
10-18 Dico.... probatut 011/. Ar.
z80 The Verba ftliorUllJ
15 quod agregatur in superfluitatem medietatis earum super CA, deinde
multiplicatur illud quod agregatur in medietatem linearum trium
agregatarum, tunc illud quod agregatur inde est equale ei quod fit
ex multiplicatione embadi trianguli ABC in se; quod sic probatur.
Revolvam in triangulo ABC maiorem circulum qui cadit in eo,
20 qui sit circulus DZU, et sit eius centrum E. Et protraham a centra
lineas ED, EU, EZ ad puncta super que tangunt circulum latera
trianguli. Et protraham lil1eam AB. Ostendam ergo quod D..:4 est
equalis et ZB equalis BU et VC equalis CD, quoniam, quando
linee contingentes circulum occurrunt sibi super punctum unum, tunc
125 ipse sunt equales, propterea quod angulus EDA est equalis angulo
EZA, et unusquisque eorum est rectus. Et due linee DE, E...4 sunt
equales duabus lineis ZE, EA. Ergo linea DA est equalis linee AZ.
Et per huiusmodi modum scitur quod due linee ZB, BUsunt equales,
et quod due linee UC, CD sunt equales. Et scitum est ex eo quod
go narra\rimus, quod unaqueque duarum linearum DA, AZ est super-
fluitas medietatis linearum AB, BC, CA agregatarum super lineam
BC, et quod unaqueque duarum linearum ZB, BU est superfluitas
medietatis omnium laterum trianguli ABC super lineam Cfl, et
quod unaqueque duarum linearum DC, CUest superfluitas medietatis
35 omnium laterum trianguli ..4BC super lineam BA. Deinde elongabi-
c. 2 mus lineam / AEusque ad T et elongabimus iterum lineam AB usque
ad H et ponemus AHequalem medietati omnium laterum trianguli
ABG. Declaratur ergo ex eo quod narravimus quod linea HB est
equalis unicuique duarum linearum DC, CU. Et elongabimus
40 usque ad K et ponemus AK equalem.r1H. Ergo declaratur quod linea
CK est equalis unicuique duarum linearum ZB, BU. Et protraham
16 illud S 011/. PZIIJ 1-1 Ala
16-17 in ... inde 011/. /-1
18-124 quod .... complere: habitam (? hie
earn?) probat ex hoc quod multiplicatio
superfluitatum medietatis Onln1Um la-
terum trianguli super unumquodque
laterum eius unius in alteranl deinde
eius quod aggregatur in tertiarn est
equale ei quod fit ex multiplicatione
medietatis dyametri maioris circuli
cadentis in in se et eius quod
aggregatur in medietatenl amniunl
laterulTI trianguli. Ex hac propositione
patet quod habito enlbado et duobus
lateribus habetur tertium et sinliliter
habitis tribus lateribus habetur emba-
dus. S
20 DZU: DZM }-I
21 - U: -N 1-1 hie et ubiqlle
22 de ostendam seT. jJnJg el Z/)/ slIpra vel
manifestum est
23-25 et
l
equales ]-1 IJlg P et 'JIg. Z'IJ,
et ante el//N habel1/ P et ZnJ in alia
24 sibi 011/. ]-/
29 sciendunl I-f
35 ante del. ]) A
40 K: N (?) 1-1/ AK: l\N (?) 1-/
41 GK: C; N (?) ]-1
of the Banii Milsa
- BC] [1/2 (A.B + BC -+- G/1) - G.6,.1] 1/2 (.,L1B -1- IJCT' -t-
(area 6 ...4BG)2, whicll is !Jrovcd as foll()\\l's.
I shall inscribe in L .L4BG' t11e greatest circle \\,hicll ca.n fit ill it, namely,
the circle DZU. Let its center be E. Tsllall protract from tIle centcr lilles
ED, EU, EZ to the points of tallgenC)T of the sides of the triangle \\Jith
the circle. I shall draw line .L1E'. I shall sho\v, therefore, that 1:J.. /1 ==-: ... L1Z,
ZB = BU, and VG == CD. For wllen lines tangent to a circle meet in a
single point, they are equal, since L EDj<1 == L_ .EZ l)()th being right
angles. But DE + EA = ZE' + 'l11erefore, 1)1/1 === ,/1Z. In the
same way it is known that ZB == .8[/ ancl that VCr' == G'D. j-\nd it is
known from what we have recounted that == --l/lZ == 1/2 (--lL1B + BC
+ GA) - BC and that ZB = BU == 1/2 (/tB + BC + G'/l) -
and that DC = GV = 1/2 (AB + BC + G'/I) - B.l4. Then we shall
extend line ABto T* and line AB to H and posit /1H = 1/2 perimeter
6 ABC. Therefore, it is shown from what we have recounted that HB
= DG = GU. And we shall extend AG to K and posit .L4K =
Therefore, it is shown that line GK = line ZB = line BV. r\nd I shall
* But the authors have not yet given us the conditions to determine T.
19 Revolvam: (we draw)
20 a centro 0111. Ar. (Note: everywhere
Gerard has Z, the Arabic text has ,) (D).))
2 1-22 super ... trianguli: ..,..,L.:JI (of tangency)
22 DA: -.J I - (AU) Gerard has D where
Arabic text has.J (U). I do not give the
other instances.))
23 AZ: - ,) I - (AD) Gerard has Z
where Arabic text has,) (D). I do not
give the other instances.)) / BD: - j y-
(BZ) Gerard has U where Arabic text
hasj (Z). I note no other instances.))
23-29 quoniam.... equales om. Ar.
31 AB, BG, GA om. Ar.
33, 34-35 medietatis ABG: (halfo..f it)
35-36 elongabimus lineam
1
011/. Ar.
36-106 usquez .... se: y J'
!J c:.. JI - [., -.J -j -
- (. , - ,j- " - j - -
if.J - !JI
&J
l
.4-
1
..i - .J. !J - J., - cS - !J L.. -
'-'.J - .J. I - .J- o..u-.l, 0J.Jr"
- !J J., - L J., - - J., -
!J .J. - - J., L.. - U.)J' &Jt,
!J I - cS.JWJ 4.i' -
282. The Verba ftliorum
ex puncto H lineam HT super angulum rectum linee AHet protra-
ham ex puncto K linea KT super angulum rectum linee AK. Ergo
manifestum est quod linea KT est equalis linee HT. Et accipiam ex
45 linea BCequale BH, quod sit BL. Et protrahamTL. Ergo manifestum
est quod ipsa est perpendicularis super lineam BC. Propterea quod nos
protraximus duas lineas BT, TC, ergo manifestum est quod augmen-
turn quadrati BT super quadratum TG est equale augmento quadrati
BHsuper quadratum KC. Sed KC est equalis LC et BHequalis EL.
50 Ergo augmentumquadrati BT super quadratum TC est equale aug-
mento quadrati BL super quadratum LG. Propter illud ergo TL est
perpendicularis super BC. Et LT equalis linee TH, propterea quod
BL est equalis BH et BT est linea communis, et duo anguli BLT,
BHY sunt recti. Et propter illud sunt duo anguli LBT, TBHequales
55 et duo anguli LTB, BTHequales. Et linea BHest continuata secun-
dum rectitudinem cum linea AB, ergo duo anguli UBZ, HBU sunt
equales duobus rectis. Et duo anguli LBHet LTHsimul sunt equales
duobus angulis rectis. Ergo angulus LTH est equalis angulo ZBU.
Sed angulus EBU est medietas anguli ZBU. Et angulus BTH est
60 medietas anguli LTH. Ergo ipsi sunt equales. Et remanet ex triangulo
42 AH: AN (?) H
42-43 et ... AK om. H
44 KT: HT H I HT: KT H
45 equalem Zm
46 est Oil'. Zn, I super lineam bis I-f
47-48 augmentum: angulum H
48 equale augmento: equalis angulo H
50 augmentum: angulum /-1
50-5 I BT... quadrati 0111. 1-1
51 ilIud: hoc H
52-53 propterea ... anguli om. H
54-5 5 LBT anguli om. H
56-57 cum duobus onl. 1-1
59 Sed ... ZBU his H
60 remanet Zn, AfaR remamanet P rema-
nent /-1
--------------------------
- J, , - 0.,fJ - (. , -
- C ok - 1, - - 1, , !J - J, , L- -
- L. - - (. - :r - J -
0'1 - l::. - j&. fi; - J 1, -
w
J.-.aA1 tS' - l::. 1, - 1, - Jv-
w
J 1, - - *!J l::. - (. - Jv- 0
----------------
*Adds Paris and other 1155 the fol-
lowing:
- JL.. - !J (. - J - J '-;-' - JL.. - (. - J
- (. .kJ - JL. rJ - C - -
tr -.1 - J - 4.JL. - L. y -
J, J - - J L.. - J
- 0 - .J - ok y L.-
- ..JLi. - 0 - y j -
- C .L, J - c:. - L. y J
- C.1. J - - j -
w
- .k - 0 - J
..,
- J - 0 j-AAJtS' - [. J,
J<:
of the BanG 1vliJsa
28
3
dra\\," from point f-l1ine HT at a rig11t al1g1c t() liJ.lc .' /1.[-1 arlcl I sllull dra\\"
from point K line KT at a rigllt angle tt) lil1C '] 411crefore, it is evident
that }(T == HT. f\nd I sllull take fronl line BG' a line equal to B.H, and
this will be line BIJ. I shall draw I-fel1ce it is C\,jdel1t tl,at TfJ is perpen-
diclllar to line BC. For \\Then we ha\re dra\vn the tW() lines and TC',
therefore it is evident that BT2 - =--=- fJ[f2 - J(-(,'2.* But == LC'
and .BH = BL. I-Ience, JJl"'2 - == ./JIJ
2
- I.,G'Z [or, iil'}. - ,BL2 ==
TG2 - LG2]. i\ccordingly TJJ is perj)endiclllar to IJ(;. J\nd l.JT == TH be-
cause BL = BH, line BTis conlmon, and the two angles and B.f-I]-' are
right angles. And because of this, L J--IBT === ]'/3/-/ U11d L B ==
L BTH. \nd line BH is a rectilinea.r continuation of line &,-'1 B. I-Ience,
L UBZ + L HB[T = 2 right angles. l\nd L I-JBl-l + L LT11 == 2
rigllt angles. I-Ience, L LTH == L ZBU. But L E"1BU == 1/2 L ZBU
and L BTH = 1/2 L LTH. Hence, L EBU == L BTI-I. i\nd there
* For BT2 = BH2 + HT2, and TG2 =
KG2 + TH2, by the Pythagorean theorem,
- ,je -.) y 0 -
,je - L. J, y - - 0 .) y
- .1 L.. y - 0.) Y - -.1 L.. y -
- j, y - .) 0 Y - lili.i cJl::llj
- y - - y .) - JI - a .) -
L.. - .J - j y - - y .) - .J - .J. L.. - JI
JI ... 11._
- '-:'"'.) - -.) 0 - - - -
- 0 .) - j, L.. - JI - -
- - j -j y - .JL. - L..-
- .) 0 - JI -.) 0 -
-J-j y- -.1-
- - j, C. - JI - .) 0 - -
JI - .) 0 - Cif - C. ' JI - .) I
L I - JI - .) I - - - LJ - j y -
- y.ri - (.1 - - .) - Cj;;- -
and KT = HT. Therefore, BTz - TGl
= BH2 - KGz.
t..- -.) , - j - - j -j '-:"'
- L.. ' - C!;r j - .) - - c:. ' - j
A
I(
-.-----.-.H
Note: The letters are transliterations ofArabic
letters.
z84 The Verba jilioruflJ
BTH angulus TBH equalis angulo BEUtrianguli BEU. Ergo trian-
gulus EBU est similis triangulo TBH. Ergo proportio EU ad UB
est sicut proportio BHad HT. Sed ZB est equalis BU. Et EUequalis
ZE. Ergo proportio EZ ad ZB est sicut proportio BHad HT. Ergo
65 quadratum*EZ in HT est equale quadrato ZB in HB. Sed proportio
quadrati**EZad quadratumEZin HTest sicut proportio EZ ad HT.
Et proportio EZ ad HT est sicut proportio AZ ad AH. Ergo pro-
portio .A.Z ad AHest sicut proportio quadrati EZ ad quadratum EZ
in HT. Et quadratum EZ in HT est equale quadrato ZB in HB.
70 Ergo proportio quadrati EZ ad quadratum ZB in BH est sicut pro-
portio AZ ad AH. Ergo illud quod fit ex multiplicatione quadrati
EZ in linearn AHest equale ei quod fit ex multiplicatione quadrati
HB in BZ per lineam .A.Z. At vero linee AZ, ZB, BH sunt super-
fluitates rnedietatis linearum trianguli AB, / BC, CA agregatarum
75 super unarnquamque linearum AB, BC, CA. Et linea EZest medietas
diametri circuli DUZ. Et linea AHest medietas linearum AB, BC,
G..4 agregatarum.
lam ergo manifestum est quod multiplicatio superfluitaturn medie-
tatis omnium laterum trianguli super unumquodque laterurn eius unius
80 earum in alteram, deinde eius quod agregatur in tertiam, est equalis
ei quod fit ex multiplicatione medietatis cliametri maioris circuli ca-
dentis in triangulo in se et eius quod agregatur in medietatem omnium
* Here used for "product." (See the
Introduction, division 2, of this chapter.)
62 TBH: BTH mg. 1-1
63 est
2
om. Z,JJ
63-64 Sed ... HT om. H
64 est del. P?, ORJ. Zm
65 est equalis his H / ZB: BZ H
67 post Et del. P ergo / AH: HA J-I
69 Et ... HT PZIII quod H
72 equalis H
- j - ,- - [..J - -j -
- L. ' - 0 - 0..,5:JJ - L.. '
c:-r - L. ' - - 0 - c:-r
(JL. tr \.)lj
- - I - - C
j
- -.J -
- c.'
** Here used for "square of."
73 ante At scr. ZnJP nJg., H lex. in (pro H)
alio, et quod agregatur
74 linearum trianguli Ir. Zm / agrega-
tarum Ir. 1-/. post trianguli
75 super GA onl. H
75-76 est AH 0111. H
80 deinde eius 0111. ZnJ et H / equalis P
equale Z,III-IJl1a
(1I11/il Bl-I == GZ, and AG I/Iltil Cl\. =
BZ, and so AJ-J as JI-'ell as AKeqllals half
of the S/l/II the sides. froIII the /JJ'O
J)oil1/S I1 and K }}'C drauJ 111/0 perpendi-
(1IIars- 1-17' and And so IhC)I JJ,j/J
l1eressari!y IlIeel in a single poilll [Iil/e]
/ltIll/eD" poiJJt 1'. TJ-I == TK.
[Or] if H'e 1/'ish let liS drou' Fll-' perpcl/di-
of the Hanu .L\1.usa
remains of 6 BTH, L T wllic11 is equal to L .8E[-: of BE[_;.
Therefore, 6 EBUis similar to 2\ TBl:!. 'fhercfore, t13 === .BH/HT.
But ZB = BUand EU == Tllerefore, .b7jZB ==: BH/FI7, Therefore,
(EZ. HT) = (ZB HB). But EZ2/(EZ HT) = EZ/I-fT and I:.Z/HT =
AZjAH[by similar triangles]. Therefore, ./IZj/:lfl = 1::.'2
2
/ (EZ HT).
And (EZ HT) = (ZB HB). l'llcrefore, E7
2
/(ZB BH) ==-=
Therefore, (EZ2 AH) = (HB BZ But lines ./4Z, Z B,BHare
the excesses of 1/2 (AB + BC + G'./1) over each of the sides, ./lB,BG,
and CA. And line EZ is the radius of circle .DUZ, i\nd line AH ==
1/2 (AB + BC + CA).
Therefore, it has now become evident that the multiplication of one of
the excesses of 1/2 the perimeter of the triangle over each of its sides by'
the second excess, followed by the multiplication of this product by the
third excess, is equal to the multiplication of the square of the radius of the
greatest circle falling in the triangle by 1/2 the perimeter of the triangle.
cular andjoin TK and show that it also is
perpendicular: For AK = AH, and AT
is common, and L HAT = L KAT.
And we join BT and TG, and from' BC
we CI/t BL = BH, and we draw TL. And
it is perpendicular to BG because BTz -
TGz = BHz - G1(2 [But BH= BL and
GK = GLjandsoBT2 - TCz = BLz-
GLz]. * AccordinglY, TL is perpendicular
to BC. And TL = TH because BH =
BLandBTis common and angles Hand L
*The sentence in brackets is a transla-
tion of the material given in the aste-
risk, note, page 281. **Paris MS;
art right angles. AJld so L LBT = L
HBT. We draw BE, So L ZBE = L
DBB. BNt sinct L LBH + L LTH =
2 right anglls, L ZBD = L LTJ-I. And
the half is tfJllal /0 tb, half, i.t" L EBD
of BDE If/Nals L BTH of 6 BHT.
And angles BDE** and are right
anglls. And so tria1lglls BED, BHT are
similar. And [thus] DE/DB = BH/HT
and DB = BZ, BH = ZG. And so
ED***/ZB = ZG/HT. And DE HT
"BZE" in published text. ***"HD"
in published text; "EO" in other
MSS.
286 The Verba jiliorum
laterum trianguli. Sed multiplicatio medietatis diametri maioris circuli
cadentis in triangulo per medietatem omnium laterum trianguli est
85 mensuratio trianguli. Et multiplicatio eius iterum per medietatem
diametri circuli est sicut multiplicatio medietatis diametri circuli in
se, deinde quod agregatur in medietatem laterum trianguli. Deinde
multiplicatio etiam eius quod agregatur in medietatem omniunl late-
rum trianguli est equalis multiplicationi embadi superficiei trianguli in
90 se, propterea quod multiplicatio medietatis diametri maioris circuli
cadentis in triangulo in meclietatem omnium laterum trianguli est
embadum trianguli, sicut ostenclimus in illis que sunt premissa. Et
multiplicatio EZ in se, deinde in AH, que est meclietas omnium
laterum figure ./4BG, est equalis multiplicationi EZ in AH et eius
95 quod agregatur in EZ. Ergo multiplicatio eius in AH et eius quod
agregatur in se est equalis multiplicationi BHin BZ, deinde eius quod
83 post trianguli odd. DIg. PZnJlvfo et lex.
HR Sed multiplicatio quadrati EZ in
AH est sicut multiplicatio AH in EZ
et quod provenit in EZ. Ergo multipli-
catio AH in EZ et quod provenit in
EZ est sicut multiplicatio HB in BZ
et eius (OHI. H) quod congregatur
(agregatur in ZA. Ponamus* AH
communem. Erit multiplicatio I-fB in
BZ et quod congregatur in ZA* (* ...*
om. H) et quod (0111. /-1) proveniet in
AH equale (equalis H) multiplica-
tioni ZE in AH et quod congregatur in
EZ et totius quod proveniet in AI-I.
Sed multiplicatio EZ in AH est emba-
dum (embadi 111aR) trianguli. Ergo
erunt 3 (etiam AlaR) quantitates:
triangulus (trianguli H triangule AfaR)
EZ, et l-IA (AI-f, ZIII). Ergo multipli-
catio trianguli in EZ et eius quod con-
gregatur (agregatur AlaR) in AI-I est
sicut multiplicatio AH in EZ et quod
provenit in triangulum. Sed multipli-
catio in EZ est triangulus (trian-
gule ilIaR). Ergo multiplicatio trian-
guli in triangulunl est equalis multi-
plicationi l-IB (in I-lB 111a) in BZ et
cius quod provenit (pervenit in ZA
et totius aggregati in A)-I. Et illud est
quod demonstrare voluinlus. Et post
voluinlus add. J-! in alio, ianl ostenSUI11
est quod multiplicatio uniuscuiusque
linearum AZ, ZB, BH in eo quod ag-
gregatur ex multiplicatione unius ea-
rum in aliam deinde quod aggregatur
in medietatem omnium laterum, est
equalis ei quod aggregatur ex multi-
plicatione embadi trianguli in se et
illud est quod demonstrare yoluimus
ad presens. (Cl var. lineae go.)
83-106 Sed .... voluimus 0111. H bic et add.
post BH in linea I Ig
85 Et 0111. H
87 deinde
J
: inde H
88 etiam 0111. H hie. if. IJar. 89
89 post trianguli add. /-1 deinde etiaol mul-
tiplicatio eius quod aggregatur / equa-
lis H et equalis P e' quale R i\Ia
90 post se ser. P nlg. et lext. llfaR (et ZIII
Illgpost trianguli in linea 8j) in (Olil. illaR
alio (011/. llfaR), ianl ergo ostensum est
quod multiplicatio unillscuiusque line-
arum AZ, ZB, BH in eo quod agre-
gatur ex 111ultiplicatione unius earUl11
in aliam deindc quod agregatur in
medietatenl olnruum laterum est equale
ei quod agregatllr ex olultiplicatione
embadi trianguli in se. Et illud est (011'.
AIa quod dcmonstrare. (Cj: /'ar.
lineae S}).
92 Et: est /-f
94 l\BG: BG 1-1
94-9
6
EZ... nlldtiplicationj his I-I
of the Banu !vlusa
28
7
But the multiplication of t11e radius of tlle largest circle falling in tIle
triangle by 1/2 the perimeter of tile triaIlgJe is equal to the area of the
triangle. And the multiplicatioll of tllis 1,roduct agaitl by tllC radius of the
circle equals the multiplication of the square of tIle radius })}T IJ 2 the peri-
meter of the triangle. Then tl,e fllrt11er n1ultipl icati()J1 of tllis IJfoduct by
1/2 the perimeter of the trianle equals to the area ofthe triangle squared, since
the multiplication of the radius of the largest circle falling ill the triangle by
I/Z the perimeter of the triangle is equal to tIle area of tIle triangle, as we
demonstrate in those tllings wllich have been presented bef()re. Therefore
(EZ2 AH) = [(EZ AH) .EZ]. 1-'llcrefore, [ ~ Z __/1/-/) .t;L'] ==
= BZ ZG. And a/so EDz/ED HT
= ED2JBZ ZG = ED/HT and ED/
HT = AD/AH. Andso EDz/BZ ZG
= ADJAH. Hence ED2 AH = BZ
ZG AD. Andifwe multiplY them i.e.,
each side of the equation by AH, then
BD'- AH2 = BZ ZG AD AH.
BI/I since BD AH = area of the
triangle, so ED1. AH2 = square of the
area of the triangle. And thus the sqlltlre of
the area of the triangle is equal 10 the pro-
dllc/ BZ ZG AD AH, i.e., [/0 the
prodHct of] th, three excesses into half thl
sum of the sides. The reader should
compare this whole translation with
the slightly different Latin text.
C.2
100
105
110
115
120
288 The Verba ftliorulN
agregatur in AZ. Ergo EZ iam multiplicata est in duos numeros, in
AH, et fuit embadum, et in embadum, [i.e.,] mensurationem, et fuit
equalis multiplicationi BHin BZ, deinde eius quod agregatur in AZ.
Ergo proportio linee AH ad embadum est sicut proportio embadi
ad multiplicationem AZ in ZB deinde eius quod agregatur in BH.
Ergo multiplicatio superfluitatum meclietatis omnium laterum trian-
gull super unumquodque laterum trianguli unius earum in alteram et
eius quod agregatur in tertiam deinde multiplicatio eius quod agrega-
tur in n1edietatem omnium laterum trianguli est equalis multiplicationi
embadi trianguli in se. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus.
Et nobis quidem est possibile venire cum demonstratione super
veritatem eius quod narravimus per modum alium. Cum factum sit,
illud quod premissum est de narratione eius in hac figura manifestum.
Et illud est, quonian1 proportio EZ ad ZB est sicut proportio BHad
HT, ergo quantitates EZ, ZB, BH, HT sunt proportionabiles. Ergo
proportio prime ad quartam est proportio prime ad secundam multi-
plicata per proportionem prime ad tertiam, propterea quod quando
ponitur quantitas secunda media inter priJmam et quartam, fit pro-
portio prime ad secundam multiplicata per proportionem secunde ad
quartam, existens proportio prime ad quartam; ergo proportio secunde
ad quartam est proportio prime ad tertiam. Ergo proportio EZ ad
HT est sicut proportio EZ ad ZB multiplicata per proportionem EZ
ad BH. (Et cum proportio EZ ad HT sit sicut proportio AZ ad AH
per similes triangulos, ergo proportio ad AHest sicut proportio
EZ ad ZB multiplicata per proportionem EZ ad EH, et ergo multi-
plicatio AZ in ZB et eius quod agregatur in BH est equalis multi-
plicationi EZ in se et eius quod agregatur in lineam AH. Et tunc
possumus sicut prius den1onstrationem complere. >
98 AH: OZH Z111 / in aliI. H / mensura-
tioni J-I / fuit: sunt l-J
99 multipEcationis /-1
101 in:: anI. J-I
103 in alteram PZflIOIJI .ilIa in altcrum I-I
106 dcclarare: demonstrare
107 est possibile Ir. /-/
110 Et: est quod H
1 J J proportionales Z,JI
17-108 Et ... aliun1: ?'
(.&4nd also allo/ber IJlelbod)
I 13 per jJZ,J1Jl1a in B
1 I 5 secundam nlultiplicata scr. et del. H
I J 6 existens ... quartam scr. et del. H / ergo:
et Znl
I 18 per OIJI. /-1
I 19 BI-I: I-IB 1-1 / posl l-IB add. H lineas
Sj-Io6, i.e., Sed ... voluimus
I 19-24 (Et .... complere> SIIPpICIJi; cf. Ar.
Hie e.rlloc/lna in jJZ,IJ
108-10 CUl11 . guoniam: 4 .l.A.!
(afler il is elJidell1 thal)
III ergo .... propnrtionabilis 01lJ. Ar.
of the Banu Miisa
28
9
(EH BZ ./4Z). I-Ience, .b71,as 110W lJeen n1l1ltiJ?liecllJY t\V'() nUlnbers: (1)
by .. and tllis is the area oftlle triangle [i.e., EZ --:<IH == area of and
(2) by the area of the triangle itself, and this \V"as equal to (B[-{ BZ .:' lZ)
[i.e., (EZ area of D) === (BII 13Z 'I1lcrefore, .L/J11/area of :=::
area of 6/(-44Z ZB BH) [dividing (1) by (2)]. the rnlllti-
plication of one of the excesses of 1/2 the perimeter of tIle triangle O\lCr each
of the sides of the triangle by tIle second excess, followed l)y the multi-
plication of this product by the third excess, alld tllCll followed once more
by the multiplication of t11is product by 1/2 the perimeter ()f the triangle, is
equal to the triangle squared. j\11d tllis is what we wished to show.
We can demonstrate the trutll of what we have recounted by another
method. When this has been done, then what we have stated before
in regard to this proposition is evident. j\nd this is as follo\1l5: since
EZ/ZB = EH/HT [cf. line 64], hence the quantities h7, ZB, BH, l-IT
are proportional terms. Therefore, *the ratio of the first term to the fourth
is equal to the ratio of the first to the second multiplied by the ratio of the
first to the third, since, when the second term is placed as a mean between
the first and the fourth, there results the ratio of the first to the second
multiplied by the ratio of the second to the fourth [which compound
ratio] equals the ratio of the first to the fourth. But the ratio of the second
to the fourth is as the ratio of the first to the third. Therefore, EZ/ HT ==
(EZ/ZB) (EZ/BH).* And since EZ/HT == AZ//1Hby similar triangles,
therefore AZ/AH = (EZ/ZB) (EZ/BH). Hence, (AZ ZB BH) ==
EZ2 AH. And then we complete the demonstration as before [in
lines 78-106].
** See Commentary, Proposition VII, lines I I I - 19.
119-2 4 cum.... complere>: - "':'" .)-.1
- - - - Y -.1 -j Y-
- J' -.) , - - J, L. - JI - .) ,
- j y - J' - .) , - W;. - L. I
- .) 1- "':"'.r4i - - JI - .) , - 4:-i
- .) , y - - j - j y - j
- (. 1- .j
(And DB = BZ, BH = ZG; and so
BD/HT = ADJAH = (ED/BZ)
(ED/ZG). And so AD BZ ZG =
BDz AH. And ]J.'t cOlllplell the proof by
the former file/hod.) See translation for
Arabic variant, lines 36-106, for the
rest of the proof. Although the texts
are substantially the same, note that I
have reconstructed Gerard's Latin text
somewhat differently than the Arabic
text since the first proof in the Gerard
text is somewhat different from the
current Arabic text; so my reconstrUc-
tion must tie into the Gerard text rather
than al-Tiisi's Arabic text.
The Verba jiliorunl
[VIII.] CUM PROTRAHUNTUR EX PUNCTa INTRA SPE-
RAM QUATTUOR LINEEPERVENIENTES AD SUPERFICIEj\I
SPERE, ET SUNT LINEE EQUALES, ET PUNCTA AD QUE
PERVENIUNT LINEE NON SUNT IN SUPERFICIE UNi\
5 RECTA, TUNC PUNCTUM QUOD EST INTRA SPER.t\j\I EST
CENTRUM SPERE.
Verbi gratia, sit spera ABGD intra quam sit punctum lV[Fig. 42].
Et protrahantur ex puncto 1\T linee NB, NE, lVD, NG, que sint
equales. Et puncta B, E, G, D non sint in superficie una (recta).
10 Dico ergo quod punctum 1\T est centrum spere; cuius hec est demon-
stratio.
Puncta E, G, D sunt in una superficie recta propter illud quod
declaravit Euclides de 110C, quod omnis triangulus est in superficie
una (recta) et propter illud puncta B, E, G sunt in superficie una
15 (recta). Revolvam ergo super puncta E, G, D circulum super quem
sunt E, G, D, et super puncta B, E, G circulum BEG. Et protraham
ex puncto .L\! perpendicularem super superficiem circuli BEG caden-
tern super punctum K. Ergo manifestum est quod punctum K est
centrum circuli BEG propterea quod si nos protraxerimus lineas BK,
20 GK, EK oportebit ut sint equales, quoniam linee B1\T, E1\T, Gj\l SUIlt
equales, et linea l\7K existit communis, et unaqueque linearum BK,
EK, GK continet cum linea KNangulum rectum. Ergo circulus BEG
est super superficiem spere ABGD. Et iam protracta est ex centra
I [VIII]: 10 I1lg. MaR I ex: a S
2 provenientes H
3 linee onl. S I ad que: atque H
4 proveniunt H
~ punctum: illud punctum S I quod est
0111. S
7-30 Verbi .... eius 0111. S
7 de ABGD ser. P I1Jg. cl ZnJ RIg. in alia,
ABGDE
9 BEDG H I non 0111. H
9, 14, I 5 <recta) SliPpletJi
12 post Puncta add. IJlg. PZII' cl text. HllfaR
(et del. H) in (0111 .AfaR, pro 1-1) alio
(OUI. AJaR) B, E, G sunt (sint .AfaR) in
superficie una recta secundum quod
ostendit euclides (add. H puncta E, G)
quod omnis* triangulus* (* ... * 0111. R
bie) est in una superficie recta (0111. lv/oR,
add. l? hie omnis triangulus) et propter
illud puncta E, G, D sunt in superficie
una recta secundum quod ostendit
euclides.
]4 B, E, G: B, G, E Z,II
I 5 ergo: igitur H
20-2 I sunt equales 0111. /-1
2 I comn1urutas /-1
21-22 linearun1 ... GI<: linea BN est GN 1-1
22. KN: NK .f-I
23 super superficien1 Z,IIPAJa superficien1
R superficies l ~
----------------------------
6, 7 N: j (Z) Here and everywhere
Gerard has N instead ofj (Z) of the
printed Arabic text. I give no more
instances of its variation.)
9 puncta D 0111 ..(4,..
10-- I 2 Dieo recta 0111. Ar.
of the Banu l\llisa
A
[As given in 1'IS P] Fig. 42
A
[Reconstructed]
[\lIll.] I.J1N j\Rr:: ])R-L\ \\7N FR01\f .1\
\\'YITHIN J\ 'T'C) '1'1-11.': OF
.I\R[': 1
1
:QU./\1. /\ND '1'I-f.E l?OINrrS \\Tl-IICf-I
LINES N"OT IN .l\
TI-IEN THE POINT \X/HICI-J IS \XlI'TI-IIN Sl)l-IERF: IS TI-lE
OF THE
For example, let there be a spllere BGt.D, in wl1.icll there is a point 1\7
[see Fig. 42 ]. j\nd let equal lines .1\,rB, .1\r" j\:D, .l\1
1
G be drawn from point
And points B, E, G', D are not in a single plane surface. I say, therefore,
that point i\T is the center of the spllere.
o
Demonstration: Points E, G, D are in a single plane surface since
Euclid has proved that every triangle is in a single plane surface. For this
same reason, points B, E, G are in a single plane surface. Therefore, I
shall describe circle EGD on points E, G, D and circle BEG on points
B, E, G. And I shall protract a perpendicular from point N to the surface
of circle BEG, falling on point K. Therefore, it has become evident that
point K is the center of circle BEG. For if we draw lines BK, GK, EK,
they are necessarily equal since lines BN, EN, Gl\l are equal, line NK
is common, and each of the lines BK, EK, GK contains a right angle with
line KiV. Therefore, circle BEG is on the surface of sphere ABGD. And
a perpendicular on its surface has been drawn from its center, and tIus is
13 omnis triangulus: $
(t2I!J three points)
14 et ... una 0111. Ar.
super ... E, G. D: - 0.) - (GDE)
17 jHJSI aJJ. Ar. - (..j -
(ZH) Note: (. (H) replaces the K of
Gerard's text throughout.))
17-18 cadentem... est
l
: &
(And so it falls on)
.14 super ... est om. Ar.
292. The Verba jiliorUNJ
eius perpendicularis super superficiemeius, que est KN. Ergo centrum
!l5 spere est super lineam KN. Et similiter iam ostensum est quod [si sit]
perpendicularis que protrahatur I ex puncto N et cadit super super-
ficiem circuli GDE, tunc super ipsam est centrum circuli BGD. Et
oportet propter illud ut super ipsam sit centrum spere. Ergo est
punctum N centrum spere. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus. Et
30 hec est forma eius.
[IX.] CUM LINE1\ QUE PROTRAHITUR EX PUNCTO CA-
PITIS OMNIS PIRAlvIIDIS COLUMPNE AD CENTRUM BASIS
EIUS EST PERPENDICULl\RIS SUPER BASIl\1 IPSIUS, TUNC
LINEE QUE PROTRAHUNTUR EX PUNCTO CAPITIS EIDS
5 AD CIRCULUM CONTINENTEM SUPERFICIEM BASIS EIUS
SECUNDU1\1 RECTITUDINEM SUNT EQUALES. ET MULTI-
PLICATIO UNIUS LINEARUM QUE PROTRAHUNTUR EX
CAPITE EIUS I\D CIRCULUM CONTINENTEM BASIM EIDS
IN 1\1EDIET1\TE1\1 CIRCULI CONTINENTIS Bi\SIM EIDS EST
10 SUPERFICIEI PlRAMIDIS COLU11PNE, SCILICET
SUPERFICIEI EIUS QUE EST INTER PUNCTUM CAPITIS
EIUS ET LINEAM CONTINENTE11 BASI11 EIDS.
Exempli causa, sit piramidis ABGD caput punctum A [Fig. 43].
Et circulus continens basim eius sit circulus BGD. Et centrum
2.4 eius
1
, 2: amborum Z"I / in (?) centrum
H / ante centrum add. nlg. P text. AJaR
ex corolario et theorematis (tehore-
matis A/fa) 1 Theodosii libri. This
whole addition in AJaR is enclosed in a
box to indicate, I suppose, that it
comes froln a marginal note.))
25 est
l
Ir. 1-/ post KN il1/inea 2/ / linea /-1 /
[si sit] sllpplel)j
26 ex: a Z,JI
27 EGD: GED 1-1
25 post KN add. Ar. L.
j''J1 JLS:.;,I
(Accordil1g 10 J/Jhat is proved ill Proposition
I I of the Book of the Spheres oJ Theodosills.)
...
27-2.8 Et ... spere:
- j - .J.:&. 'J'I '1
28 est OIJI. J-I
29 N: M H / centrum spere fr. Z'JI ante
punctum / declarare: demonstrare H
1 [IX]: 11 nlg. MaR
2 ante omnis add. PS eius; sedOlJI. Z,,,JVIHa
/ ad centrun1: a centro J-I
3 est OIJI. / perpendiculariter H / super:
supra J-]
5 continentem: contingentem H
] 3-77 Exempli .... voluimus OlJI. S
13 capud J-/
(passes throl/(.e.h the cC1Iter of the sphere and
the perpel1ditlllars 'Nee! 011IY at Z)
29 declarare 0111 ./lr.
29-30 Et ... eius 0"1. _/1,..
1-12 Cunl ... COllS: r-
n
;
:;..;; cS\" ol.-L 0 J-!,JI e:.k-i
of the BanD l\Iusa 293
[the perpendicular] Ki\. Therefore) the center of the sphere is on line
KJ.\"'. j\nd it has no\v lJeen delTIOl1strated in t11e same v/a)' that if a perpen-
dicular is drawn from p()int i\r to fall Ofl tile suface of circle CD.E, then
the center of circle EG'D is on it. .L\nd f()r the salne reason [as abov-e]
the center of the sphere is on that perpendicular. [But point J\' is the
common point of the tVlO perpendiculars.] Tllerefore, point j\7 is the center
of the sphere. And this is \\t11at Vle wished to s11ow. J\nd here is its fornl.
[Fig. 42 ].
[IX.] WHEN A LINE DRL-\\VN FR01\f Tt-lE VERTEX OF j\NY
CONE TO THE CENTER OF ITS Bi\SE IS PERPENDICULI\R TO
THE BASE, THEN THE STRAIGHT LINES DRf\ \VN FROJ\I ITS
VERTEX TO THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF ITS BJ-\SE f\RE EQU.r\L.
AND THE 1fULTIPLICATION OF (1) ONE OF THE LINES
DRAWN FR01\f ITS VERTEX TO CIRCU1\JFERENCE OF ITS
BASE BY (2) ONE HALF THE CIRCU1tIFERENCE OF ITS BASE
IS EQUAL TO THE AREA OF THE SURF.t\.CE OF THE CONE,
THAT IS, ITS SURFACE BETWEEN THE VERTEX AND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE OF ITS BASE.
For example, let there be a cone ABGD with vertex A [see Fig. 43].
And let the circle containing its base be circle BGD with point E as
u
A A
K T Z
[Reconstructed] Fig. 43 [As given in MS P]
Note: The figure is slightly different in the Arabic text, but it is tlle same
kind of drawing.
'-'-'w j
*as in printed text, but one would
expect &)) (In the cllSe of et'try right
cone, the product of a line j'oining its vertex
and any assigned point on the circumference
of its base and one half of the circumferlnce
the base equals the area of the cone.)
14 circulus ont. Ar.
2.94 The Verba ftlioruln
15 eius-sit punctum E. Et linea AB que protrahitur ex puncto A ad E,
quod est centrum basis eius, sit perpendicularis super superficiem
circuli BGD. Et propter illud linee que protrahuntur ex puncto A
secundum rectitudinem ad lineam continentem circulum BGD erunt
equales. Et protraham ex eo lineam unam, que sit linea AB. DicD
20 ergo quod multiplicatio linee AB in medietatem linee continentis
circulum BCD est embadum superficiei piramidis .A.4BCD, que ele-
vatur ex circulo BCD ad punctum A; quod sic demonstratur.
Si non fuerit ita, tunc sit multiplicatio linee AB in quantitatem
longiorem aut breviorem medietate circumferentie circuli BCD ipsum
embadum piramidis ABGD. Sit ergo in primis multiplicatio eius in
quantitatem que sit longior medietate circuli BCD ipsum embadum
piramidis Et sit quantitas UZ. Et duplum UZ est longius
circulo BGD. Ergo faciam super circulum BGD figuram habentem
latera et angulos equales continentem ipsum. Et sint latera eius agre-
30 gata duplo linee UZ, que sit figura HTK. Et protraham lineas
..:4T, .4K. Et protraham iterum duas lineas AG, A.D, que sint
equales et equales linee AB. Ergo manifestum est quod linee ..:4B,
..:4D, ... 4G cadunt orthogonaliter super lineas HT, KT, (KH) prop-
terea quod axis piramidis qui egreditur ex puncto capitis eius ad cen-
35 trum circuli basis eius est perpendicularis super superficiem basis eius.
c. Tunc linee que protrahuntur ex punctis / B, C, D ad centrum erigun-
tU! super lineas HT, TK, KHorthogonaliter, quoniam sunt contingen-
tes circulum. Et ostendam quod multiplicatio unius linearum AB,
A C, ADin medietatem omnium linearumHT, TK, HKest embadum
40 superficiei corporis ATHK. Sed embadum superficiei corporis AHTK
est maius embado superficiei piramidis columpne super quam est
./4BGD, quoniam ipsum continet illude Et medietas omniumlaterum
figure HTK est brevior linea UZ. Et iam fuit multiplicatio linee ABin
17 ex: a Znl
27 U-: 11- H hie ct ubiqllc in hae proposi-
tione I langior H
3I -K: -N 1-1 hie et IfbiqllC in haepropositione
33 cadunt: cadent Znl / (HK) ?Z,I/
I 5 punctum 0111. Ar.
15-16 Et linea ... sit: - 0 I -
its o.","is is _4E Jl,hich is)
34 qui P que /-1 quod Ma
37 de HT, TK ser. P '''g. et ZIII IIlg. in alia,
I-IK, TK / KI-I: I-IK Z1Il
41 columpne .l-lhfa columne PZUJ
42 ABGD: BGD /-1 I Et: et est H
17 circuli BGD: ll'Li .kJ.,.;.l1
(0.( the base, so Iba! toe cone is a rigbt cone)
of the BanG rvIiisa 295
its center. i\nd let line drawn frorn point to the ccntc.r of its
base, be perpendicular to the surface of circle BG'D. i\ccordingly, the
straight lines drawn from point ... to the circumference of circle BCD
\\rill be equal. .t\nd I sllall draw from it (i.c., one [such] line, namely
line _4B. I say, therefore, that the multiplication of line by 1/2 the
circumference of circle .BG.D is equal to t11e surface area of cone J:/IBG'D,
i.e., to the surface area extending from [the circumference of] circle BGD
to point A
Demonstration: If it is not so, then let the multiplication of line L4B
by a quantity greater or less than 1/2 the circumference of circle BGD
be equal to the area of cone 4-4BG'D. In the first place let the multiplication
of it by a quantity greater than 1/2 the circumference BGD be equal to
the area of cone ABGD. Let that [greater] quantity be UZ. And 2 UZ >
circum BGD. Therefore, I shall construct on circle BGD a regular polygon
containing it. Let its perimeter be less than 2 UZ. This polygon is HTK.
Then I shall draw lines AH, AT, and AK. And, further, I shall draw two
lines, AG and AD, equal to each other and equal to line AB. It has
become evident, therefore, that lines AB, AD, AG fall perpendicularly
on lines HT, KT, and KH, since the axis of the cone from its vertex to
the center of its base is perpendicular to the surface of its base. Then the
lines drawn from points B, G, D to the center are perpendicular to lines
HT, TK, and KH, since these lines are tangent to the circle. And I shall
demonstrate that the multiplication of (1) one of the lines AB, AG, AD
by (2.) one half of the sum of lines HT, TK, HKis equal to the surface area
of body ATHK. But the surface area of body AHTKis greater than the
surface area of cone ABGD, since the one contains the other. Now 1/2
the perimeter of polygon HTK is less than line UZ. But the multiplication
17- 19 Et ....AB: - , - J-..j.J
(..r4nJ 811 join AB)
19-%0 Dico... linee AB: 1-
(And SD th6 prodNct of AB...)
21-Z2 ABGD demonsttatur om. Ar.
tunc ABGD om. Ar.
25 eius: - I - (AB)
26-
1
7 BGD ABGD 0111. Ar.
J.7-28 Etz BGDI om. Ar.
30 porI HTK mltJ. Ar. J..Ai .;I.LII ,-",L.:J.J
-.)-[.-,--,-
(Aat/ kt it tOllGh tIN arGI6 at poinis B, G,
D)
33 (KH) is in the Arabic text: - L. !1 -
34 axis .... eius: - 0 , - (AB)
35 basis eius: .) - i;'.3 (of circle BGD)
36 B, G, D: (of tangenry)
37 lineas .... KH: ':/' (the sides)
37-38 quoniam... circulum 011/. Ar.
3
8
Et ostendam quod:
(And accydingty will... be)
3
8
-39 unius AD: - '"":" , - (AB)
39 linearum HK: (of the sides)
40-42. ATHK illud 0111. Ar.
43 HTK 0111. Ar.
296 The Verba jiliorUIJI
lineam UZ ipsum embadum piramidis columpne. Et illud quod egre-
45 ditur ex conclusione est quod multiplicatio linee AB in id quod est
brevius linea UZ est maior superficie piramidis columpne. Hoc est
contrarium; ergo non est possibile ut multiplicatio linee ABin lineam
que sit longior medietate circuli BGD sit embadum piramidis ABGD.
Amplius ponam lineam UZ breviorem medietate circuli BGD, si
50 fuerit illud possibile. Ergo multiplicatio linee ABin lineam UZest em-
badum superficiei piramidis ABGD. Sedlinea UZest brevior medietate
circumferentie circuli BGD. Ergo multiplicatio AB in medietatenl
circuli BGD est maior embado superficieipiramidis ABGD. Sit ergo
illud ipsum embadum piramidis cuius basis est circulus AIL et caput
55 eius punctum A. Cum ergo het in circulo .NIL hgura habens latera et
angulos equales non contingens circulum BGD, et protrahantur ex
extremitatibus laterum huius figure linee ad punctum A, et protra-
hantur superficies triangulorum, erit embadum superficiei corporis
cuius basis est figura habens latera facta in circulo AIL et cuius caput
60 est punctum A minus embado superficiei piramidis cuius basis est
circulus ilfL et cuius caput est A, quoniam piramis continet ipsum.
Sed multiplicatio unius linearum que protrahuntur ex puncto A ad
medietates laterun1 figure facte super circulum ML in meclietatem
omnium laterum figure facte in circulo j11L est embadum superficiei
65 corporis cuius basis est figura facta in circulo A1L et cuius caput est
punctum A. Et linea que protrahitur ex puncto A ad medium unius-
cuiusque laterum huius figure facte in circulo illL est longior _AB.
Et meclietas omnium laterum figure facte est longior medietate circuli
45 P / AB: AD 1-] / est
011/. H
46 est
2
HMaZnl onI. P
49-5 0 de ponam... possibile scr. ]:JZ,IJ "Ig.
(et add. I-JAtlaR* al1te ponam): in (0111.
alio (0111. J-IllJaR), ponam
multiplicationem eius breviorem si est
possibile. Ergo (add. linea) erit.
* 111aR put the phrase in a box to
indicate, I suppose, that it canle from
a n1arginal note.))
50 fuerit illud Ir. 1-1 / UZ: Ntl ]-1
5I pyramis i-I
2 circunlferentie '1Ig. ]J, text OIJI.
llfa/circumferentie circuli Ir. Z,II
53 pyranlis /-1
55 in circulo 0111. I-J / figura Z,JIH figum P
figuram AJa
56 protrahentur Z,J/
57 linee P linea J-lilla / ad onl. H
57-58 protrahantur P protrahentur ZIIIH
protrahuntur ilIa
60 piralnis I-J
62 puncto 0111. I-I / ad: et /-1
63-64 de super ... laterum ser. PZ,J/ IJlg.
(et add. ante super): in (Olil. lvIaR)
alio (0111. llIaR), in circulo in n1edieta-
tern (-01 OJII. olllnium laterum
eius. (*ilIal? put the phrase in a box to
indicate, I suppose, that it calne fronl
a Inarginal note.)
66 punctUI11 011/ .!-1/ l1rotrahatur i-I
of the BanG !Vllisa 297
of line ..4B by line was earlier [takeJ] as] tl1e area of the cone. i\nd tIle
inference fronl the conclusion is that the tTIultiplication of IUle _AB by a
quantity less than [IZ is greater tllatl tIle surface of the cone. 'This is a
contradiction. Hence, it is not possible that the multiplication of lil1e L--1 B
by a line greater tllall 1/2 the circumference BGD is equal to the area of
cone ABG'D.
Further, I shall posit line [7Z to beless than 1/2 the circumference BGD, if
that is possible. Hence, the multiplication ofline A Bbyline UZis equal to the
surface of cone ABGD. But line UZ < 1/2 circum BGD. I-Ience, the mul-
tiplication of AB by 1/2 the circumference BCD is greater than the surface
area of cone ABGD. Hence let this [product] be the area of a cone
whose base is circle ML and whose vertex is point A. When a regular poly-
gon is inscribed in circle ML-but not touching circle BG'D-and when
lines are drawn to point A from the extremities of the sides of this polygon
and [thus] the surfaces of the triangles [formed by these lines and the sides
of the polygon] are produced, then the surface area of the body whose
base is the polygon inscribed in circle Jt;/L and whose vertex is point A
is less than the surface area of the cone whose base is circle AIL and whose
vertex is point A, since the cone contains it. But the multiplication of (1)
one of the lines drawn from point A to the middle points of the sides of
the polygon inscribed in.-circle ML by (2) 1/2 the perimeter of the polygon
inscribed in circle ML is equal to the surface area of the body whose base
is the polygon inscribed in circle ML and whose vertex is point A. And
the line drawn from point A to the middle of anyone of the sides of the
polygon inscribed in circle ML is greater than AB. Further, 1/2. the
perimeter of the polygon is greater than 1/2 the circumference BGD.
44-48 Et ...ABGD: II .;:.J:.-.u dW
JA
(And so the area of the cone is greater than
that by which it is contained. This is con-
tradictory.)
49-50 BGD... possibile:.J (And)
'I ABGD 0111. Ar.
J I-5 2 linea .... Ergo 0111. Ar.
'3 circuli om. Ar. / est .. piramidis :
&-J - - 4:we
(is IIJ"IlI to something greater than it, i.e.,
/0 the slIrfacl of a cone)
'7 extremitatibus ... figure: o4,!Jj (itl angles)
'7-,8 et triangulorum 01lJ. Ar.
59-60 cuius ... .A: (new)
61 et ... ipsum om. Ar.
63 medietates: (the middle of one) !
facte ... ML: (. y -
(which does not touch circle BGD)
64 omnium... ML: (of its sides)
...
65-66 corporis ...
...
67 huius ... ML om. Ar. / AB: - y , -lu:-
(line AB)
68 omnium OfIJ. Ar. / faeteo111. Ar.! circuli:
(of the circumference of the circle)
The Verba jiliorufJJ
BGD. Ergo multiplicatio linee ABin medietatemcircumferentie BGD
70 est brevior multum embado superficiei piramidis cuius basis est cir-
culus ML. Et iam fnit multiplicatio AB in medietatem circuli BGD
ipsum embadum superficiei piramidis cuius basis est circulus illL et
cuius caput est punctum A. Et superficies huius piramidis est maior
superficie corporis habentis superficies. Hoc vero est contrarium. Ergo
multiplicatio / linee ABin medietatem circumferentie circuli BGD est
76 embadum superficiei piramidis ABGD. Et illud est quod declarare
voluimus.
[x.] OMNIS SUPERFICIES CUM ABSCIDIT QUAMLIBET
PIRAMIDEM COLUMPNE, CUIUS BASIS EST CIRCULUS, ET
EST EQUIDISTANS BASI EIUS, TUNC AMBARUM SECTIO
C01\1MUNIS EST CIRCULUS. ET SI PROTRAHATUR EX C1\-
5 PITE PlRA:rvUDIS LINEA AD CENTRUM Br\SIS EIUS, TUNC
IPSA TRANSIT SUPER CENTRUM CIRCULI QUI EST SECTIO
C01\I1\1UNIS.
Verbi gratia, sit piramis ABGD, cuius caput sit A et cuius basis
sit circulus BGD, et ipsius centrum E [Fig. 44]. Et secet earn super-
10 ficies equidistans superficiei circuli BGD, et fiat sectio earum com-
munis superficies UTZ, et protrahatur ex puncto A linea ad E, et
70 est) H Z'H supra om. PA1a
71 de circuli ser. P mg. (et Zm supra ill/inea
J2) in alio, linee
72 ipsum: ipsum est H
73 cuius caput: caput eius H
medietatem ZnJHMa medietate P /
circuli Z,nP om. 1-1 circulum R
Ma
76 declarare: demonstrare H
69-74 Ergo ... superficies: J,.J.r.L'
C.la.... .:r - J i - Js.li <.S]I .;:.l:.-.U
41;.1,) <.SlH
(A/Id so the area of the COlle lJJhose base is
AIL is slI/oller thall the area of the body
JJ'hirh is inside it.)
circumferentie 0/1/. Ar.
76 declarare OHI. Ar.
1-7 omnis .... communis: -,:..l.:.-.
I [X]: 12 R/g. MaR
2 piramidis H / columpne ZmHJl1a
columne P
3, 10 equedistans H hie et ubiql/e
3 ambarum Z,lJp amborum HMa
linea: ex linea H
8-34 Verbi .... eius OHJ. S
I I protraham H / linea: lineam H / ad:
atH
j!J.. & ..li.J ;;,,)
:.c ;;,,)
(71Je any cone, lJJhose
base is 0 circle, ond a plane parallel to the
base is a circle, and the axis passes throllgh
its cell/er.)
8 ABGD OHI...4r.
9-10 Et ... BGD 011/ .r1r.
10 earunl oln.../Jr.
I I et) .. E:- il' - (..4ntl[ils] axis AB)
of the BanG !Vrlisa 299
the nlultiplication c.f line _./1.B by 1/2 tile circumference BG_D
is much less than tIle surface area of the COl1e whose 11ase is circle
But the multiplication of by 1/2 the circunncrence .BG.D was [taken
as equal to] the surface area of tile cone wllosc base is circle 11/L and
\\rhose vertex is point ./1. . .r\nd [yet] the stlrface of this cone is greater than
the surface of th.e body having [triangular] surfaces. Tllis indeed is a
contradiction. Therefore, the multiplication of line by 1/2 the cir-
cumference of circle BGD is eqtlal to the surface area of cone ABGD.
i\nd this is what we wished to show.
[x.] IN THE CASE OF EVERY [PLJ\NE] SURFi\CE WHICH
CUTS ANY CONE WHOSE Bl\SE IS .A CIRCLE-THE SURFACE
BEING PARi\LLEL TO THAT BASE-THE C01JIMON SECTION
[OF THE CUTTING SURFr\CE AND TI-IE CONE] IS r\ CIRCLE.
j\ND IF r\ LINE IS PROTRACTED FR01'f THE VERTEX OF TI-IE
CONE TO THE CENTER OF ITS BASE, THEN THAT LINE WILL
PASS THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE WHICH IS
THE COMMON SECTION.
For example, let there be a cone ABGD, whose vertex is A and whose
base is circle BGD with center E [see Fig. 44]. And let a surface parallel
to the surface of circle BGD cut the cone. Let their common section be
UTZ. And let a line be protracted from point A to E, passing through
A
o
[Reconstructed]
Fig. 44
D
[As given in Arabic
texts and in MS P]
3
00
The Verba ftliorum
penetret linea superficiem UTZ super punctum H. Dico ergo quo.cl
linea UTZ continet circulum cuius centrum est punctum H, quod SIC
demonstratur.
15 Signabo super circulum BGD duo puncta B, G, et ponam arcum
BC minorem semicirculo, et protraham duas lineas, BB, BC, et duas
lineas BA, AG, et estimabo duas superficies duorum triangulorum
BAE, CAEprotractas. Ergo secat triangulus BAEsuperficiemBGD
super lineam BE et secat superficiem UTZ super lineam HU. Ergo
20 due linee HU, BB sunt equidistantes, sicut narravit Euclides, et simi-
liter due linee BC, HZ iterum sunt equidistantes. Et protraham iterum
duas lineas BC, UZ. Ergo manifestum est quod utreque sunt equidis-
tantes, propterea quod BC est sectio communis superficiei trianguli
BAG et superficiei BGD, et linea UZ est sectio communis superficiei
25 trianguli BAC et superficiei UTZ. Ergo triangulus BEG habet latera
equidistantia triangulo UHZ. Ergo anguli amborum sunt equales et
latera utrorumque sunt proportionalia. Ergo proportio BE ad EC
est sicut proportio UHad HZ. Sed BEest equalis GE. Ergo due linee
UH, HZ sunt equales. Et per huiusmocli clispositionem scitur quod
go omnis linea egrediens ex puncto Had quemlibet locum exitus circum-
ferentie circuli UTZ est equalis unicuique duarum linearum UH, HZ.
Ergo oportet ut sit linea UTZ circumferentia circuli et punctum H
centrum circuli. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus. Et hec est forn1a
elUS.
12 superficies H
I 8 BA9E P / protractis H
20-2 I sicut... equidistantes mg. P, Z,JI
HMa
25 superficies H
26 equedistancia H
12 UTZ: (sectional)
12-14 Dico ... demonstratur OHI. Ar.
I 5 circulum 0111. Ar.
16 cl uas Iineas OIJI. _4r.
16-17et2... AG: -(.,-:",-1(.-1,-:",-
(B/I, C./1, BC) w
1
7-
2
5et .... UTZ: -., 1-
- (.., 1- t-JI :r - e
J
-
- - ( '-:" I - - f) e
j
-
c. jJ - .... (1 -jJ
28 Sed OfJI. J-I
29 UH, HZ ]:JMaZ,J/ UH et HZ R ZH,
HN 1-1
32 UTZ: NTZ et J-I / et: ad H
33-34 quod .... eius: propositum H
*- - in the printed text. **
in the printed text. (And triangle _-4BE
CIIts the [COIJIIJIOI1] sectional slIrface in [COIJJ-
I}JOII] sectional [line] U1-1 andtriangle /1G
[cllls thal sllI./ace] ill [COIJIIJ/on] secliol1al
[line] Zl-I and triallgle _4BG [Cllls it] ill
reOIJIIJIOII] sectional [line] UZ and [so] tri-
allgle UZI-I is forJ)/ed.)
25 -27 Ergo .... proportionalia: 0.r(:jJ
l: '-:'" 0 l:)""';''J'
of the BanG i\[l'isa 3 I
surface UTZ at point H. I say, therefore, that line UTZ is the circumference
of a circle whose center is point H.
Demonstration: I shall mark two points .B ancl C' on circle BCD and
I shall assume that arc BC is less than a semicircle. Further, I sllall draw
t\\-o lines Bli and EG" and t\VO [more] li11es, B.. and ..c4G". j-\nd [thus]
I shall consider the t\\'O surfaces of the two triangles, .B and
as drawn. Therefore, let 6 B/-1E cut surface BCD in line BE and surface
[TTZ in line HU. Therefore, the two lines HU, BB are parallel, as Euclid
explained. And similarly the two lil1es BC and HZ are also parallel. j\nd
I shall draw the two lines BC, UZ. Therefore, it is evident that they are
parallel, since line BC is the common section of the surface of 6 B..:4G
and the surface of BGD, and line UZ is the common section of the surface
of BA'4C and surface UTZ. Therefore, L. BEG has sides parallel to
[those of] 6 UHZ. Therefore, the angles of the one are equal to the
angles of the other, and the sides of the one are proportional to the sides
of the other. Therefore, BB/BC == UH/HZ. But BE == GE. Therefore,
[lH == HZ. And from a disposition of this kind it is known that every
line going out from point H to any place on the circumference* of circle
UTZ is equal to each of the two lines UH, HZ. Therefore, it is necessary
that line UTZ is the circumference of a circle and point H is the center of
the circle. And this is what we wished to show. This is its form [Fig. 44].
* See Commentary, Proposition X, lines 30-3 I.
(A1IIl ils .ritles are parallel to the sides of
trifl1lgu EBG, 6ach to thl onefacing it. And
Jt) they the two triangles are .similar.)
28 due linee 0 Ar.
19 Et .... quod: .J (Anti)
30-3 1 quemlibet .... HZ: - .J., j.J -
(the circumference UZT)
3z Ergo... circumferentia :
(And so UZT)
33 declarare OfIJ. Ar.
33-34 Et .... eius om. Ar.
The Verba jiliorunJ
[XI.] IN OMNI PORTIONE PIRAMIDIS COLUMPNE, CUILTS
BASIS EST CIRCULUS ET CUIUS SUPERIUS EST CIRCULUS
ET CUIUS BASIS SUPERFICIES EQUIDISTAT SUPERFICIEI
SUPERIORIS EIDS ET LINEA QUE EGREDITUR EX CENTRO
5 BASIS EIDS AD CENTRUM SUPERFICIEI SUPERIORIS EIUS
EST PERPENDICULARIS SUPER DUAS SUPERFICIES, TUNC
SI PROTRAHANTUR IN Br\SI EIUS ET IN CIRCULO QUI EST
IN SUPERIORE EIUS DUO DIAMETRI EQUIDISTANTES, ET
CONTINUATUR QUOD ESTINTERDUAS EXTREMINT.t\TES
C.2 DUARU1\1 Dlr\METRO/RU11 PER DUAS LINEAS, ERIT 1Il1L-
II TIPLICATIO UNIUSDUARUM LINEARUMIN MEDIETI\TE}\/I
CIRCU1\1FERENTIE CIRCULI BASIS EIUS ET IN MEDIETA-
TEM LINEE CONTINENTIS SUPERIUS EIUS El\IB\-
DU1\1 QUOD ELEV.t\TUR EX BASI EIUS ET PERVENIT AD
15 SUPERIUS PORTIONIS SECUNDUlvI RECTITUDINEi\1.
\Terbi gratia, sit basis portionis piramidis columne UTZBGD cir-
culus UTZ [Fig. 45]. Et eius superius sit circulus BGD. Et sit 1111ea
EH, que continuat quod est inter duo centra, perpenclicularis super
superflciem BCD et super superflciem TZU. Et protrahantur in duo-
20 bus circulis BGD, UTZ due linee BD, UZ equiclistantes. Et conti-
nuetur quod est inter duas extremitates earum cum duabus lineis BU,
I [XI]: 13 nlg. J.VfaR
z superius: superficies H
3 equedistat /-1
4 ex: a S
6 superficies: lineas ZIJI
7 protrahantur ZIIIPA1a protrahatur J-I
protrahuntur S / et 0111. /-1
1-15 In.... rectitudinem: d
0 ..(J.:-.
..,
0 01 )ai
..,
.1>-\ &
J . .l:-11
(In fl,lC')' scgl"cnt of a right cone betu'eel1 111
1
0
parallel circles lJ
J
hen t}J'O parallel dia/Jlelers
are dralvn in these circles and the extre/Jlities
of thelJI the diameters)) are joined I?J'
111'0 opposite li11es, tben the IIJllltiplicatio1l of
olle of the lu)o li11es 0' the haltJes the
circuniferences of the 111'0 circles is eqllal to
10 duarum: duorum Ala
12 circumferentie OlJI. ZfJl / circuli O/JI. 5
16-24 sit .... quod: dico quod antece-
dente posito sicud patet in figura 5
16 U-: N- H hic et IIbiqlle
20-2 I continuentur H
the area of the seglJJclJt the cOlle.)
16 UTZBGD: - j ..b J (. - (BGLT1Z)
16, 17 circulus OIJI ....4r.
17
eius
superius: .kJ.rl' j; jl
(r111d the other [circle] lJlhich is Ilear the top
of the cone.)
17-1 9 Et
2
TZU: L. .;yJ.' d - L. - J
YJ
Efl is [that part] the axis 11
,
bi(o
falls lJetJJ,IeCIJ thelll and is perpendicular to
the t11'O circle.r.)
19-20 in .... U'fZ 01)/ ./-lr.
2 I duabus linejs 0111. _/lr.
of the Banii MGsa 303
[XI.] OF J\ \\7HERl:
TJ-IE Bl\SE IS .1\ CIRCLE l\ND TI-IE UPPER SURF.t\CE]
IS j\ CIRCI.. E i\ND IS PJ\RJ\LLEL
TO ITS UPPER SURF.i\CE J\ND f\ DRr\\XTN FROi\l TT-lE
CENTER OF ITS Bl\SE TO THE CENTEI{ OF l"rS UPPER SU.R-
Fi\CE IS TO BOTH SURf'i\CES, IF r\
IN ITS Bi\SE IS DR1\\XIN P-,\R1\LIJEL TO j\
TER IN THE UPPER CIRCLE AND THE T\VO LINES CONNECT-
ING THE PAIRS OF EXTRElvfITIES OF T.HE TWO
J\RE DRAWN, THE MULTIPLIC1\TION OF ONE OF THE T\VO
LINES [OR SLANT HEIGHTS CONNECTING THE EXTREl\JITIES
OF THE TWO DIA1\JETERS] BY THE SUM OF 1/2 THE
FERENCE OF ITS BASE CIRCLE AND 1/2 THE CIRCUMFERENCE
OF ITS UPPER CIRCLE IS EQUAL TO THE SURFi\CE AREA
[THAT IS, LATERAL AREA] OF THE SEGj\;IENT BETWEEN ITS
BASE CIRCLE AND THE UPPER CIRCLE.
For example, let circle UTZ be the base of cone segment UTZBGD
[see Fig. 45]. Let circle BGD be its upper surface. And let line EHwhich
joins the two centers be perpendicular to surface BGD as well as to
surface TZU. In the two circles BGD and UTZ let two parallel lines BD
and UZ be drawn. Let their extremities be connected by two lines BU
A
A
u .............-----,z
T
[Reconstructed]
Fig. 45
Z t-----.60-----' U
T
[As given in MS P]
* I use the more general expression expression in Proposition XIII also in-
"segment of a cone" instead of cll}des a cone itself.
of a cone" because the authors' use of this
34 The Verba jilioruflJ
DZ que sunt equales, propterea quod linea EH iam secuit unam-
quamque duarum linearum BD, UZ in duo media, et est orthogona-
liter erecta super unamquamque earUffi. Dico ergo quod multiplicatio
25 linee EU in medietatem circumferentie circuli BGD et in medietatem
circuli UTZ est embadum superficiei portionis piramidis que elevatur
ex circulo UTZ et pervenit ad circulum BGD, cuius hec est demon-
stratio.
Complebo piramidem ATUZ. Et notuln est quod linea EHquando
30 extenditur secundum rectitudinem transibit super punctum A. Propter
illud quod ostendimus quod linea que egreditur ex puncto A ad
punctum H transit per punctumE, ergo linea AHegreditur ex capite
piramidis ad centrum basis eius et cadit perpendicularis super basim.
Ergo multiplicatio linee AUin medietatem circuli UTZ est embadum
35 superficiei piramidis AUTZ. Et multiplicatio linee AB in medietatem
circuli BCD est embadum superficiei portionis piramidis super quam
signatum est ~ B G D Sed multiplicatio AV in medietatem circuli
[ITZ est sicut multiplicatio AB in medietatem circuli UTZ et BU in
meclietatenl circuli UTZ. Verum multiplicatio AB in meclietatem cir-
40 culi [TTZ est sicut multiplicatio ...4B in meclietatem circuli BeD et
in superfluum medietatis circuli UTZ super medietatem circuli BGD.
Verum multiplicatio AB per medietatem circuli BCD est embadum
superflciei piramiclis _ABeD. Ergo remanet nlultiplicatio AB in su-
perfluitatem medietatis circuli UTZ super medietatem circuli BeD,
45 et multiplicatio BUin medietatem circuli UTZ, et est embadum super-
ficiei portionis piramidis super quam sigl1ate sunt BeDUTZ. Et illud
quod fit ex multiplicatione linee ...riB in superfluitatem medietatis cir-
culi [ITZ super medietatem circuli BCD est equale nlultiplicationi
linee BU in medietatem circuli BG'D, propterea quod proportio linee
50 _,4B ad medietatem circuli BGD est sicut proportio BU ad super-
fluitatem medietatis circuli UTZ slll)er medietatem circllli BG'D.
27-96 cuius .... eius 0111. S
30 extenditur 1-1RZI/I(?) extendetur P ex-
stenditur 1l1a
31-3 2 ex ... egreditur 0111. /-1
32 transil?!t jJ
33 perpendiculariter (?) 1-1
39 Verum PZ,,, vera J-f
39-4
0
Verum... UTZ 0111. Ala
40 UTZ... in PZ,,, BGD est in 1-1
BCiO et R
4 1-43 UTZ.... piramidis ilIa IIIg.. ]J I I ~ g
Z"I 0111. I-I
43 ABGD 11 AOBG PZIIJlvla I AB: AD H
45 et
2
0111. J-I
46 ante portionis add. P et sed onl. Z,JlHi11a
I signati I-I
47-48 post circuli i/lser. H lineas /2-70
("Quod .... circuli")
48 est equalc: et equalis /-1
50 BGD: AJ3GD l!
51 circuli ( ... 111edietatCI11 0111. /-1
of the BanG !vfusa 305
alld LIZ. These two lines are equal since line LJ-! bisects each of the two
lines BD and UZ and is perpcndiclllar to both of tllcm. I say, therefore,
tllat BL,"'" (1/2 circunl BG'D + 1/2 CirCU1TI LTTZ) === surf area cone seg
L"lZBG"D.
Denlonstration: I shall complete the COl1e ./JTUZ. r\nd it is known that
line EH, wllen extended rectilinearly, will pass through point A. Since
",,-e show that the line going out Eronl point /1 to point H passes throllgh
point E, therefore line ..:/.iH goes out from the vertex of the cone to the
center of its base and is perpendicular to tIle base.
Therefore,
r\nd
AU 1/2 circum UTZ = surf area cone AUTZ.
A.B 1/2 circum BGD = surf area cone
and
But
...qV 1/2 circumUTZ=[(AB 1/2 circumUTZ) +(BU 1/2 circumUTZ)].
Now.
AB 1/2 circum UTZ = AB [1/2 circum BGD + (1/2 circum UTZ
- 1/2 circum BGD)]
AB 1/2 circum BGD = surf area cone ABGD.
Therefore [I],
(1/2 circum UTZ - 1/2 circum BGD) +(BU 1/2 circum UTZ)]
= surf area cone seg BGDUTZ.
And [so]
[_/lB (1/2 circum UTZ - 1/2 circum BGD)] = BU 1/2 circum BGD,
line AB line BU
since 1/2 circum BGD = (1/2 circum UTZ---I-/-2-c-ir-c-u-m-B-G-D-)
22-24 que earum om. Ar.
26-28 que demonstratio om. Ar.
29 ATUZ: J' (up to the vertex A)
29-;0 Et ....A: - JI -0 L.. -
-.,)j 'YJ-
(_41ld we ex/e"d HE up to A and similarlY
llB, ZD [also liP to A].)
3
0
-33 Propter .... basim om. Ar.
34 Ergo: cJ' ,';""J (And it is known that)
35 (of/he whole)
36-37 super ...
est
0111. Ar._
37 po.If ABGD aJJ. Ar. .r:-)" j&. J.-.d.J
W&AJ4 J;.l:...J-I e.U' JA
(ANI /h1 IXCISS of 'he first oiler the second
is IhI 18" tJ/ fhl SlglI/ml of thl tone.)
37-43 Sed....ABGD om. Ar.
43 Ergo remanet:.JA (And that is)
The "that" refers to the "area of the
segment of the cone"-noted in the
variant given after ABGD in line 37.))
45-46 et ... BGDUTZ om. Ar. But see
variant for line 43.))
49-5 I proportio .... BGD: - JI - y'
JI -.,) <: y - ;;1.,) -.J Y
j&. - j .1. .J - ;}I.,) J.-.ai
- -I
-.,) <: Y - OJ")
*corrected from .1. .J)) (ABIBU = 1
BGD I [I UTZ -i BGD]) Note: the
rearrangement of the proportion in the
Gerard translation.))
55
75
306 The Verba ftliorum
[Quod proportio linee AB ad medietatem circuli BGD sit sicut
proportio linee BU ad superfluum medietatis circuli UTZ super me-
dietatem circuli BGD, sic proba. Quia duo trianguli ABE, AUH
sunt similes, igitur proportio AB ad BE est sicut proportio AU ad
UH et proportio AB ad BD est sicut proportio AU ad HZ. Ergo
ex 24 quinti libri Euclidis est proportio A.B ad BD sicut proportio
AU ad UZ. Sed proportio BD ad lineam circumductam BCD est
sicut proportio UZ ad lineam circumductam UTZ. Ergo secundum
60 equalitatem erit proportio AB ad lineam circumductam BCD sicut
proportio ~ U ad linean1 circumductam UTZ. Ergo proportio linee
AB ad medietatem circumferentie circuli BCD sicut proportio AU
ad n1edietatem circun1ferentie circuli UTZ, et hoc per impossibile pro-
batur ex 24 quinti libri Euclidis. Sed cum he sint due quantitates,
65 scilicet linea ..;,4[,7 et n1edietas ci rculi UTZ, et minuemus ex eis duas
quantitates, scilicet lineam AB et meclietatem circuli BGD, et est
proportio diminute ad diminutam sicut totius ad totum, ergo est pro-
portio reliqui, quod est BU, ad reliquum, quod est superfluum medie-
tatis circuli LTTZ super medietatem circuli BGD, sicut proportio totius
70 ad totum et sicut proportio AB ad n1edietatem circuli BGD. Et hoc
est quod declarare voluimus.]
Ergo multiplicatio linee AB in superfluum medietatis circuli UTZ
super meclietatem circuli BGD est sicut multiplicatio BU in medie-
tatem circuli I BGD. Ergo multiplicatio linee BU in medietatem cir-
culi UTZ et in medietatem circuli BGD est embadum superficiei por-
tiams piramiclis super quam sunt BGD, UTZ. Et illud est quod de-
clarare valuimus.
60r
c. I
52-54 Quod BGD OHI .ilIa
52-71 Quod voluimus II/g. P et Z,I/
0111. bic sed add. fol. 77r i11 fine trac/allls
AIJJeli de proporlio11e (Cl tJar. linearllnJ
47-4
8
, 54-7
1
)
52 AB: AD J-I
53 ad: sicut 1-/
54-71 sic .... voluitTIUS add. IJlg. ilIa et R ifJ
texl. (C./: var. linear"'JI 52-7 1)
54 sic proba PZ/I/ sic probat i1Ja quod
sic probatur I-I / trianguli: anguli 1-/ I
ABE, AUI-I: ABH, AUE ZIII (Z,JI
Ir. 1-1 et B Jlbiqtle in lin. /2-/6)
56 ED i11aH EB P I est OHI. /-1
56-57 I-IZ.... ad his H
58 UZ: TZN ~
58-59 est sicut Ire I-I
63-64 probatur Hilfa proba PZ,JI
65 et
Z
011/. ~
67 diminutan1 (?)P, ZIJJAIa din1inutum
I-J
70-7 I Et ... voluimus 0111. 1-/
72 in 011/. 1-1
76-77 declarare: de010nstrare I-J
-------------
52-76 Quod .... BGD, UTZ 0111. rlr. 76-77 declarare OlJl ...4,..
of the Banii Mlisa
line ./lB lirie .BLT
*[Prove that . BG'D === (/. [112 I BGD)
1/2 Clrcum I 2 ClrCU1TI _0 - I J1. Clrcum
as follows: Since L\ BE' is similar to ..iLl [/1-/, therefore /-lBIBE =
/1LTjLlH and ..l-IB/hD = L-1UjHZ. by V.24 of the book of
Euclid, = ./1UjUZ. But BDjcircum BGD = UZjcircum UTZ.
Therefore, by equality, AB/circum BGD = AUjcircum UTZ. Hence,
line AB line /lU Thi cl b cl .
/
. BGD /. UTZ S IS prove y re uctlon to
I Z Clrcum 1 2 Clrcum
absurdity from V.24 of the book of But since these are two
quantities, i.e., line AUand 1/2 circumference UTZ, and we subtract from
them two quantities, that is, line AB and 1/2 circumference BGD,
and the ratio of remainder to remainder is as the ratio of whole to whole,
therefore the ratio of [one] remainder, i.e., BU, to the [other) remainder,
i.e., (1/2 circum UTZ - 1/2 circum BGD), is as the ratio of whole to
whole, i.e., as the ratio of AB to 1/2 circumference BGD. .t\nd this is
what we wished to show.]
Therefore [2],
(1/2 circum UTZ - 1/2 circum BGD) = EU 1/2 circum BGD.
Hence [if formula 2 is substituted in formula I],
BV (1/2 circumUTZ + 1/2circumBGD) = surfareaconeseg BGDUTZ.
And this is what we wished to show.
See Commentary, Proposition XI, lines '2.-71, for the material in brackets.
80
8S
90
95
308 The Verba filiorulH
lam ergo scitur ex eo quod narravimus quod si due linee UB, BA
fuerint equales quocunque modo fuerit earum applicatio, scilicet se-
cundum rectitudinem aut non secundum rectitudinem, tunc multi-
plicatio unius earum in medietatem circuli UTZ et in circulum BGD
est embadum superficiei corporis cuius caput est punctum A et cuius
basis est superficies UTZ. Et hine scitur quod si fuerint portiones
plures piramidum colunmarum composite ad invicem et fuerit super-
ficies superior portionis inferioris equalis basi superficiei portionis que
est super earn et fuerit portio superior ex portionibus habens caput
quod est piramis et fuerint bases portiol1um omnium equidistantes
et fuerint linee que egrediuntur in omnibus portionibus ex basibus
earum ad earum superiora secundum rectitudinem equales, tunc mul-
tiplicatio unius linearum que egrediuntur ex basibus portionum ad
earum superiora in medietatem linee continentis basim portionis infe-
rioris et in ornnes lineas continentes ornnes bases portionum que sunt
super portionem inferiorem est embadum superficiei corporis com-
positi ex illis sectionibus, si sunt superficies sectionllm continue secun-
dum rectitudinem aut sunt non secundum rectitudinem. Et illud est
quod declarare 'ioluimus. Et hec est forma eius.
78 ante lam "'g. add. illaR 14
79 quecunque 1-1 / scilicet 0111. H
80 aut ... rectitudinem: circuli UTZ super
medietaten1 circuli BG est embadum
superficiei piramidis ]-1
83 de hinc ser. P IJlg. et ZII' sl/pra in alio,
propter hoc / hinc: propter hoc 111a
85 basi: basis J-I/ superficiei: superioris J-I
86 de portionibus ser. P Illg. et Z,I/ slIpra (et
add. .lIa* post portionibus): in (011/.
83 superficies: ~ ; . (circle) / post scitur add.
../1,.. ~ \ (also)
87 quod ... piran1is 011/. oA4r.
lV/a) alio (0111. 111a), piramidis capIUs.
((*111a adds the phrase in a box.))
87 piramidis Z,IJ / post piramis add. H et
basis piramidis capitis / fuerint PZlllilJa
fuerit R similiter /-1
89 superiora: superficies 1-/
9I basis .f-f
96 declarare: demonstrare 1-/ / Et ... eius
0111. I-I
90-91 que superiora: ~ t (these)
93 super inferiorenl: ~ ~ (abO/le it)
95-96 Et eius 0111. _;,lr.
of tIle BanG ivIiisa 309
l-Ience it is now known from vlI,at \\"!'c ha,re reCOul1ted that, If t\VO lines
l YB, B.. 1 are equal, regardless of vihether tIle one is applied to the other
as a continuous straigllt line or not, then the multiplicatiol1 of either of
tllem by the sum of 1/2 circumference UTZ and the circumference BGD
is equal to the surface area of the body whose vertex is point A and \vhose
base is the surface [TTZ. J\nd fronl this it is known that if there are se,reral
cone segments put together so tl,at tIle upper su.rface of [each] lower
segment is equal to the base surface of the segment which is [immediately]
above it and if the top one of tIle segments is [itself] a cone and if the bases
of all the segments are parallel and if the straight lines [i.e., slant heights]
connecting each pair of lower and upper surfaces are equal, then the
multiplication of (1) one of the slant heights by (2) [the sum of] 1/2 the
circumference of the base of the lowest segment plus all the circumferences
of the bases of the segments which are above the lowest segment is equal
to the surface area of the body composed of all those segments, regardless
of whether the surfaces are rectilinearly continuous or not. * And this is
what we wished to show. And here is its form [Fig. 45].
The Verba ftliorU1Jl
[XII.] CUM FUERIT CIRCULUS CUIUS DIAMETER SIT PRO-
TRACTA, ET PROTRAHITUR EX CENTRO IPSIUS LINEA
STANS SUPER DIAMETRUM ORTHOGONALITER ET PER-
VENIENS AD LINEAM CONTINENTEM ET SECATUR UNA
5 DUARUM MEDIETATUM CIRCULI IN DUO MEDIA, TUNC
CUM DIVIDITUR UNA HARUM DUARUM QUARTARU1f IN
DIVISIONES EQUr\LES QUOTCUNQUE SINT, DEINDE PRO-
TRAHITUR CORDA SECTIONIS CUIUS UNA EXTREMITAS
EST PUNCTU11 SUPER QUOD SECANT SE LINEA ERECT.t\.
10 SUPER DIAMETRUlvI ET LINEA CONTINENS ET PRODU-
CITUR LINEj\ DIJ\1\1ETRI IN PARTEM IN QUAM CONCUR-
RUNT DONEC CONCURRUNT ET PROTRAHUNTUR IN CIR-
CULO CORDE EQUIDISTANTES LINEE DIAMETRI EX ONI-
NIBUS PUNCTIS DIVISIONUMPERQUAS DIVISA EST QUi\.R-
15 TA CIRCULI, TUNC LINEA RECTA QUE EST INTER PUNC-
SUPER QUOD EST CONCURSUS DUI\RUM LINEARUj\lI
PROTRACTARU1\,1 ET INTER CENTRUM CIRCULI EST EQU-
11EDIETATI DIAMETRI ET CORDIS QUE PROTRi\CTE
SUNT IN CIRCULO EQUIDISTANTIBUS DIA1vIETRO CON-
20 IUNCTIS.
Verbi gratia, sit circulus ABG, cuius diameter sit linea AG et
cuius centrum sit punctum D [Fig. 46]. Et protrahatur ex eo linea
DB erecta super lineam AG orthogonaliter et dividat arcum ABG
c. 2 in duo media. Et I dividam quartam circuli super quam sunt A, B
25 in divisiones equales quot voluero et ponam eas divisiones AZ, ZL,
LB. Et protraham cordam BL et faciam ipsam penetrare. Et elong
abo
iterum lineam AG, que est diameter, secundum rectitudinem donee
I [XII]: I 5 IIlg.
1-7
6
Cum.... voluimus 0111. S
2 protrahatur
3 supra J-I
3-4 proveniens I-I
6 dividatur I-I I harum duarum Ir. .fl
earun1 dUarUl11 Z",
9-
1
0 de super ... continens (ser. ]) IJlg. et
Z!IJ slIpro (et add. /-/1\-la* flnte super): in
(0"'.". Hll!a) alia (ONI. 111\/a), sectinnis
I
" ) ere
cte
circuli (add. Ala !Jlg. in. a 10 *lv/a
(erecti H) cum linea contlnente. ((
puts the phrase in a box.))
I 2 in: a H . HI supra
15 de recta ser. P IJJg. ltfa !Jlg.
(et add. 1tla post recta): 10 alto,
17 protractarU111 0'". 1-[
I 8 corde 11 . . leas:
25 l1uot PZIII llunc1 H quO il[a
CaSclCI11 11
of the Banii l\flisa 3
11
[XII.] WHEN IS ./\. CIRCLE \XlI-lOSE DIAl\IETER IS
DRi\WN AND TI-IERE IS DRL\\X1N FR01f ITS CENTER 1\ LINE
}lERPENDICUL\R TO TI-IE Dll\l\IE1
i
ER AND TING
j\T THE CIRCUlvIFERENCE SO l
f
HAT ONE OF TitJE 'f\XfO I-I.t\LV-
ES OF THE CIRCLE IS BISECTEJD, i\ND THEN \XTfIEN ONE OF
THE TWO QUf\DRJ\NTS IS DIVIDED INTO ANY NUiVIBER OF
EQU1\L PARTS AND THE CHORD OF TI-IFJ SEGj\lENT, ONE
OF WHOSE EXTREiVIITIES IS TI-IE POIN1-i OF INTERSECTION
OF THE LINE ON THE DIAMETER .L\ND Tl-IE CIR-
CUMFERENCE, IS PRODUCED WHILE THE DIA11ETER IS
PRODUCED IN THE DIRECTION OF TI-IEIR INTERSECTION
UNTIL THE TWO LINES INTERSECT, AND TI-IERE i\RE DRA\XTN
IN THE CIRCLE FROM THE POINTS j\T W.HICH Tf-IE QUAD-
Ri\NT ARC OF THE CIRCLE IS DIVIDED CHORDS Pi\RALLEL
TO THE DIAMETER, [IF ALL OF THIS IS DONE,] THEN THE
STRAIGHT LINE BETWEEN THE POINT WHERE THE TWO
EXTENDED LINES MEET AND Tl-IE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE
IS EQUAL TO THE SUM OF THE RADIUS PLUS THE CHORDS
DRAWN IN THE CIRCLE Pr'\RALLEL TO THE
For example, let there be a circle ABG whose diameter is line AG
and whose center is point D [see Fig. 46]. And from the center let line
DB be drawn perpendicular to AG, thus bisecting arc ABG. And I
shall divide the quadrant AB into as many equal parts as I wish, and I
shall assume these parts to be AZ, ZL, LB. And I shall draw chord BL
and make it continue. And I shall also extend line the diameter,
E
8
1-%0 Cum... coniunctiS 0111. Ar.
23 lineam AG: ).AJ' (th, Jia11let".)
Fig. 46
23-24 et ... media om. Ar.
3
35
4
45
5
3I 2. The jiliorulJ/
concurrant super punctumE. Et protraham ex duobus punctis Z, L
duas cordas ZT, LHequidistantes diametro AG. Dieo ergo quod linea
DEest equalis medietati diametri et dllabus cordis ZT, LHconiunctis,
cuius hec est demonstratio.
ProtrahamlineamTA et protrahamlineamHZet faciam ipsal11 pene-
trare secundum rectitudinem donec oceurrat linee BC super [le Et
similiter faeiam, si quarta circuli super quam sunt A, B fuerit divisa
in divisiones plures istis divisionibus. Linee ergo TZ, HL sunt equi-
distantes, quoluam taliter sunt protracte. Et linee TA, HU, BE sunt
equidistantes propterea quod due divisiones TH, HB sunt equales
duabus divisionibus ....4Z, ZL. Ergo quadratum TAUZ est equiclis-
tantium laterum. Ergo linea TZ est equalis AV. Et iterum quadratum
H[TEL est equidistantium laterunl. Ergo linea HL est equalis UE.
Ergo tota linea ED est equalis duabus lineis TZ, HL et linee erecte que
est medietas cliametri coniunctis.
Si ergo nos protraxerimus in hac figura lineanl ex centro et secuerit
unarn cordarumclivisionum quarte circuli in duo media, sicut lineam
Dilf, tunc secatur linea LB super duo media super punctum Al in
duo media. Tunc iam scietur ex eo quod narravimus in hac figura
quod multiplicatio medietatis corde BL in duas cordas equiclistantes
diametro et in medietatem cliametri coniunctas est minor multiplica-
tione medietatis diametri in se et maior multiplicatione linee Dll1in se,
propterea quod triangulus DllfB estsimilis trianguloEDB et estsimilis
triangulo Ergo proportio linee illB ad BD est sicut proportio
28 Z, L: L Z H
32 ante TA del. P TH / HZ: HT H
33 accurrat: concurrant J-I / U: N ]-1 hie
et ubiqlle
34 si quarta: super quartarn H
36 protracta 1-/ / linee PZIIJ linea /-1i11a /
TA, HU: TA HN TA HN 1-1
37 de due di\risiones ser. P RIg. et Z,JJ supra
(cd add. 111a ante due): in (0111. A1a) alia
(0111. RAIa) duo arcus
30 post diametri add. - I - (G_4)
3I cuius .... denl0nstratio 0111. _,4r.
32 et ... lineanl01l1. c.-(I-lZ)
33 secundum rectitudinem OIJI ./1r.
38 de duabus divisionibus ser. P IJlg. et Z,JI
supra (et add. lvIa* a11te duabus): duobus
arcubus.*1110 puts the phraseina box.
41 ED est OIJI. 1-1
44 de cordarum... quartc ser. P !Jlg. ZIIJ.llIg.
(et odd. J-lilfa post secuerit): in alio cor-
dam (corda ilIa) ex sectionibus (sac-
tionibus! jlfa) cordarum quarte I
quarte: quarti J-1 / sicut: super H
47, 48 in 0111. ]-1
34 quarta .... B DIll. Ar.
35 istis divisionibus 0111 ./1r. / TZ, I-IL:
- J C-j.b - c.- (Cl], 7Z, J-fI_)
36 quonianl .... protractc 011/. - 4r.
of the BanG Mlisa 3J 3
rectilinearly until tl1ey [i.e., EL al1d .//lG] n1cet at point . .l\nd I shall
dravl from the two points Z and L t11e two cIlords ZT and Ll-I parallel to
diameter ../IG. I therefore, t11at line DE == radius + ZT +LH.
Proof: I shall draw line ancl I shall draw line J-IZ, continuing tIle
latter rectilinearly until it nleets line at rl. I shall proceed in a similar
way if the quadrant is divided into more !)arts than t11ese. Hence lines
TZ and HI-J are parallel, since they are so drawn. ;\nd lines T_4, HU,
and BE are parallel, since TH == .. 4Z and !-fB === ZL. Therefore, the
quadrilateral T..:4Lrz is a parallelogram. Therefore, line TZ == AV. And
also quadrilateral HUEL is a parallelogram. Therefore, line HL == UE.
Therefore, the whole line ED == TZ + HL + radius.
Hence in this figure we draw a line, e.g., line Dill, from the center thus
bisecting one of the chords of the quadrant, LB being the line bisected
at point AI. Then it will already be known, from what we have recounted
concerning this figure, that the multiplication of(I) 1/2 chord BL by (2) the
sum of the two chords parallel to the diameter plus the radius is less
than the square of the radius and is greater than Dllf
2
, because of the fact
that the three triangles Dlt1B, EDB, and BAlD are similar. Therefore,
}VIB/BD = DB/BE. Hence, DB2 = llfB BE, DB being the radius.
39-40 Et ... laterum 0111. Ar.
41 tota linea om. Ar. / duabus lineis om. Ar
41-22 et .... diametri: - .) , - (AD)
42 post coniunctis add. Ar. o\.j')JI Le
(Ami that is what we wished.)
43-47 in... quod: - J '-:"' -;.J j&. I- r.)-
(DMperpenJieNlar /0 chord BL.)
47 corde 0111. Ar.
47-48 in coniunctas: - .) - (DE)
'0-65 et se: .) '-:"' - '-:"' r .) -
- r - - - -
r - .) - J' - .) '"':"' - - .) r- JI
- .JL-. -.,.) - j - J y -
- r.) - j - .) y -.J - r.) - j -.) ,-:,-J
'.il; - .) r- l:;.r ,jA - .) y - t;r .f
- c.S;.J j.J j - J y -
)dj' c::,r ""J' - J Lr -j J,
- r.) - CJr ,jA
(For the two angles DMB, EBD are right
angles and angle B is common. And BM/
MD = BD/DE, and so BM DE =
BD DM, or [I BL DE = BD
DM], BD DM < BDz, and BD
DM > MDz. And so [i BL radius
(TZ + HL)] < raJiu.r
z
and> DM".)
60v
c. I
55
60
65
70
75
314 The Verba filiorum
DB ad BE. Et propter illud erit multiplicatio linee DB, que est me-
dietas diametri, in se equalis multiplicationi linee MB in lineam BE.
Verum linea BE est longior duabus cordis ZT, LHet medietate dia-
metri coniunctis, propterea quod iste coniuncte sunt DE, et linea BE
est longior DE. Ergo multiplicatio linee AIB in duas cordas ZT, LH
et in medietatem diametri coniunctas est minor multiplicatione me-
dietatis diametri in se. Et quoniam triangulus DAlBest similis trian-
gulo EllID, erit proportio BA/f ad AID sicut proportio illD ad illE.
Et similiter erit multiplicatio linee BM in lineam AlE equalis multi-
plicationi linee AID in se. Sed linea AfE est minor duabus cordis ZT,
LHet medietate I diametri coniunctis, propterea quod iste omnes sunt
equales linee DE, et linea DE est longior EllI. Ergo multiplicatio
111B in duas cordas ZT, LHet in medietatem cliametri coniunctas est
maior multiplicatione Di11 in se.
lam ergo ostensum est quod in omni circulo in quo protrahitur
ipsius diametrus deinde dividitur una duarum medietatum ipsius in
duo media, postea dividitur una duarum quartarum in divisiones equa-
les quotcunque fuerint et protrahuntur ex punctis divisionum omnium
corde in circulo equidistantes diametro, tunc multiplicatio medietatis
corde unius sectionum quarte circuli in medietatem diametri et in
omnes cordas que protracte sunt in circulo equidistantes diametro
coruunctim est minor multiplicatione medietatis diametri in se et maior
multiplicatione linee que egreditur ex centro et pervenit ad unam corda-
rum divisionum quarte circuli et dividit earn in duo media in se. Et
illud est quod declarare voluimus.
52 de Et ser. P RIg. et Znl supra in alia,
similiter / Et PZm et similiter J-J simi-
liter et .i'1a but sinlililer is in a box in
~ f a
54 Verunl PZnJ oln. H Verum tamen Ala
54-5 5 Lf-I ... sunt onI. J-I
56 LH: HL i-I
57-58 111cdietatis Z/IJ J-JR, !JIg. P Illg. llla
59 BM: MB 2/11
61 est minor ZnlilIa his Pest maior
minorll-l
67, 68 divldatur 1-1
70 corde: cordarUI11 H / in: in cum (?) H
75 divisionenl i-j / dividat /-1
76 declarare: denlonstrare J-I
------- ----- - -------- ------
69 onlniulTI 0111. Ar.
7I quarte circuli oln. Ar.
72-73 que ... coniunctinl oln. ~ r
75 quarte ITIcdia 011/. ~ ~ J r
76 quod voluin1us:
(that JI,hirh iJ sO/lgbl)
Therefore,
of the BanG 11lisa 3I 5
1'0\\ line BE' > (ZT + .1--,!-1 + BD), since Z j ~ +J-J.l-J -1- Bl:J) == DEand
BE > DE. Hence, line .il11J (ZT ~ J-Jl.l -t- BD) < ~ BD2. j\nd since
D.llB is similar to L EillD, J3,.lf I .411.D == /t-lD / .LlfE. j\nd similarly
B. 1/ #.1/ == illD2. But lil1C ilfE < (Z7
1
~ J-IH + BD), since
(ZT + LH -l- B.D) == DE al1d DE > Ellf.
illB (ZT + LE-I + BD) > Dll{2.
Therefore it has now been demonstrated that in every circle where the
diameter is drawn and one of the two halves of tIle circle is bisected and
one of the two quadrants [thus formed] is then divided into any number
of equal parts and from the [dividing] points of the parts are drawn chords
in the circle parallel to the diameter, then the multiplication of one half
of the chord of one of the segments of the quadrant by the sum of the
radius plus all the chords drawn in the circle parallel to the diameter is
less than the square of the radius and greater than the square of the line
going out from the center which meets and bisects the chord of one of
the parts of the quadrant. And this is what we wished to show.
316 The Verba ftliorulD
[XIII.] CUM CECIDERIT IN MEDIETATE SPERE CORPUS
QUOD CONTINEAT MEDIETAS SPERE ET FUERIT CORPUS
COMPOSITUM EX PORTIONIBUS PlRAMIDUM COLUi\IP-
Nr\RUM QUOTCUNQUE FUERINT, ET FUERIT SUPERFI-
5 CIES SUPERIOR CUIUSQUE PORTIONIS EXISTENS Bi\SIS
PORTIONIS QUE EST SUPER EAM, ET FUERINT SUPERFI-
CIES BASIUM PORTIONUM OMNIUM EQUIDISTr\NTES, ET
FUERIT BASIS PORTIONIS INFERIORIS IPSA BASIS 1fEDIE-
TATIS SPERE, ET FUERIT PORTIO SUPERIOR PIRi\l\!IIDIS
10 PIRA1fIS CAPITIS, ET PUNCTUM Cf\PITIS EIUS EST POLUS
MEDIETATIS SPERE, ET FUERINT LINEE RECTE QUE
EGREDIUNTUR EX OMNIBUS BASIBUS \D
ILLUD QUOD EST ALTIUS IN EIS SECUNDUM RECTITUDI-
NEM EQUALES, ET CUI\1 CECIDERIT IN CORPORE I\tIEDIE-
15 Tr\S SPERE QUAM CONTINEAT CORPUS, ET FUERIT SU-
PERFICIES BASIS HUIUS MEDIETATIS SPERE POSIT1\ IN
SUPERFICIE BASIS CORPORIS: TUNC EMBADUM SUPER-
FICIEI HUIUS CORPORIS ERIT MINUS DUPLO EMBf\DI SU-
PERFICIEI BASIS MEDIETATIS SPERE QUE CONTINET
CORPUS ET 11AIUS DUPLO EMBADI SUPERFICIEI Bf\SIS
11EDIETATIS SPERE QUAM CONTINET CORPUS.
Verbi gratia, sit medietas spere ABGD [Fig. 47]. Et circulus 04ABG
sit circulus magnus, et eius superficies sit basis meclietatis spere ...ABGD.
1 [XIII]: 16 nlg. Ala mg. R
1-153 Cum.... eius om. S
5 cuiusque: cuiuscunque H
7 equidistantes PZIII extremitates /-J
13 altius PZII' alteri /-1 alterunl Ala
6-7 et ... equidistantes Ir. Ar. post spere
in linea I I
14 et cum: (- (Ihen)
17 corporis: JJ)" the firsl half)
18-19, 20 enlbadi superficici 0111. Ar.
18 erit: eius ]-J
19 medietatis H-R Ol}/. PZll/iV!a
19-2I que spere 0111. 1-J
20-2 I et corpus Ol}l. R
2.2. ABGD: ABG !-l
----------------------
19-20 que corpus: J.J)' I (oj" the first)
2 I quam corpus: the second)
2.2 nledietas OlJ/ ....4,..
2.3 et ... ABGD 011/. _-'1,..
of the BanG Miisa
[XIII.] \VH'EN IS 1\ \\71-IICI-I Fi\LI_4S \X/ITl-IIN 1\
\\7l-1ICI-l [CONSEQlTENr-fLY] TI-IE
CONT.I\INS-l\t\.TD BODY IS OF
OF OF CONJ::S* SUCll TI-Lt\T UPPER
[PL.i\NE] OF j\NY IS Bi\SE OF THE
TELY] IT ,AND TI-IE Bi\SE SUR-
F.r\CES OF 1\LL TI-IE SEGj\fEN'1-1S .l\RE i\.ND SUCH
THi\ T THE BASE OF l
1
J-IE BO"fTOj\;I SEGJ\IEN'T IS TI-IE BASE
OF THE HEJ\lISPHERE, WHILE TCHE TOP SEGj\lENT IS ITSELF
A CONE WITH ITS VERTEX .i\ POLE OF THE I-IEJ\tIISPHERE,
I\ND SUCH TH\T THE SLI\NT I-IEIGHTS OF THE SEG11ENTS
ARE EQUAL, AND WHEN THERE IS INSCRIBED WITI-IIN THE
BODY A WHICI-I TI-lE BODY CONTAINS I\ND
WHOSE BASE IS PL1\CED \VITI-lIN THE SURFACE OF THE BASE
OF THE BODY-[WHEN ALL OF THIS IS TRUE,] 1"1l-IEN THE
SURFACE AREA OF THE BODY IS LESS THr\N DOUBLE THE
AREA OF THE BASE OF THE HEMISPHERE CONTAINING THE
BODY AND MORE THAN DOUBLE THE r\REA OF THE BASE
OF THE HEMISPHERE WHICH THE BODY CONTAINS.
For example, let there be a hemisphere ABGD [see Fig. 47], and ..t4.BG
a great circle of it, whose surface is the base of the hemisphere ...4BGD.
___G
D
[Reconstructed] Fig. 47 [As given in Arabic
texts and in MSS Hand P]
Note: AMB is drawn off center in MS P, and lines MF, MQ, and MS
incorrectly drawn in MS H.
* As in Proposition XI, I have used here Note that the authors use this to stand both
the expression "segment of a cone" to for a frustum of a cone and for a small cone
translate Clportio piramidis columpne." which stands on the uppermost frustum.
3I 8 The Verba jiliorufll
Et polus huius circuli magni sit punctum D. Et signabo in medietate
spere in primis corpus compositum ex portionibus quot voluero pira-
midum columpnarum secundum modum quem narravimus. Et ponam
corpus in hac descriptione compositum ex tribus portionibus, que sint
portiones ABCH, EHTZ, ULZD. Et basis corporis et basis meclie-
tatis spere ABCD est una. Et est superficies circuli ABG. Et caput
C.2 / corporis est punctum D. Et est polus medietatis spereABCD. Dieo
31 ergo quod embadum superficiei corporis ABGD compositi ex em-
badis superficierum trium portionum piramidum, quarum una est su-
perficies que elevatur ex circuIo ABC secundum rectitudinem ad cir-
cuIum HTE et superficies alia est ilIa que elevatur ex circulo HTE
35 secundum rectitudinem ad circulum ULZ et superficies tertia est que
elevatur ex circulo ULZ secundum rectituclinem ad punctum D, est
minus duplo embadi superficiei circuli ABC, cuius hec est demol1-
stratio.
Protral1am in spera ABCD medietatem circuli qui est ex circulis
40 magnis qui cadunt in spera transeuntis super polum qui est punctum
D, qui sit arcus _-4 DB. Et protraham lineam AB, que sit diameter
spere, et clividam earn in duo media super punctum Et notun1 est
quod punctum .A,1 est centrum spere. Et protraham duas lineas HE,
UZ. Et notum est etiam quod utreque sunt equidistantes, et equiclis-
45 tantes linee AB, propterea quod linee AB, HE, ZU sunt differentie
communes super quas superficies circuli ADB secat superficies tres
equidistantes, scilicet superficies circulorum ABG, ETH, ULZ. Et
manifestum est quod linee AB, HE, UZ sunt corde circulorum
ETH, ULZ, qui sunt bases portionum ex quibus componitur corpus
50 J.4BGD, propterea quod polum 11orun1 circulorum omnium est punc-
tum D super quod transit n1edietas circuli /lDB. Et protrahan1 in
24 de circuli ser. P IJlg. et Z,II sl/pra in alia,
sperc / anle circuli add. ilIa slJere
26 quam J-I
27-28 que ... portiones ZIIIAfa IJlg. P 0111.
1-/
28 ABGI-I ... ULZD se,.. et del ]-1 / EI-ITZ
corr. ex EI-ILZ in 1\/55
3 pOSI corporis add. jJ el del. eills
31 enlbadum 1)Z,I/ enlbado I-J enlbadc il/a
34 de HTEl se,.. ]J !llg. in alio / l-ITEI. 2:
ELH Z!JI et Z,JI ser. sl/pra in alia, l-ITE I
BTEI: nrn lin hprp (?) f-l
34-3 5 I-ITE! ... ULZ 011/. 1-1
34 .HTE2 de se,.. P !Jlg. in alia
35, 36deULZ ser.]) Illg. in alia /l!LZ:
UTZ ZJII el se,.. Z,II slIpra in alia L'LZ
35 U-: N- ]-J hie et IIbiqllf
39 (llli: (luac! Fl
4
2
notUl11: necessari unl 1-1
43 quod bis 1-1
44 et equidistantes 011/. 1:1
46 ADB: l\BD ZlIl
4
8
corde: dian1ctri 211/
4CJ corpus: tOtUJ11 corpus If
of the BanG 1vIGsa 3J 9
i\nd the pole [of the axis] of tltis great circle is IJoint D. l\nd I shall first
describe in the hemispllere a body COrIlrJOscd of as many segments as I
\1lish in the way that ha,re reCOul1ted. I sllull posit as t11c body so
described the bod)r composed of t11ree segl11cnts: the segments ./LIBGH,
EHTZ, and [.7LZD. .r\nd the base of this bod}T is also the base of l1emi-
sphere ./"1BGD, this base being the surface of circle J\nd the vertex
of the body is point D, which is also the pole of tile hemisphere.:4BGD.
I say, therefore, that the surface area of body ./1.BG'_D which is composed
of three segments of cones-i.e., (1) the surface extended rectilinearly
[i.e., the lateral surface] between circle ./lBG and circle HTE, and (2)
the surface extended rectilinearly between circle HTE and circle ULZ,
and (3) the surface extended rectilinearly between circle ULZ and point
D-is less than double the surface area of circle ./.1BG.
Proof: I shall draw in [hemi]sphere ABGD a semicircle of one of the
great circles of the sphere [and this is the semicircle] passing through
polar point D. This semicircle is the arc ADB. .t\nd I shall dra\v line
AB as a diameter of the sphere and I shall bisect it at point ill. And it is
known that hI is the center of the sphere. And I shall draw the two lines
HE and UZ. It is known also that they are both parallel [to each other] and
parallel to line AB, since lines AB, HE, and ZUare the common sections
of circle ADB and the three parallel surfaces of circles .4BG, ETH, and
ULZ. And it is evident that lines AB, HE, UZ are chords of circles ..t4.BG,
ETH, and ULZ which are [themselves] the bases of the segments of which
body ABGD is composed, since the pole [of the axis] of all these circles
is point D, through which the semicircle ADB passes. And I shall draw
24-36 Et
2
D: Le j&. .y
.;,;) l.r c::z-'.
- Cr .1. 0 - .;1.) J' - y , -
4-- - j J.J - ..;b JI 4:.-
J.,z -;) - J'
(AlIa according to what we have described
let there be [inscribed] in it a body co1o-
potmtltJ of three segments. The first extends
fro,. nrch ABG to circle ETH and the
.11ttmJ Ix/mM from i/ (ETH) to circle
VLZ, _ thl third extelldsfr011l it (ULZ)
ID po;IIt D. AM so we say Jhat the sum of
the areas of the conic seglnents cOH/prising
the body)
37-38 cuius ... demonstratio om. Ar.
39 ante spera add. Ar. (half)
41 arcus om. Ar.
42 punctum om. Ar.
42-43 Et spere om. Ar.
44 notum quod om. Ar.
45 linee ZU om. Ar.
47 equidistantes .. superficies om. Ar.
47-48 ABG.... corde : ..,Jai L.a. .J
(And they are diameters)
48 ABG 0111. Ar.
qui ADB om. Ar.
51-52 in portionibus om. Ar.
61r
c. I
55
60
65
70
3
20
The Verba filiorum
omnibus portionibus ex basibus earum ad ipsarum altiora lineas rectas,
que sint linee BE, EU, UD. Et notum est quod ipse sunt equales,
propterea quod ita posite sunt. Ergo medietatis circuli ADB iam
protracta est diametrus et est AB, et divisa est medietas circuli in duo
media super D. Et divisus est arcus DB in divisiones equales, que
sunt arcus BE, EU, VD, et protracte sunt ex duobus punctis E, U
due corde equidistantes diametro, que sunt UZ, EH. Ergo multipli-
catio medietatis unius cordarum BE, EU, UD, quecunque fuerit, in
duas lineas UZ, HE et in medietatem linee AB coniunctim est minor
multiplicatione medietatis linee AB in se, propter illud cuius premi-
simus demonstrationem. Et iterum corpus ABGD est compositum
ex portionibus piramidum columpnarum, et bases portionum omnium
sunt equidistantes, et portio superior habet caput quod est piramis,
et linee recte que protrahuntur in omnibus portionibus ex basibus
earum ad earum superiora secundum rectituclinem sunt equales. Ergo
propter illud erit multiplicatio linee unius earum que protra11untur
ex basibus portionum ad superiora earum secundum rectituclinem in
medietatem linee continentis basim portionis inferioris et in omnes
lineas continentes bases portionum que sunt super portionem infe-
riorem est embadum superficiei corporis, sicut oJstendimus in illis
que sunt premissa. Ergo multiplicatio linee BEin duos circulos ULZ,
ETH et in n1edietatem circuli ABG coniunctim est embadum super-
ficiei corporis ABGD. Verum multiplicatio linee BEin duos circulos
53 sint: sunt ZnJ
60 et: etiam H
62 est PZIJ' eorum H ex AJa
64 equidistantes: extremitates H
67 erit: est H
68 in Oil'. H
69 basim PZn, 'JIg. /-J basis AJa
71-72 iIlis ... premissa: premissis J-I
74 add. Zn, !Jlg. -t- qllod referl ad seqllcnles
lilleas in fol. S4r:
Set multipljcatio linee EB in nlulti-
plicationen linee ZU in pro!)ortionem
circunlferentie circuli ULZ ad linealTI
ZU et in multiplicationenl linee EI-I
in proportionem circunlferentie circuli
ETH ad linealll EI-I et in I11ultiplica-
tionenl J11cdietatis dianletri AB in
proportionem medietatis circunlferen-
tie ad lineanl l\'lB que est
paris ABGD. Set multiplicatio EB in
multiplicationem linee ZU in propor-
tionem circumferentie circuli UZL ad
lineam ZU est sicut multiplicatio EB
in lineam ZU et eius quod provenit in
proportionem circumferentie circuli
'UZL ad diametrum UZ. Ergo multi-
plicatio linee EB in lineas ZU, EH, 1'fB
et eius quod provenit in proportionem
circumferentie circuli UZL ad lineanl
ZU est superficies corporis ABGD.
Ergo et 111ultiplicio Inedietatis linee EB
in predicta omnia est medietas
f1ciei corporis ABGD. Et lTIultlph-
catio linee BS in lineas UZ, EH, 1/1B
est minus nlultiplicatione MB in
ipsam. Ergo multiplicatio Hnee BS In
lineas ZlT, El-I, 1fB et eius quod
venit in prol)ortionem circull1ferentlc
_ ",,,IC'
of the Banu 1:fiisa
in all of the [surfaces of the] se,g111CJ1ts fronl tllcir bases to those [bases
immediately] above thenl straight lines, [i.e., slal1t heights] and these are
the lines BE"', EU, LlD. j\.nd it is k.t10\\Tn that tllese lines are eClual, since
tlley were posited to be so. Hence a clian1eter of semicircle L.'J.DB has
already been drawn and it is .L
1
-1B. /-\nd the setnlcircle [i.e., arc has
been bisected at D. .t\nd arc DB llas been divided into equal parts, namely,
the arcs BE, EU, and [,7D . .t\nd froIn the two points E and U the two
chords UZ and E'H have been drawn parallel to the diameter. Tllerefore,
the multiplication of one half of anyone of tIle chords BE, EU, and UD
by the sum (UZ + J-IE + 1/2 /1B) is less than (1/2 ...4B)2, as we have
demonstrated before [in Proposition XII]. FurtIlermore, body ABGD is
composed of segments of cones in such a way that the bases of all the
segments are parallel, the upper segment is a cone, and the straight lines
drawn in all [the surfaces of] the segments from their bases to their upper
[plane surfaces] rectilinearly [i.e., the straight lines constituting the slant
heights] are equal. Therefore, as we demonstrated before [in Proposition
XI], the multiplication of (1) one of these lines [i.e., slant heights] drawn
from the bases of the segments to the upper [plane surfaces] rectilinearly
by (2) the sum of one half the circumference of the base of the lowest
segment plus all the circumferences of the bases of the segments above
the lowest one is [equal to] the surface area of the body. Therefore,
BE (circum ULZ + circum ETH + 1/2 circum ABC) = surf area
body ABGD.
53 que ... linee 081. Ar. / notum... quod
0111. Ar.
Ergo EH 0111. Ar.
9 cordarum UD: Lt:.- (of them)
60 duas lineas om. Ar.
61"-96 propter .... spere: Lt:.- t, &
- '-:" ,- ;;1.) J
- J.J j - J. 0 C. - .;b
.. .. ,
- 1_-_ ,-is-, U
J .
r -j.J - L.. - 1-
L L-.. l W '-' . l.il W
.. ... ..
- y I - ojl,) j Lt:.- J.>.t, &-'
- J.J j - .1, L.. - J;I.) j.J
III
;.;e ' &-J'
L. - y I - '-:" .:r I
Cl;-.J ' )dj' 4J
322 The Verba filiorum
75 ULZ, ETH et in medietatem circuli ABC est equalis ei quod fit ex
multiplicatione linee BEin duas lineas UZ, EHet in medietatem linee
AB coniunctim et multiplicationi eius quod agregatur inde in quanti-
tatemin quam cum multiplicatur diameter est illud quod agregatur inde
ipsa linea circumdans, propterea quod linee UZ, EH, ABsunt diametri
80 circulorum ULZ, ETH, ABG. Ergo multiplicatio linee BE in duas
lineas UZ, EHet in medietatem linee AB coniunctim et multiplicatio
eius quod agregatur in quantitatemin quam cum multiplicatur diameter
est illud quod agregatur ipsa linea circumdans est embadumsuperficiei
corporis ABGD. Sed multiplicatio medietatis linee BE in duas lineas
85 UZ,EHetinn1edietatemlinee J:4B coniunctimet multiplicatioeius quod
agregatur in quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diameter est illud
quod agregatur ipsa linea circumdans est equalis medietati superficiei
corporis ABGD. Et ipsa est minor multiplicatione medietatis linee AB
in se et multiplicatione eius quod agregatur in quantitatem in quam
go cum multiplicatur diameter est illud quod agregatur ipsa linea circum-
clans. Sed multiplicatio medietatis linee AB in se et multiplicatio eius
quod agregatur in quantitatemin quam cum multiplicatur diameter est
illud quod agregatur ipsa linea circumdans est embadum superficiei
circuli ABG, propterea quod linea AB est eius diameter. Ergo super-
95 ficies circuli ABCqui est basis corporis et medietatis spere que continet
multiplicatione linee 1fB in se et eius
quod provenit in proportionem cir-
cumferentie circuli UZL ad lineam ZU.
Set multiplicatio quadrati linee MB in
proportionem circumferentie circuli
UZL ad lineam ZU que est eadem pro-
portioni circumferentie circuli ABG
vel medietatis eius ad diametrum AB
vel medietatem eius est superficies
circuli ABG quia si posuero super-
ficiem que provenit ex multip]icatione
medietatis diametri AB in medietatem
circumferentie circuli ABG que est
equalis superficiei circuli ABG et
quadravero dianletri medietatem erit
proportio illius superficiei equalis cir-
culo ABG ad quadratum medietatis
diametri AB sicut proportio medictatis
circumferentie ad nledietatem diametri.
Cum ergo diviserimus superficiem
illam equalem circulo per quadratum
nledietatis diametri proveniet propor-
tio circuli ad quadratum que est pro-
portio medietatis circunlferentie ad
meclietatem diametri. Si ergo multipli-
caverimus quadratum illud in illam
proportionem proveniet circuli supre-
ficies. Set multiplicatio quadrati in pro-
portionem est maior multiplicatione
medietatis linee EB in lineas ZU, HE,
:rvIB et eius quod provenit in propor-
tionem quod est equale medietati super-
ficiei corporis ABGD. Ergo duplunl
circuli est maius superficie corporis.
75 ei: ctiam (?) J-J
77 inde 0111. /-1
78 inde PZ,II in I-IMa
8 I et
l
0111. I-J
84 BE: EB J-I
85 medietatem ZIIIJ-f.i\Ja medietate P
90 -9 1 posl circumdans add. H, A1alllg. linca!
97-/18 ("Quod .... forlna")
92 CUITI 011/. I-I
of the Banii Ivliisa
No\\"
BIJ (circum ULZ + + 1/2 circum ..lBG) =0 BE (CZ
+EH -t- 1/2 ./IB) 7r*
since UZ, EH, and ABare the diam;ters of circl:s ULZ ETH and ."'1BG.
Therefore BE (UZ +EH + 'lB) "
;-. ' T . 1/2 <" .:it = surf area body .-:"'lBCD. But
BE (CZ + EH + I!2 AB) :it = 1/2 area body ABCD, and so
1/2 BI! (UZ + E.H +. Ij2 .4B) :it < (..1B/2)2 71:. But (AB/2)2. :it =
area cIrcle ABG, Since hne /1B is its diameter. Therefore, circle A.BC,
* I have used here the modern symbol n
to stand for the phrase "the quantity
&-J .JL.. .y l..:i - y I -
l..:i - y I - ;;IJJI
4.J
ut
';IJJI - y I - j Or
III
Jil &Jli
- [,. y ,- ojl.)
* in Paris MS, in printed
text.) (AIIJ also tht prodMct of one of
IINIII muJ i the cirNlfll/erence ofcircle ABG
_ tIN tirCIIIII/ermcIs 0/ tire/es HET,
ZUL IDglthtr js IfJII'll to the area f!f the
ntr/iNI of thl body, according to what haJ
/NUs,J [ill ProptJ.rition IXl; and the pro-
atl of". of tlNm IJtul i ABand(EH +
which when multiplied by the diameter
produces the circumference."
UZ), andthat wholeproduct mllJlipJied b)' 1l,
is equal 10 the product of one of them and t
the circumference of circle ABG and the
sum of the circllmferences of circles HET
and ZUL, i.e., to the area of the surface
the body. And this is less than 2:j(, (AB/2)2
and n(AB/z)Z is equal to the area of the
circle, because (AB/z) n is equal to t the
circumference the circle and (AB/z) n
(AB/z). One half AB is the area of the
circle. And so the area of the surface of the
body is less than double the area of circle
ABG. As in the translation of Ge-
rard's text, I have throughout rendered
by the symboln the phrase "that quan-
tity which when multiplied by the dia-
meter produces the circumference.
314 The Verba ftliorunJ
corpus est plus medietate embadi corporis cadentis in medietate spere.
[Quod multiplicatio medietatis diametri in se et eius quod provenit
in quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diameter provenit linea
circumdans circuli sit equale superficiei circuli, ita ostenditur. Quo-
100 niam ponam ET equalem medietati circumferentie et EZ equalem
medietati diametri (Fig. 48), et unam multiplicabo in alteram, erit ergo
superficies ZT equalis superficiei circuli, et super ZE constituam qua-
dratum, quod sit ZL, et ponam quod quantitas in quam cum multipli-
catur diameter provenit circumferentia sit quantitas RU. Et quod
105 diameter cum multiplicatur in RV proveniet circumferentia, ergo cir-
cumferentia cum dividitur per diametrum provenit RU. Ergo RU
est proportio circumferentie ad diametrum. Sed proportio totius ad
totum est sicut medietatis ad medietatem et ET equatur medietati
circumferentie et EL medietati diametri. Ergo proportio TE ad EL
110 est RLT. Sed proportio TE ad EL est sicut proportio TZ ad ZL. Ergo
proportio TZ ad ZL est RU. Ergo TZ cum dividetur per RUproveniet
ZL. Ergo et ZL cum multiplicabitur in RV proveniet ZT. Sed ZL est
quadratum medietatis diametri et RU est quantitas in quam cum mul-
tiplicatur diameter provenit circumferentia. Et ZT equatur superficei
115 circuli. Ergo multiplicatio medietatis diametri in se et eius quod pro-
venit in quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diameter provenit
circumferentia equatur superficiei circuli. Et hoc est quod voluimus,
cuius hec est forma.]
96 medietate: medietati H
97-118 [Quod .... forma] nlg. P; om. ZIII?;
cf. lJar. lin. 90-9 I
97 Quod: sed quod H
98-99 linea ... circuli
z
corr. ex linea cir-
cumdans est superficies circuli ABG
in IJlg. H cl superficies circuli ill IJlg. P et
vel circumferentia circuli sit equale
superficiei circuli supra !Jlg. P et vel
superficies circuli in i\la
102 ZT: ET J-J
103 quod
t
J-li\la 011/. P 1ZL: Z 1-/
104, 106 proveniet I-J
107 ad
l
Pl\,fa Illg. 1-/
97-118 [Quod .... fortna] 01/1. /lr.
108 ET equatur: erit equatum H
19 medietati: medietate /-1 1ELl: DL H
110 RU: NZ H 1ad': et I-I
III RU': NIt]-f
112 Ergo onl. H
1 13-114 et .... diameter 011/. H
114 ZT: ZD 1-11 equatum rJ
I I 5-16 proveniet I-I
1 17 equatur: equalis 1-1 1post quod add. J-J
demonstrare
I 18 cuius ... forma 0111. I-f / post farIna
add. ilIa vel circumferentia circuli sit
equale superficiei circuli ((f. /Jar. lill.
.9 8-99).
of the Banu 3 5
tile base of the body aIld the l1Cll1is!JllCre \vhicll c()ntains tIle body, is
equal to more tllan one 1131 tIle area (Jf the body falling \vitlljn tIle hemi-
sphere.
the multiplication of the square of tIle radius by n is equal to
the area of the circle is demOl1strated as follows (see Fig. 48). Since I
assume ET to be equal to onc l1alf the circumference al1d EZ equal to
z
L
E
Fig. 48
Note: I have not reproduced line RV (which equals n).
T
the radius and I shall multiply one into the other, therefore surface ZT
will be equal to the surface of the circle. And I shall construct a square on
ZE, which square is ZL. I shall posit RU as the quantity which when
multiplied by the diameter produces the circumference (i.e., as 1t). And
since the multiplication of the diameter by RVwill produce the circumfer-
ence, therefore, when the circumference is divided by the diameter, RU
is produced. Hence, RU = curcumferencejdiameter. But the ratio of the
whole to the whole is as that of the half to the half, and ETis equal to half
the circumference while EL is half the diameter. Hence, TE/EL = RU.
But (TB/EL) = (area TZjarea ZL). Therefore, (area TZjarea TL) = RU.
Hence, (area TZjRU) = area ZL. Hence, (area ZL RU) = area ZT.
But ZL is tIle square of the radius, RU= :Tr, and ZTis the area of the circle.
Hence, the multiplication of the square of the radius by jf, is equal to the
area of the circle. And this is what we wished. This is its form (Fig. 48).]
* For the doubtful authenticity of lines
97-
118
, included here in brackets, see the
Introduction, division 2, footnote 8, of
this chapter.
120
1 2 5
135
326 The Verba filioruHI
Amplius describamin corpore ABGD medietatem spere quam con-
tinet corpus et sit superficies basis medietatis spere in superficie basis
corporis, que est superficies circuli ABG, et est superficies circuli
OKY. Et dividam lineas BE, EU, UD in duo media super puncta 5,
Q, F et protraham lineas AIS, .ilIQ, kIF. Et notum est quod ipse sunt
equales, propterea quod punctum AI est centrum circuli ABGet corde
BE, EU, UD sunt equales. Et faciam in superficie huius circuli lineam
..:1/0 non in superficie circuli ADB. Ergo puncta S,Q, F, 0 quattuor
non sunt in superficie una. Et ad ea quidem omnia protracte sunt linee
ex puncto jl1, que sunt linee hIS, A1Q, jlfF, AIO, et sunt linee equales.
Ergo punctum III est centrum spere quam continet corpus ABGD
et linea A/S est medietas diametri eius. Et circulus KOY est basis me-
dietatis spere. Ergo multiplicatio linee j ~ in se, deinde eius quod
agregatur in quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diametrus est
linea circumdans, est en1badum circuli KOY. Sed multiplicatio meclie-
tatis linee BE in duas lineas UZ, EH et in medietatem linee AB
coniunctim est maior multiplicatione linee A,IS in se, propter illud
119 de describam scr. P 1IJg. vel signabo et
Z,I/ RIg. in alio, signabo / describam P
signabo describam HMa / ABGD:
ABG (?) H
119-20 continet HAJa contineat P Znl
120in superficie PZm in superficies .Ala
inferioris H
123 j\fF, MQ, MS 1-1
125 EU: EM H / Et: quod H
126 non: que non sit Z"J / punctum 1-1
I 29 centrum: centrum circuli Z,JJ
130 diametri: digitus H
13 1-3 5 deinde .... coniunctimZ/I/H1\10 IlJg.
P
133 est Of/I. Znl.
133-49 de Sed .... ABGD scr. ZII' in infer.
Illg.fol. 84r: Set multiplicatio medietatis
linee EB in lineas ZU, El-I, MB con-
iunctas est maior multiplicatione linee
~ \ in se, que est equalis MY que est
medietas diametri circuli, scilicet
KOY. Ponam proportionem medie-
tatis circumferentie circuli KOY ad
J11edictatem diametri ipsius KIvIY que
est eadem que totius circumfercntie ad
totanl diametrum. Ergo 111ultiplicatio
medietatis EB in lineas ZU, HE, MB
coniunctas et eius quod provenit in
proportionem circumferentie ad dia-
metrum vel medietatis circumferentie
ad medietatem diametri et hoc est
medietas superficiei corporis ABGD
quia proportio circumferentie ad dia-
metrum suum est una est maius multi-
plicatione linee 1\1Y in se et eius quod
provenit in proportionem circum-
ferentie vel medietatis eius ad diame-
trum vel medietatem eius. Set multi-
plicatio linee IvIY in se et eius quod
provenit in proportionem est super-
ficies circuli KOY, ut probatum est.
Ergo superficies circuli KOY est
nlinus nlcdietate superficiei corporis
ABGD. Ergo duplum circuli est minus
superflcie totius corporis et hoc est
quod demonstrare voluimus.
134 UZ: QZ I-I
135 maior: minor 2/11 / linee... se: nle-
dietas linee BE in duas lineas UZ, EH
et in medietaten1 linee AB coniunc-
tim Z",
135 propter ill ud ser. et del. (?) f-l
of the BanG :!\Iusa 3
2
7
Now, further, I sllall describe in body [Fig. 47] a hemisphere
the body contains and let tIle base of the l1emisphere be inside the
surface of the base of the body, i.e., il1side tIle sllrface of circle and
it (the base of the hemisphere) is the surface of circle O}(}'. f\nd I shall
bisect lines BE, ELl, and flD at points S, .Q, and F', and I sllall draw lines
.. .illQ, and illF . .l\nd it is kl10wn that tllese lines are eqllul, since pOil1t
.. "11 is the center of circle A,1BG and the chords BE, E'fI, and LlD are equal.
.t\nd I shall produce in circle 01<.. l
r
line Oil I, which will not be in the
surface of circle ./lDB. Therefore, the four points 5, Q, F, and 0 are not
in a single [plane] surface. And to these points the equal lines itfS, jl:{Q,
illF, A10 have been drawn from point 111. Therefore, point ill is the center
of the sphere which body ABGD contains and line illS is its radius. f\nd
the circle KOY is the base of the hemisphere. Therefore, ll/5
2
1l = area
circle KOY. But BE (UZ + EH + 1/2 AB) > 11-15
2
, as we have
12I-ZZ et ... OKY: 4.:.a
(will be smaller than it)
123 Q: t.Note: here and everywhere))
1 24-2 propterea .... equales: ;uI
fr Jlj.JI f)-'
y I - ;JI.) & j - LY' , - - , -
- cS !l - ;;1.)-
(For thry are perpendiculars [drawn] from
the (enter 10 equal chords and we describe
circle KOY on center M uJith radius MS
and within circle ABG.) Note: Gerard
represents by 0, no doubt because
he had already used S for
126-53 Ergo.... eius: - r-
- r- r- t r
- r - .:r & J
-.1 U.
- 4S !J - .;1,).1 u...,..ld - c.J" ,
u....; &-- - (' - Cj...r-.J U.
- - J.J - I - J - -
c.e-lIl jlJ.iJ.I J - ..r (' - - j.J
;JI.) & 4J
-oy-
- j .J - L. 0 - - , - j
y J'-Lil' j (
...
&
j U>.L.LJI ; c-"r\
- I> .r' !.I - .;b & .:r
oU.)J' La
(And because lines MS, MQ*, MF, ana
MO** are four equal lines which are not in
one surface and are drawn from point M
to the surface of the inside sphere, M is its
center. And MS is half oj' its diameter;
and circle KSYIKOY?)) is its base. And
MS2 < [i BE ! AB (EH + UZ)].
And so MSz. n = area circle KOY, and
(MSZ n) < [l- BE I AB (EH +UZ)
n], i.e., (MSZ n) < i area of the body
contained by the interior sphere. And so the
area ofthe whole body < 2 arIa circleKOY.
Q.E.D.) *Rendering t by Q, as Ger-
ard does)) **Rendering by 0.))
c. !l
328 The Verba ftliorulJ]
cuius demonstrationem premisi/mus. Ergo multiplicatio linee .illS in
se et multiplicatio eius quod agregatur in quantitatem in quam cum
multiplicatur diameter est illud quod agregatur ipsa linea circumdans
est equalis superficiei circuli KOY. Ergo superficies circuli KOY est
140 minor multiplicatione medietatis linee BE in duas lineas UZ, EH et
in medietatem linee AB et multiplicatione eius quod agregatur in
quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diameter est illud quod agre-
gatur ipsa linea circumdans. Sed multiplicatio medietatis linee BE in
duas lineas UZ, EH et in medietatem linee AB et multiplicatio eius
145 quod agregatur in quantitatem in quam cum multiplicatur diameter
est illud quod agregatur ipsa linea circumdans est equalis medietati
embadi superficiei corporis ABGD. Ergo embadum superficiei cor-
poris ABGD est maius duplo embadi superficiei circuli KOY, que est
basis medietatis spere quam continet corpus ABGD
150 lam ergo ostensum est quod embadum superficiei corporis ABGD
est minus duplo embadi basis medietatis spere que continet corpus
et maius duplo embadi basis medietatis spere quam continet corpus
ABGD. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus. Et hec est forma eius.
[XIV.] E1\1BADU1\1 SUPERFICIEI 011NIS MEDIETATIS SPE-
RE EST DUPLU1\1 EMBADI SUPERFICIEI MAIORIS CIRCULI
QUI CADIT IN EA.
Verbi gratia, sit medietas spere BGAD, et maior circulus qui cadit
5 in ea sit circulus ABG, et punctum D sit polus l1uis circuli [Fig. 49].
Dico ergo quod embadum superficiei medietatis spere /-lBGD est
duplum embadi superficiei circuli ABG, quod sic probatur.
Si non fuerit duplum embadi circuli ./:1BG' equale superficiei medie-
tatis spere ABGD, tunc sit duplum eius aut minus sllperficie medie-
10 tatis spere ABGD aut maius ea [, si fuerit possibile]. Sit ergo in primis
duplum embadi circuli /lBG minus embado sllperficiei medietatis
spere ABGD, si fuerit illud !)ossibile. Et sit duplum en1badi circuli
136-37 cuius ... se 0111.1-1
1 38 ipsa: illa H
139 KOyl: KOlB H / Ergo /r. 1-/ post
circuli
2
I 49 basis: embadum basisll
150 quod: quod cum H
1 5z et: est ]-1
153 declarare: den10nstrare I-I / Et ... eius
0111. }[
I [XI\']: 17 IJlg.
4- 36 Verbi .... est
I
: Ex quo infert S
4 BC;AD: ABGD
10 [si ... possibile] sic. })Z,JIJ-jj\fa; sed delflJ-
d"'IJ e.rl?
I 2-- J 3 si .... j\I1G 01)/. if
of the BanG Miisa 3
2
9
demonstrated earlier. '"fllerefore, [sil1ce] ilfL\Z 7l === area circle KO}?, then
area circle R"O}/ < 1/2B' -t Ell + 1/2 ./'1B) n. BLIt
I/Z BE (Lrz + EH + 1/2 /lB) 1l 1/2 sllrf area l)od}T
Therefore, the surface area of body ./,-lBGL) is greater tllan double the
area of circle KOY, circle beirlg the base of t11e hemispllere which
body ./tBGD contains.
Therefore, it has now been demonstrated that the surface area of body
ABGD is less than double the area of the base of the henusphere which
contains the body and greater than double the area of the base of the
sphere which body ABG'D contains. i\nd this is what we wished to show.
And this is its form [Fig. 47].
[XIV.] THE SURFACE AREA OF EVERY HEj\tIISPHERE IS
DOUBLE THE AREA OF THE GREATEST CIRCLE WHICH FALLS
IN IT.
For example, let there be the hemisphere and circle J:4BG the
greatest circle falling in it, and let point D be the pole of this circle [see
Fig. 49]. I say, therefore, that the surface area of hemisphere ABGD is
equal to double the area of circle ABC.
Proof: If double the area of circle ABC is not equal to the area of
hemisphere ABCD, then it is less than the area of hemisphere ABGD
or greater than it. First, let double the area of circle ABC be less than
the area of hemisphere ABGD, if that is possible. And let double the
M
[Reconstruetedl Fig.49 [As given in MS P and in Arabic texts]
4-J qui ca: (which is its base)
6-7 Dico probatur 0111. Ar.
9-1z ABGD.... possibile: 'Y.JI &J,H
(then let it at first be less than it)
12-13 duplum...ABG 0111. Ar.
61v
c. I
15
20
3
35
330 The Verba jilioru"J
....4BG equale superficiei medietatis spere minoris medietate spere
ABGD, que sit medietas spere EHTK, Cum ergo fiet in medietate
spere ABGD corpus compositum ex portionibus piramidum colum-
narum, cuius basis sit superficies circuli ABC et cuius caput sit punc-
tum D, et ponetur ut corpus non tangat I medietatem spere EHTK,
tunc oportebit ex eis que premisimus ut embadum superficiei corporis
ABCD sit minus duplo embadi superficei circuli ABG. Sed embadum
superficiei corporis ABGD est maius embado superficiei medietatis
spereEHTK, quoniam continet ipsam. Ergo embadum superficiei me-
dietatis spere EHTK est multo minus duplo embacli superficiei circuli
Et iam fuit ei equalise Hoc vero contrarium est et impossibile.
Et iterum sit duplum embadi superficiei circuli ABG maius embado
superficiei medietatis spere si fuerit possibile illude Et sit
equale superficiei medietatis spere maioris medietate spere ABGD,
que sit medietas spere UZLilf. Cum ergo let in medietate spere UZLllf
corpus compositun1 ex portionibus piramidum columpnarum, cuius
basis sit superficies circuli UZLA1 et cuius caput sit punctum D, et non
sit corpus tangens n1edietatem spere ABGD, tunc oportebit ex eo
quod premisimus ut sit en1badum superlciei corporis UZLlll n1aius
duplo embadi circuli ABG. Verum embadum superlciei medietatis
spere UZLllf est maius embado superficiei corporis UZLlll. Ergo em-
badummedietatis spere UZLi11estmaius duploembadi superficiei circuli
BC. Sed iam fuit ei equale. Hoc vero est contrarium et impossibile.
lam ergo ostensum est quod embadun1 superficiei omnis spere est
quadruplum embadi superficiei maioris circuli cadentis in ea. Et illud
est quod declarare voluimus. Et hec est forma eius.
13 equale PZmAla equalis I-I
18 ante tunc del. H cum ?
19 ABGD: ABG J-I / ABG: ABGI? P
2 I spere: spei H
23 ei: cl g r/ / est: fui t J-I
24 Et 0111. /-1
ABGD: AABGD P
26 equale Z,;ll:Jjlfa equalis H / medietate:
medietatis 1-1
27 U-: N- rl hie et IIbiqlle in hae propositione
29 LZL1f 1-1
3I ut: quod J-!
1 compositurTI ... columnarunl: Lf
(jlfst as J/'e have described)
33 maius: magis H
33-34 embado. .. maius OIIJ. J-1 hie sed cf.
tJar. lin. }J
34 superficiei 0111. J-I
35 post ABG add. [-I omisimus embadum
superficiei medietatis spere NZL11 est
magis embado superficiei circuli AB (I)
/ Sed: et 1-1 / equale cor,.. ex equalis ill
Pr/Ala
37-38 Et .... eius OIIJ. S
38 Et ... eius OIIJ. l-J
18-23 tunc .... impossibile:
& :r - C y I - :;;1.;) c..la.-
of the BanG 33
1
area of circle _0'1 BC,' l)e equal t() tile area ()f a hemisp11erc slnaller than
henusphere ... --,1 BC;' D, nalTIcly, 11ernislJllcre \X
l
hel1, therefore, there
is described in hemisphere ABGD a body composed of segments of
cones, the base of whjch body is tIle surface of circle and its vertex
is point D, and it is posited tllat the body does not touch hemisphere
EHTK, then from what we l1av"e proved before [in Proposition XIII] it
\\iill follow that the surface area ()f bod)T /,q BG' D is less than double the
area of circle _,4BG'. But the surface area of body -4--1BGD is greater than
the surface area of hemisphere EHTR", since the one contains the other.
Therefore, the surface area of hemisphere EHTKis nluch less than double
the area of circle ABG. But it was posited as eqllal to it. This indeed is a
contradiction and is impossible.
Now again let double the area of circle ABGbe greater than the surface
area of hemisphere .L4BGD, if that is possible. Let it be equal to the area
of a hemisphere greater than hemisphere ABGD, namely, hemisphere
[IZLJl,f. When, therefore, there is inscribed in hemisphere a body
composed of segments of cones, the base of which body is circle UZLllf
and its vertex is point D and the body does not touch hemisphere ABGD,
then it will follow from what we have proved before that the surface area
of body UZLM is greater than double the area of circle 044BG. But the
surface area of hemisphere UZLlVI is greater than the surface area of
body UZLhf. Therefore, the surface area of hemisphere UZLllf is greater
than double the area of circle ABG. But it was posited as equal to it.
This indeed is a contradiction and is impossible.
Therefore, it has now been demonstrated that the surface area of any
sphere is quadruple the area of the greatest circle falling in it. And this
is what we wished to show. And this is its form [Fig. 49].
- ;;1,) &- - !J .1 L.. 0 - of
!J J., (. 0 - of \$.JWI - y I
'l. 4:.... -
(Its .flIT/ace UJQS less than double the surface
of circle ABG andgreater than the sllr/ace
hemispher6 EHTK. And double the
aria of circle ABG, which is equal to the
arIa of /hI 1N11Iisphtre EHTK, is much
grta/er thall it. [Blit] this is a contradiction.)
2 S si .... illud 0/11. Ar.
16-2 7 maioris ... spere
l
0111. Ar.
18-29 compositum... D: \.:..i....,.J Lf
(jlUJ tU "" htzvt tltsmbeJ) ..
30-31 ex eo quod premisimus: ..,....U
(according to what went before.) Note:
this phrase is transferred to a position
after ABG in line 32.))
32 Verum:.J (And)
33 UZLM% om. Ar. sed add.
(because the one contains the other)
34 maius: (much greater) / duplo
om. Ar.
3S et impossibile 0111. Ar. et hie add.
oU,)J' L. p'
(And so the rule is established. Q.E.D.)
Note: the Q.E.D. is given here in-
stead of in lines 37-38 \Yhere it appears
in the Latin text.)
33 z The Verba ft/iorlUlJ
[XV.] MULTIPLICATIO MEDIETATIS DIAMETRI OMNIS
SPERE IN TERTIAM EMBADI SUPERFICIEI SUE EST EM-
BADUM MAGNITUDINIS SPERE.
Verbi gratia, sit spera ABGD, et medietas diametri eius sit linea
s SB [Fig. 50]. Dico ergo quod multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi
superficiei spere ABGD est embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD,
cuius hee est demonstratio.
Si non fuerit ita, tunc sit multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi
superficiei spere minoris aut maioris spera ABGD ipsum embadum
10 magnitudinis spere ABGD. Ponam ergo in primis multiplieationem
linee 5B in tertiam embadi superficiei spere maioris spera ABGD
ipsum embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD. Et sit spera ZULM,
cuius centrum et centrum spere ABGD sit unum. Ergo multiplicatio
c. a 5B in tertiam embaJdi spere UZLM est embadum magnitudinis spere
15 ..l4BGD. Ergo cum fiet super speram ABGD corpus habens super-
ficies continentes ipsum et non tangat speram UZLM, oportebit ex
eo quod premisimus ut multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi super-
ficiei corporis quod continet speram ABGD sit maior embado spere
/1BG'D. Sed multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam superficiei spere UZLA1
20 est embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD. Ergo tertia embadi spere
L7ZLilf est minor tertia embadi superficiei corporis habentis superficies,
et spera [IZLAJ continet corpus. Hoc autem est contrarium.
I [XV]: 18 HI!!.. il1a mg. R 14 U-: N- H hie et ubique in hac proposilione
2-3/)OJ/ embadum add. S et 16 tangat HR tangant PZ11J tagat Ala
4-38 Verbi .... voluimus OHI. S 17 de premisimus scr. P. RIg. in conclusione
7 cuius: secundum J-I I figure huius / superficiei :superficielTI
I I ante superficiei .fer. et del. }-1 et embadum NZLM est embadum magnitudinis
12-13 Et ... unum: sit prinlum /-1 spere ABGD H (Sed if par. lin.
I 3 ante et del. jJ sit E 19-20 UZLM.... ABGD 0111. H
SB:
-7 Dico demnnstratio Ofl/...
8-- 1 5 Si ABc-;O:1 - j - r 0Lt
- (. I - ;5 & J
- - 4..Ji&. ';r'JI
4J L.. - c. 1- :r &
- \ J j J - - -' C "7" , - ;.J"
1..1.>-1) l .r
(../-111d the product .f find !i the area
sphere /llJG'D is 110t equal 10 ils
['Ollllllf, thell a/ first let it be less ,ball ilJ
I'ohlllle. lel the prodllti oj" aJ1tl
the area of a sphere larger than sphere
_4BGD be equal to the volllme of sphere
ABGD-and [this larger sphere is] for
exalnple UZLJ\,l. And let the (efl/ers of
the !Jl'O spheres be COHJflJOn.)
.... ipsum: Lf
Cillsl as JJJC have described)
18-2.2 quod .... corpus:
\AJ - y , - ..,:5"
..,
- , J j J - ;;.J" ,j- r-1a&.' r' &
of the BanG Miisa 333
[X\T.] ?\[ULTIPLICf\1
1
!C)N ()F R;\DIUS OF
BY ONE THIRD OF IS TI-rE VOL-
U\..lE OF THE SPHERE.
For example, let there be a spllere ABG'D \vith radius SB [see Fig. 50].
I say, therefore, that the n1l1ltiplication of ljne 5B by one third of the
surface area of sphere _/1BGD is tJ.1e volume of spllere ..
Proof: If this is not so, then let the multiplication of line 5B by one third
of the surface area of a sphere eit11er larger than or smaller than sphere
4IBGDbe[equalto] the volume of sphere ./,1BGD. Hence, I shall posit
first that the multiplication of line 5B by one third of the surface area of
a sphere larger than sphere ABG'.D is [equal to] the volume of sphere
/1 BG'D. Let this sphere be ZULjlf [UZLLt1], concentric with sphere
z
[Reconstructed]
M
Fig. 50
T
B
l
[As given in MS P
and in Arabic texts]
...--1BGD. Hence (SB 1/3 area sphere UZL.iVJ) = volsphereABGD. Hence,
when there is described about sphere ABGD a body having surfaces
which bound it but which body does not touch sphere UZLiVf, it will
follow from what we have proved before that the multiplication of line
5B by one third of the surface area of the body which contains sphere
is greater than the area of sphere ABGD. But the multiplication
of line SB by one third of the area of sphere UZLM is [equal to] the
volume of sphere ABGD. Therefore, one third of the area of sphere
[IZL...i1-1 is less than one third of the surface area of the body having
surfaces, while the sphere UZLM contains the body. This, however, is a
contradiction.
('fJ'*l1s tIN bo4J tlIIIi will bl greater than
.rphw, ABGD, fI1IJ il fo/lows from this
that! ofthe area ofthe body isgreater thlJll i
of[the area tif] sphere UZLMcontaining it.)
(j2r
C.I
334 The Verba fiJion/fIJ
Et sit multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi superficiei spere
minoris spera ABGD ipsum embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD.
Et sit spera ilIa spera EHTK, cuius centrum et. centrum spere ABGD
sit unum. Ergo multiplicatio 5B in tertiam embadi superficiei spere
EHTK est embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD. Cum ergo net in
spera ABGD corpus habens superficies continentes ipsum et non
tangat speram EHTK, oportebit ex eo quod premisimus ut sit multi-
30 plicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi super6ciei corporis habentis super-
ficies quod continet spera ABGD minor embado spere ABGD. Sed
multiplicatio linee SB in tertiam embadi superficiei spere EHTK est
embadum magnitudinis spere ABGD. Ergo tertia embadi superficiei
spere hrfTK est maior tertia embadi superficiei corporis habentis
superficies, et corpus continet speram EHTK. Hoc vera est contra-
rium. lam ergo declaratum est quod multiplicatio medietatis diametri
spere in tertiam embadi superficiei eius est embadum magnitudinis
eius. Et illud est quod declarare voluimus.
[X\TI.] \'OLO OSTENDERE QUOMODO PONANTUR IN-
TER DU./\S QU1\NTITATES DUE QUANTITATES ITA UT
CONTINUENTUR QUANTITATES QUATTUOR SECUNDUM
PROPORTIONEi\I UN.t\1I.
Scientia enim illius valde utile est ei qui geometrie querit scientiam.
Et hac eadem operatione extrahatur latus cubi, quod est quoniamquan-
do illud quod est in cubo de unitatibus et partibus est no/turn et
ponuntur inter numerum cubi et inter unum duo numeri continui
secundum proportionem (unam), tunc ille qui sequitur unum ex duo-
10 bus numeris mediis est latus cubi.
z spera
2
OHI. 11 / ETJ-IK /-1 / et: est /-J
27 tier: fiat ]-/
29 tangat llAla tangant j)Zf" / de prenlisi-
mus scr. P mJ!,. in conclusione 2 figure
huius
30- 3I superficies: superllcielTI 1-1
36 dianlctri 0111. 11
23-3 8 Et .... eius: - J - :.f.-) r
- - , - o.J) ;..,.f
- ,- o..,.f 4J L. - .b C 0
l.:..L,'.J Lf W - ,- :; 5' . l _:'.J
.-I
37 etnbadi superficiei Ir. H
38 quod ... voluimus OHI. H
1 [XVI]: 19 111g. Ma mg. R
1-62. Volo ostendere onl. S
5 Scientia scientiam PZ1IJA1a mg. H I
Scientia enim: Nota quod scientia H
9 (unan1) .ftlpp/evi
---- -----_._----------------
&--
L.. 0 - & -.) ,-
..,
& .:r -!J
'.lA
of the BanG Miisa 335
I\nd let the rrlultiplication ()f lille LfB by ()ne third of tIle surface area of
a sphere less tha.tl sphere .. be [equal to] tile volunle of sphere
.. 1 BG'D. Let that [lesser] sphere be spllere EIITK, concentric with sphere
.4BGD. Therefore, the nlultjplication of by one t11ird of the surface
area of sphere EHTK is [equal to] the "\rolllme of sphere /-1 BG'.D. \'Vllen,
therefore, there is inscribed ill sl)here /1BGD a body llaving sufaces
which bound it but which body does not touch sphere EHTK, it \V'"ill
follow from what we have proved before that the multiplication of line
.fB by one third of the surface area of the body having surfaces which the
sphere ABGD contains is less than the area of sphere But the
multiplication of line 5B by one third of the surface area of sphere EHTK
is [equal to] the volume of sphere Therefore, one third of the
surface area of sphere EHTK is greater than one third the surface area
of the body having surfaces, while the body contains sphere EHTK. This
indeed is a contradiction. Therefore, it has now been shown that the
multiplication of the radius of the sphere by one third of its surface area is
[equal to] its volume. And this is what we wished to show.
[XVI.] I WISH TO DE1fONSTRATE HOW TWO QU1\NTITIES
ARE PLACED BE1WEEN 1WO QUr\NTITIES SO THAT THE
FOUR QUANTITIES ARE IN CONTINUED PROPORTION.
For a knowledge of this [proposition] is very useful to anyone who
seeks a knowledge of geometry. By this same operation is extracted the
side of a cube; for when the cube is known in terms of units and parts,
and between the number representing the cube and 1 are placed two
[other] numbers in continued proportion [with the cube number and 1],
then that number [representing that one] of the two mean numbers which
follows I is the side of the cube. *
* See Commentary for a representation of this statement in modern notation.
(The" let the product of SBand 1the area
11 sphere EHTK-a sphere smaller than
spINre ABGD-be eqlltll to the volu1IIe of
sphere ABGD. And /et us inscribe in
sphn-e ABGD (J body SNch as we have de-
scribed !Hfor, so that it does not touch sphere
EHTK. Anti it is necessary fr011l what
htu pI bt/ore [in the first part of the
IbtDn_] that th, prodMct of SB and i the
I6IIl DJ [Iht i1Umb,tIj botly is less than the
of sphtr, ABGD. AmI so i th,
area of EHTK is greater than ! the area
of the body containing it. [Blit] this is a
contradiction. Andso the rule is establisbed.)
38 declarare 011/. Ar.
1-62 Note: al-1'usi seems to have
followed the original text more closely
here than in most propositions.))
6 hac ... extrahatur: "':'J"!
(by mefllU of this is known)
7-8 illud ... ponuntur:
(1111 knOIll 11110 quantities which fall .)
336 The Verha ji/iONl11/
Et hec quidem operatio quam narramus est viri ex antiquis qui
dicitur Mileus*, cui est liher in geometria. Sint ita due quantitates inter
quas volo ponere duas quantitates ita ut continuentur secundum pro-
portionem unam quantitates M, N. Et sit quantitas M longior quan-
15 titate N. Revolvam autem eirculum ABGD [Fig. 5I]. Et ponam clia-
metrumeius et est AB equalem quantitati M. Et protraham in cireulo
ABGD eordam AG equalem quantitati N. Et protraham ex extre-
mitate diametri cireuli ABGD, ex puncta B, lineam super rectos
angulos, et produeam lineam A G donee occurrat ei super punctum Z.
110 Et erigam super areum A GB superficiem medietatis columne ita quod
sint linee que protrahuntur in ea secundum rectitudinem ad arcl;lm
perpendiculares super superficiem circuli ABGD. Et revolvam
super lineam semicirculum, cuius superficies sit erecta ex super-
ficie circuli Jf4BG'D super angulos rectos super lineam AB et est arcus
Et 6gatur punctum .44 arcus ARE in loco suo sicut centrum
et revolvatur arcus ARE super punctum A. Et sit superficies eius
in re\Tolutione sua erecta super superficiem circuli ABGD super rectos
angulos ut arcus ARE separet superficiem medietatis eolumne erec-
tarn super arcum ... Et figatur linea AB sicut meguar. Et revol-
30 triangulus .. B super meguar AB donee occurrat linea AZ
* J\!tne/ollJ in the l\rabic text.
--------- - - - ------- -------_. ----------------------------
I I Et ... quidem: Hec autem I-I / quam H
CJua i\la qui [.J
1 ante Et scr. el del. 1-/ cordam AG
16 equalenl Z,//.;l1a equalis H equale P
19 concurrat 1-/
23 anle sit del. 1.J est
I Z ;v1ilellS: / po.rt gen-
metria add. Ar.
..,
13- 14 duas ... quantitatcs: (111'0 lines)
ABGD: - (. I - here
and throughout
16- 1 7 in .... ABC;D: (ifI it)
17-
18
cxtren1itate ... puncta 01// ./lr.
T8-- 19 lineanl ... angulos: - , - J&- I
(0 perpelldic/llar on _--'lB)
19 punctU111 011/. r.
24 super ... 1\8 01)/ .......:lr.
25 Et: quod H
26 revolvatur: revolvam H / arcum H
28 de separet ser. P mg. et Zm supra vel
secet/separet: vel secet separet Ma
29 Et
r
: est H
30 super: supra H
25 AHEI: Arabic has - 0 , - by mis-
take since in the rest of the passage it
has - 0 L. ' -
26 punctum: P.r (eenter) / Et: 4- (so that)
29 sicut meguar: P).5'"" (as a eenter) This is
no doubt a corrupt reading since the
Arabic word for "axis" is better
here.
30 meguar: (as an axis) Here is the
cl r " . " correct wor lor aXIS.
of the Banu !vliisa 337
A\nd the method wllich we describe is the met110d of one of the ancients
called who wrote a Boo,k of G'eo'tJctIJJ. ./If and 1\' be the two
quantities between which I wish to place two quantites so that they are
[all] in continued proportion. And let quantity ill be longer than quantity
lV. Then I shall describe circle .-IBGD [see Fig. 51]. I shall posit its
diameter as equal to quantity 11[. .I\nd I shall draw in circle 41BGD
Z
B
z
M N 8
D
[Reconstructed] Fig. 5I [As given in 1'15 P]
Note: The Arabic texts have a somewhat similar diagram, but like MS H
the orientation is reversed to agree with the orientation of the Greek text
of Eutocius and hence in my reconstruction I have followed this reversed
orientation. Also, there are a number of errors in the drawing as given in
MS P; the principal error is that L does not fall on semicircle DQG, and
LKis not perpendicular to ABGD, as it should be.
the chord A G, * equal to quantity N. I shall draw a line at right angles to
the diameter of circle ABGD from its extremity, point B, and I shall
produce line A G until it meets the line from B at point Z. And I shall
erect on arc AGB the surface of a half cylinder, in such a way that its
rectilinear elements from arc AGB are perpendicular to the surface of
circle J.,..4BGD. And I shall describe on line AB a semicircle whose surface
is erected at right angles to the surface of circle ABGD. This semicircle
is the arc A HE. And let point A of arc AHE be fixed in its place as a
center and let arc AHEbe rotated about point A, and its surface remains
during its rotation perpendicular to the surface of circle ABGD, so that
arc intersects .the surface of the half cylinder erected on arc AGB.
Now let line AB be fixed as an axis,. and let 6 AZB be rotated about
axis AB until line AZ makes a common section with the surface of the
The chord AGis not actually drawn.
338 The V"ba ft/iorM11J
sectioni superficiei meclietatis columpne et designet punctum G. Tunc
ex linea AZ in revolutione sua meclietatem circuli GQD erectam ex
superficie circuli ABGD super angulos rectos, et signabo super locum
in quo occurrit linea AZsectioni superficiei meclietatis columne punc-
turn H. Et figatur arcus _AHE ex revolutione sua apud punctum H.
Et protraham duas lineas AH, AB. Et signabo ubi occurrit linea AH
arcui GQD punctum L. Et protraham ex puncto L perpenclicularem
super superficiem circuli ABGD, que sit LK propterea quod est
differentia communis superficiei semicirculi AHE et superficiei semi-
40 circuli GQD et unaqueque harum duarum superficierum est erecta
super superficiem circuli ABGD super angulos rectos. Ergo linea
LK est perpendicularis. Et protraham lineam LT. Manifestum est
igitur quia erigitur ex linea AL super angulos rectos, propterea quod
multiplicatio linee GK cum linea KD est equalis multiplicationi
45 linee IJA" cum equali eius. Verum multiplicatio linee GKcum linea KD
c. SI est equalis multiplicationi linee TK cum linea KA. Ergo multipliJcatio
linee KT cum linea KA est equalis multiplicationi linee LKcum equali
eius. angulus ..4LTest rectus. Et iam ostensum est quod angulus
trianguli _4HE est rectus, quoniam ipse est compositus super
50 medietatem circuli AHE, et quod angulus ATH trianguli ATHest
rectus, quoniam HT est perpendicularis super superficiemcirculi ABG
et est una linearum que protrahuntur in medietate columne secundum
rectitudinem ad arcum _4GB in superficie circuli ABGD. Sed linea
AT est in superficie circuli ABGD. Ergo angulus ATH, propter
illud quod diximus, est rectus. Ergo in unoquoque triangulorumAHE
ATH, ..4LT, AKL est angulus rectus. Et angulo HAB communi
in eis omnibus sunt trianguli similes. Ergo proportio EA ad J:4H
est sicut prol)ortio AI-I ad AI' et sicut proportio AT ad AL. Sed
linea ./11E est equalis quantitati AI et linea AL est equalis quantitati N.
3I Tune: et II
32 AZ: A'f AZ J-I/ C;QD: GHD /-J
33 super locunl jJ2/11 super circulunl j}la
lineanl 1-1
37 post L2 add. If vel sectio (tf. par. lil1. J9)
39 de differentia se,.. J) IJlg. cl ;:,,/ slIpra vel
sectio / differentia: vel sectio differentia
ilIa puts l'cl sfclio in a box))
40 anle superficicrull1 del. 111inearunl
43 post igitu! del. Pet / erigitur: egrc:dituf
1-1
44 GK: GN H / KD PZ,nND HGDltla
45 LK: HZ H / GK: GN H / KD: ND J-I
46 TK: TN fl / KA: NA H
47 KT: NT H I KA: NA H / LK: LN fl
48 rectus: erectus 1-1 / est
2
0111. Znl
5I lIT Z'II _A.r. AT PHlvfa
53 superficienl J-]
triangulo J-I / AI-lE: AHT /-1
56 AIJT, AKL: ANL H / HAE: AHE /-l
59 N 0111.11
of the BanG IvIGsa 339
half cylinder, and it n1arl{s p()jnt * hy tile rc)tation of line .. ---1Z I
shall be erecting t11e sen1icircle at right angles to t.he surface of
circle D. .I\nd I shall desi.gnate point .If as the place where line
intersects the [common] sectioll of the sllrface of t11e l1alf cylinder [and
arc l\nd let arc AHE stop rotating when it arrives at point H.
Now I shall draw two lines ./1/-1, L-1E'. I shall designate as point L the
place where line /-lH intersects arc C7QD. I shall draw from point L a
perpendicular to the surface of circle and this perpendicular is
LK, since LKis the common intersection of the surface of semicircle ..:4HE
and the surface of semicircle GQD and each of these two surfaces is
erected at right angles to the surface of circle /-lBGD. Hence, line LK
is perpendicular. I shall also draw line LT. It is evident, therefore, that
LTis erected at right angles to line AL; for GK KD = LK2 [Euclid, \TI.S,
Por.], and GK KD = TK KA [Euclid, 111.35]. Therefore, KT KA =
LK2. Hence, L .L4LT is a right angle. l\nd it now has been demonstrated
that L AHE of 6 AHE is a right angle, since it has been constructed
upon semicircle A HE, and that L ATH of 6 ATH is a right angle,
since HTis perpendicular to the surface of circle ABG', and it is one of the
straight line elements of the half cylinder protracted to arc ABGin the sur-
face of circle ABGD; but line ATlies in the surface of circle ..4BGD, and
therefore L ATH, because of what we have said, is a right angle. There-
fore, in each of the triangles AHE, ATH, ALT, AKL, there is a right
angle. And since L HAE is common to all of them, the triangles are
similar. Therefore, EA/AH = AH/AT = AT/AL. But line EA = ill
* That is, it marks G as the beginning
of the curve constituting the common in-
32 -Q-: t Gerard again renders 'ain
by Q.))
37-3
8
Lz ... LK: ' - (.-
- l::.";:" -.J., L- - l::. ":'" I - ijb
- ,- .;,,) ,)yF .Y'.J -!J J
(H Q perpllldieuJor to the surface of circle
ARG fIIIIl it is /in' HT and we draw LK
tIIII1 it is pn-ptnJicuJar to the slIf"jace oj
",tU ABG)
!9 semicirculi:
1
(tritJIIgl,)
tersection of line AZand the surface of the
half cylinder.
41-42 Ergo ... perpendicularis om. Ar.
49 trianguli AHE onl. Ar. / ipse ... com-
positus: - J, (. -
(HT is perpendicular)
50 trianguli ATH om. Ar.
52-53 et ...ABGD 0111. Ar.
54 ATH: - j.., J , - (ALT)
56 AKL om. Ar.
56-57 Et .... trianguli:
(And one angle is common; and so they are)
340 The Verba ji/ioNlm
60 lam ergo ceciderunt inter duas quantitates M, N quantitates AH, AT
et continuantur secundum proportionem unam. Et illud est quod
voluimus ostendere.
[XVII.] Et quamvis demonstratio Milei in rebus quibus uritur in
positione duarum quantitatum inter duas sit demonstratio certa ereeta
in mente, tamen est difficilis valde per inquisitionem et per earn est
possibile ut ponamus inter duas quantitates duas quantitates ita ut
continuentur secundum proportionem. Nos autem querimus ut sit
modus quo possibile sit nos consequi illud de quo narravimus facile.
Sint ergo due quantitates inter quas voluimus ponere duas quanti-
tates ita ut continuentur secundum proportionem unaQ1, due quanti-
tates ..-4, B. Et ponam quantitatem CD equalem quantitati A [Fig. 52].
10 Et erigam ex linea CD lineam DE super rectum angulum [ex CD].
Et ponam lineam DE equalem quantitati B, et protraham lineam CB
et extendam duas lineas CD, BD secundum rectitudinem, et non
ponam eis utrisque fincm determinatum. Et erigam super punctum B
linee GE lineam orthogonaliter et protraham ipsam donec occurrat
15 linee que extenditur secundum rectitudinem cum linea CD super
punctum LI. Et erigam super punctum C lineam equidistantem linee
- donee oecurrat linee que extensa est secundum rectitudinem cum
linea ED super punctum et est ilfG, et extendam lineam }\;fG in
partern alteram secundum rectitudinem usque ad punctum P, ut sit
I IX\!II]: 20 "Ig. llfa nlg. R
I -60 Et .... ostendere OHI. 5
2 positione: portione 1-1 / certa: corporis
I-I
3 de tanlen est difftcilis ser. J) '1Ig. et Z'II
slIpra (el add. 11 post nlente): in alia
tamen (011'. ZIII) non est difficilis
4 duas cluantitates
2
0111. I11\la
nlUS 0/11. II
62 ostendere 0111.
1-6 Et facile: j'
. \ . s::...c. , ., Lel . I I "L;L.
U _- .. ; u 00 U'.J ifJ J
l:.:J.k L.\)
There appears to be S0l11C confusion
of gender in this statenlent, but 1 have
let it stand as in the printed text.)) (_J"d
6 narramus H
9 GD: GB H
10 [ex GD] delenduHJ est?
11 et GE Olll. ZHl
12 et GD ZnJH1l1a onl. P
13 utrisque: nusquam (?) H
14 et ... ipsam oln. Zn/
15-17 secundum.... est 0111. H
19 usque 0111. H
-- - ----------- - --------
since the things JJJhich ilfenalalls /lsed-even
!lthv' are true-are either not possible /0
execute or are !Jef)' dijJic/lII, l1
1
e have ac-
(ording!J' all easier HIe/hod.)
7-9 inter ... quantitates onl. Ar.
12 secundum rectitudinem onl....
17-18 linec ... linea 0"'. /4r.
18--19 extendan1.... P: u;-)i.J
(_,-rll1d JJ,'f! f:hlend it)
of the BanG r.,fiisa 34I
and = N. So now, therefore, the quantities AH and /IT have been
placed between ill and so that they are [all four] in continued
proportion. .And thIS IS what we wIshed to demonstrate.
[XVI!.] Although the demonstration of 11enelaus concerning the
placing of two quantities between two quantities is theoretically correct,
still it is very difficult to follow it and by lneans of it [actually] to place
twO quantities between two quantities so that they are [all] in cOl1tinued
proportion. .r\ccordingly we seek a method by which it is possible for
us to obtain easily that which we have recounted.
Cs]
Fig. 52
Note: I have added the prime signs to M', V', E', and P' here and in the
Latin text. In MS P the letters M, U, E, and P are used twice. Also, I have
made BGperpendicular to MP and EUas the text demands, although they
are not so drawn in MS P, and added the dotted lines and [Q], [R], and [5].
Let the quantities A and B be the two quantities between which we
wished to place two quantities so that they are [all] in continued proportion.
And I shall posit quantity CD equal to quantity A [see Fig. 52]. AndI
shall erect line DE perpendicular to line CD [at D.] And I shall posit
line DE as equal to quantity B. And I shall draw line CB and extend the
two lines CD and ED rectilinearly without positing any fixed length
to them. I shall erect on point E of line CE a perpendicular, extending it
until it meets the rectilinear extension of line CD at point U. And I shall
erect at point C a line parallel to line EU, [extending it] until it meets the
extension of ED at point M, and this line is MC. And I shall extend line
i.lfG in the other direction to point P so that line A/Pis equal tolineEU.
342 The Verba ji/iorllfIJ
Ra linea MP equalis linee EU. Et estimabo quod posuimus EU moveri
ex parte puneti U ad pattern puncti D. Et sit extremitas eius que est
apud punctum U inseparabilis in motu suo a linea UD. Et linea in
motu suo non cesset transire super punctum E linee GE, ut quando
mo/vetur UE sicut narravimus, tunc ubi est extremitas eius ex linea
[lC, tunc linea UE in ilia dispositione secundum rectitudinem sit
extensum quod est inter punctum extremitatis eius et punctum E'
sicut linea UE. Deinde signabo super lineam extensam secundum rec-
titudinem signum K et imaginabor quod linea MP moveatur ex parte
puncti AI ad partem puncti K. Et sit extremitas eius que est apud M
30 inseparabilis in motu suo a linea DK. Et linea MP in motu suo non
cesset ire super punctum C linee EC, sicut narravimus de motu linee
[YE. Et imaginabor quod due linee MP, UBin motu suo sint equidis-
tantes. Et imaginabor quod super extremitatem linee UB super punc-
tum E sit linea ereeta orthogonaliter super lineam UE sequens earn
3!t in motu suo. Et non posita huic linee finem determinatum. Et hec
linea non cesset abscidere lineam hIP apud motum duarum linearurn
;lfP. Cum ergo moventur due linee VB, MP et sunt in motibus
suis equidistantes, adherent extremitates utrarumque duabus lineis VD
.1IK, sicut narravimus. Et proeul dubio linea erecta super lineam UE
40 orthogonaliter, que movetur cum ea et seeat lineam hIP, pervenit ad
punctum P'. Quando ergo per,renit linea erecta super punctum E ad
punctum p', perveniunt illic due linee U'E', A/'P'. Et lineamus duas
lineas E' p', V'ill'. Et scitum quidem est quod linea E' pi erigatur ex
unaquaque duarum linearum U'E', ill'P' orthogonaliter, quoniam est
linea quam posuimus in principio esse erectam orthogonaliter ex linea
20 estirnabo: continuabo If extimabo
211J / -U: -N J] hie cl "biqlle in hac
propositione
22 in
J
: a / ante VD del. P ED
23 cessat If
24 liE: PE /-1 / ex: e If
25 l:E: If
26 punctUI11
J
corr. motunl puncti ill
PZnJI!.ilfa / E': est J[
z7 l11:':: PI\f Z/I/
28 imaginabor 2," ynlaginabor J-l ian1-
ginabo ]J inlmaginabur Jfa
29 K: N If
30 DK: DN If
.. w ; ... .no. rI 1 1 I 1;,...0. .-. '). _. r J
32-33 equidistantes: extremitates H
33 ymaginabor P jlinee DE: NE linee H
34 earn 0111. ZRJ
35-3 6 Et
2
non PZnJMa in alio,uthec
linea non RIg. P et sl/pra Zm pro alio
ut l1cc linea non est ut linea non H
36 cessat Il
37 UE, !vIP: MP NE H
38 equidistantes: extremitates H I utrarum-
que PZ/JJ utrorumque 1\1a utcunque H
39 l\1K: !\1N H
40 111): PlvI /-1
43 est guod Ir.lJ j erigatur: erigitur H
45 esse 011/. {-{
of the Banu Miisa 343
l\nd I shall imagine t11at we llave put ELl in lTIoti()n from point [JT in the
direction of point D; and let tIle extremity at point Lr in the course of its
movement be inseparable from line UD . .J.\nd the line [EV] in the course
of its motion continuall}r passes through point E of lille GB, so that when
LE is moved as we 11ave recounted, wherever the extremity of line VB
is on line UG, in that position the straigllt line between that extremity
[on line [lG] and point E' is equal to line VB. Then I shall mark on line
[DE] rectilinearly extended the point K, and I sllall imagine that line ilfP
is moved from the direction of point ill toward ,the direction of point K.
And let the extremity at Al be in the course of its movement inseparable
from line DK. And line llfP in the course of its movement continues
to pass through point G of line BC, just as we recounted concerning the
motion of line UE. And I shall imagine that the two lines i}fP and UE
in the course of their movements are [continually] parallel. And I shall
imagine that the line erected perpendicular to line VB at its extremity E
follows that line VB in its motion, and no fixed end is posited for this line.
This line continues to cut line ilfP in the course of the movement of the
two lines UE and illP. When, therefore, the two lines UE and iY/Pare
moved and remain parallel in the course of their movements, their ex-
tremities [continue to] adhere to the two lines UD and A1K, as we have
recounted. And without doubt the line erected perpendicular to EU,
\\:hich is moved with and cuts line 1l1P, arrives [some time] at point P'.
When it arrives there, the two lines rUE and MP] have arrived at U'E',
ill' Pi. Let us draw the two lines E'P' and U'M'. And indeed it is known
that line E'P' is perpendicular to each of the two lines U'E' and A/'P'.
since it is the line which we initially posited as being perpendicular to line
20 MP: - ~ ,- M ~ Note: Gerard
renders ~ by P))
2J UG: - ~ J - (UD)
z6 punctum.: 4I..ii (poillt) sed in Lat. MSS
motum puneti
27 sicut: .:r (from)
..,
28 signum K: - !l .) 0 - .Ja.>. (line EDK)
30 DK: -!l r - (MK)
4S in principio om. Ar.
344 The V".ha ftliorum
UE et movetut cum ea donee pervenit ad punctum P'. Dieo ergo
quod due linee DM', DU' sunt due quantitates que iam ceciderunt
inter duas quantitates GD, DE et quod proportio GD ad DM' est
sicut proportio DM' ad DU' et sicut proportio DU' ad DE, euius
demonstratio est:
Quoniam due linee U'E', M'P' sunt equidistantes et equales et duo
anguli U'E'P' et M' P'E' sunt recti, tunc linea U'M' est equalis linee
E'P' et unusquisque duorum angulorumE' U'M' et P'M' U' est rectus.
At vero linea Af'D est perpendicularis super lineam U' D et linea
U' D est perpendicularis super lineam M'E. Ergo proportio linee GD
ad est sicut proportio DM' ad DU' et sicut proportio DU' ad
DE. Verum linea CD est equalis quantitati et linea DEest equalis
quantitati B; ergo due linee DU', DM' iam ceciderunt inter duas
quantitates B et continuantur secundum proportionem unam. Et
60 illud est quod voluimus ostendere.
c. [X'TJII.] I ET NOBIS QUIDEM POSSIBILE EST CUM HOC
SIT INVENTUM UT DIVIDAMUS QUEMCUN-
QUE ANGULU1\.f VOLUMUS IN TRES DIVISIONES EQUALES.
Sit itaque angulus ABG in primis minor recto. Et accipiam ex
duabus lineis B.4, BC duas quantitates equales, que sint quantitates
BD, BE [Fig. 53]. Et revolvam super centrum B et cum mensura
longitudinis BD circulum DEL. Et extendam lineam DB usque ad
L. Et protraham lineam BZ erectam super linean1 LD orthogonaliter.
46 moventur I-I
48 pOJI quod add. Zl1l ED ad GB et sicut /
est j.JZ et est J-/.A1a
49 DU': DE 1-1
I equidistantes: extremitates J-/
53 P'I\1'lJ': PNM J-]
5 super lineanl OHI. /1 / GD: DG ZIII
55-57 de Ergo ... DEI srr. ]J IIJ!!.. et 0111. Z/J/
(et add. J-Ji\/a* af/te Ergo): ex corollario
(capitulo II) Bc (80 I/, octava 1\/a) sexti
47 due ... ceciderunt 0111...-4,..
54 LT'D: - - (tlG) This is also cor-
rect, since it is the sa.nlC line
7, 8 quantitati 0111. _4,..
60 /"\fter the conclusion of the proposi-
H, sesti i\1.a) euclidis (euclidi lv/a).
*A1a puts this phrase in a box.
55-5 6 GD ad Ir. H
I [XVIII]: 2 I Rig. Ala
I -46 Et .... figure 0111. S
I .post est del. P ut
3 voluerimus H
6 de BD, BE scr. P Rig. et ZRI !Jlg. in alia,
AE BD / BD, BE: AE, BD, DE H /
cum 0111. El
7 DB: DA H
tion al-"fusi adds a "mechanical" re-
constructiol1 of tllis method not in the
Latin and presumably not in the origi-
nal text of the BanG Miisa. This has been
given in Gern1an translation by Suter,
of the Banu !vlusa 345
[.:rE and moving \vitll it tlI1til it [pc)int (;' \)f line EL] arri'/cd at .point P'.
I say therefore, that the two lines D,ll', l)[t' are the two quantities \vhich
<I ,
fall between tIle two [given] qllantities G'D, DJ3, and t11at G D D ~ l f ==
Dl1f'/DU' = Dell/DE'.
Proof: Since the two lines V'E', ill'P' are parallel and equal and the
two angles V'E'P' and ill'P'E' are rigllt al1gles, then line [;T'jlf' === line
E'P' and each of the two angles B'U'111' and P'1}f'U' is a right angle. But
line Af'D is perpendicular to line [T'D and line U'D is perpendicular to
line AI'E. Therefore, GD/Djlf' == DAI'/DU' = DU'/DE. But CD =
A and DE = B; therefore, the two lines DU', D j ~ f now fall between
the two quantities A and B and are in continued proportion with them.
And this is what we wished to demonstrate.
[XVIII.] AND INDEED IT IS POSSIBLE, WHEN THIS [KIND
OF] DEVICE* HAS BEEN FOUND, FOR US TO DIVIDE ANY
ANGLE WE \VISH INTO THREE EQUAL DIVISIONS.
And so let L ABG at first be less than a right angle. And I shall take
from the two lines BA and BC two equal quantities BD and BE [see
Fig. 53]. And I shall describe circle DEL on center B with a radius BD.
And I shall extend line DB up to L and erect line BZ perpendicularly on
G
I H
A
Fig. ~ 3
* See Commentary and also Appendix VI.
BibJitJJhecQ MIl/he11lIlticll) 3. Folge, vo!. J
(19Oz), pp. 269-70. Accordingly, I have
omitted giving the Arabic here.))
2 ingcnium: a;. I (artifice) I sit inventurn
fJ Ar.
5 BA: - 0 I y - (BAE) I que .... quan-
titates om. Ar.
6 B: - 0 - (E)
6-7 cum mensura longitudinis BD: l..~
(And with their distances [as radii])
34
6
The Verha ji/iorll1fJ
Et lineabo lineam EZ et extendam ipsam usque ad H. Et non ponam
10 linee ZHfinem determinatum. Et accipiam de linea ZH equale me-
dietati diarnetri circuli, quod sit linea ZQ. Quando ergo ymaginamus
quod linea ZEHmovetur ad partern puncti L et punctumZ adherens
est margini circuli in motu suo et linea ZHnon cessat transire super
punctum E circuli DEL et ymaginamus quod punctum Z non cessat
15 moveri donee fiat punctum Q super lineam BZ, oportet tunc ut sit
arcus qui est inter locum ad quem pervenit punctum Z et inter punc-
tum L tertia arcus DE; cuius demonstratio est:
Quod ego ponam locum ad quem pervenit punctumZ apud cursum
punctiQ super lineam BZ apud punctum T. Et protraham lineam TB
110 secantem lineam BZ super punctum S. Ergo linea TS est equalis me-
dietati diametri circuli, propterea quod est equalis linee ZQ. Et pro-
traham ex B lineamequidistantem linee TS, que sit linea MBK. Et pro-
traham lineam ex Tad Af. Ergo linea MTet linea TS sunt equidistantes
duabus lineis 11/B, BS et equales eis. Ergo linea MT est equidistans
"25 linee BS et equalis ei. Sed linea BS est perpendicularis super diame-
trum LD. Ergo corda arcus Tjl1 erigitur ex diametro LD super duos
angulos rectos. Ergo dividit diametrus LD cordam MT in duo media
et di\,idit propter illud arcum AfT in duo media super punctum L.
\'erum arcus est equalis arcui DK. Ergo arcus DK est equalis
30 medietati arcus i'lfT. Sed arcus llfT est equalis arcui EK, propterea
quod linea TE equidistat linee 11/fK. Ergo arcus DK est tertia arcus
Et similiter angulus DBK est tertia anguli ABG.
l::'t quoniam possibile est nobis per ingenium quod narravimus in
10 ante ZH del. IJ DJ-I / equale PZ,)J
equalis 1l1a equalem R
1 I imaginabinlur Z,)1
J.2 moventur /-1
I 3 margini: magini (/)/-1
14 inlaginanlur Znl
BZ: HZ If
16 ad: apud (?) If
16, 18 provenit if
lolinee ZI-I 0/11.
.
1 I ZQ: - t. j - (ZQ) ((Again Cicrard uses
Q to transcribe t)
12 ZEJ-I: - C
j
- (Zll)
13 nlargini circuli:
2 I anle Et add. Ma trinsecat super centrum
Ala puts this phrase in a box))
21-22 de protraham ex B scr. P mg. et ZnJ
supra in alia, transeat super centrum
24 est Of)l. ]-l
25 et: est H
26 super: supra H
29 arcus
1
01)1. /-1
30 MTI: J\1L 1-1
(to the circllniference)
17 post DE add. Ar. o.G jl
.. ,. A IA_:11
- ., .) - tJ"r
(and the ang/e ]JJhich this arc SI/blends, [i.,.,]
1/3 (/11(./!,le 1)BE)
of tIle Banii 1\{Gsa 347
line .1.JD. Furtller, I shall dra,v lil1e EL, e:\:tendil1g it to If, but without
assuming ZJI to have any fixed length. i\nd I shall cut from line ZH a
line equal to the radius of trle circle, namely, line Therefore, when we
imagine tllat line is lTIoved ill the direction of point L and that
point Z [continually] adheres to the circunlference in the course of its
motion, and that line ZJi continues to pass tl1rough point E of circle
DEL, and we imagine that point Z continues to be moved until point
Q falls on line BZ, then it is necessary for the arc between the point at
which Z arrives and point L to be one third of arc DE.
Proof: For I posit point T as the place at which point Z arrives as point
Q meets line BZ. i\nd I shall draw line TE cutting line BZ at point S.
Therefore, line TS is equal to the radius of the circle since it is equal to
line ZQ. And I shall draw through B a line parallel to line TS, namely,
line illBK. And I shall draw a line from T to ,.11. Therefore, lines Lv!T and
TS are [respectively] parallel and equal to the two lines BS and it/B.
Therefore, line AfT is parallel and equal to line BS. But line BS is per-
pendicular to the diameter LD. Therefore, the chord of arc Till forms
two right angles with diameter LD. Therefore, diameter LD bisects chord
AIT and [therefore] it also bisects arc .NIT at point L. But arc lV/L = arc
DK. Therefore, arc DK = 1/2 arc .NIT. But arc AfT = arc EK, since line
TE is parallel to line A1K. Therefore, arc DK = 1/3 arc DE. Therefore,
L DBK = 1/3 L ABG.
And since by means of the device which we have described in connection
18-19 apud .... BZ om. Ar.
21 B: ?)I (the center) / TS: - 0 J, - (TB)
.13-14 Ergo ... eis:
- ( - 4.JL. - ..,..w
(...4nd so TS equals and is parallel to ME)
25-16 diametrum 011/. Ar
26 corda arcus om. Ar
27- 28 Ergo ... L: )dJ4
(...4""for this reason it will be divided into
hllo by the diameter)
19-3 1 Verum.... MK: - - J \ -
-J,r-.J-Jr- j.;. -!l,)-.J-J,J
- 0 !J - -!J Ji - 0 J..I - .JL...
(..4nJ ML = LT, and DK = ML, and
= TE. AIIl1 so DK = i KE.)
32 post ABG add. Ar. oU').J1 L.
(AJUI lbat ;/ what we lII;sh,J)
33-46 Et ... figure: - 0J..,s'll'
-y j&. - j - j&. - L..j
- j&. d? - () - JI.i:. ':/.1
...
-j - Ja.,:. j&. - t - - 0
y,llJ.'
d.:.- olill
.J
(And with the device lve have mentionedZH
is moved so that Z is moved on the circum-
ference inseparably and line ZH in its
motion continues to intersect point E until
point Q .falls on line BZ and that which is
sought is completed. And if it is an obtuse
angle, we it. trisect the half. And
so two thIrds of It lVII/ be one third of the
obtuse [angle].)
348 The Verba ft/ion/m
eis que premissa sunt et per ea que sunt ei similia ut moveamus lineam
ZH et ponamus extremitatem eius que est apud punctum Z revolvi
super marginem circuli inseparabilem ab ea et sit linea ZH in motu
I suo non transiens nisi super punctum E donee per/veniat punctum
Q per motum linee ZH super lineam BZ, ergo similiter est divisio
omnis anguli minoris recto in tres divisiones equales. Et per illud
40 possibile est nobis facile illud quod narravimus.
Et notum est quod si angulus quem dividere volumus in tres equales
divisiones est maior recto, dividemus ipsumin duas medietates; deinde
dividemus unam duarum medietatum in tres divisiones equales se-
cundum quod narravimus. Manifestum est igitur quod iam tunc sci-
mus tertiam anguli qui est maior recto. Et illud est quod demonstrare
voluimus. Et hec est forma figure.
[XIX.] Et quoniam eius quod narravimus in pOSlt10ne duarum
quantitatum ita ut continuentur secundum proportionem unam iuva-
mentum est in cognitione lateris cubi, et significatio super illud non
est nisi ut innuatur ad illud tantum, sicut significant auctores geometrie
3 super radices surdas quibus non raciocinatur et sequitur computatorem
necessitas multociens ut raciocinetur per latus cubi, et cum veritate
mensure sue si est ex eis cum quibus raciocinatur, aut cum propinqui-
tate si est ex eis cum quibus raciocinatur, sicut faciunt cum radicibus
surdis, tunc propter illud oportet nobis ut narremus cum propinqui-
10 tate latus cubi ut raciocinetur cum eo apud necessitatem. Et faciam in
ilIa modum quo in propinquitate rei ex veritate non est modus magis
ultimus; quod est quia narrabo modum qui significat super propin-
quitatem lateris cubi ex veritate mensure sue ad quemcunque finem
34 [J I per: pt H
37 posl perveniat add. J-! super
38 Q: K (?) J-1
41 voluinlus If
42-43 est ... divideJTIlIs 0111. II
46 Et ... figure 0"1. /-1
I [X1XJ: Z 2 J 1(/
}--20 Et .... ut: operacio ad extrahendun1
latus cubi secundunl veritatelTI propin-
(Juanl in radicibus surdis ubi nUJnerllS
est o111nino cubiclls ita C)llnd inter
ipsunl et vcritatenl non est nisi Ini nus
sccundn si voluerit vel tcrtio si voJ1Jcrit
aut quantacul1llue parte vult est taliter J'
I positione PZm portione H porcionem
Ala
3 super: tunc (?) H
4 ut: ut non (?) H
radices P vel) ternunos RIg P et 21/1
sl/pra terminos radices H / rationatur
(?) fl hie et IIbiqlle
6 et I-Ill/a etiam PZ,I/
HaI/le si del. P qui est I post quibus add.
jJZ,II..lfa non; .red011/. Ar H / de radicibus
Jer. jJ et ZIIJ slIpra vel terminis
9 post surdis add. 1-1 terminis
I I rcei 1./ I rnagis: maius H
12.- 13 propinquitatc If
of the BanG 1\t(lisa 349
with tIle propostitions previousl)' pr()ved and by means ()f things which
are Sil1.1ilar to it it is possible for us to filo,rc line Z!f so that POiilt Z moves
inseparably upon the circumferel1ce \"vhile line ZHin its motion continu.es
to pass t11rough point .. until pointQ arrives at line BZ, therefore in the
same vlay e\Tery angle less tllan a right angle can be trisected. And by
tl1is [technique] we can easily do what \ve have recounted.
[\nd it is known that if the angle we \vis11 to trisect is greater than a
right angle, we bisect it. Then let us trisect each of the two halves in the
manner we have described. It is evident, therefore, that we now know
the third of an angle greater than a right angle. And this is what we
vlished to demonstrate. And this is the form of the figure [Fig. 53].
[XIX.] And since that which we have recounted concerning the placing
of two quantities so that they are in continued proportion is of assistance
in the finding of the side of a cube-and its significance [here] is only
that it leads to such an end, as remark the geometric authors in treating
of surd roots with which there is no [exact] reckoning-and since a
calculator must of necessity often reckon with the side of a cube, both
with its true measure if it is such that he is reckoning with, or with an
approximation if it is that with which he reckons as they do with surd
roots, then accordingly we must describe a method of approximation of
the side of a cube so that it can be reckoned with when necessary. In this
matter I shall present a method whichyields the best possible approximation
of the true root. For I shall describe a method which gives an approximation
of the true measure of the side of the cube to any limit the investigator
I [XIX]: Note: This proposition is un-
numbered in the published Arabic text))
1-62 Et .... proportionaliter :
L:J
..cs
,-:-,...,a..; '1 j..-J.J
cJl U.)J' 1.)1 .c...
III
ljJJi ..:re.,' Jil ;;.;;1..1
JI 4J J..J'.J
r .If.J' .JI
.).lJ1 4..JL.
....L; 4:J' y)'
..
JSWI r' w--l:AJ'
(We must describe after this [hollJ to obtain]
by approximation the side o.f a cube so thot
it will be reckoned with when netessary and
350 The V".ha fiJioTllm
vult querens, scilicet quando vult querens ut raciocinetur per latus
15 cubi cum propinquitate donee non sit inter illud quo raciocinaturet
inter veritatem mensure eius, verbi gratia, nisi minus minuto, possit
illude Et si vult ut noli sit inter illud et inter veritatem nisi minus
secunda aut quacunque parte vult, possit illud per illud quod narrabo,
si deus voluerit.
RO Et operatio quidem in illo est ut ponas illud quod est in cubo de
unitatibus partium, eius tertia aut sexta aut nona aut ad quemcunque
c. 2 finem volumus ex / finibus computationis. Deinde inquiramus nume-
rum cubi equalem numero partium quas habemus, scilicet secunda
(!tertia?) aut sexta aut queeunque sint partes. Ergo inquisitio illius
a ~ est parva, cum nos non utamur fractionibus in eo quod querimus.
Quod si non invenimus numerum cubi equalem numero partium quas
habemus, accipimus numerum cubi propinquiorem numero partium
que sunt nobiscum. Cum ergo inveniemus numerum cubi propin-
quiorem, servabimus ipsum. Deinde considerabimus partes que sunt
go nobiscum. Nam si sunt tertia, tunc numerus harum partium que sunt
in latere huius cubi est numerus rninutorum que sunt in latere primi.
Et si sunt partes sexta, tunc numerus partium que sunt in latere huius
cubi est numerus secundorum, que sunt in latere cubi primi. Et se-
cundum hoc exemplum quod est in latere huius cubi in secundis
35 facien1us in eis que sunt preter illude Et iste quidem modus quem nar-
ra\rimus ex eis super quem non est necesse ponere demonstrationem
neque ut addatur ex sermane in eo super illud quod diximus. Quod
est quia orones qui prababiliter dant computationem scient veritatem
eius quod diximus qual1do legent librum nostrum.
40 lam erg() declaratun1 est in eo quad narravimus de tibro nostro isto
super nl()dunl extrahendi nlensuran1 linee continentis circulum ex
14 scilicet ... guercns 0'". /1 / de pcr sr,.. jJ
~ ~ et ZIJ/ SliP"" vel cu111
21 de partiunl se,.. /) ~ ~ et ;:"1 slIpra in
alio, partibus / cius 0111. X,II / nona:
3& 11
22 volucris .f I inquiras .S'
23 habcs .r / scilicet: scCUndUl11 (?) If
24 Ergo: vel, narn 1)lg. [) et X,II SII/)"(/ non
rei J-J
2 ~ non: ianl f-/ I eo: hoc ..r
26 invenienlus if
27 accipiamus J'
28 Cum: quando f-l
30 sunt
l
: sint S
3I prinli: prin1.i cubi S
32 si 01)1. 5 / partes: ilIe partes S
33 cubi primi Ir. S
35-79 Et .... dei Ofll. S
35 Et: est I-I
36 eis .P eis est ZIII)1,lo ei est H
37 in eo: men (?) }{
3
8
l)lnnes: ulnnis I-J / ante probabiliter
del. P propter
40 isto 0111. }f
of the Ballu !vlGsa 351
desires. l ~ t is to say, if the in\restjgat()r \vislles to reckon with a sicle of
a cube of such an appr()Xin1atiol1 tIlat tIle root he reckons "'ith differs
from the true measure by an amOlll1t that is only less than a minute, he
can do this. And if he wishes that tIle difference between his approximation
and the true measure is only less than a second, or than any other part he
wishes, he can do this by the means which I shall describe, if God wills.
l\nd the procedure is this*: Convert tIle cube from units into [sexage-
simal] parts, i.e., to thirds, or to sixths, or to ninths, or to any desired
limit of computation. Then we seel( a cube number equal to the number
of parts that we have, i.e., seconds (!thirds ?), or sixths, or whatever parts
we have. The search is a simple one since we do not use fractions in that
which we are seeking; for if we do not find a cube number equal to the
number of parts we have, we take the cube number nearest to the number
of parts we have. When we find the nearest cube number we shall use it.
Then we shall consider the parts we have. If they are thirds, then the
number of parts in the side [or root] of this cube is the number of minutes.
.t\nd if they are sixth parts, then the number of the parts in the side
[or root] of this cube is [the number of] seconds. \"Y/e shall proceed in
regard to other parts according to the example of the side of the cube
being in seconds. The method which we have described does not demand
proof, nor is any commentary necessary beyond what we have said; for
all those who calculate in a worthy manner will know the truth of what we
have said when they read our book.
Therefore, it has now been shown, in what we have narrated in our
book, how to find by the method that Archimedes used the measure of the
* See Commentary for a description of this procedure in modern notation.
[we must] act in this matter with a method
which yields the best possible approxima-
tiOIl. Thai js to soy, if we wish that between
the approximation tlIId the /rile [root] there
is, for txam}", less than fl minute or fl
sImlll1, ." can do it IlIIJ the protetlNre is
this: [W,] r,_, the CIIbl to its third
jJdrls, or to sixths, or to nillths, or to other
parts. Then we seek the cube equal to the
number, if this cube exists. If not, we seek
the nearest cube to it. And when we have
found it, we take its side [i.e., cube Toot].
And if the parts were thirds, then the side
is in minutes; and if t ~ y were sixths, the
side is in seconds. And [other] problems aTe
treated according to this model.)
3S2 The Verba ftlioru11I
diametro suo per modum quo operatur Archimenides et narravimus
demonstrationem secundum quod multplicatio medietatis diametri cir-
culi per medietatem linee continentis est embadum superficiei eius.
45 Et posuimus post illud modum communem quo scitur embadum om-
nis trianguli acutorum angulorum et orthogonii et ambligonii. Et isto
modo quamvis iam usi sint multi hominum et sciverint ipsum, tamen
ipsi etiam usi sunt eo, aut pIures eorum, secundum modumcredulitatis,
preter quod sciverint demonstrationem super veritatem eius. Et po-
so suimus post illud qualiter sciatur embadum superficiei piramidis co-
lumne et embadum superficiei sectoris piramidis columne. Et posuimus
cum proportionibus id cuins necessitas sequitur nos in scientia embadi
superficiei spere et embadi magnitudinis eius, quo fit iuvamentum in
aliis ex scientia geometrie. Deinde posuimus post illud in eo qualiter
55 scitur embadum superficiei spere et ostendimus quia est equale qua-
druplo superficiei maioris circuli qui cadit in spera. Et narravimus
qualiter scitur embadum magnitudinis spere et ostendimus quia est
illud quod fit ex muItiplicatione medietatis diametri spere in tertiam
embadi superficiei eius. Et invenimus super illud quod narravimus de
60 ilIa cum demonstratione sufficientiam faciente geometrica. Et posui-
rnus past illud qualiter ponantur due quantitates inter duas quantitates
ita ut continuentur propartionaliter.
Et amne quod posuimus in tibro nostro isto est ex eo quod nos
docuimus nisi scientia extrahendi mensuram linee continentis circu-
65 lum ex diametra suo, nam est opus Archimenidis, et nisi scientia
po/nendi duas quantitates inter duas quantitates ut continuentur se-
cundum proportionem unam. Nam postquam posuimus nos in libro
nostro isto opus quod operatus est !vIileus in ilIo, posuimus cum eo
illud quod fecimus 110S in eo. posuin1us iterum quaIiter dividatur
70 angulus in tres divisiones el1uales.
42 ,\rchimcnides ;(," IJI? Archinlinides
jJ J\ rchenlinadcs it/a
49 vcritaterrl eius Ir. I J
50-5 I piranlidis ... supcrflcici JJZfll IIJg. fJ
52 CU n1 011/. 1-1 qui habet /a(lIlJtl IIJ / id:
illud 11 I scientia: tertianl f I
3 qII 0 / J Z IIJ l1 ue If qua J1{/ l]ll i if
54 ex scientia geolnetrie PZIJI sex scien-
cianl gconlctrie .JJa ex sua geonletria
1I / pust j)Z,1/ OIlJ. /-1 postea ilIa
7 magnitudinis cor,.. e:,-: superficiei ill
})2,I/l I; ser. et del. .ilIa
60-6 I de posuimus scr. P !llg. in alia,
fecimus
6 I de post illud scr. P IIJg. et ZHJ supra in
alia, tunc
62 continuantur (?) 1-1
63 in 011/. If
64 docuin1us PJtfa in alia, fecimus mg. P
et Z')1 sl/pra determinavimus H
65 opus: o.peratio I-f
67 nos 0111.
68 j\fileus: I-I Milleus Z,I/
70 angulus: triangulus H
of the BanG IvIGsa 353
circumference of a circle fronl its diameter. J\nd wc have described the
denlonstration according to wllich the multiplication of the radius by
one half of the circumference is equal tIle area of its surface. t\nd we
have posed after that a comlnon method by
T
\vluch is known the area of
any triangle: acute, right, or obtuse. i\nd altllough many people used
this method and knew it, still evel1 they-or [at least] many of them-used
it credulously without knowing the demonstration of its truth. i\nd then
\lle posed how the surface of a cone is known and [as well] the surface area
of a segment of a cone. .t\nd then we put forth with ratios that
which we need for the knowledge of the surface area and volume of a
sphere, which is of assistance for other matters of geometry. Then we
posed after that how the surface area of a sphere is known and we de-
monstrated that it is equal to quadruple the area of a great circle of the
sphere. And we described how the volume of a sphere is known and we
demonstrated that it is equal to the product of the radius of the sphere
and one third of its surface area. And we found that which we described
by means of sufficient geometric demonstration. .t\nd then we posed
how to place two quantities between two quantities so that they are [all]
in continued proportion.
J\nd everything which we have put in our book is our own teaching
except the knowledge of finding the measure of the circumference of a
circle from its diameter, for that is the work of Archimedes, and except
the knowledge of placing two quantities between two quantities so that
tlley are [all] in continued proportion. For although we have posed in
our book in regard to the matter [of the two mean proportionals] the
method that Menelaus fashioned, we put forth in addition our own method
concerning it. And further we posed how to trisect an angle.
67-79 Nam.... dei: r tf .:r
yl:SJI (' ..is
(...4.IIti il is frf)11J tIN IPorle of MeneiaMs jllst
as hi htu tkstrilHtI it. Praise to God a/one,
the book is finished.) al-Tiisi adds after
the end of the text another proof of
Proposition VII closer to that of Hero,
but attributes it to one al-Khazin.))
3S4 The Verha ji/iorll11l
Et harum quidem rerum quas narravimus in nostro libro cognitio
apud omnes qui querunt scientiam geometrie et computationis est
magne quantitatis et animosa est earum operatio, et quod sequitur
querentes hanc scientiam de necessitate earum. Nam scientia super-
ficiei spere et magnitudinis eius que est ex eis proprie est ex eis quibus
non vidi in illis quos testificati SUffiUS ex illis qui sunt nostri temporis
aliquem qui sciat modum quo computet ea convenientem veritati in
ilio qui vocet ut sciatu! demonstratio super operationem eius. Com-
pletus est liber auxilio dei. *
* The Latinity of this presumably literal translation from the Arabic leaves much to
be desired, and I am not at all sure Iny translation reflects the ultimate meaning of the
authors. lTnfortunately, this passage is missing in the Arabic version.
72. qui: quia If
73 est ... operatio O/JJ. J-J
76 in: ex II / nostri: tante ]-{
77 ean1 If / conveniente LIII
78 post eius add. J-I ete (?)
78-79 Con1pletus ... dei 01/1. ZfI'
79 post libcr add. J-J trium fratrum / posl
dei odd. ilIa An1en
of the Banli 1{lisa 355
indeed the understanding of all tllcSC t11ings \ve havc recounted in
()ur book is of great 11101TICnt El)! all tllose seek a kno\vledge of
gC()nletry and con1putation, and t11e use [of these things] is vital and they
are necessar)r for those WIlD seek this knowledge. For tIle knowledge of
the surface and volume of a sp11ere which is one of the things [presented
here] is properly a part of those things which no one of our time, as far as
I have seen, knows Il0W to compute by a metllod according witll the truth
[which is] in one who claims to know the demonstration of his metllod.
This book has been completed with the help of God.
COMMENTARY
Proel'lit,/'Jl
4-34 "Propterea ... Et." Notice that the Arabic text of al-Tiisi omits tllis
first section of the Proemium. Latin manuscripts 5 and T omit much
the same material, except that they both begin in line 35 and thus
contain one line less of the Proemium. It is evident that the scribe
of 5 had seen not only a truncated version (see division 2 of the In-
troduction) but also a fuller copy of the r,.7erba ftliortlm which included
the omitted material, for he notes that the inepi! of the treatise is
"Propterea quia vidimus" (see variant readings).
5 "magnitudinis." This is the word commonly used by Gerard to render
what we call "volume."
44-46 "Euclides ... latitudinem." Notice that when the BanG cite
Euclid's Elements, they do not give the specific number of the defini-
tion, axiom, or proposition, or even book. It is for this reason that,
when in the marginal note to Proposition XI (lines 57, 64) the spe-
cific proposition number is cited, the genuineness ofthe note becomes
suspect.
8I cCquadratura. " This is an unusual use of the word. Here it does not
mean "quadrature" in the sense of "squaring" but rather it means
"squareness," i.e., the unit-measure's character as a square. Cf. the
Arabic reading in the Arabic variant readings.
3,6 Verba ji/iorNm of the Banii Miisi
Proposition I
I "Figure laterate." The authors mean any "regular polygon." Gener-
ally this phrase is a shorthand way of indicating a regular polygon.
5-21 "Verbi .... voluimus." Compare the of S given in the variant
readings. I translate this as follows: "It is proved by [I] resolving the
figure containing the circle into triangles so that if it (the figure) is a
triangle, [the resolution is] into 3 triangles, and by [2] drawing lines
from the center of the circle to the points of contact of the circle with
the figure-each line being a radius of the circle and falling perpen-
dicularl}T on a side of the figure, i.e., the triangle, and by [3] using the
following proposition: the area of any triangle arises from the multi-
plication of its altitude by one half of the base on which the altitude
falls, [i.e., by using this proposition] as many times as there are
triangles into which the figure is resolved."
18-21 "Et ... corporis." This corollary concerns a regular polyhedron.
.;\5 al-Tiisi suggests (see Arabic variant readings), this corollary can
be pro\red by dividing the polyhedron into pyramids whose vertices
are at the center of the sphere about which it is circumscribed and
\\-hose bases are the faces of the polyhedron, while the altitudes of
tllese pyramids are radii of the sphere. Then the volume of each
pyramid is l/ === ! a b, where a is a radius and b is a face or base
area. l"hus the \7olume of the whole polyhedron becomes V = 1a B,
\\"llere B is tIle sum of all the b's of the individual pyramids.
Proposition 11
"Verbi .... circuli." l\1-anuscript S says only "He proves this by the
preceding (proposition]." proposition obviously assumes that an
inscribed regular polygon must be less than the circle in which it
is inscribed. '
19-21 ... spere." By analogy the authors extend the proposition to a
[regular] polyhedron illscribed ill a sphere, so that! r' A < vol.
sl)llcrc, wllcre r is tIle radius and /1. is the surface area of tIle inscribed
})o]yhedr()11. No proof is given.
PropoJitiol/ III
1-36 "Si .... figure." Tllis llas as its basic purpose to demonstrate tllat when
tllere is a circumference greater tl,an (or less thatl) a given straight line,
it is possible to hl1d tIle perinleter of a regular inscribed (or circum-
scribed) polygon \\"hich is greater than (or less tllan) the gi\ren straight
line. 'T'llis is SOn1e\Jlhat sinlilar to tIle basic SUIJl)osition specified by
Proposition IV 357
of SaXOl1}r, aJld tacitly assunlcd 1))'- the author of the Pseudo-
Brad\vardine text presented in Chapter v. Sllppositiol1 is this:
Gi v"en t\\'O unequallJut C011til1UOUS magl1itudes, it is always IJossible to
take away from the greater Inagnitude a tllird magnitlldc whicll is less
than the greater of the t\\ro gi\,rel1 magnitudes and greater tllan the
lesser. Compare the Introduction to Chapter Five.
17-
1
9 "Et ... EDZ." One supposes tllat the authors would do this by'" tIle
authority of Proposition XII.16 of the E1en/en/s, although that pro-
position is not cited. It should be pointed out l1ere that Proposition
XII. 16 uses the corollary to X. I in its proof, a corollary apparently
missing in the Arabic versions of the ElelJlents. Sec Chapter Three,
page 60, footnote I.
36 "voluimus." Here, al-Tusi adds that the proposition is based on the
assumption of the existence of a circle whose circumference is equal
to a straight line (see r\rabic variant readings and also page 63 above).
Proposition IV
1-38 Compare the proof of Leonardo Pisano in his Practica geoHJetrie,
edition of B. Boncompagni, Scritti di Leonardo Pisano, vol. 2 (Rome,
1862), p. 87, which from the form of the enunciation I would say
originated with the Banii 1tIiisa text, although Leonardo does not
spell out the proof in the same detail.
39-45 "Et .... declarare." This is the same corollary given in the Arabic
text of the De mensura circuli and which, I suggested in Chapter Two,
Section 2, appears to have been part of the Greek text in Hero's time.
Cf. Hero of Alexandria, Afetrica, I. 37, ed. of H. Schone (Leipzig,
1903), p. 86.
Proposition V
1-39 "Verbi .... voluimus." Cf. De curvis superjiciebus, Proposition Ill, as
given belowin Chapter Six. Compare also Pappus, CoI'ectio, Book VIII.
Proposition 22, ed. of F. Hultsch, vol.} (Berlin, 1878), p. 1105,
Euclid XII. 2 is the basis of all three proofs (and the BanG lvIlisa cite
XII. 2, although not by number, in lines 25-28). It should be noticed
that the Banii Miisa make an interesting shift in the wording of the
proposition. They abandon the earlier proportionality statement to
the. effect that the circumferences are to each other as the diameters,
and they substitute instead that the ratio of any diameter to its circum-
ference is a constant. This leads into the sixth proposition where such
a constant ratio is determined.
3, 8 Verba ji/iorMm of the Banii Musi
Proposition VI
2-4 "proportionem... ipsum." As stated here and in Proposition V, the
authors appear to be seeking the reciprocal of 1'. But actually, as the
determination is detailed, we find that it is the ratio of the circum-
ference to the diameter that is presented.
7-21 "Et .... Archimenides." Notice that the authors not only indicate the
irrationality of the ratio of the diameter to the circumference but add
that an approximation of the true ratio can be made which differs
from the ratio by less than a minute (i.e., by less than a ratioofIJ60of
the diameter to 1), or by less than a second (i.e., by less than a ratio of
1.13600 of the diameter to I), or by less than some other smaller frac-
tion. f\ctUally, of course, fractions used in this proposition are those
of ..r\rchimedes and Eutocius and are not expressed as sexagesimal
fractions. These remarks of the Banii NIiisa concerning approximation
should be compared with the later statements of Proposition XIX. If
the reader compares those figures used which go beyond the figures
employ'ed by \rchimedes, lle will see that they almost all agree with
Eutocius' figures as given in his Commentarius in dimensionem eirc/Jli,
ed. of J. I... I-Ieiberg, opera omnia, vol. J (Leipzig, 191 5),
pp. 232-58. This coincidence of the figures given by the Banii 1tIiisa
\vith those of EutocitlS would appear to be evidence in support of the
that Eutocius' commentary was known and used by the Islamic
mathematicians. For tIle entirely different figures of Leonardo Pisano
in his Practica geo"Jctrie, see Serifli di Leonardo Pisano, ed. of B. Bon-
compagni, \rol. 2 (Rome, 1862), pp. 88-91.
28-3 I B." Compare Eutocius, /6C. eit. I shall not
specify the specific line numbers of tIle Eutocius text here and in the
succeeding comments since the reader can easily follow them in the
J-Jeiberg text.
45-46 ... quil1que." r-fl,is agrees \vitll the translation of the De
IJle1J.fllra eire"li possibly done by Plato of Tivoli (see lines 81-82 of that
translation), where (ec.luivalent to G'B in the Verba ftlio1"um and
E'G' in the Greel{ text) is obviousl}T assumed to be greater tl1an 265, for
it is said tllat > 265/153." In the Greek text of the De
Illf1lS/Ira fj-'G-'/ (J';: is taken as equal to 26 5/1 53. This is repeated by
who adds 11owe,'er that the sqllare root of 70227 is
26
5 plus
a ,rerv small fracti()n.
63-65 "Er. .. quarta." \X'hcre the Banii i\li:isa have 13 505 341, Eutocius has
13 5534 + ! +- tl\ Note that the Florence Version of Proposition III
Propositioll VII 359
(see Cl,aptcr rI"hrec, Section 3, .line 76) gi\rcs the correct figure as an
irnproper fraction.
66-68 "Et ... quarta." \\lhere t11e Bal1U have 13739431, has
1373943 + ! + j\gain note that the Fl()rence Version (line 87)
has the correct figure as an improper fraction.
73-76 "erit ... tribus." Eutocius gives .EG' (equivalent to C'B in the
ftliorum) as equal to 2334! and EG2 =-= 544
8
72 3*, while the BanG
simply say that BG' > 23344 and (-;B2 > 5448723.
77-79 "Ergo ... duobus
2
." Eutocius says that EK2 (equivalent to G'Dz
in the Verba ftliortlnJ) equals 5472132* w11ile the Banu say that
G'Dz > 54721 32
87-88 "Et ... diametrum." The authors have inadvertently reversed t11e
order of the terms here, since GElBH is equal to the ratio of the cli-
alneter to one side of the polygon having 96 sides. But in the next
sentence the proper order is restored. Notice the absence here of the
magnitude H[.M] which is the actual side of the polygon, although
this side is specified in the Greek text (but there as Lh1). The Banii
1IGsa did not bother to specify the side itself, since the ratio they do
give, namely, GB/BH, is equivalent to the ratio of the diameter to the
side, GB being half the diameter and BHhalf the side.
155-57 "Et ... octo." Eutocius has AL2 (equivalent to A-i11
2
in the
ft/iorum) equal to 4064928/6 while the Banii Miisa say that AM2 <
4
06
49
28
.
158-60 "Ergo ... quattuor." Eutocius has AGz (equivalent to AB2 in the
r/erba jiliorum) equal to 40692843\ while the Banii Miisa say that
< 469
28
4.
Proposition VII
1-124 "Vola .... complere." Some of the interesting history of this so-
called "Hero's formula" is traced in Appendix IV. Suffice to say here,
the proposition as given in this translation is the first treatment of the
formula in Latin which also contains a proof, although the enuncia-
tion of the formula had been made by the agrimensores and in Plato of
Tivoli's translation of Savasorda's Liber embadorum. Incidentally, F.
Hultsch in his article on the history of Hero's formula (see Appendix
IV) feels that Hero's proof is simpler and more elegant than the
rather redundant proof of the Banii Miisa.
83, 90 In the variant readings under these line numbers will be found two
marginal notes that appear in P and Zm. Before considering their
360 Verba ji/iorNfIJ of the BaniiMiisi
origin and significance, I shall first give them in translation: Note to
line 83:
"(1) But (EZ2 AH) = [(AH EZ) EZ]*. (2) Therefore, [(AH EZ)
EZ] = [(HB BZ) ZA]. Let us multiply both products by AH.**
(3) Then [(HB BZ) ZA] AH = [(EZ AH) EZ] AH. (4)
But (EZ AH) = area triangle. Therefore, [on the right side of equa-
tion (3)] there will be three quantities: Area triangle, EZ, and AH.
~ Hence [(Area 6 EZ) AH] = [(AH EZ) Area 6].+ But [as
was said above in (4)] (AH EZ) = area triangle. (6) Therefore, [sub-
stituting the equation of (4) twice in the equation of (3)] (Area 6)2 =
[(HB BZ) Z ~ 4 ] AH. And this is what we wished to demonstrate."
Note to line 90: "Hence it has now been demonstrated that the multi-
plication of anyone of the lines AZ, ZB, BH by the product of the
other t\\10,++ and then by the semiperimeter, is equal to the area of
the triangle multiplied by itself. And this is what we wished to
demonstrate. "
In note 7 of division 2 of the Introduction to this chapter I touched
on the \rexing question of the origin and proper position of these two
marginal notes. But I must take up the matter in more detail. In
manuscripts P and Zm the two notes appear separately in the margin.
But in manuscript H the notes are joined and put into the text after
"trianguli" in line 83. They there constitute a conclusion to the so-
called first proof of Proposition VII. r\ccordingly, H transfers what
are lines 83-106 in the text to a point after BH in line I 19. There
these lines become the conclusion of the second proof of Proposition
VII. Actually, in P and Zm a lacuna follows line 119 and nothing more
is given until the beginning of Proposition VIII.
l"et us first c()nsider certain aspects of 1-1's rearrangement of the
text. J-J is certainly wrong in IJutting the two notes together, for tIle
first nc)te clearly is a conlplete conclusion to the argument, wllile the
second note presents tIle last step in a similar concluding argument.
j\nd so if \lie put l)oth of tlle notes ill tIle text we not only have the
last nlathclnatical step rJf tl,e argu111ellt twice (which is conceivable
but not likely) bllt we also l1a,'c the concludil1g pllrase: "And this is
* I have used the parentheses and brack-
ets, \vhich are of course unnecessary in
this n10dern notation) si 111ply to indicate
the successive n1ultiplicatioJ1s given by the
rhetorical expressions of the text.
** rVlore literally: "Let us posit .A4.H as
cOlnnlon."
+ Sinlply by rearranging the multipliers.
++ '[his I believe to be the sense of the
l .. atin, which is confusing.
Pr()position VII 361
what we \vished t() del11011stratc" t\vicc (a11cl tI-lis is 110t probable).
But suppose we accept for the n10n1cnt t11at tIle first note of line 83 is
the conclusion of the first proof, \viII /-1's tral1sfercncc oflines 83-106
as a conclusion of tIle second pr()of stand-lIp? I thjnk the answer must
be in the negative. In tIle first place, 1-1 is tIle only copy to make this
transference; for not only do the Latin manuscripts P, Z,JI, and 1.1/0
fail to have this arrangement but it is also absent in tIle r\rabic text of
al-Tiisi. And in the secol1d 111ace, lines 83-106 do not tllemselves form
a sufficient conclusion mathematically to wllat l1as been given as the
beginning of the second proof. Tllat is to say, we must still add further
steps before these lines becolne an acceptable conclusion. Let me ex-
plain this in more detail. As one can see from the text, the second
"proof" starts off with the statement [1] EZjZB = BH/HT, which
had been given earlier in line 64. The authors then show: [2] EZjHT
== (EZJZB) (EZJBH). Following this, the text breaks off in manu-
scripts P and Zm. But the Arabic text of al-Tiisi follows statement [2]
by asserting, as the proof demands, the following:* [3] EZjHT =
AZJAH (compare line 67). It then concludes from [2] and [3] to-
gether: [4] AZJAH = EZ2/ (BH ZB), and its equivalent ~ Z
BH Z B) = (EZ2 AH). Then, as the Arabic text points out, we can
complete the proof as in the first case (i.e., by using the procedure of
lines 78-106). If, instead of doing what the Arabic text does, we
follow H and add lines 83-90 after statement [2], it will be evident that
statements [3] and [4], which are necessary parts of the proof, will be
omitted since lines 83-106 only complete the proof after the deriva-
tion of [4] is assumed. Thus, no matter what we do about adding lines
83-106, we must add the further steps to complete the proof suggested
by [I] and [2]. On the whole, it seems more probable that al-Tusi is
giving us what was essentially in the original Arabic text and that the
"second proof" in the Arabic text was merely an alternate way to
derive formula [4], i.e., to arrive at the same conclusion that was de-
rived in a different way in the first proof and presented in lines 71-73.
But let us return to the question of the nature and origin of the two
marginal notes. A careful study of the first note will show that it is
an argument very much like that given in lines 78-106. In fact, the
only differences are these: (a) while a number of the steps are common,
the order of these steps differs in the two versions; and (b) in the note,
I have changed al-Tiisi' 5 lettering to the equivalent lettering used by Gerard.
36z Verba ji/iorN11J of the Banii Miisi
the equation of step (2.) is expanded to the basic equation of step (3),
and thus ultimately to the equation of step (6), by the multiplication of
each side of the equation by AH(a procedure that is also found in the
text of al-Tiisi). But in lines 78-106 the same objective is achieved by
dividing the equation (EZ AH) = (area 6) by the equation (EZ
area 6) = (AZ ZB BH). The fact that al-Tusi uses the procedure
followed in the note seems to favor the conclusion that the note was
added by Gerard from an alternate Arabic reading, a reading that was
eventually taken up by al-Tiisi. On the other hand, two considerations
throw some doubt on this conclusion. The first is that the introductory
pllrase in alio that precedes such alternate Arabic readings elsewhere
in the text is missing in this case. Furthermore, it must be
that the second note (i.e., the note to line 90) is definitely labeled as an
alternate reading, having the introductory phrase in alio, and this
second note is an alternate reading for the last step of the argument
that appears in both the first note and the text. Thus, if we accept the
first note as an alternate Arabic reading, we would have to conclude
that for the last step of the argument Gerard had before him three
..o\rabic readings. But nowhere else in the text is there any evidence of
three texts.
If the note to line 83 is not an alternate Arabic reading to lines 78-
106 ,we are left with two other possibilities: (1) The note is from an
.:\rabic text but applies to the conclusion of the second proof rather
than the first. There is no positive evidence to support this conclusion.
Furthermore, it is obvious that one would still need some additional
material, namely, the assertion of step [3], even if he took this note as
a conclusion for the second proof. I have already noted that no con-
clusion, other than the kind of statement found in al-Tiisi's text, was
needed to crJrnplete the second proof. (2) The note was composed by
Gerard of Cremf)na or some other T4atin author with two objectives:
to gi ve a slightly different dc,relopment of the conclusion from that
found in tIle text and to reduce the argun1ent to one involving only
specific quantities ratl,cr than general statements. This seems to me to
be a strong possibility.
I I 1-19 ... BH." 'l-1he reaS()nil1g in terIllS of specific quantities, as
expressed ill tl,is selltence, is as follows: If (1) EZ/ZB = BHjHT,
tllel1 (2) == From (1) \ve also know that
(3) ZB/Hl' == Blf. .'\11C1 so (4) === (EZjHB).
Proposition VIII 3
6
3
P"f)position J
1-;0 "C:UlTI .... eius." Cf. tIle proof of I.Jeonard() Pisano, ,)t:ritti Cede of B.
. Boncompagni), vo1. 2, (Rome, 1862), pp. 178-79.
25 "Ki\'." ,\t this point al-!'usi cites Proposition 11 [of the first book] of
the .fpheries of Theodosius; actuall}-, it is the corollary to tllat proposi-
tion that is pertinent.
Proposition I.Y
1-77 "Cum.... voluimus." For this proposItlon, cf. J\rchimedes, De
sphacra et cylindro, Propositions 7-10, 14. Cf. also the proof of Leonardo
Pisano, Seritti, vol. 2, pp. 179-80. It is obvious that j\rchimedes'
Proposition 14, which is == ! e r' where r'2 == s r, reduces to the
proposition of the Banii i.e., to A == t e s, s being the slant
height, e and r being respectively the circumference and radius of the
base circle. For if A = :Tt r'2, then A == n S r; and with n = ejzr,
_4 = le s. Cf. also Proposition I of the De eurvis superjieiebus,
Chapter Six below. Finally, cf. Pappus illath. CoIl., VII, Proposition
16
5.
Proposition X
1-34 "Omnis .... eius." Cf. Proposition 11 of the short tract on the hyper-
bola edited in Osiris, vol II (1954), p. 370. Cf. also Leonardo Pisano,
Practiea geometric, ed. cit. (pp. 180-8I); this was drawn from the Banii
!vliisa text.
30-31 "circumferentie ... UTZ." Actually, we cannot call this "the circum-
ference of circle UTZ" until the next sentence. It should read rather
"line [TTZ." After we have stated that all the lines from H to UTZ
are equal to UH or HZ, then we can call UTZ the circumference of
the circle with H as its center.
Proposition XI
1-96 "In.... eius." That this proposItIon follows from Proposition IX
is shown much more economically by the use of modern notation.
Assume that the segment of the cone has Cl as the circumference of
its lower base, c2 as the circumference of the upper face, s as its slant
height. :rvfake a complete cone out of the segment. This cone has Cl
as the circumference of its base, (p +s) as its slant height, and AI
as its lateral surface area. In completing the larger cone, a smaller
cone was added to the segment. That cone has c2 as its base circum-
ference, p as its slant height, and A
2
as its area. From Proposition IX,
,64 Verha ji/ioru111 of the BanG Musi
AI = 1Cl (p + s) and A
z
= ! C2 p.
Now [1]
A seg = AI - A
z
= ! Cl (P + s) -1C2 P
= (1 Cl p) +(1 Cl s) - (I C
2
p).
But C
1
/C
2
= (P +s)/p [by similar triangles].
Or [2] Cl P= (C
2
P) +(C
2
s). Substituting [2] in [x], we arrive at the
required proposition, namely, A seg = ! s (Cl +(
2
). Cf. Leonardo
Pisano, Practica geometric, ed. cit., pp. 181-82; this was drawn di-
rectly from the Banii Miisa text. Cf. Archimedes, De sphaera et cylindro,
Proposition 16. a. also De curvis superftciebus, Proposition IV (see
Chapter Six below). It is evident that the original proposition of
Archimedes has been considerably altered by the author of the De
cun,is superftciebus and by the Banii Miisa.
2-71 The material in brackets is added in the margin of P, Zm, and Aid
and in the text of Hand R. I have put it in brackets because I believe
it to be an addition of Gerard's rather than a part of the text. For it is
missing in the J\rabic text and it cites a specific proposition of Euclid,.
a practice not followed in the Banii Miisa.
Proposition ..YIf
1-76 "Cum.... voluimus." Cf. l\rcllimedes, De sphaera et cylindro, Proposi-
tions 21 and 22, and the De curvis superftciebus, Proposition V. Again
\\"e note that Leonardo !)isano drew from the Banii 1tliisa: see Leonar-
do Pisano, Practica geometric, ed. cit., p. 183.
43-76 "Si .... \Toluimus." This passage is an extension of, or corollary tOt
tIle enunciation wllich does not indicate the object of this additional
proof.
Proposition
1-153 .... eius." Cf. J\rcllinledes. De .rphaera et cylindro, Propositions
25 and 30. ,\150 sec ])isano's PracticageoQJetrie, ed. cit., 183-85.
77-79 "quantitatenl ... circulndans." 'I'his is the rhetorical expression used
by the I3anu t() designate \\T},at came to be designated as 7l.
Nc)ticc that l-..conardo l)isano, in taking o,'er this proof, simply sub-
stitutes "3 1/7" WllC11c\rer tllis eXl)ressioll al)pears in his proof (Ibid.
18
4-
8
5).
97-1 18 "Quod .... farIna." '1-'llis is the section proving tIlat _4 = 1l ,-2. TIle
Il1(lre COlnnl011 fOflllulatiofl f()! the area of the circle in antiquity and
the i\liddle J\ges is ..'-1 == c r, as it appears in the De menSIJra circ/lli
of i\rcllimedes.
PropositIon Ai V 30 5
Proposition ..YIT/
1-38 "Embadum.... eius." Cf. Archimcc1cs, Dc .rphttera et C]lil1dro, Proposi-
tion 33, and the De cllrvis J/ptrficiebl1.r, !)ropc)sition VI, Corollary. See
also Leonardo Pjsano, Praclica ed. cit., 185-86, and the
anonymous De ysopcrinJetris, i\ppendix Ill, paragraph 8.
Proposition AYV
1-38 "NIultiplicatio .... voluimus. Cf. j\rc11inledes, De sphaera et cylindro,
Proposition 34, and the De curl}is SIperftciebtls, Proposition VIII. See
Leonardo Pisano, Practica c.geoIJletric, ed. cit., 186-87 and the anony-
mous De ysoperimetris, J\ppendix Ill, paragraph 8.
Proposition XVI
6-10 "Et ... cubi." The substance of this statement in modern notation is
this: If a and I are the given quantities, a being equal to the cube, and
a/x == x /y == y / I, x and y being the mean proportionals, then y =
{la for ay == x
2
, and x == y2. Thus ay == y4, or a = y3.
12 "Mileus ... geometria." The Banii 11iisa say that they took this proof
from a Liber in geometria attributed to Mileus (i.e., :Nlenelaus, as in the
Arabic text*). While such a Greek text has not survived, we find this
work mentioned in the Fihrist (cf. H. Suter, "Das 1fathematiker-Ver-
zeichniss im Fihrist des Ibn Ab! J an-Nadim," Abhand/tJngen
zur Geschichte der Mathematik, 6. Heft [1892], p. 19). This work is also
mentioned by al-Biriini (Suter, Bib/iotheca illathematica, 3. Folge, vol. I I,
p. 69). Menelaus probably took it from Archytas (see next remarks).
12-62 "Sint.... ostendere." While attributed here to Menelaus, this is
the solution which Eutocius in his commentary on the De sphaera et
cylindro (ed. of Heiberg, Arch. opera omnia, vol. J, pp. 84. 12-88.2) as-
signs to Archytas on the authority of Eudemus. Cf. the English
translation of the passage by Ivor Thomas, 5elections Illustrating the
History of Greek A/athematics, vol. I (London, Cambridge, 1:Iass.,
195 I), pp. 284-89. Thomas analyses the solution in modern notation
which I have here adapted to the lettering found in the Verba ftliorum
(see Fig. 5I in the text): Take AB as the x -axis, a perpendicular to A
in the plane of ADBG as they axis, and a perpendicular to the plane
of ADBG at A as the .z axis. AB, AG are the two given quantities,
and we let AB = a, AG = b. The solution depends on finding point
Obviously the Arabic form was without any diacritical mark for the nUn, so that
Gerard read instead of r..Y'.J*--.
3
6
6 Verba ji/iorN11J of the Banii Miisa
H, which is the intersection of three curves: (I) the cylinder x
2
+y2.
= a x, (2) the curve formed by the motion of semicircle AHE
about A (a tore of inner diameter zero), X
Z
+yZ + ZZ = ay'x
z
+y2,
and(3) the cone X
Z
+y2 +Z2 = (a/b)2. x
2
. Since H is the intersection,
AH= yx
Z
+yZ +Z2, AT = yX
2
+yZ. From (2) it follows direct-
ly that AH2 = a ..4T, or a/AH= AH/AT. From (I) and (3) it
follows that x
2
+y2 +Z2 = (x
2
+y2)2/b
2
and hence y'x
2
+y2 +Z2 =
(x
2
+y2)/b, i.e., AH= AT2/b, or AH/AT = AT/b. And so a/AH=
= AT/b, and thus AHand ATare the mean proportionals
between (J and b. As I have indicated in Appendix V, this proof was
borrowed from the Banii Miisa by Leonardo Pisano in his Practica
geometrie and by Jordanus in his De triangulis. Of interest concerning
the connection between I\Ienelaus and Eutocius is the comment of
J. L.Heiberg and E. Wiedemann (Bibl. Alath., 3. Folge, vol. 10.1910- 1 I,
p. 203). For the existence of the Eutocius commentary in Arabic manu-
scripts, see V, note 6.
Proposition I
1-60 "Et .... ostendere." This solution which the Banii Miisa give as
their own is much like that given as Plato's solution by Eutocius
opera olHl1ia, vol. j, 56.13-58.14). Cf. Thomas' English
translation, op cit. in previous comment, pp. 263-67, and T. Heath,
../4 Histo')' of G"reek It/athematics, vol. I, pp. 255-58. The reader will
find Heath's analytical examination of this solution of interest.
For the additional mechanical device described in the Arabic text
of al-Tiisi but not gi\ren by Gerard, see H. Suter, Bib/iotheca A/fathcIJJa-
tieo, J. Folge, \Tol. J (1902), pp. 269-7.
Proposition .'(1//] JI
1 "lllgenium." reference is to a device or procedure similar to the
one used in the second solutic)n of the mean proportional problem,
i.e., the procedure that allows us to move a line so that its extremity
follo\\Ts a curve while it passes throllgll a certain point, the line being
posited as undetcrnlilled in lel1gtll. See also j\ppendix \TI.
1-46 "I .. figure." 'I
1
his s()lutiol1 ()f tIle problem is a mechanical one
tllat serves to s()lve tile problcl11 as reduced to a 11Cl1sis(i.e., to a "v"erg-
ing" probleln). is, it gi,res a n1ec11al1ical procedure to find the
crucial point j" througll \\rllicll line Zl-J ffillst pass in verging toward
point for \vit11 the Jletlsis so],'cd, the trisection is solved. This
l11echanical procedure of n1()ving ZH so t11at Z adheres continually
Proposition XIX 3
6
7
to the circumference vlllile Z1/ contil1ually passes throllgh IJoint E
perrnitsQ (chosen on ZH Sf) tllat is eqllal to the radius) to trace a
conchoid which intersects BZ at j"'. l11is is a conclloid referred to a
circular base, namely, the circunlference of tIle circle. \Xlhile this
exact solution is not kno\vn in antiquity, a similar reduction of the
trisection problem to a neuJis is found in lemma eight of tIle Liber
assumptorunl (or Le/IIIJJala) found only in Arabic but attributed to
i\rchimedes. For a discussion of both of these propositions and the
subsequent history of the solution of the problem by the Banu l\Iiisa,
see Appendix VI.
Proposition XIX
1-39 "Et .... nostrum." This method of approximating a cube number is
a simple one. It involves the conversion of the number whose cube
root is desired to an improper sexagesimal fraction such that the
denominator is a perfect cube, and then finding the perfect cube num-
ber which is nearest to the numerator (i.e., ai = {!a where a
is the number whose cube root we seek and n is some multiple of 3).
As the authors suggest, if the original number is converted to "thirds"
(i.e., [a 60
3
]/60
3
), then the root will be expressed in "minutes" (i.e.,
ai = a 60
3
/60); or if the number is converted to "sixths" (i.e.,
[a 60
6
]/60
6
), then the root will be expressed in "seconds" (i.e., al =
60
6
/60
2
If used seriously, this system requires an extensive table
of cube numbers and roots.
Chapter ftve I
Further Versions of the
De mensura circuli
]n Chapter Fi,re I propose to include three more versions of Proposition I
of the De mensura circlllj of Archimedes. They could very well have been
included in Chapter Three with the other emended versions of the De
mens/Ira circuli since they obviously resemble them in some respects. But
I put them together in this chapter because two of them, the Pseudo-
\Tersion and the Version of Albert of Saxony, do not directly
use Proposition X. I of Euclid's Elements as fundamental to their proofs, as
do tIle emended versions of Chapter Three, \vhile the third version, the so-
called r.7ersio abbretJjata-e\ren though it employs Proposition X. I-is
fundamentally a shortened version of the Pseudo-Bradwardine text.
Instead of using Proposition X. I, both tIle Pseudo-Bradwardine and Albert
of Sax()ny \Fersions assert the possibility (in the first part of the proof) of
hIlding an inscribed regular polygon greater than a given surface (the right
triangle witll circunlference and radius as the sides including the right
angle) l)ecause of the continu()us di\Tisibility of the assumed excess of the
circle ()vcr tIle triangle. 'l-ihat is, they do not start with a given regular
pOlyg()ll whc)se area differs fronl tllat of tile circle by an anlount greater than
tllat by which tIle circle is said t() exceed tile triangle and then proceed
()n tIle authority of Proposition X. I to reacll a polygon whose area differs
from tIlat of th.e circle l)y an am()unt less tllall tIle assumed excess of the
circle over the triangle, as was done ill the enlendcd versions of Chapter
Similarly, the proof developed in tIle first four propositions of the
l/Terba filiorl/IIJ gi\ren in Chul)ter Fc)ur cleJes not directly use Proposition X. I
[()f asserting that we call obtain tIle desired polygon whose perimeter, it-
self less tllan tIle circulnference, would be greater than a given line assun1ed
Introduction 3
6
9
to be less than the circlllnference of the circle, alt110ugh in proving their
assertion the Banii j\Ilisa appear t(J assun1e without specification Propo-
sition XII. I 6, which uses the cor()llary to Proposition X.I in its proof.
I n effect, all of the versions wllicll do not directly tlSe Proposition X.I rest
on the assumption made specific by j\lbert of Sa...X011)T that, given t\VO une-
qual continuous (and comparable) magnitudcs, it is always possible to take
from the greater a third magnitude greater than the lesser and less than the
greater of the two given magnitudes, a species of what 1tIurdoch has called
"betweenness" postulates. I The third magnitude is either a regular polygon
greater than a triangle (as in the Pseudo-Bradwardine and .r\lbert of Saxony
versions) or a straight line (equal to the perimeter of such a regular poly-
gon) greater than a given. straight line and less than the circumference of
the circle (as in the proof of the Verba jiliortJIJ1). I do not mean to assert
that either the author of the Pseudo-Bradwardine Version or Albert of
Saxony directly followed the proof of the Verba jiliortlm, since the actual
form of their proofs differs considerably from that of the Verba jiliorum.
But even granting the evident influences of the tradition of the emended
versions of Chapter Three on the proofs of Pseudo-Bradwardine and Al-
I As Mr. Murdoch notes in his paper,
"The Medieval Language of Proportions,"
in A. C. Crombie, ed., Scientific Change (New
York, 1963), pp. 247-48 "betweenness"
postulates assume the following: for all
magnitudes a and b, when a > b, there is
a third magnitude c such that a > b > c.
In speaking of Albert's axiom, Mr. Mur-
doch adds, "This may be an odd way to
state the property betweenness, but Al-
bert is tailoring it to fit the Archimedean
quadrature procedure of the De mensura
rirNlIi. By appeal to this, rather than to the
traditional X. I, he has avoided the suc-
cessive construction of inscribed and cir-
cumscribed polygons with increasing
numbers of sides. This circumvention is
effected because Albert has indeed packed
a generalized X.I (together with various
assumptions validating the existence of
additional magnitudes from consideration
ofthe sums and differences of given magni-
tudes) into his postulate ofcontinuity. Also
notable is his grounding of his assumption
upon the properties of divisibility of the
geometric continuum, a move charac-
teristic of the later medieval philosopher-
mathematician." A "betweenness" pro-
position similar to Albert's postulate is
found in Archimedes, On Spiral Lines,
Proposition IV. This proposition could
easily have been known to Albert of
Saxony, since it was present in the form of
the Moerbeke translation as Proposition 11
of a hybrid tract on quadrature inserted in
the midst of Johannes de Muris' De ar/e
mensurandi (MS Paris, BN lat. 73 80, 59r):
"2&. Duabus lineis datis inequalibus, recta
scilicet et circuli periferia, possibile est
accipere rectam maiore datarum linearum
minorem, minore autem maiorem." Cf.
the Moerbeke translation in Vat. Ottob.
!at. 1850, 12[. The hybrid tract is dated at
Paris in 1340. See M. Clagett on ]ohannes
de Muris in Isis, vo!. 43 (195 2 ), pp. 2.3
6
-
42. This tract will be discussed at length in
Volume IT.
370 Further Versions of De menmra circuli:
bert of Saxony, it is not beyond possibility that these proofs were in some
fashion influenced by the proof of the Banii Miisa.
Other similarities are evident among the three versions of this chapter.
They all depend on a basic proposition which asserts that a regular polygon
is equal to a right triangle one of whose sides including the right angles is
equal to the perimeter while the other is equal to the line drawn from the
center of the polygon to the middle of one of the sides (Pseudo-Bradwar-
dine Version, Proposition I; Versio abbrevata, Proposition I; Albert of
Saxony Version) Conclusion V). Many of the versions in Chapter Three
have a similar proposition) and sometimes they have such a proposition
stated as a separate proposition (e.g., see the discussion of the equivalent
proposition in the introduction to the Corpus Christi Version). But the
versions of this chapter are the only ones to give the area of the polygon
as equal to a right triangle; the otller versions say the area is equal to the
product of one half the perimeter and the line drawn from the center of the
polygon to the middle of one of the sides, or something very similar to
this. In short, only these versions of this chapter use the expression right
triangle to stand for the area in question. I suppose that this was used by
the author of the first of these versions as a kind of formal analogy with the
statement of the principal quadrature proposition given in the De mensura
circllli where the circle itself is said to be equal to a right triangle. I do not
mean to press the point unduly, but the fact that all three of these versions
use the same expression seems clearly to tie them together. It should also
be noticed that the scholastic form of presentation is a further point of
similarity in the three versions, although its use is much reduced in the
r'''ersio abbreviata.
I. The Pseudo-BradwardineVersion (vcrsio T/aticana)
'Turning to the f1TSt of tIle tllree \rersions, the Pseudo-Bradwardine tract,
we should observe first tl,at tIle unique text of i ~ is appended to the Geo-
Hle/ria ()f Bradwardil1e ill a nlanllscript tllat I judge to be of the fourteenth
century (see Siglum belo\\r). It is as if Bradwardine-or, as is more likely,
some otller autllor-decided to expal1d in the forl11 of an appendix the
abbrev'iated treatn1el1t of tIle ql!adrature problen1 given in t11e body of the
G"'fo",elria (see Cllupter 1 ~ \ \ o Section 2, for t11at treatn1cnt). The title of
I Pseudo-Brad\vardine \T 371
our \'ersion, ,Qtladrt.11'I"t/I" circll/i {!ell/OJlftrcili1JC (01/t;!'Itll're, resembles tIle title
of the chapter on quadrature found ill the GOfcla11us tract (see Chapter
Three, Section4). Thcexpressitjn '(tC) c{)nclude demOl1strati,rely the cluadra-
ture of the circle" brings to mind tIle (listitlction 111ade b)! i\lbert of Saxony
in his ,QtleJlio de qtladral'Ir(J circII/i (Section 3 belo"r, lines 77-83) between
quadrature ad intellecttll)' ("finding a square and del110nstratively proving
that it is equal to the circle") and guadrature lId .retJS"'JI ("finding a square
such that the sense reveals no differel1ce between it and some circle").
The author goes on to assert that in order to reach the objective expressed
in the title, he must first prove five other conclusions which will stand as
premises for the proof of t11e main conclusion. As I have noted, the first
conclusion equates a regular polygon to a right triangle with the perimeter
and the line drawn from the center to the middle of one side as the sides
including the right angle. As in the Versio abbreviata, the particular regular
polygon used in the Pseudo-Bradwardine Version is a regular pentagon
(while that used by Albert of is a square). The second proposition
in the Pseudo-Bradwardine holds that the perimeter of any polygon cir-
cumscribed about a circle is longer than the circumference of the circle
transformed into a straight line. The reader is referred to my introductions
to the Cambridge and Corpus Christi versions in Chapter Three (Sections
I and 5) for a discussion of similar statements in the various emended \Ter-
sions. Notice also that the direct conversion of curved line to a straight
line (which indeed is implicitly assumed in all the proofs of Proposition I
of the De mensura circuli) is also specifically made a part of the proof of
Proposition III of the Verba filiorum (see line 16-17, and the Commentary,
line 36). In the proof of Proposition 11, Pseudo-Bradwardine makes use of
Ptolemy's 4-4Imagest. Incidentally, the only other authority citedbyourauthor
is Euclid, whose Elements is cited three times (see the Commentary), twice in
the first proposition and once in the last. The third and fourth propositions
of the Pseudo-Bradwardine tract assert that when we have given a surface
that is less than a given circle (Proposition Ill) or a surface greater than a
given circle (Proposition IV) we can in the first case inscribe a regular
polygon in the given circle which is greater than the given surface (Propo-
sition ill) or in the second case circumscribe a regular polygon about the
given circle which is less than the proposed surface (Proposition IV). The
proof of these propositions is based on the assumption that the latitude of
excess between the given circle and the given surface is always divisible,
which, as I have already noted earlier, is the feature distinguishing this
version from the versions of Chapter Three. The fifth proposition merely
371 Further Versions of De mensllra circuli:
holds that if a given surface is neither greater than nor less than a circle:t
it must be equal to the circle. This is said to be self-evident.
With these five propositions or conclusions assumed, the main quadra-
ture proposition is then provable. For if the circle is said to be greater than
the right triangle composed of circumference and radius at the right angle)
a regular polygon which is greater than the triangle can be inscribed in the
circle by Proposition Ill. But by Proposition I it is shown that such a
polygon must be equal to a right triangle which is less than the proposed
triangle composed of circumference and radius at the right angle. This then
contradicts the inference drawn from the hypothesis that the circle is
greater than the proposed right triangle; hence that hypothesis must be
false. In precisely the same way, by the use of Propositions IV and I and
11, the hypothesis that the circle is less than the proposed right triangle can
be sho\\n to be false. Thus, by Proposition V the main proposition follows.
~ f ~ text has been constructed from the unique Vatican manuscript.
Notice that the scribe of that manuscript often uses the spelling pologonia
instead of pnligonia, but I ha,'e everywhere used poligonia. Observe also the
form d'7CltlJ for datlls. Here I have preserved the daclt/s readings (although a
later hand has corrected dacto to dato in one place). Incidentally, it can be
remarked that a later hand has often written over letters to clarify them.
The scribe uses both ci and li before vowels. I have used li throughout.
The diagrams are as in the manuscript, and the marginal folio references
are, of course, to that manuscript.
Sigllllll ~ f jlfantlscrtpt
~ a = \!atican lat. 3102, IIIV-II2V, 14c.
The Vatican Version
374
Further Versions of De mensura circuli:
[Versio Vaticana]
IIIV / Quadraturam circuli demonstrative concludere. Pro evidenti de-
monstratione habenda quinque demonstrabiles conclusiones que pre-
mise erunt pro conclusione proposita. Quarum prima sit ista:
[1.] OMNIS FIGURA POLIGONli\ EQUILATERA EST EQU-
5 TRIl\NGULO ORTHOGONlO, CUlUS UNUM LATERUM
ANGULU1\{ AMBIENTIUM (EST PERPENDICULA-
RIS> i\ CENTRO POLIGONIE j\D PUNCTUM MEDIUM UNIUS
L..-\ TERIS POLIGONIE PROTRACTU1\1, ET ALTERUM EST
EQUi\LE LATERlBUS lLLIUS POLIGONIE SIMUL
IU
Ista conclusio probatur, et ad probandum sit figura poligonia in
forma, pentagonus ..:-4BCDE, a cuius centro Z ducatur ZG perpen-
dicularis ad G' punctum medium ipsius DE lateris pentagoni propositi
[Fig. 54]. Protractis itaque duabus lineis ZD et ZE ad E et D angulos
poligonie, patet quod inde causabitur triangulus ZDE, quem prima
probo esse quintam partern pentagoni propositi, quia in dacto pen-
tagono sunt precise quinque tanti trianguli [quorum cuiuslibet] quan-
titas est dactus triangulus DEZ. Igitur dactus triangulus est quinta
pars pentagoni. Consequentia nota est. Antecedens apparet, nam pro-
tractis lineis ab ipso Z centra pentagoni ad omnes angulos ipsius patet
quod in universo causabuntur quinque trianguli in predicto pentagono
composit() triangulo predicto, quorum 4 quilibet erit equalis dacto
triangul() Z ]JE'; quod probo. Omnes illi trianguli sunt equilateri cum
6-7 <est perpendicuJarjs) s/lpplel'i:
[/'frsio abbrel'ialtl, 2- J
7 poligonie (0,.,.. bit cs: pologonie
I 1 (/1JleDE del....4t/ GE
2 C01l1posito (orl". f.X' COOlpuncto (?)
1 Pseuclo-Bradwardine Version
[The Vatican Version]
375
To conclude demonstrari,rely the quadrature of tIle circle. For an evident
demonstration fi"re demonstrable C011ClLlsions are needed-conclusions
\l/hich will constitute premises for the [main] proposed conclusion. The
firs t of these is this:
[1.] EVERY REGULf\R POLYC;'ON IS EQUI\L TO A RIGHT
TRIANGLE ONE OF \VI-IOSE SIDES INCLUDING THE RIGHT
l\NGLE (IS THE PERPENDICULAR) DR1\WN FR01\f THE CEN-
OF TI-IE POLYGON TO THF: l\JIDDLE POINT OF ON'E SIDE
OF POLYGON I\ND THE OTf-IER IS EQUAL TO THE
OF THE POLYGON.
Proof: For proving it, let there be a polygonal figure, the pentagon
ABCDE, from whose center Z the perpendicular ZG is drawn to point
G, the middle point of DE, a side of the proposed polygon [see Fig. 54].
8
A
M
\\,Then the two lines ZD and ZE have been drawn to angles E and D of
the polygon, it is evident that 6. ZDE will be formed. This triangle I
first prove to be a fifth part of the proposed pentagon; for in the given
pentagon there are exacdy five such triangles each of which is equal to
the given 6 DEZ. Therefore, the given triangle is a fifth part of the
pentagon. The consequence is known. The antecedent is apparent; for
lines drawn from Z of the pentagon to all.of its angles, it
is e\rident that they will form in toto five triangles composing the aforesaid
pentagon. Anyone of the [other] four of these triangles will be equal to
!:- ZDE. This I prove. All of these triangles have sides equal [repectively]
376 Further Versions of De mensura circuli:
triangulo ZDE; igitur equianguli; et igitur equales. Consequentie
R ~ note ex prima Euclidis; antecedens patet, quia latera eorum non sunt
nisi latera dacti pentagoni, que per casum sunt equalia. Similiter linee
a centra pentagoni protracte ad angulos eius sunt equalia, quoniam
a centro ad circumferentiam circuli circumscribentis propositum pen-
tagonum. Patet igitur quod omnes illi trianguli sunt equilateri cum
30 triangulo ZDE. Habito igitur quod triangulus ZDE est quinta pars
pentagoni, protrahatur igitur medietas GD lateris pentagoni in con-
tinuum et directum quousque sit equalis omnibus lateribus pentagoni
daeti simul sumptis, que sit GAl, que dividatur in quinque partes
equales 5 lateribus pentagoni, sic quod divisiones cadunt in punctis
~ /(., L, F, H. Et tunc a punctis divisionum rectilinee ducantur ad Z
centrum poligonie. Quibus stantibus patet quod in triangulo orthogo-
nio ZGi'lf causabuntur 5 trianguli, quos simul sumptos probe esse
equales dicta pentagono. Nam quilibet istorum 5 triangulorum est
equalis uni quinte. Ergo omnes ~ simul sunt equales pentagono. Con-
40 sequentia nota; antecedens probatur, scilicet, quod quilibet istorum
triangulorurn sit equalis uni quinte pentagoni, quia quilibet illorum
est equalis triangulo ZDE. Igitur qujlibet illorum est equalis uni
quinte pentagoni, ut probatum est. Antecedens patet, quia quilibet
illorum est equalis triangulo ZGK; nam triangulus ZG'K est equalis
4 ~ sibi et quilibet aliorum 4 est eidem equalise Quod probo, quia omnes
sunt super equales bases per casum et equalis altitudinis [quoniam]
sunt inter lineas eqllidistantes, et 11oc, si a centro Z duceretur equi-
distans linee G'll!. Igitur [per] 38 primi elementorum Euclidis omnes
illi 4 trianguli sunt triangulo ZG'K equales. Igitur cum ipse sit etiam
50 sibi ipsi equalis, quilibet illorum quinque triangulorum erit equalis
triangul() ZG'K. 'Tunc univcrsaliter igitur quilibet illorum est equalis
triangulo ZG'K. 'J(unc universaliter igitur quilibet illorum est equalis
Z IJC'. 'fenet conscc!uentia, quia triangulus Z DE est equalis triangulo
ZG'/<,P, Cllffi Si11t super cquales IJuses et inter lineas equidistantes sicut
~ ~ si de puncta producerctur eqllidistans a ipso Z. Sed cum trial1gulus
Z [)J-:.' sit quil1ta pars pentagoni, l)atet propositum, quod causat ante-
cedens prolJandun1. J-Iahito igitur quod omnes illi quinque trianguli
sinlul sunlpti sunt equales pentagono dacto, arguitur sic: Gumes illi
sin1ul Slll11pti SUllt idel11 qlHJd Z G ~ l l trianglllus ort110gonius, cuius
;0 ante J-labito del. _,la probo igitur quod 55 produceretur corr. ex producueatur (?)
latera rrianguloru1l1
I Pselldo-llradwardine \Tersion 377
to those of Z D1;'. 1'I1ereforc, tlley
r
are of equal angles; therefore, tlley"
are equal. The consequences are fr()m the first [book] of Euclid.
The antecedel1t is becallse their sides are nothil1g more than t11e
sides of the givren pentagon, wllich are equal by construction. Similarly
the lines drawn from the center of the l-1cntagon to its angles are equal,
being drawn from the center to th.e circumference of the circle circum-
scribing the proposed pentagon. It is evident, therefore, that all of these
triangles have sides equal [respectively"] to those of L.\ ZDE. I-Ience, \vith
it granted that L ZDE is a ftll part of the pel1tagon, CD, half of a side
of the pentagon, is protracted continuously and directly until it equals
the perimeter of tIle polygon. The [complete] protraction is Gjlf, \vhich
we let be divided into five parts equal to the five sides of the pentagon,
with K, L, F, and H as the points of division. Then from the points of
division let straight lines be drawn to the center Z of the polygon. \\!ith all
of this accepted, it is evident that five triangles will be formed in the right
6. ZGAf. I shall prove that these five triangles taken together are equal
to the said pentagon, for any of these five triangles is equal to a fifth [of
the pentagon]. Hence all five together are equal to the pentagon. The
consequence is known; the antecedent is proved, namely, that any of these
triangles is equal to one fifth of the pentagon since any of them is equal
to L ZDE. Therefore, any of them is equal to one fifth of the pentagon,
as is proved. The antecedent is evident because any of them is equal to
L ZGK, for 6 ZGKis equal to itself and any of the other four is equal to
the same [quantity]. I prove this, for all of them are on equal bases, by
reason of construction, and are of equal altitude, being bet\"\reen parallel
lines if from Z a line were drawn parallel to line Gill. Therefore, by
1.38 of the Elements of Euclid, all four of these triangles are equal to 6
ZGK. Therefore, since 6 ZGK is equal to itself, anyone of the five
triangles will be equal to 6 ZGK. So, universally, anyone of them is
equal to 6 ZGK and, universally, anyone of them is equal to Z DE.
This consequence holds, since 6ZDE=6.ZGK, both triangles being on
equal bases and between parallel lines if a line parallel [to GK] were drawn
through point Z. But since 6 ZDE is one fifth of the pentagon, the
proposition is evident; for the antecedent causes it to be proved. There-
fore, with it granted that these five triangles together are equal to the
pentagon, it is argued as follows. All of these triangles taken together are
[by construction] the same as the right 6 ZGM, one ofwhose sides includ-
ing the right angle, namely, ZG, is perpendicular at G, the middle [point]
378 Further Versions of De menmra circuli:
60 unum laterum rectum angulum ambientium, scilicet ZG, est perpen-
dicularis ad G, medium ipsius DE lateris poligonie descripte, et alte-
rum, scilicet GM, trianguli predicti est equale omnibus lateribus poli-
ganie simul sumptis, per casum. Sequitur quod figura poligonia equi-
latera est equalis triangulo orthogonio, cuius unum laterum etc., ut
dicit sumptio.
un / Et sicut probatur de ista poligonia, ita potest conformiter de
quibuscunque probari. Sequitur quod omnis figura poligonia equila-
tera est equalis triangulo orthogonio et hec erat presumptio probanda.
Secunda conclusio probanda erit ista:
70 [11.] LATERl\ CUIUSLIBET FIGURE POLIGONIE CIRCULO
CIRCUl\1SCRIPTE SIMUL SUMPTA FACIUNT LINEAM LON-
GIOREl\{ CIRCULI PREDICTI RECTIFI-
T.t\.
Probatur quia .-10 et SA medietates duorum laterum dacte poligo-
75 nie incur\?entur ad circumferentiam circuli SO, punctis 0, 5 manen-
tibus fixis, cum protracta corda SO [Fig. 55]. Postquam arcus SO
maior erit arcu inferiori ipsius circuli inscripti, quoniam eadem corda
cordans duo arcus circulorum inequalium plus capit de minori quam
I Pselldo-Brad,,'ardjnc Versic)n 379
of side DE' of the described PC)1)TgOJ1, al1d tIle ot11er side of t11c aforesaid
triangle, namely, G'/1/, is equal t() the .pcrilllcter of tl1c polygc)n by construc-
tion. [For which reason] it follo\vs that the reglllar polygon is equal to the
right triangle, one of whose sides, erc., as tIle enunciation states.
.&\nd in the same way that it is proved for this polygon so it can be
pro,.red for any [other regular polygon]. [Thus] it follows that any regular
.polygon is equal to a right triangle, and this was the presumption to be
proved.
1he second conclusion to be proved will be this:
[11.] THE PERI1\IETEJR OF r\NY POLYGON CIRCU1\tISCRlBED
,\BOUT I\ CIRCLE CONSTITUTES I\ I .. l ~ LONGER TI-Ir\N
THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE 1\FORES1\ID CIRCI.lE, [THE
CIRCUiVIFERENCE] HAVING BEEN TR\NSFOR1\IED INTO 1\
STRi\IGHT LINE.
This is proved, because J:40 and SA, halves of two sides of the given
polygon, are transformed into an arc of circle S [A']O, points 5 and
remaining fixed and chord 50 being drawn [between them, as in Fig. 55].
Inasmuch as arc S[A'] 0 will be greater than the inferior arc (5[B]O)-
since a chord acting as a chord of two arcs of unequal circles intercepts
more of the lesser circle than of the larger, as is evident in Book 1* of the
A
Fig. 55
Note: In the manuscript the smaller circle is not drawn so that OS is a chord
of it as well as of the larger circle. Hence I have altered the drawing to
conform with the text.
* This should, perhaps, refer rather to
Book VI, Chapter 7, of the A/1I/fJgesf where
the proposition is incidentally proved for
panicular case (Ptolemy, Syntaxis 11/a-
thematica, ed. J. L. Heiberg, vol. I [Leipzig,
1898], pp. 513-15. a. the Commentary
below, line 79).
380 Further Versions of De menSMra drCIIli:
de maiori, ut patet in prima dictione almagesti Ptholomei, et cum.
80 circumferentia, scilicet OS, sit quinta pars laterum pentagoni, et sic
arcus SO circuli inscripti sit etiam quinta pars inscripti circuli, sequitur
quod quinta pars laterum pentagoni sit maior quinta parte circumfe-
rentie circuli inscripti. Igitur omnia latera poligonie simul sumpta sunt
maiora quam tota circumferentia circuli predicti. Igitur et cetera.
8s Tertia conclusio premittenda sit ista:
[Ill.] DACTA ALIQUA SUPERFICIE QUE SIT MINOR DAC-
TO ORCULO EST DABILIS ALIQUA FIGURA POLIGONIA
INSCRIPTIBILIS EIDEM CIRCULO PROPOSITO MAIOR SU-
PERFICIE DATA.
go Probatur quia ex quo ille circulus est maior dacta superficie et ipsam
divisibiliter excedat, ergo infra latitudinem excessus locabilis est, et
per consequens inscriptibilis est poligonia. Tenet consequentia, quia
,"el obstaret magnitudo excessus vel parvitas; non magnitudo, ut no-
tun1 est, nee par\7itas, ut probo, quia sicut magna poligonia est loca-
95 bilis intra magnum excessum ita intra quodcunque parvius potest
locari minor, cum poligonia in infinitum sit divisibilis seu diminu-
ibilis. Tunc universaliter intra illam latitudinem excessus locabilis et
inscriptibilis est poligonia. Per consequens igitur illam sic locatam
oporteat sic inscribi ipsi circulo et circumscribi dacte superficiei. Se-
lOO quitur quod ipsa sic locata erit minor. 19itur conclusio valet.
Quarta conclusio:
[1\7.] DACTl\ ALlQUA SUPERFlClE QUE SIT MAlOR CIR-
CUIJO DABILIS EST POLIGONlA CIRCUMSCRIP-
TIBILIS CIRCULO SI'f MAIOR CIRCULO DATO ET
1\1JNOR SUPERFIClt
1
: PROPOSITA.
Inclusum sit minus includente et maius eo quod includit, proposito
qu()d contingit aliquam poligoniam predicto circulo CirCU1TIScribi mi-
norem super6cie dacta et n1aiorem circlllo proposito. Patet quia ex
quo dacta superficies est tnaior dacto circulo, ipsum tunc divisibiliter
J IU excedit. Igitur eadClTI ratione qua slll)ra intra latitudinem excessus
patest col()cari, et patet l1ec conclusio ut precedens.
8 I inscripti I tor,.. e;..: circlll11scripti
8 ante conel usio del. ..:40 suppositio
88-89 nlaio[ superticie data
intra' JIf!jrt/ ser.
J03-10S dabilis ... proposita RIg...40 et
I11aior superficie proposita .40; (sed
(orr. 11.... 2 Ininor ex nlaior)
106 al1te inclusul11 del. COI1-
I Pseudcl-Brad\\rardjnc Version 3
81
_ of I>tolemy-al1d since t11e arc jT,(0"1']0 is one fifth of the perimeter
of the pentagon, while the arc Sl B]C) is also onc fiftIl of tl1e inscribed
circle, it follo\v's t11at one filth of tIle l1erimcter of the pentago11 is greater
than ()ne fifth of the circlllmerence of tIle inscribed circle. Tllerefore, the
perimeter ()f the polygon is greater than tIle whole circumference of the
aforesaid circle. Therefore, and so forth.
TIle third conclusion to be premised is this:
[Ill.] \\rITH SOJ\;fE SURFI\CE GIVEN j\S LESS THI\N J\ GIVEN
THERE Cl\N BE GIVEN S01.fE [REGULI\R] POLYGON
INSCRIBABLE IN THJ\T PROPOSED CIRCLE WI-IICI-I WrILIJ BE
GREATER THAN THE SURFi\CE.
Proof: From the fact that the circle is greater than the given surface and
exceeds it by a divisible amount, therefore within the latitude of the excess
[such] a polygon can be placed and consequently is inscribable. The
consequence follows, for either the largeness or the smallness of the excess
would prevent [the location of the polygon in the excess]. But not the
largeness, as is known, nor the smallness, as I prove. For just as a large
polygon can be placed within a large excess, so a smaller one can be placed
within any smaller excess, since a polygon is divisible or climinishable
to infinity. Then universally within that latitude of excess a polygon
can be placed and inscribed. Hence, it ought to be so inscribed in that
circle and circumscribed about the given surface. It follows that this
polygon so placed will be less [than the circle]. Therefore, the conclusion
is valid.
Fourth conclusion:
[IV.] WITH SOME SURFACE GIVEN AS GREATER THAN A
GIVEN CIRCLE, THERE CAN BE GIVEN A POLYGON CIR-
ABOUT THE CIRCLE \VHICH IS GREATER
THAN THE GIVEN CIRCLE AND LESS THAN THE PROPOSED
SURFACE.
[The proof follows from this consideration:] something included is less
than that which includes it and is greater than that which it includes, it
having been proposed that some polygon can be circumscribed about the
aforesaid circle which is less than the given surface and greater than the
given circle. This is evident, for, since the given surface is greater than
the given circle, it exceeds it by a divisible amount. Therefore, by the
same argument as above, it (a polygon) can be placed within the latitude
of excess. And this conclusion is evident in the same way as the preceding
onc.
381 Further Versions of De mensura czrGII/i:
Quinta conclusio:
[V.] SI ALIQUAM DACTAM SUPERFICIEM REPUGNAT
ESSE MAIOREM ET ETIAM ESSE I\1lNOREM CIRCULO
115 PROPOSITO, IPSA ERIT El NECESSARIO EQUALIS.
Ista patet de se.
[VI.] HIIS PREMISSIS PROBO POSTEA QUADRATURAM
CIRCULI CONCLUDERE.
Quia, sit circulus Z ad cuius centrum Z ducatur semidiameter ZC
110 [Fig. 56]. Similiter a centro Z protraham perpendicularem super semi-
diametrum ZC in continuum et directum usque erit equalis circum-
ferentie circuli. Deinde a puncto C ducam lineam rectam ad punctum
G, quod possum. Quibus sic protractis, patet quod inde causabitur
triangulus CGZ. Tunc arguo sic: CGZ triangulus est equalis propo-
1S25 sito circulo Z. Igitur possibile est demonstrative probare propositum
circulum esse quadrato equalem, et per consequens dactum circulum
quadrare. Antecedens probo, quia oppositum implicat, ergo repugnat
triangulum propositum esse maiorem dacto circulo et etiam implicat
ipsum esse minorem ipso; ergo necessario erit sibi equalise Conse-
130 quentia 110ta per quintarn suppositionem. Antecedens probo quia quo
ad utramque partern; primo quo ad primam, ut quod implicat ipsum
esse maiorem. Quia, si est maior eo, ergo supra circulum circum-
scriptibilis est poligonia equilatera maior circulo proposito et minor
triangulo dacto per quartam suppositionem. Sit igitur ita poligonia
135 circulo circumscripta, cuius unum latus BCD secundum medium eius
punctum C contingens circulum in puncta contactus semidyametri
cum circuJo. 'T
4
unc arguo sic: l... atera poligonie simul sumpta sunt
nlaiora quam circun1ferentia dacti circuli inscripti rectificata, quare
ipsa lil1ea recta equalis circumferentie circuli propositi per secundam
I IJseuclo-Bradwarcline ,,'erSiCHl
Fifth conclusioll:
[V.] IF IT IS SURFJ\CE
TO Tl-I,\N OTt 'Jt}-l/\N /\ PRCJI)QSED CIRCLE,
IT \X1LL )/. Bl-4: I\IJ 11-
1
6
latera poligonii AC011/. BI 69-70 pariter sumpti Of/I. /1 . . .
57 ypothenussalium C 72 contra: quod est contra A / pred
1x1
(.
57 scilicet 0111 ./1 dicit ..<I
... ypothenusalium: et cetera A 75 id est BCD] cuius A et F
5 A. ER: ER est minor EA CD / 76 item: tunc A
/ minor ./1 77 111aiore ..---1
2. De ,'Im)is slIperjiticbus of Joha nrles de "finemue 457
== 2 jj".. /I1J.l-1Jlercfore,byII.I [of the ElcIJJCfJtS],
44B == 2 L By tIle same reasol1illg, CB === 2 L BeE.
By the same argument repeated a nUlllber of times, (/'JB + BC +
+ ilfl\: -t- i\,-rO -f- O/J -i- PQ -t-- == 2 (L + BeB
+ D ECJlf + 6 + ,/\ Ei\lO + E'PO + 6 EfQ + L E.Q_4),
that is, the product of E'R and all of tIle sides of the polygon is equal to
double all of the face triangles. But L R is a right angle. Hence > ER,
and circumference ./1Cl\!P is greater than the perimeter of the polygon,
that is, the circumference is greater than the sum of the straight lines
BC, CN!, hff\l, J.\70, OP, PQ, Q/1. Hence, circumference) >
(ER perimeter of polygon). But (E'A circumference) = 2 6. F, be-
cause ST is equal to circumference P and E_4 = SZ. Furthermore
(ER perimeter of polygon) = 2 (the sum of all the face triangles).
Therefore, 2 6 F > 2 (the sum of all the face triangles). Therefore, half
of the one is greater than half of the other, that is, 6 F > (the sum of
all the face triangles). But the sum of all the face triangles is greater than
the lateral surface of the included cone DEH. Therefore, 6 F is greater
than the lateral surface of cone DEH. Therefore, it is not equal to it, and
this is contradictory to that which the pseudographer stated earlier. It
remains, therefore, that F could not be equal to the lateral surface of a
cone situated on a base less than circle ACJ.VP but with an altitude equal
to that of cone DAB, that is, with altitude DE.
Following the pseudographer once more, let F be equal to the lateral
surface of a cone situated on a base greater than circle AC!\lP but whose
458 Archimedes' Dt sphaera et ryli"dro
midis cathetus sit DE. Brevitatis tamen causa sit DEH piramis ro-
tunda proposita, cuius ypothenusa EHsit equalis SZ. Et circumferentia
80 KH sit equalis ST. Dicatque falsigraphus F non esse equalem curve
superhciei piramiclis DEH, sed alterius piramidis eiusdem altitudinis
site in maiori basi. Et sit basis illius piramiclis circulus ACNP. Piramis
vero fundata super ACNPsit DEA, cuius scilicet DEA curve super-
ficiei sit, secundum falsigraphum, F equalise
85 Improbatio. In hoc triangulo DEH, D est rectus; maneat enim
tota prior linearum dispositio. Ergo Hest acutus. Ergo EHR est
obtusus; ergo maior quam R. Ergo ER est maius EH; et omnia latera
poligonii pariter sumpta sunt maiora quam circumferentia HK. Ergo
maius est id quod fit ex ER in ambitum poligonii quam id quod fit
90 ex EHin HK, scilicet, SZ in ST. Sed quod fit ex SZ in ST est duplum
trianguli F. Et quod fit ex ER in ambitum poligonii duplum est ad
omnes triangulos ypothenusales. Ergo maiores sunt omnes trianguli
ypothenusales quam F, subduplum subduplo sicut et duplum duplo
maius. Sed F, secundum falsigraphum, est equalis curve superficiei
95 piramidis DEA. Ergo omnes trianguli ypothenusales sunt maiores
curva superficie DEA rotunde piramidis. Superficies inclusa maior
sit superficie includente, quod est impossibile. Relinquitur ergo quod
curva superficies DAB non sit equalis F.
Cum ergo F non sit equalis curve superficiei alicuius rotunde pira-
100 midis site in maiori basi vel in minori quam in proposite piramidis
basi, que sit eiusdem altitudinis proposite piramicli, relinquitur F esse
equalem curve superficiei proposite piramidis, quod proposui. Hoc
itaque theorema satis elegans, satis eleganter propositum, saris eleganti
venustatur corollario.
105 [Corollarium:] Ex hoc manifestum quod proportio curve superficiei
79 EH sit fr. A
80 K11: HK A / phalsigraphus I
8I eiusdem altitudinis 0111...4
82. maiore base ...4
85 D: D angulus A / maneat B manet ./4C
88 pariter: insimul ...4
89 ex: ex ductu A
89-91 quam.... poligonii 0111....4
91 duplum est fr. A
93 F: F triangulus A / et onl. A
94 maius OHI .L4 / F: F triangulus / ~ et Ir.
A post falsigraphunl
96 DEA.... piramidis: piramidis DEA .. /1
96-97 Superficies ... superficie: Et sit su-
perficies inclusa maior A
99 alicuius 0111....4
100 base 4'4..
100-101 in
J
basi A piramis proposita
BC
101 eiusdem: equalis A
102 proposui: IJroposuinlus ~ 1
103 theoreJna BI theoreuma ..4/-/ teorema
C'!" "3 4 satls
2
satls 01/J ..I.
1
4 corellari() 11/ corrollario F' correlario
(?) L1 corollariun1 .1
15 quod: est l]llod/l
2. De (ur1)is superftciebl/s of Johanncs de Tinemue 459
is ]). For the sake of brevit)r, ho\vever, let cone ]]Ef-:l be the
proposed cone whose slant l1cigl1t l ..JHis equal toj'Z. f\ndlet cjrcumference
be equal to . ..:\nd let t11e pseudographer say t11at F is not eqllal to
the lateral surface of cone l)Eli, lJut [to that] of another cone of the same
but situated on a greater base. the base of that cone be circle
.. while the cone based on j4.Ci.\:rp we let be It is the lateral
surface of this cone DE.,4 tl1at the pseudographer supposes F equals.
Refutation: In this L DE"H, L D is a right angle, for the whole
arrangement of lines remains as before. Therefore, L H is an acute angle.
Therefore, L EHR is obtuse and thus greater than L R. Therefore,
ER > EH and the perimeter of the polygon is greater than circumference
HK. Therefore, (ER perimeter of polygon) > (brI HK), and hence
(ER perimeter of polygon) > (5Z ST). But (SZ ST) = 2 6 F, and
(ER perimeter of polygon) = 2 (the sum of all the face triangles). Hence
the sum of all the face triangles is greater than F, the halves being related
as their doubles. But F according to the pseudographer is equal to the
lateral surface of cone DEA. Therefore, the sum of all the face triangles
is greater than the lateral surface of cone DEA, the included surface being
greater than the including surface, which is impossible. It remains, there-
fore, that the lateral surface of DEA is not equal to F.
Since, therefore, F is not equal to the lateral surface of some cone of the
same altitude but situated on a base greater than or less than the base of the
proposed cone, it remains that F is equal to the lateral surface of the
proposed cone, which is the proposition I have put forth. And so this
theorem, sufficiently elegant and having been proposed with sufficient
elegance, made beautiful by a sufficiently elegant corollary.
[Corollary:] From this it is evident that the ratio of the lateral surface
460 Archimedes' De spha"fJ et cy/iNlro
rotunde piramidis ad suam basim est sicut ypothenuse sue ad semidia-
metrum basis sue. Archimenides enim in quadratura circuli ostendit
circulum esse equalem triangulo orthogonio, cuius unum laterum rec-
tum angulum continentium equatur circumferentie circuli, reliquum
110 vero semidiametro. Cum itaque ex ductu circumferentie in semidia-
metrum fiat superficies dupla circuli et eiusdem circumferentie in
ypothenusam fiat superficies dupla curve superficiei piramidis, erit
proportio producti ad productum que producentis ad producens. Ergo
que est proportio dupli curve superficiei piramidis ad duplumsue
115 eadem est ypothenuse ad semidiametrum. Sed duplorum et subdu-
plorum eadem est proportio. Ergo proportio curve superficiei pira-
midis ad suam basim que ypothenuse ad semidiametrum basis.
11. CUIUSLIBET COLUMPNE ROTUNDE CURVA SUPER-
FICIES EQUALIS EST TETRAGONO QUI CONTINETUR SUB
LINEIS EQUALIBUS AXI COLUMPNE ET CIRCUMFERENTIE
BASIS.
5 Hoc eodem genere demonstrationis quo et precedens theorema a-
struitur. Sive enim dicatur quadrangulum equale curve superficiei ma-
ioris columpne eiusdem altitudinis, sive minoris columpne quam sit
ilia cuius axis et circumferentia basis sunt equalia lineis continentibus.
quadrangulum, probabitur contrarium.
10 Describatur enim intra basim maiorem poligonium equalium late-
rum minorem circulum non contingentium. Et erigantur a singulis
angulis perpendiculares basi et equales axi, que omnes cadunt in cur-
yam superficiem maioris columpne; alioquin due linee super punctum
unum eidem linee orthogonaliter insistent, propter lineam que suo
15 circuitu deseribit superficiem columpnalem Si igitur capita linearum
perpendicularium reetis lineis coniungantur, fient quadranguli rec-
tanguli interiorem columpnam minime eontingentes, qui omnes pariter
accepti erunt maiores curva superficie minoris columpne incluse et
112r minores n1aiforis, et equales ei quod fit ex duetu perpendicularium
106 basim: piramidem A
107 Archimedes F
] 1 I circuli C trianguli circuli B ad circu-
lum A' ....
I 12 curve ... primidis .4 superficie piranli-
dis El pramidis superficie C
1 16 proportio: que est /1
I 17 basem ./1 / que: eadC111 est / .poJI
basis add. A et p rin
I 11 B 0111. C IIn, J 28. ..4D
5 theoreuma ..(1
8 sunt: sint
10 basetn .L4
14 eidenl ... insistent: orthogonaliter insis-
tunt uni et cidenl linee .. / insisterunt
(r) C'
16--1 7 rcctianguli lJ
2 De t'urvis superftcieblls of Johanncs de Tinernue 4
6
I
of a cone to its base is tIle sal11e as tllat of its slal1t heigllt tCJ the radius of
its base. For j\rclumedes in the Qlltldratl,re of the Circle shows that a circle
is equal to a right triangle one of whose sides containing the right angle is
equal to the circumference of tIle circle \vhile the otl,er [is equal] to the
radius. J\nd so, since from tIle product of the circumference and radius
arises a surface double that of the circle and froIn the product of tIle same
circumference and the slant height arises a sllrface double that of the cone,
tIle ratio of product to product will be as the ratio of multiplying factors
to multiplying factors. Therefore, [after the elimination of common
factors] the ratio of double the lateral surface of a cone to double its base
is as the ratio of the slant height to the radius [of the base]. But the ratio
of doubles is the same as that of their halves. Therefore, the ratio of
the lateral surface of a cone to its base is as that of the slant l1eight to the
radius of the base.
11. THE Li\TER1\L SURFACE OF /\NY [RIGHT] CYLINDER IS
TO TH.E RECTANGLE CONTi\INED BY LINES EQUAL
[RESPECTIVELy] TO TI-IE .t\XIS OF Tl-IE CYLINDER AND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE BASE.
This is provided with the same kind of demonstration as the preceding
theorem. For if it be said that the rectangle is equal to the lateral surface
of a cylinder with the same axis but which is either on a greater or lesser
base than that whose axis and base circumference are equal to the lines
containing the rectangle, the contrary will be proved.
For within such a larger base let there be described a regular polygon
whose sides do not touch the smaller circle [which is the base of the
proposed cylinder]. And let there be erected from each of the angles [of
the polygon] a line perpendicular to the base and equal to the all
of which lines fall in the lateral surface of the greater cylinder. Moreover,
two [such] lines [opposite to one another] will be perpendicular to the
same line [each] at one [terminal] point. When this line [with its per-
pendiculars] is rotated, it will generate a cylindrical surface. If, therefore,
the terminal points [of each adjacent pair] of perpendicular lines are joined
by straight lines, there will be produced [a set of] rectangles which do not
touch the interior cylinder at all. All of these rectangles taken together
will be greater than the lateral surface of the lesser, included cylinder and
will be less than [the surface of] the greater [cylinder], and they will be
equal to the product of [one of] the perpendiculars, or the axis, and the
462 Archimedes' De sphaera ,1 ty/inJro
ao sive axis in totum ambitum poligonii, qui maior est circumferentia
basis minoris et minor maioris. Observanti ergo ordinem precedentis
demonstrationis facile patebit propositum.
[Corollarium:] Ex hoc igitur manifestum quod proportio curve Sll-
perficiei columpne ad curvam (supemciem) sue (rotunde) piramidis
25 est tanquam proportio axis columpne ad medietatem ypothenuse pira-
midis. Erit etiam proportio curve superficiei columpne ad suam basim
sicut axis columpne ad quartarn partern diametri basis.
Quia ex duetu circumferentie circuli in medietatem ypothenuse fit
curva superficies piramidis per proximam et ex ductu eiusdem circum-
so ferentie in axem columpne fit curva superficies columpne per istam,
ergo cum productorum et producentium eadem sit proportio, erit
proportio curve superficiei columpne ad curvam piramidis tanquam
axis columpne ad meclietatem ypothenuse piramiclis.
Amplius, ex ductu circumferentie circuli in semicliametri medietatem
35 provenit area circuli, et ex ductu eiusdem circumferentie in axem
columpne provenit curva superficies columpne; ergo cum producto-
rum et producentium.eadem sit proportio, erit proportio curve super-
ficiei columpne ad suam basim que est axis columpne ad quartam
partern diametri basis. Et sic duplex patet corollarium suo iunctum
40 theoremati.
Ill. QUORUMLIBET DUORUM CIRCULORUM CIRCU11FE-
RENTIE SUIS DIAMETRIS SUNT PROPORTION.t\LES.
Describantur duo circuli ABC, EFG circa centra D, H [Fig. 65].
Dicoquod proportio diametri CD..A. ad diametrum GHE que circum-
5 ferentie ABC ad circumferentiam EFG. Si enim ita non fuerit, erit
proportio CA diametri ad G'E diametrum que circumferentie
ad rninorem vel maiorem circumferentiam quam EFG'.
Et sit prima ad minorem, scilicet circumferentiam IK. Describatur
ergo intra circulum EFG poligoniun1 equalium laterum et angulorun1
2.0 sive: sue
2. I minoris: maioris minoris rl
2. 3 igitur: etiam /1 I quod: est quod _4
26 basem ./1
2.8 Quia: quonian1 ./1
3I anle proportio del. ..4 J)roductio
33 piramidis 01)1. B
34 circuli: basis ...4 I senlidian1etri J11cdie-
tatcm: IneclietatclTI sui senlidiamctri ....:]
39-4
0
Et ... theoremati: Sic ergo pater du-
plex corollarium prclnissi theoreulna-
tis A
39 duplex: dupliciterB I corellariunl B
40 teoren1ati C
I III B Of". C 111
n
..1 30. /11) I circulorum
circumferentie /r../1
4 quod .. quonialTI fJC' I dianletri
Ir. ...4 I L]Ue: est que ...
5 ita .' B supra se,.. C:'
7 minorenl vel 111il!dren1: nlaiorenl vel
n1.innrCt11 .. -1 I sit AI
8 scilicet Ire ill/It IK
2 l)e {Ifft'i! sllperjiciebus of Johannes de 4
6
3
perinleter of the l,olygon \vhicll is [itself] greater tllan the circumference
of the lesser base and less than that of the greater. T(herefore, tllat wluch
was proposed \V"ill be easily evidellt to one the order of the
preceding demonstratiol1.
[Corollary:] From this it is evident, therefore, that the ratio of tile lateral
surface of a [right] c)rlillder to tIle lateral surface of its cone [constructed
on the same base] is as the ratio of the axis of the cylinder to one half the
slant height of the cone. Furthermore, the ratio of tIle lateral surface of the
cylinder to its base will be as tllat of the axis of the cylinder to one foutrh
the diameter of the base.
Since from the product of tIle circumference of the [base] circle and
one half the slant height arises tIle lateral surface of a cone, by the preceding
[theorem], and from the product of the same circumference and the axis
of the cylinder arises the lateral surface of the cylinder, by this [theorem],
therefore, the products and the factors producing the products being of the
same ratio, the ratio of the lateral surface of the cylinder to the lateral
surface of the cone will be as that of the axis of the cylinder to one half
the slant height of the cone.
Further, from the product of the circumference of the [base] circle
and one half of its radius arises the area of the circle, and from the product
of the same circumference and the axis of the cylinder arises the lateral
surface of the cylinder. Therefore, since the ratio of the products is the
same as that of the factors producing the products, the ratio of the lateral
surface of the cylinder to its base will be as that of the axis of the cylinder
to one fourth the diameter of its base. And thus the two-part corollary
joined to its theorem is evident.
Ill. THE CIRCUMFERENCES OF ANY TWO CIRCLES ARE
PROPORTIONAL TO THEIR DIAMETERS.
Let the two circles ABC, EFG be described about centers D and H
[see Fig. 65]. I say that the ratio of diameter CDA to diameter GHE is
as that of circumference ABC to circumference EFG. For if it were not
thus, the ratio of diameter CA to diameter GB will be as the ratio of
circumference ABC to a circumference which is either greater than or less
thanEFG.
Now at first let [the ratio of diameters] be as that [of ABC] to a lesser
circumference, namely, IK. Therefore, let there be described within circle
EFG a regular polygon whose sides do not touch circle IK at all. And
464 Archimedes' De sphaera et q/indro
10 minime contingens IKcirculum. Et describatur simile poligoniumintra
circulum ABCet sit IK circa centrum H. Ratio. Age, que est propor-
tio CA diametri ad GE eadem est ABC circumferentie ad IK cir-
cumferentiam ex ypothesi falsigraphi; et que est CA ad EG eadem est
ambitus poligonii ad ambitum poligonii, per primam duodecimi. Ergo
15 que est ABCcircumferentieadIKcircumferentiam eadem est ambitus
poligonii ad ambitum poligonii. Ergo permutatim que est proportio
ABC circumferentie ad ambitum poligonii ABC eadem est circum-
ferentie IK ad ambitum poligonii EFG. Sed ABC est maior ambitu
sui poligonii. Ergo IKcircumferentia maior est ambitu poligonii EFG,
20 quod est falsum. Relinquitur ergo quod non sit proportio ABC cir-
cumferentie ad minorem circumferentiam quam EFG que diametri
CA ad diametrum EG.
Sit itaque proportio ad maiorem circumferentiam quam EFG
que diametri ad diametrum; sitque A,IS. Ergo e contrario proportio
25 EG diarnetri ad AC que AfS ad .L4BC. Est itaque proportio EG ad
AC que EFG circumferentie ad aliquam circumferentiam; sitque ilIa
H. Que est proportio EG ad AC eadem est tarn hIS circumferentie
ad ABCcircumferentiam quam EFG circumferentie ad H. Ergo que
est proportio ad ABC eadem est EFG ad H. Ergo permutatim
30 que est 1llS ad EFG eadem est -44BC ad H. Sed illS est maior EFG.
Ergo ABC est maior H. Est itaque proportio E'G diametri ad AC
I 1 Ratio .4C 011/. B
12 CA: EA A
14-16 Ergo ... poligonii OIIJ. A
17 ad 1 in BC / poligonii ABC: sui poli-
goon ..:4
18 ABC: EFG AC'
19 post poligonii add. -4 vel 1\ BC
20 est falsuI11 Ir. fl / ergo 0/11. C
21 que: que est .4
23 itaque: erf!,o ..4
27 post 11 add. .. 4 ratio
2ft circumfcrcntie OIIJ ...
z9 proportio 0111. B / proportio om. C,
slIprl'; J(r. C'in Illtl1JII reeen/jori
2 l)e CIt11}iJ superficiebus of ]ohanncs de 1
4
inelTIUC 4
6
5
let there be described a similar polygon withil1 ci.rcle ABC; let the center
()f lA: be H. Proceed witll tIle dernonstration as follovls: the ratio of
to diameter GJJ is as tllat of circulnference --,,--lBC to cir-
cumference IK, b
y
T
the l1ypothesis of tile pseudographer, and C.Ll is to
E"G" as tIle perimeter of [one] pOlygOl1 is to the perimeter of the [other]
polygon, by XII.I [of theE'lenJC1Jts]. Therefore, circumference /4BC is to
circumference IR." as the perimeter of tIle one polygon [within _.4.BC] is
to the perimeter of the polygon [witllin .EFG]. Therefore, permutatively,
circumference ./-1 BC is to tIle perimeter of the polygon within .4BC as
circumference IK is to the perimeter of the polygon within EFG. But
[circumference] is greater than the perimeter of its [inscribed]
polygon. Therefore, circumference IK is greater than the perimeter of
C t-----------IA
Fig. 65
polygon EFG, which is false. It remains, therefore, that the ratio of
circumference ABC to a circumference less than EFC is not as that of
diameter CA to diameter EC.
I\nd so let the ratio of ABC to a circumference greater than EFC be
as diameter to diameter. And this [greater circumference] we let be MS.
Therefore, by inversion the ratio of diameter EC to [diameter] AC is
as that of [circumference] MS to [circumference] A BC. And so the ratio
of BC to ACis that of circumference EFC to some circumference, and
that [latter] circumference we let be H. [Thus] the ratio of EG to ACis as
the ratio of circumference MS to circumference ABC and as the ratio of
circumference EFG to [circumference] H. Therefore, [by the equality of
ratios] the ratio of MS to ABC is as that of EFG to H. Therefore, by
the alternation [of ratios] MS is to EFG as ABCis to H. But [circumfer-
ence] jifS is greater than [circumference] EFG. Therefore, [circumference]
..4Ee is greater than [circumference] H. And so the ratio of diameter EG
466 Archimedes' De sphaera et '.YulUlro
que est EFG ad circumfetentiam H minorem ABC, quod prius im-
probatum est. Relinquitur ergo propositum inconcussum.
Idem aliter posset demonstrari per tertiam Archimenidis de men-
S5 sura circuli. Sed non est adeo sufficienter.
[Corollarium.] Ex hoc liquet theoremate quod id quod fit ex ductu
cuiuslibet circumferentie in diametturn alterius circuli est equale ei
quod fit ex ductu secunde circumferentie in diametrum alterius circuli.
IV. QUARUMLIBET DUARUM PlRAMIDUM R O T U ~ ~
RUM INEQUALIUM ET SIMILIUM CURVE SUPERFICIES
HABENT DIFFERENTIAM EQUALEM El QUOD FIT EX
DUCTU DIFFERENTIE YPOTHENUSARUM IN DI1UDIAS
5 CIRCUMFERENTIAS SUARUM BASIUM.
Esto exemplum OBC piramis rotunda [Fig. 66), cuius basis circulus
BQB, cathetus OC, ypothenusa CB, curva superficies R, et minor
piramis DIllf similis piramidi OBC, cuius basis ANM, cathetus DJ,
ypothenusa IA1, curva superficies L. Dieo ergo quod differentia aug-
32 EFG: EFG circumferentie A
3
8
circuli: c1rrnl, cr,l,rpt hrioris A
Z Df tHrlJis superfit"iebuJ of Johannes de 'Tincmue 467
to [dianleter is as tllUt (Jf [circumfcrellce] EFG' to circumference 1-1
where H is less than [cirCllITlference] j-JBC, \VlllCh [proportio.nalit)r] \vas
refuted earlier. Therefore, that WlllCll Vlas proposecl remains hrnl.
The same thing can be den10nstrated ill another way by [using Propo-
sition] III of j\rcrumedes' 011 the ilfeast/relllent 0)' the Circle, but not so
adequately.
[Corollary:] From this theorem it is clear tllat the surface arising from
the product of any circurnference and the diameter of another circle is
equal to that whicll arises from the product of the second circumference
and the diameter of the first circle.
IV. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE LATERi\L SURFACES
OF ANY TWO UNEQUi\L BlIT CONES IS EQUi\L TO
TI-JAT WHICH j\RISES FROJ\1 THE 11ULTIPLICt\TION OF THE
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SLANT HEIGHTS BY HALF [THE
SUM OF] THE OF THEIR Br\SES.
For example, let OEC be a cone [see Fig. 66], whose base circle is
EQB, altitude is OC, slant height is CB, and whose lateral surface is R.
l\nd [let there also be] a lesser cone DIll! similar to cone OEC. Its base
we let be A]\.l1.lf, its altitude DI, its slant height /111, and its lateral surface
8 E
Fig. 66
Note: I have added the prime sign to 0' here and in the text.
4
6
8 Archimedes' De sphan-a It ry/illliro
10 menti R superficiei curve ad superficiem L est id quod fit ex duetu
IIRV augmenti CBypothenuse super IMin medietates I citcumferentiarum,
QBB,ANM.
Sit enim trigonus orthogonius STP, cuius latus 5T sit equale CB
et TP sit equalis circumferentie BQB. Est enim trigonus STP equalis
15 R, per primam huius. Resecetur, ab ST, ZS equalis IM, 21
T
equidis-
tante demissa a Z.
Ratio. Age. Tarn Z quam T est rectus, et S est communis, et Y, P
sunt equales propter ZY, PT equidistantes. Ergo trigonus 5TPest
similis trigono SZY. Ergo proportio ST ad TP que SZ ad 21,7. Item
20 que est proportio diametri BB ad diametrum MA eadem est circum-
ferentie BQB ad circumferentiam ANAl, per proxima'm. Et que est
EB ad A.i1/[ eadem est CB ypothenuse ad IAl ypothenusam, per dif-
finitonem similium piramidum. Ergo proportio CB ad IM que BQB
ad J.4l\T.l.1f. Sed 5T, CB; et BQB, TP; et IM, SZ sunt equales. Ergo
proportio ST ad SZ que TP ad ANNI. Sed que est 5Tad 5Zeadem est
TP ad ZY, propter 5TP, 5YZtriangulos similes. Ergo Al\TM,ZYsunt
equales, cum TP ad ilia eadem sit proportio. Sit ergo trigonus 5Y"Z
equalis L, per primam huius. Patet ergo quod differentia R ad Lest
superficies Z}7PT. Ducatur ergo linea ZP a Z in P et YT a Y in T.
30 Ratio. ZT}7, YPZ sunt trianguli super ZYbasim inter ZY, TP equi-
distantes. Ergo sunt equales. Ergo id quod est ex ZTin ZY est duplum
ad utrumque, et sic ad ZPY. Ergo id quod fit ex TZ in medietatem
est equale ZPY. Similiter id quod fit ex TZ in TP est duplum
TPZ. Ergo quod fit ex ZT in medietatem TPest equale TPZ. Et sic
35 ZTP}'7' superficies, que est differentia R ad L, fit ex ductu differentie
CE ad 1111, que est linea ZT, in medietatem circumferentie EQB et
medietatem ..4.L\TjJl, mediantibus TP, Z}T quod proposuimus.
\.7. SI IN CIRCULO DESCRIPTI POLIGONII EQUILATERI
ET EQUll\N"GULI MEDIE'-rAS J\D TERMINOS Dlt\METRI
TER1\1INATJ\, Dlf\j\1ETRO ST.r\NTI, CIRCU11DUC.r\TUR,
12 QBE: scilicet ABC A 29 ZYPT B YZTP A ZYTP C with
14 EQB: EOB A signs to reverse Y' and P in C
16 Z: T ..,/.] 30 sunt onJ. C I baSelTI TP: et TP lineas
19 que: que est A / ZY: ZP A .:"1
24 TP: SP A / TP corr. C ex SP / n.I, S2: 3I id l]uod .AC quod B / ZT in ZY B
I!\fS, ZY ...1 I equales: equalia A equa TZ in TY ..4 TZ in ZY C
C 32 id 011/. G'
26 SYZ: SZY A / triangulos similes tr. A 34 TPZI .A ZTP BC / TPZ2: ZTP _,1
2.7 Sit: Est ..4C I SYZ: STY I \T B 01'1. C'VI\ ! .. 1/)
2. De fllrt'is superfttieblls of Johannes de Tinenlue 4
6
9
L. I sav, tl1creforc, that
(latsuriR -latsurfL) = (CE- Iilf)'(I/2circumQBE+I/2circum /-LYJ1).
For let there be a right STP, whose side ST is equal to CE and TP
is equal to circumference EQ.B, for 6 &.\TP == by the first [proposi-
tion] of this [work]. Let line Z.S, equal to line Iill, be cut frOlTI 5T, with
line 21'" drawn from Z parallel [to TP].
Now proceed with the proof: Both L Z and L T are right angles, L S
is common, and L Y == L P since Z},... and PT are parallel. Therefore,
L STP is similar to 6 5Z}7". Tllerefore, ,)T/TP == SZ/Z}l'. [\]so, diameter
EB is to diameter ilIA as circumference EQB is to circumference
by the preceding [proposition]. And EB is to All! as the slant height CE
is to the slant height IAi, by the definition of similar cones. Therefore,
CEI/hl = EQB/AiVhf. But 5T = CB, EQB = TP, and 1111 == 5Z.
Therefore, ST/SZ = TP/ANill. But ST/5Z = TP/ZY, since L STP
and 6 SYZ are similar. Therefore, ANllf = Z}T, since TP has the same
ratio to [each of] them. Therefore, let 6. 51
7
Z == L, by the first [pro-
position] of this [work]. It is evident, therefore, that CR - L) = surface
ZyPT. Then let line ZP be drawn from Z to P and YT from },. to T.
[Further] argument. ZYT and YPZ are triangles [constructed] on base
ZY and between parallel lines ZYand TP. Therefore the triangles are
equal. Therefore (ZT ZY) = 2. (each triangle) = 2. 6. ZP}T. Therefore
(TZ 1/2. ZY) = 6 ZPY. Similarly (TZ TP) = 2. 6 TPZ. Therefore
(ZT ! TP) = 6 TPZ. And thus
surfZTP},r = (R - L) = (CB - IA1) (! circumEQB +!
since ZTPY = ZT (lZY + lTP), and (CB - = ZT. This is what
we proposed.
V. IF HALF OF A REGULAR POLYGON-TERMINATED AT
THE ENDS OF A DIAMETER AND DESCRIBED IN A CIRCLE-
IS ROTATED WHILE THE DIAMETER REj\tIAINS FIXED, THE
470 Archimedes' De sphaera et tylinJro
RUNT CONICE SUPERFICIES TOTIUS CORPORIS EQUALES
5 El QUOD FIT EX DUCTU LATERIS CIRCUMDUCTI IN OM-
NES ORCUMFERENTIAS DESCRIPTAS AB ANGULIS POLI-
GONII, SIVE El QUOD FIT EX DUCTU ORCUMFERENTIE
CIRCULI CONTINGENTIS POLIGONIUM IN LINEAM QUE
CUM DIAMETRO EIUSDEM CIRCULI ET LATERE POLIGO-
10 NIl IN EODEM CIRCULO CONSTITUIT TRIANGULUM OR-
THOGONIU!vl.
Esto exemplum circulus AHID et poligonium equilaterum ei in-
scriptum [Fig. 67].
Dispostio. A singulis angulis poligonii ad oppositos ducantur linee,
15 et sint f\TM, PG, HD, LE, BC, secantes diametrum AI perpendicu-
lariter. Ne tamen minus diligens lector scrupulum, quo progrediens
pedem offendat, possit reperire, sic probetur illas perpendiculariter
secare AI.
Ratio. Age. ADC, AHB arcus sunt equales. Ergo CIY, BIYanguli
~ o cadentes in illos sunt equales. Item YBI, YCI in BI, Cl arcus equales
sunt equales. Ergo cum in BIY triangulo, B, I, Yanguli sunt equales
duobus rectis, similiter et in triangulo YIC, Y, I, C anguli sunt equales
duobus rectis, gemini Y sunt equales, et sic uterque rectus. Ergo BC
est perpendicularis ad AI. Simili ratione N.NI perpendicularis ad AI.
1 2. ei: i Hi ./'-1
1.& anP'UIi" nil} ~ I
I ~ Nj\t: 1\1 N .. 1
y r.. h LI n _... , ...
z De cUTIIi.r slIperftciehlis of Johannes cle T.inemue 47
1
CC)!\ICA,\I.I SURF1\CES OF t-J(I-[fi: BOD\r [f;OR1fED] \VII.lL
[:QlJ.l\I.J [IN TO t-fI-TJ\'T
i
\X
7
}-IICl-I Tf-IE
]JR()DUCT OF i\ SIDE OF YGON] .f\ND
OF BY
.\l\;GI.. OF POI-JYGON, OR [l"r IS L\L] '"fO 1
1
I-IJ\T
j\RISES FRO\! OF TI-fE CIRCU1\IFEREN-
OF THE TOUCI-JING T.f-IE POLy"GON I\ND TI-IE
\Xil-IICH FOR1\IS j\ RIGI-IT J\LONG \X/ITI-I Tt-lE
OF TI-lE CIRCLE l\ND A SIDE OF THE POLY-
GON IN THE SAJ\IE CIRCI..
For example, let there be circle and a regular polygon inscribed
in it [see Fig. 67].
H
D
Fig. 67
Disposition: From the individual angles of the polygon let lines be
drawn to the opposite angles, namely, lines NM, FG, RD, LE, and BC,
all these lines cutting diameter AIperpendicularly. Lest, however, the less
attentive reader be able to find an obstacle against which he strikes his
foot as he goes forth, let it be proved as follows that these lines cut AI
perpendicularly.
Proceed with the proof: Arcs ADC and AHB are equal. Therefore,
angles CIYand BIYfalling in those arcs are equal. Also, [angles] YBI and
}"CI in equal arcs BI and Cl are equal. Therefore, since angles B, I, Y in
L are equal to two right angles and similarly angles Y, I, C in 6
};r/c are equal to two right angles, the pair of angles at Yare equal, and
thus each is equal to a right angle. Therefore, BC is perpendicular to A/.
By a similar argument N M is perpendicular to AI. Also, LC intersects
472 Archimedes' De lphalra 61 tylinJro
515 Item LC secat LE, BC, et facit L, C angulos cadentes in LB, CE
equos arcus equales et coalternos. Ergo LE, BC sunt equidistantes,
et eadem ratione, LE, HD, et FG, et NM.
Protrahuntur deinde oblique secantes diamettum AI linee !'.JTG,
FD, HE, LC. Prottahatur deinde AI in occursum EC et ED extra
so circulum, singulis angulis et punctis tationi necessariis per equalia
notatis. Erunt ergo NM, FG, HD, LE, BC diametri circulorum
quos describunt anguli semipoligonii ADI circumducti. Dico itaque
quod conica superficies corporis poligonii fit ex ductu unius lateris
poligonii, scilicet DE, in orones circumferentias [circulorum] quorum
35 diametri sunt MN, FG, HD, LE, BC; et etiam est equalis ei quod
fit ex HE in ADIHcircumferentiam.
Rationis causa, superficiem piramidis YIC describit ypothenusa lC.
Et est axis illius piramidis IY, diameter basis linea BC. Ergo per pri-
mam huius superficies curva piramidis YIC, quam describit IC cir-
Ilgr cumvoluta, est superficies que fit / ex ductu ICin medietatem circum-
41 ferentie BCdiametri. Item in SEK, YCK triangulis, et Y et 5 est rectus
et K communis. Ergo SEK, YCK trianguli sunt similes. Item super-
ficies curva quam continent LB, CE et circumferentie diametrorum
LE, BC, scilicet quam describit linea CE circumvoluta, est differentia
45 duarum piramidum inequalium et similium, quarum minoris axis est
YK, ypothenusa KC, diameter basis BC; maioris piramidis axis
ypothenusa KE, diameter basis LE. Ergo per proximam ilIa superfi-
cies, quam describit CE circumvoluta, fit ex ductu CEin circumferen-
tie BC medietatem et medietatem circumferentie LE. Ergo curva
50 superficies piramidis quam describit IC, et curva superficies
quam describit CE, pariter sumpte, fiunt ex ductu CB in circumferen-
tiam BC et medietatem circumferentie LE, quoniam lC, CE latera
poligonii sunt equalia. Item curva superficies quam describit DE" cir-
cumvoluta est differentia piramidum simiIium et inequalium 0' DZ,
55 SEZ. Ergo ilIa superficies fit ex ductu ED in medietatem circumferen-
25 LE _/lC le (?) B lLB, CE: Le LB A 42-43 superficies curva Ir. A
26 equos ... equales: arcus equales equos A 43 circumferentie diametrorum ....4 circum-
29 B ferentia diametrum B circumferentia
31 ergo: igitur A diametrorun1 C'
3
2
itaque OlR ./:1 46 piramidis __,4 OIH. BC
3 ei: illi A 47 LE: LEI C) sed slIpra Sfr. C LE
3
6
ADIH: AI-II A 48-5 I circumvoluta ... eEl 4"lB IIJg. C-'
39 superficies curva Ir. _4 52 J-IE 01/1. _/'1 I posl LE del. C' et nledieta-
41 triangulis A 0'". BC tern circuIllfcrentic Dl-l
4
2
K: K est ...4 55 DE
% De eun,is jllperJiciebil.r of Jollannes de Tincmuc 473
LE and BC and makes equal alternate angles JS alld C fallillg in equal
arcs I.JB and CE. Therefore, LL' and BC are parallel, and by the same
argument LE, HD, FG, and are parallel.
Then let the oblique lines J.\:G, FD, and Le, all cutting tIle clianleter
./'11, be drawn. Then let ..,41be extended to meet ECandED outside of the
circle, with the separate angles and points l1ecessary for tIle argument
marked off by equal lines. _lV11/, FG, HD, LE and BC \vill
be the diameters of the circles which the angles of the half polygon L1D/
describe in rotation. And so I say that the conical surface of the polygonal
body arises from the product of one side of the polygon, namely, DE,
and the sum of the circumferences [of the circles] whose diameters are
AI FG, H D, LE, and BC; and also that it is equal to the product of
HE and circumference AD/H.
For the sake of the argument, [let us say that] hypotenuse IC describes
the surface of cone YIC. And the axis of this cone is IY; the diameter of
its base is line BC. Therefore, by the first [proposition] of this [work],
the lateral surface of cone YIC, which IC describes in rotation, is the
surface arising from the product of IC and one half the circumference of
which BC is the diameter. Also in triangles SEK, and YCK, Y and S
are right angles and L K is common. Therefore, triangles SEK and }TCK
are similar. Further, the lateral surface contained by LB, CB and the.
circumferences of diameters LE and BC, i.e., the lateral surface which
line CE describes in its revolution, is [equal to] the difference between
the two unequal but similar cones, the smaller of which is that one with
axis },:rK, slant height KC, and base diameter BC, and the larger of which
is that one with axis KS, slant height KE, and base diameter LE. There-
fore, by the preceding [proposition], that surface which CE describes in
its revolution is equal to CB (1/2 circum BC +1/2 circum LE). There-
fore, the lateral surface Y/C described by IC and the lateral surface de-
scribed by CE taken together are equal to the product of (1) CB and (z) the
sum of circumference BC and one half the circumference LE, since le
and CB, as sides of the [regular] polygon, are equal. Further, the lateral
surface described by DE in revolution is [equal to] the difference of the
similar and unequal cones 0' DZ and SEZ. Therefore, that surface is
equal to the product of (I) ED and (2) the sum of 1/2 circumference
474 Archimedes' De sphaera It tylilltlro
tie LB et medietatem circumferentie DH. Et sic superficies curva
quam describit lC et quam describit CB et quam describit DB sunt
equales ei quod fit ex ductu DE in circumferentias BC et LE et
medietatem circumferentie HD. Simili ratione invenies curvam super-
60 ficiem quam describit AA! et quam describit MG et quam describit
GD, scilicet medietatem totius conice superficiei poligonii corporis,
esse id quod fit ex GD, sive DE illi equali, in circumferentiam ArM
et FG et medietatem circumferentie HD. Ergo si sufEcienter enume-
res, reperies totam conicam superficiem fieri ex uno latere poligonii,
65 scilicet DEin omnes circumferentias quas describunt anguli poligonii,
quarum diametri sunt Njll, FG, HD, LE, et BC. Et sic prior pars
constat propositi.
Rusus, Y undique est rectus, et C, B anguli cadentes in I B, IC
equos arcus sunt equales. Ergo et T, I anguli sunt equales. Ergo BYI,
70 TJ
7
C sunt trianguli similes. Simili quoque ratione TYC, TSL, SRE,
RO'H, O'XD, XQF, QOG, OPN, PAM sunt similes. Ergo que est
proportio IY ad BY eadem est TY, YC; et ST, SL; et RS, SE; et
RO', O'H; et XO', O'D; et XQ, QF; et OQ, QG; et OP, PN; et
..4P, Pill. Ergo que est proportio IYad BY eadem est totius AI ad
75 omnes rectas lineas, BC, LE, HD, FG, NA1. Sed que est AI ad NM
et FG et HD et LEet BC, eadem est ADIHcircumferentie ad omnes
circumferentias quas describunt anguli poligonii, quarum diametri
sunt 1\TA1, FG, HD, LE, et BC, per tertiam huius et penultimam
quinti. Ergo que est proportio IY ad BY eadem est A.DIH ad
80 quinque circumferentias diametrorum N.ilI, FG, HD, LE, BC[,quas
describunt anguli poligonli. Sed HED angulus est rectus cadens in
semicirculum; ergo est equalis Y. Et H, B sunt equales, ut qui cadunt
in DE, IC arcus equales. Et sic BiTI, DEH trianguli sunt similes.
Ergo que est proportio I}T ad BY eadem est DE ad EH. Ergo que
85 est DE ad EH eadem est ./1DIH circumferentie ad quinque circum-
ferentias]. Ergo quod fit ex ductu primi in ultimum, scilicet ED in
post LE del. C et medietatem circumfe- quoque: que /-1. / TSL: TIL A
rentie I"E 71 RO'H: HRO A I OPN: ONP A
62 N1f: A11 _/-le 72 IY: TY A
64 reperies: invenies /1 73 G'B: CH A I OQ: CQ ..4
65 scilicet ... poligonii 0111. 7
8
et
l
0111.
67 constat Ir. .. 1 allle prior ill linea 66 79 IY: QY Cl I ADII-I: totius .r\DIH .. 4
68 IB: LB C 80-86 rguas .... cricuJ.nferentias] supplet,i,
69 equos arcus Ir. _4 sed 13 ubi .fer. post IY ad BY
69 anguli A 0111. Bel in linea 79 DE ad lil-l Cl1Jn trianguli
70 TYC: TIC A / trianguli ... 0111. Bel I RIY sunt sin1iles
2 De CurI/I".r sf.lperJiciel}f.'s of Johanncs de Tinemue 475
and 1/2 circulnfercnceDll. ,\rld thus the lateral surfaces described
by le, C""E', and are [togctl1erJ equal to tIle product of (1) DE and
(2) the sum of circumferellce BC', circunlference J..JJ3, arId one half the
circumference IfD. By a sirnilar argument you will find that the lateral
surfaces described by oL/1)1/, 4'lfG', and C.D, i.e., 1/2 the whole conical
surface of the polygonal body, is eqllal to tl1e product of (1) CD, or its
equal DE, and (2) the sum of circumference i\7i l/, circumference FG,
and 1/2 circumference 1-1D. Therefore, if you make the complete enume-
ration, you will find t11at the whole conical surface arises from the product
of (1) one side of the polygon and (2) the sum of the circumferences
described by the angles of the polygon, i.e., it is equal to DE (circum of
+ circum of PG + circum of H D + circum of LE + circum of
BC). j\nd so the first part of the proposition is evident.
j\ gain, every angle at }? is a right angle and angles C and B falling in
equal arcs I Band IC are equal. Therefore, angles T and I are equal.
Therefore, L BYI is similar to 6 TYC. By a similar argument, triangles
T}"C, TSL, SRE, RO'H, O'XD, XQF, QOG, OPl\T, and P..:4Af are
similar. Therefore, IY/BY = TY/YC = ST/SL = RS/SE = RO'/O'H =
XO'/O'D = XQ/QF = OQ/QG = OP/PAT = _4P/Pllf. Therefore,
= AI/(BC + LE + HD + FG + iVilf) [by Euclid V.I]. But
.,41/(J.\Tll1 + FG + HD + LE + BC) = circum ADIH/(circum of
l\ll11 + circum of FG + circum of H D + circum of LE + circum of
BC), by [Proposition] III of this [work] and the penultimate [proposition]
of [Book] V [of the Elements]. Hence IY/BY = circum ADIH/(circum of
J\.r.tlf + circum of FG + circum of H D + circum of LE + circum of
BC). [But L HED is a right angle, falling as it does in a semicircle. Hence
LHED = L Y. And LH= L B, as they fall in equal arcs DB and
IC. Thus triangles BY! and DEHare similar. Hence IY/ BY = DE/EH.
Hence DE/EH= circumADIH/the 5circumferences.*] Hence (BD the
1 circumferences) = (EH circum AD/H). But (BD the 5 circumferen-
* That is, (circum of NM + circum of re + . f RD + circum of LE +
. f BC) Clrcum 0
Clrcum 0
476 Archimedes' De sphtura ,t cylinJro
omnes circumferentias, est equale ei quod fit ex EH in AD/H. Sed
ex DEin quinque circumferentias fit tota conica superficies corporis
poligonii, ut preostensum est. Ergo tota superficies corporis poligonii
go equatur ei quod fit ex EHin ADIHcircumferentiam. Et sic utraque
propositi pars plene constat
Eodem modo poterit probari propositum si fuerint latera semipoli-
gonii numero imparia. Descripta tamen superficies a medio latere
columpnalis erit. Esto enim figura X equalium angulorum inscripta
95 circulo ADIHet equalium laterum [Fig. 68]. Ductis lineis a singulis
angulis ad oppositos angulos, sicut prius, perpendiculariter ad AI,
et [duce] alias oblique secantes AI, sicut in dispositione
deinde ab 0 centro ducatur OD perpendicularis ad GB, secans GB
in duo equa, et OH perpendicularis ad FL, secans FL in duo equa.
100 Deinde ab 0 in F et in B ducantur due linee OF, OB.
Ratio. Age. HF, GD arcus sunt equales, quia sunt medietates
FL equalium. Et FA et GA sunt equales. Ergo AH, AD sunt
equales arcus. Sed utraque est quarta totius circumferentie. Ergo 0
gemini centrales cadentes in illos sunt recti. Ergo HOD est una recta
105 linea. Similiter cum FAB sit semicirculus, erit FOB una linea recta.
Item cum HD sit perpendicularis ad GB et FL ex dispositione, erunt
GB, FL equidistantes. Et sunt equales ex ypothesi. Ergo FGBL est
parallelogramum rectangulum. Cum itaque FG et LB sunt equales
et equidistantes, similiter FL et GB, et stanti A!'P, circumvolvatur
110 superficies FB, et fiet columpna, cuius basis erit circulus quem de-
scribitLB; axis vero Ai'P. Fit autem curva superficies illius columpne
87 ei: illi A I ADIH: ADIH circulnferen-
tiam ...4 I Set A
90 EH: HE_4-
9
1
propositi ... constat: pars constat pro-
positi A
92. Eadem: eodem autem A
94 columpnalis erit Ir. /"1
9
8
-99 ad ...perpendicuIaris 0111. _-4-
99 secans OHI. 13
101 arcus ... equales: sunt equales arcus A
T""-. ........ 1___ _ ,. A
14 cadentes ... recti: sunt equales caden-
tes in illos arcus quare recta A
105 recta onJ. BC
106 GE: G ..fl
107 Et _4 Sed et BC'
108 et 0111. BC
109 et
3
0111. A
I I 0 erit: est
I I I curva superficies: ilIa superficies cur-
va
1 De cUrt.Jis slIpcrjicicbus of Jollannes d.e Tinemue 477
ces) is equal to the whc)le conical surface of tile polygonal bc)dy, as was
just demonstrated. '"Therefore, the whole sllrface of the polygonal body
is equal to the product of E"H and circllmference ...4.DIH.t\nd tlluS each
part of the proposition is fully e\.ridel1t.
By the same method the proposition cOllld be proved if tIle number of
the sides of the half polygon was an odd nun1ber. I-Iowever, the surface
described by the middle side will be cylindrical. For let there be described
in circle ../1DIH a regular polygon of tell sides [see Fig. 68]. Having
dra\vn lines connecting each angle with the angle opposite to it, as
before, these lines being perpendicular to ~ A I [draw] other [lines] cutting
-4,..11 obliquely, as in the previous construction. Then from center 0 let
A
H H ~ ~ H D
,
Fig. 68
Note: I have added the prime sign to J\,f'.
OD be drawn perpendicular to GB, bisecting GB, and OHperpendicular
to FL, bisecting FL. Then from 0 let there be drawn two lines OF and
OE to F and E [respectively].
Proceed with the argument: HF and GD are equal arcs because they
are halves of equal arcs GBand FL, and FA and CA are equal. Therefore
44H and AD are equal arcs. But each is a quadrant of the whole cir-
cumference. Therefore, both the central angles 0 falling in those arc are
right angles. Therefore, HOD is a straight line. Similarly, since FABis a
semicircle, FOE will be a straight line. Also, since H D is perpendicular
to GE and to FL by construction, GB and FL are parallel, and they are
equal by hypothesis. Therefore FGEL is a rectangle. And so, since PG
is equal and parallel to LE, and similarly FL to GB, with M' P fixed,
surface FE is rotated and a cylinder is produced whose base circle will
be the circle described by LE and whose axis is JW' P. Moreover, the
lateral surface of this cylinder is equal to the product of (I) the axis
478 Archimedes' De sphaera et rylillJro
ex duetu axis A/'P, sive PL, in circumferentiam diametri LE, per
secundam huius. Ratiocinando ergo ut superius, proba quod conica
superficies poligonii corporis fit ex PL in circumferentias quatuor
115 diametrorum, NM, PG, LE, BC. Similiter etiam ut supra probetur
conieas illas superficies fieri ex ductu PG in ADIHcireumferentiam.
Et sic omni modo constat propositum.
llgv / VI. CUIUSLIBET SPERE SUPERFIOES EST EQUALIS
QUADRANGULO RECTANGULO QUI SUB LINEIS EQUALI-
BUS DIAMETRO SPERE ET CIRCUMFERENTIE MAXli\II
CIRCULI CONTINETUR.
5 Esto exemplum ACBD circumferentia, diameter cuius sit AB[Fig.
69]. Stanti ergo AB, cireumducatur ACB, et fiat spera. Dieo quod
id quod fit ex ductu diametri in ACBD circumferentiam est equale
superficiei spere ACBD.
Sin autem, sit equalis superfieiei minoris spere vel maioris; et prima
10 minoris spere, scilicet spere quam describit SNH semicirculus cir-
cumvolutus circa 0 centrum, constituitur.
Dispositio. Inscribatur circulo ACBD poligonium equalium late-
rum et angulorum, circulum 5NH minime contingentium. Deinde ab
o centro ducatur OJ perpendicularis ad AF et secans AF in duo
15 equa et alia a B in F.
Ratio. Age. AB diameter est maior BF. Ergo id quod fit ex /lB
I 14 corporis 0111. .r1
1 14-1 5 quatuor diametrorU111 Ir. ..:4
1 I 5 etiam: et A
116 ADIH J AHDI ./-1Be'
117 omni modo: omnino ../1
I VI II n,,, r '1r. 1 f.:n r> / pl:;f
2 rectangulo OlJI. A
5 Esto ./1 011/. I cuius sit: eius .. 4
7 ACBD J BC'
8 spere 0111. . .
13 SNI-l Inlnin1e IJ SI-f non A SH mlnl-
nlC r'
z De (un/iJ- sJlperficiebl1S (Jf Johanncs de 479
1\/'P, or [its equal] alld (2) the circun1ference ()f diameter J-JE', by
the second [proposition] of this [work-l. hy reasoning as above,
prove that the conical surface of the polygonal body is eqllal to the product
of (1) Fl., and (2) the circumferences of the four diameters FC, LE,
and BC. .\lso let it be proved in the salne \vay as above tIlat those conical
surfaces [making up the surface of tIle whole polygonal body] are equal to
the product of FG' and circumferellce l\nd so this proposition
is evident in every way.
VI. THE SURF1\CE OF ANY SPHERE IS EQUf\L '"fO TI-IE
RECTr\NGLE CONTAINED BY LINES EQUr\L TO THE DIA1I-
ETER OF THE SPHERE AND THE CIRCUlvIFERENCE OF THE
GRE1\TEST CIRCLE [OF THE SPI-IERE].
For example, let ACBD be a circumference whose diameter is AB
[see Fig. 69]. With J4.B fixed, let _ACB be rotated, producing a sphere.
A
s
Fig. 69
I say that the product of (I) the diameter and (2) circumference ACBD
is equal to the surface of sphere ACBD.
But if not, let it be equal to the surface of sphere that is less or greater
than [ACBD]. In the first place let it be [equal to the surface] of a lesser
sphere, i.e., of the sphere which semicircle SNH describes in rotation
about center O.
Disposition: Let there be inscribed in circle ACBD a regular polygon
whose sides do not touch circle SNH at all. Then let 01 be drawn from
center 0 perpendicular to AF and bisecting AF. Let another line be
drawn from B to F.
Proceed with the proof: Diameter AB is greater than BF. Therefore,
480 Archimedes' D, sphtura ,t ry/iNJro
in AGBD circumferentiam maius est quam id quod it ex EP in
AGED. Sed id quod fit ex BP in AGED est'equale conicis supedi-
ciebus corporis poligonii per proximam. Et conice superficies car-
gO poris poligonii sunt maiores superficie spere SH interioris. Ergo id
quod fit ex ductu AB in AGBD circumferentiam maius est superficie
spere SH; contra preconcessa. Relinquitur ergo id quod fit ex duetu
AB in AGBD non est equale superficiei minoris spere quam AGED.
Sit itaque si fieri potest equale superficiei spere maioris. Brevitatis
25 tamen causa, prior observetur ligura, et sit SH spera proposita et
diameter SHe Dico quod fit ex HS diametro in HS circumferentiam
non est equale superficiei maioris spere quam SHe Sin autem, sit
equalis superficiei spere AGBD.
Ratio. Age. F cadens in semicirculum ADB est rectus. Similiter
30 et I rectus ex dispostitione; et A communis. Ergo AIO, AFB trian-
gull sunt similes. Ergo que ~ s t proportio AF ad AI eadem est BF
ad 0/. Sed AFest dupla ad A/. Ergo BF est dupla 01. Sed 0/ est
maior quam OS, que subdupla est ad HS diametrurn. Ergo BFest
maior HS; et AGBD circumferentia maior SNH circumferentia.
35 Ergo id quod fit ex BF in AGBD est maius eo quod fit ex HS in
Si\TH circumferentiarn. Sed quod fit ex BF in AGBD est equale
conicis superficiebus corporis poligonii per proximam. Et quod fit
ex HS diametro in Sl\TH circumferentiam est equale superficiei spere
AGBD secundum falsigraphum. Ergo conice superficies corporis
40 poligonii sunt maiores superficie AGBD spere, inclusum includente,
quod est impossibile. Relinquitur propositum.
[Corollaria:] Ex hoc ergo manifestum quoniam superficies spere est
quadrupla n1aximo circulo eiusdem spere, et equalis curve superficiei
columpne, cuius tarn axis quam diameter basis equatur diametro
18 BF: FB C / ACBDz: ADBC ~ l I equa- 29-30 Similiter et I: Et similieter I est A
les _4 30 post A add. A est I AID, AFB: Ale
19-20 corporis poligonii Ir. ~ AFD A
20 spere SH Ir. /1 32 Ergo ... 01I Oil'. A
21-2 3 circulnferentianl ...ACBDI AB IJlg. 33 que: quia_4-
C 35 ex I: ex ductu A I ACBD: ACBD cir-
22 ergo: ergo quod A cun1ferentiam ~
23 ACBDI: ABeD C I minoris sperc Ir. 36 BF: ductu ~ / j\CBD: J\CBD cirCUIn-
A / ACBD2: ABeD C ferentiam ..(-1
24 itaque: ergo ./4 38 HS: 11[-1 B
24 equale ... spere _-4. 011/. BC 4I propositum: ergo propositun1 .. 4
25 prior: prius posita r1 / sit ./4 0111. BC' 42 ergo OIJJ ..4 / manifestulll: manifestum
26 I-IS diametro: cluctll I-IS clianlctri _4 est rl
_ _ .'\ T""\ ~ _ ." ~ """""' ,
2. Dt fllrt';S JltjJerficieblls of Johannes de 48I
(_IB circum o/1CBD) > (Bl-f'. circum But (B.F circunl
.. -le"BD) is equal to the conical surfaces of t11e polygonal bod}T, by the
preceding [proposition]. Further, the cOlucal sLlrfaces of the polygonal
body are greater tllan the surface of the interior sphere LfH. Therefore,
(/lB circum _;L'1CBD) > surface of sphere SH, \vhich is contradictory
to what was conceded earlier. It remains, therefore, that tile product of
and /olCBD is not equal to the surface of a sphere less than J.L-1CBD.
i\nd so, if possible, let it be made equal to the surface of a sphere
greater [than sphere ../-lCB.D]. For the sake of brevity, however, let the
prior figure [Fig. 69] be consulted, and let sphere SE-I be the proposed
sphere with diameter SHe I say that the product of diameter HS and the
circumference of HS is not equal to the surface of a sphere greater than
LS'H. But if this is not [equal to the surface of sphere SH], let it be equal
to the surface of sphere
Proceed with the proof: F, falling in semicircle ADB, is a right angle.
f\nd similarly I is a right angle by construction, and L is common.
Therefore, triangles Ala and AFB are similar. Therefore, .r11 =
BF/OI. But AF = 2 AI. Therefore, BF = 2 al. But 01 is greater than
OS, which is one half diameter HS. Therefore, BF is greater than HS,
and circumference ACBD is greater than circumference SNH. Therefore,
(BF circum ACBD) > (HS circum SNH). But (BF circum ACBD)
is equal to the conical surfaces of the polygonal body, by the preceding
[proposition]. And the product of diameter HS and circumference SNH
is equal to the surface of sphere ACBD, according to the pseudographer.
Therefore, the conical surfaces of the polygonal body are greater than
the surface of sphere ACBD, i.e., the "included" [is greater] than the
"including." which is impossible. [Hence] the proposition remains [as
the only true possibility].
[Corollaries:] From this, therefore, it is evident that the surface of
a sphere is quadruple [the area of] the greatest circle of the same sphere,
and [it is further evident that] it is equal to the lateral surface ,of a cylinder
4
8
2. Archimedes' D, sphlltra ,t fY/iWtJ
45 spere. Tota quoque huius coIumpne superficies superficiei spere sex-
quialtera est.
Ut enim in quadratura circuli ostensum est quod fit ex duetu quarte
partis diametri in circumferentiam est equale circulo. Ergo quod fit
ex diametro in circumferentiam, scilicet superficies spere, est quad-
50 rupIa ad circulum. Item ex ductu diametri in circumferentiam maximi
circuli fit superficies spere, et ex duetu axis in circumferentiam basis
fit curva superficies columpne. Si ergo et axis et diameter basis colump-
ne sit equalis diametro spere, erit superficies spere superficiei illius
columpne equalise Ex hoc liquet quod curva superficies columpne cum
55 duobus circulis qui sunt extremitates columpne est sexquialtera ad
superficiem spere. Et hoc erat probandum.
Liber secundus
[Descriptio:] Omne corpus erectum super basim supereminenti su-
perficiei equalem et similem et equidistantem sub basi et altitudine
dicitur contineri.
VII. OMNE SOLIDUM CONICARU1\1 SUPERFICIERUi\I IN-
SCRIPTIBILE ET CIRCU1\1SCRIPTIBILE SPERE EQUUl\I EST
PIRr\j\,IIDI CUIUS BASIS SIT EQUALIS SUPERFICIEI SOLIDI
ETAI..,TITUDO SE1\IIDIAMETRO SPERE INSCRIPTE SOLIDO.
Esto solidum conicarum superficierum CAQB inscriptibile et cir-
10 cumscriptibile spere [Fig. 70]. Dico quod corpus ACBQ est equale
piramidi cuius basis est equalis conicis superficiebus _-4CBQ corporis
propositi et altitudo equalis semidiametro spere inscripte solido ACBQ
Rationis causa. Protrahantur a centro 0 ad tria latera superficiei
poligonie, que circumvoluta facit solidum, tres perpendiculares. Et
sint 01, OT, OZ. I Protrahantur item ad quatuor angulos C, F,
46 est onl. C
48 ante diametri del. B circumferentie I dia-
metri: circumferentie diametri C
49 diametro: ductu diametri ./1
2 et
l
OlJI. B
4 equalis Ir. A post spere / equale C
56 erat probandu111 ..--1 est BC, sed .posl est
add. C' "Ianu recel/lior; quod ostende.re
voluimus I ill !JJg. habet B JllOnU refen/iori
Explicit primus Jiber
I Liber secundus NIg. Jj Illg. secundus
liber de
bus f"g. B nJanll reeen/iori secundus J
(I
2 [Descriptio] nJg. H 0111. alii jtylSS diffini-
tio 11Jg. D
5 VII: 78. /1D I B la ] I solidum BC su-
pra se,.. _4 corpus in le.. '</Ii A
10 ACBQ corr. ex ..4CQB in BC-4.
11 l\CBQ C 8..4
I 3 Protrahatur (.'
14 poligonii ./1
I 5 O'f, OZ: OZ, ()'f C
2 De cun/is superfifjrlJ/ts of Johannes de T'inetnue 483
\\yhose axis arId base dianIeter are eacll equal te) tIle dial11eter ()f tile sphere.
Further, the \vll0le surface of this cylinder is three halv"es tIle surface of the
sphere.
For in the ,Qtlodralt/re of the C""ircle it \vas demonstrated that the product
of (I) one quarter of the diameter and (2) the circumference is equal to
the circle. Therefore, that which arises from the product of the diameter
and the circumference-that is, the surface of the sphere-is quadruple
the circle. 1\lso [if] from the product of the diameter and the circumference
of the greatest circle arises the surface of a sphere, and if from the product
of the axis and the base circumference the lateral surface of a cylinder is
produced, then, when the axis and the base diameter of the cylinder are
each equal to the diameter of the spllere, the surface of the sphere will be
equal to the [lateral] surface of tIle cylinder. From this it is evident that the
lateral surface of the cylinder together with the two circles which are the
bases of the cylinder is three halves the surface of the sphere. .t\nd this
is what \vas to be proved.
Book 11
[Description:] Every body erected on a base which is parallel, equal,
and similar to a surface rising directly above [the base] is said to be
contained by the base and the altitude.
VII. EVERY SOLID CONSISTING OF CONICAL SURFACES
f\ND INSCRIBABLE OR CIRCU11SCRIBABLE IN A SPHERE IS
EQUAL TO A CONE WHOSE Br\SE IS EQUAL TO THE SURFACE
OF THE SOLID AND WHOSE ALTITUDE [IS EQUAL] TO THE
RADIUS OF THE SPHERE INSCRIBED IN THE SOLID.
Let there be a solid CAQB (ACBQ) having conical surfaces, which solid
is inscribable and circumscribable in a sphere [see Fig. 70]. I say that
body ACBQ is equal to a cone whose base is equal to the conical surfaces
of the proposed body ACBQ and whose altitude is equal to the radius of
the sphere inscribed in solid ACBQ.
[Construction] needed for the proof: Let there be drawn three perpen-
diculars from center 0 to three of the sides of the polygonal surface whose
rotation makes the solid. Let these peqJendiculars be 01, OT, and OZ.
484 Archimedes' De sphatra et ey/indro
16 A a centro quatuor linee OC, OF, ON, OA. Protrahantur itaque ANt
NF in occursus linee OC. Ab F item ducatur perpendicularis FP
ad OC, et ab N perpendicularis NV ad OC.
Ratio. Age. Triangulus 0 FC, stanti OC, circumduetus facit du-
510 plicempiramidem0 FC, equalempiramidibus 0 PF, PFC. Sed colump-
na que fit ex ductu PC in circulum quem describit FP circumvoluta
est tripla ad piramidem PFC per IX duodecimi Elementorum. Et
columpna que fit ex ductu PO axis in circulum quem describit FP
est tripla ad piramidem FPO per eandem. Quod ex ductu axis in
25 basim fiat columpna sumat demonstrator pro rato per precendentem
descriptionem. Quod ergo fit ex ductu totius OC in eundem circulum
triplum est duplicis piramidis OFC per primam secundi. Sed tarn I
quam P est rectus et C communis. Ergo OIC, CPF trianguli sunt
similes. Ergo que est porportio linee OC ad 01 eadem est CF ad FP.
go Et que est proportio CF ad FP eadem est curve superficiei piramidis
FCP, quan1 describit linea FC, ad circulum quem describit FP per
corollarium prime huius. Ergo quod fit ex ductu OC linee in circulum
descriptum ab FP, quod, scilicet, est aliqua columpna per descrip-
tionem precedentem, est equale ei quod fit ex O/linea in curvam super-
35 ficiem piramidis FPC, quam describit linea FC. Sed quod fit ex ductu
OC in circulum quem describit FP circumvoluta est columpna tripla
duplici piramidi OPF, PFC, per IX duodecimi Elementorum et
16 itaque: que C"
17 ante. NF dcl. C AF
17, 21, 23 FP: SP A
21 circumvoluta onl. B
22IX:XIA
23 PO: PC ..4
24 FPO: SPC A
2.5 sun1at B sumit r1 summit C
30 Et: Sed r1 / proportio onl. A
3I Fep: FOP _4/ FP: SP ..4
32 corcllarium B
33 FP: SP _4
34 cl: illi : ~ ex: ex ductu ..4
33-34 clescriptionem precedcnten1 fr. /1
34 linee ~ 4
36 1:1): S1) ./1
2 De SIJperj1tt"t
J
!JUS of Johannes de 4
R
5
Also let the four lines (JC, or", ();\T, and (). I be dra\\Il1 from the ccnter
to the four angles C, F, lV, and A.And then let /UV and;YF be extend-
ed until they meet line OC [extended]. from F let FP be drawn
perpendicular to OC, and from IV['- perpendicular to OC'.
Proceed with the proof: \'fith QC !-ixcd, /'. ore by rotation produces
the double cone oFe, equal to C()llCS (JP_I,' ancI ./) the cylinder
which arises from the prodllct of PC,,' and tile circle described by FP in
rotationis three times the COl1e PFC, by [Prol)()sitionJ XJ I. 9* of tIle Jj'lelJJefltJ
And the cone which arises from the l.,foduct of axis PC) and tIle ci rcle
described by FP is three times the cone by the sanle [proI)osition].
The demonstrator assumes that the cylinder arises frC)ffi tIle product of
A
QI-- E
8
Fig. 70
the axis and the base, as is confirmed by the preceding description [given
just prior to Proposition VII]. Therefore, the product of the QC
and the same circle is three times the double cone OFC, by [Proposition]
11. I [of the Blefnonts]. But both L I and L P are right angles, and L C
is common. Therefore, triangles OIC and CPF are similar. Therefore,
QC/OI = CF/FP. But the ratio of CF to FP is the same as that of the
lateral surface of cone FCP described by line FC to the circle described
by FP, by the corollary of [Proposition] I of this [work.] Therefore, the
product ofline QCand the circle described by FP, which product evidently
is equivalent to some cylinder by the preceding description, is equal to
the product of line 01 and the lateral surface of cone FPC described by
line FC. But the product of OCand the circle described by FP in rotation
is [equal to] a cylinder which is [in volume] three times the double cone
OPF, PPC, by [Proposition] XII.9 of the Elements and by the preceding
* Greek text XII.IO throughout this proposition.
486 Archimedes' De sphaera et cyJiWD
precedentem descriptionem. Ergo solidum quod fit ex duetu linee
0/ in curvam superficiem quam describit FC in FCP piramidem est
40 equale illi columpne, et ita est triplum ad duplicem piramidem OPF,
PFC. Sed illius eiusdem columpne, que fit ex 0/ in curvam superfi-
ciem que sit equalis curve superficiei piramidis FPC, quam superfi-
ciem describit FC circumvoluta, subtripla est piramis cuius altitudo
01, basis vero equalis curve superficiei quam describit FC, per IX
45 duodecimi Elementorum. Ergo duplex piramis OFP, FPC est equalis
piramidi cuius altitudo 01, basis vero circulus equalis curve super-
ficiei quam describit FC. Sit ergo ilia piramis rotunda piramis Af.
Amplius, ex ductu 0 V axis in circulum descriptum ab NV fit
columpna tripla piramidi ]\TVO et ex ductu V D in eundem cireulum
50 fit eolumpna tripla piramidi lVDV. Ergo per primam secundi quod
fit ex OD in eundem circulum est triplum duplici piramidi DNv
T
,
lVI/O. Item tarn V quamZ est reeus et D est communis. Ergo NVD,
DZO trianguli sunt similes. Ergo que est proportio OD ad ZO eadem
est D.L\T ad NV. Sed que est Dl\l ad NVeadem est curve superficiei
55 piramidis Dl\TV, quam describit DNeircumvoluta, ad cireulum cuius
semidiameter est ATV, per corollarium prime huius. Ergo que est
proportio linee OD ad OZ eadem est curve superfieiei quam describit
.L\!D ad eirculum quem describit NV. Ergo quod fit ex ductu linee
OD in circulum descriptum ab J.\7V, primi, scilicet, in ultimum, equum
60 est ei quod fit ex ductu linee OZ in curvam superficiem quam deseribit
.1..\!D, scilicet unius medii in reliquum. Sed ex ductu OD in circulun1
quem describit NV fit columpna, per precedentem descriptionem,
tripla duplici piramidi i\rvo, NVD, per IX duodecimi Elementorum.
Ergo quod fit ex ductu linee OZ in curvam superficiem piramidis
65 _\TDT/, quam describit linea l\lD, est equale columpne triple ad du-
plicem piran1idem 1\7[-70, 1\1[..7D. Ergo piramis cuius altitudo est OZ,
basis vera circulus equalis curve superficiei piramidis 1\TT/
7
D, quam
3
8
-39 linee 01 Ir. A
39 FCP: FOP A
42. superficiei 0111 ..4 / FPC: SPC A
43 piramidis ./1
45 FPC: SPC A
4
6
equalis 0111. rl
52 NVD: NOD A
53 est 01)/. C
54 NVI: NO C
5 DN: linea DN J,-j
56 senli- sIIpra ser. B / corellariunl B /
Of/I. _4
59 OD 0"'. C
60 linec OZ Ir. A
61 scilicet _.4 om. BC
63 tripla: est tripla A I piramidi 0"'. _,.;.1 I
IX: XI /1
65 equale co!un1pne B equalis J4 e(lualis
columpne C'
66 est ./J onl.
67 cllualis ./'1 0111. IJCJ-'
2. De curvis sllperftciebllS of Johannes de 4
8
7
description. Therefore, the solid arising from the product of ]inc 0 I and
the lateral surface of cone pep described IJy is equal to that cylinder,
and thus is triple the double cone OPF, P1:::C. But tile C()11e \Vll0Se altitude
is 0/ and whose base is equal to tIle lateral sllrfacc \vllichFc describes is
one third that same cylinder w.hicll arises fron1 the product of 0/ and tIle
lateral surface of cone FPC described by j7(,' in r()tation; tIlis is by [Propc)-
sition] XII.9 of the EleIJ/cfJtS. 'Therefore, the dc)uble cone O.f'P, FPC'is
equal to the cone whose altitude is Of and whose base circle is equal to
the lateral surface described by Fe'. Therefore, let tllis c()nc be cone ill.
Further, from the product of axis 0 r
T
and the circle described by i\'" r'-
arises a cylinder which is three times the cone j\'L/"O, and from the product
of l/"D and the same circle arises a cylinder which is three times the cone
/v"rD l/. Therefore, by [Proposition] 11. I [of the the product of
OD and the same circle is three times the double cone Di.\,TV, j\lso,
as well as Z is a right angle, and L D is common. Therefore, triangles
/\/T/-D and DZO are similar. Therefore, ODjZO == D.\T/i\Tr/
T
But as
DN is to NV, so the lateral surface of cone DJ.\7r/' described by D_\-
in rotation is to the circle whose radius is by the corollary of the
first [proposition] of this [work]. Therefore, the ratio of OD to OZ is the
same as that of the lateral surface described by i\TD to the circle described
by NV. Therefore, the product of line 0 D and the circle described by
i.e., the product of the first and the last term, is equal to the product
of line OZ and the lateral surface described by .L1\lD, i.e., the product of the
two middle terms. But the product of OD and the circle described by
equals, by the preceding description, a cylinder which is three times the
double cone NVO, NVD, by [Proposition] XII.9 of the Elements. There-
fore, the product of line OZ and the lateral surface of cone i\'D f./ described
by line N D is equal to a cylinder which is three times the double cone
l\TVO, NVD. Therefore, the cone whose altitude is OZ and whose base
is a circle equal to the lateral surface of cone NVD described by 1\TD is
95
488 Archimedes' De sphaera ,t cylimJro
describit ND, est equalis duplici piramicli NVO, NVD, cum earum
utraque sit ad idem subtripla. Item tarn P quam Z est rectus et D
70 communis. Ergo DFP, DOZ trianguli sunt similes. Ergo proportio
OD ad OZ que FD ad FP. Sed que FD ad FP eadem est curve super-
ficiei piramiclis FDP, quam describit FD, ad circulurn cuius semidia-
meter est linea FP per corollarium prime huius. Ergo proportio OD
ad OZ que curve superficiei quam describit FD ad circulum quem
75 describit FP. Ergo quod fit ex ductu linee OD in circulum quem
describit FP est equale ei quod fit ex ductu OZ in curvam superficiem
piramidis FDP, quam superficiem describit linea DF. Sed ex ductu
OD in circulum quem describit FP est columpna tripla duplici pira-
midi FDP, FOP. Et quod fit ex ductu OZ in circulum equalem curve
80 superficiei piramidis F DP, quam superficiem describit F D, est equ-
ale columpne triple ad piramidem cuius OZ altitudo, basis vero cir-
culus equalis curve superficiei piramidis FDP, quam superficiem de-
scribit FD, per precedentem descriptionem et IX duodecimi Elemen-
torum. Ergo piramis cuius altitudo OZ, basis vero circulus equalis
85 curve superficiei quam describit FD in piramidem F DP est equalis
duplici piramidi FDP, FPG; subtriplum subtriplo equale sicut tri-
plum/ triplo. Sed piramis cuius altitudo OZ, basis vero circulus equalis
curve superficiei piramidis NVD, quam superficiem describit linea
circumvoluta, VD stanti, preostensa est esse equalis duplici pira-
90 midi l\:rVO, p.lVD. Ergo piramis cuius altitudo OZ, basis vero cir-
culus equalis curve superficiei quam describit N F circumvoluta, P r
T
stanti, est equalis differentie duplicium piramidum DV1\T, NVO et
DPF, FPO, scilicet corpori quod describit triangulus .l\TFO, depen-
dens a linea J.\TD, circumvolutus, DO stanti. Ilia piramis sit S.
Regula enim l1ec firmissima est: Quarumlibet duarum pirimidum
inequalium [eiusdem altitudinis] differentia equatur piramidi eiusdem
altitudinis cuius basis equatur differentie basium illarum piramidum.
Quod sic probatur. Sit piranus DBO, cuius basis circulus ..:4B, cathe-
tus OD, Yl)othenusa DB, et nuno! piramis ODE eiusden1 altitudinis,
68 NVO, N\TD: NVD, NVO C
69 D: D est 4
7
2
-74 cuius circulum 0111 ./1
73 corellarium B
77 piralniclis ./q. piranlidum BC:
7
8
OD 0111 ./1 I COlUl11pna: conica JoJ
79 equale
81 columpne: cOJlice superlicici I 02
altitudo Ir. ./1
83IX:Xla/l
8Geguale: est equale ... ,1
93 Fl)O: l)F __.--1
94 IlIa piranlis 0111.
piralniduln inequaliulTI Ir. ..<4
9
6
Iei L1 sde111 a] ti t LldinisJSliP!)/el,j
9H j\ l.B .. ,1
z De c/trois slperficieblls of Johanncs de ]-1ineITIUe 489
equal to the double cone j\7T/-C), sillce cacl1 ()f t11cm is one third
of the same quantity. ./\lso, jJ as well as Z is a rig11t angle, and L I) is
common. Therefore, triangles .DF]) ancl !)()Z are silnilar. "fllerefore,
OD/OZ = FD/FP. But tIle ratio of to flP is the same as that of tIle
lateral surface of cone described 11)' ],'1) tC) tIle circle \Vll0Se radius
is line FP, by the corollary of tIle first [I)rol)()sitic)nl of this [work].
Therefore,
OD lateral surface <.lcscribed by j":lJ
OZ circle describcd l)y .FP
Therefore, the product of line OD and the circle described b)r -FP is
equal to the product of OZ and the lateral surface of cone F'DP described
by line DF. But from the product of O.D and the circle described by FP
arises a cylinder which is three times the double cone F'DP, FOP.
the product of OZ and the circle equal to the lateral surface of cone F DP
described by F D is equal to a cylinder which is three times the cone
altitude is OZ and whose base is equal to the lateral surface of coneFDP
described by FD, by the preceding description and [Proposition] XII.9
of the Elements. Therefore, the cone whose altitude is OZ and v""hose base
is a circle equal to the lateral surface which F D describes in cone FDP
is equal to the double cone FDP, PPO, for one thirdis to one third as triple
is to triple. But the cone whose altitude is OZ and whose base is a circle
equal to the lateral surface of cone NVD described by line in rotation,
with V D fixed, has previously been shown to be equal to the double cone
NVO, NVD. Therefore, the cone whose altitude is OZ and whose base
is a circle equal to the lateral surface described by i.\/F in rotation, with
PV fixed, is equal to the difference between the double cones D r '..\T,
NVO and DPP, FPO, i.e., to the body described by 6 J.\TPO in rotation,
where line N D is revolved with DO remaining fixed. Let this cone be S.
For the following rule is firmly established: The difference [in volume]
between two unequal [right circular] cones [of the same altitude] is equal
to a [third right circular] cone of the same altitude whose base is equal
to the difference [in area] between the bases of those cones. Proof: Let
there be cone DBO, whose base circle is AB, altitude OD, and slant
490 Archimedes' De sphllera ,t ry/inm
100 euius basis circulus GE, ypothenusa DE [Fig. 71]. Differentia AB
circuli ad GE eirculum vocetur K. Sitque circulus M equalis K, et
piramis MS fundata super AI circulum, cuius altitudo equalis OD.
Ratio. Age. Que est proportio DBO piramidis ad DOE piramidem
eadem est AB circuli basis ad GE circulum basim, per XI duodecimi.
105 Ergo que est proportio DBO ad augmentum DBO super DOEeadem
est AB circuli ad K superficiem per eversam proportionem. Ergo a
pari que est DBO ad augmentum suum super DOE eadem est AB
circuli ad AI circulum. Sed que est AB circuli basis ad M circulum
basim eadem est DBO piramidis ad MST piramidem, cum sint eius-
110 dem altitudinis per XI duodecimi. Ergo proportio DBO ad augmen-
turn suum supra DOE que DBO ad MST piramidem. Ergo augmen-
turn DBO piramidis super DOE est equale A1ST piramidi, quod pro-
posuimus. Principali ergo proposito insistamus.
Amplius, in AOE, TOE tarn 0 quam T angulus est rectus, et E
115 est communis, quod ut in anteproxima propostitione probari potest.
Ergo OAE, OTE trianguli sunt similes. Ergo proportio OE ad OT
est que EA ad OA. Et que est AEad AO eadem est curve superficiei
_AOE ad circulum quem describit AO. Ergo que est proportio OE
ad OT eadem est curve superficiei piramidis AOE, quam superficiem
120 describit AE, ad circulum quem describit AO. Ergo solidum quod
fit ex ductu OE in circulum quem describit AO est equale solido
100 DE: OD C
102 1\'1: AN ...4 / equalis: est equalis j4
10
3 DBO: ABO ...4
10
4, 106, 107, 108 AB: IB _4
10
4 basem ..4 / XI A IX BC
10
7 DBO: proportio DBO ~
109 basem -,,1C' I est 0111. C
I 14-15 in ... communis A AOe angulus
est rectus BC'
I I 5 potest ./1 potest et E est communis
BC
1I7EA: i\E .. ~ / OA: AO .. -1/ est
Z
B
OIIJ. J4C-'
I 18-20 Ergo ... AC) 0"1../1
2 De cun/is sJlperfiejebtls of Johannes (le Tinen1ue 49 I
height DB [see Fig. 71]. i\nd [let r11ere be] a slnallcr cone ODli of tIle
same altitude, whose base is circle and whose slant 11eight is .D.E'.
The difference [in area] between circles al1d \VC let be designated
as K. Then let there be a circle Il! cLlual to and erected upon circle A.11
a cone illS, whose altitude is equal t() ().D.
o o 5
Ftg. 71
Nowproceed with the proof. cone D BO _ base circle .-"I B b XII
cone DOE base circle GE V I I
cone DBO circle .'-1 B
[of the Elements]. Therefore, DBO DOE f: K ' bv
cone - cone sur ace J
the conversion of ratios. Therefore, by equality,
cone DBO circle _4.8
cone DBO - cone DOE circle ill
But base circle AB/base circle M = cone DBO/ cone .ill..fT, since they
are of the same altitude; this is by XII.I I [of the Elements]. Therefore,
cone DBO cone DBO
cone DBO - cone DOE = cone 1115T
Therefore, cone DBO - cone DOE = cone MST, which we proposed.
Therefore, let us press on to the principal proposition [see Fig. 70, above].
Further, in [triangles] AOE and TOE, 0 as well as T is a right angle,
and L E is common, which can be proved as in the proposition before
the preceding one [i.e., as in Proposition V]. Therefore, triangles OAE
and aTE are similar. Therefore, OE/OT = EA/OA. And
AB lat surf cone AGE
AO = circle described by AO
145
492 Archimedes' De sphaera et rylintlro
quod :fit ex ductu OT in curvam superficiem piramidis AOE, quam
superficiem describit AB. Sed quod fit ex OE in circulum quem de-
scribit AO est columpna tripla ad piramidem AOE. Et id quod fit
JSlS ex ductu OTin curvam superficiem piramidis AOE, quam superficiem
describit linea AB, est equale columpne triple ad piramidem, cuius
altitudo OT, basis vero circulus equalis curve superficiei piramidis
AOE, quam superficiem describit linea AB. Ergo piramis AOE est
equalis piramidi cuius altitudo OT, basis vero circulus equalis curve
130 superficiei piramidis AOE; subtriplum subtriplo sicut triplum triplo.
Deinde simili ratione sicut superius respiciantur OTE, NVE trian-
gull similes, cum tarn V quam T sit rectus et E communis. Ergo pro-
portio OE ad OT que EN ad NV. Sed que EN ad NV eadem est
curve superficiei piramidis NVE, quam superficiem describit linea
135 NE, ad circulum cuius semidiameter est NV, per corollarium prime
huius. Ergo que est proportio OE ad OT eadem est curve superficiei
piramidis ATT/TE, quam superficiem describit NE, ad circulum quem
describit ]\TT/. Ergo quod fit ex OE in circulum quem describit
est equale illi quod fit ex ductu OT in curvam superficiem quam de-
140 scribit NE. Sed ex OE in circulum quem describit NV fit columpna
tripla duplicis piramidis NVE, NVO, per precedentem descriptionem
et per IX duodecimi. Et quod fit ex OT in curvam superficiem quam
describit f\lE est columpna tripla piramidis, cuius altitudo OT, basis
vero circulus equalis curve superficiei quam describit NE, per eandem
descriptionem et per IX duodecimi. Ergo duplex piramis NVO, NT/E
est equalis piramidi cuius altitudo OT, basis vero circulus equalis curve
superficiei quam describit .A/E. Sed piramis AOE preostensa est esse
equalis piramidi cuius altitudo OT, basis vero circulus equalis curve
superficiei quam describit Ergo piramis cuius altitudo OT, basis
150 vero circulus equalis curve superflciei quam describit A.l\T circum-
voluta, 0 T/ stanti, est equalis corpori quod est differentia piramidis
ad duplicem piramidem j\7T/7'E, i\/f,TO, scilicet corpus quod des-
cribit triangulus .1\"0../1, dependens a linea .. 4E, circumvolutus, OE
I Z3, 1Z 52, 134, 137 superficienl OIJJ. A
13 z cum: quorunl -,,/:1. / sit: angulus est _-:1 /
E: E est A
134 NVE B NVB ..4 NVI-I (r) C'
135 cuius scnlidianleter ./1 Ir. B(;' I corel-
larium B
141 duplicis piramidis Ir. _/1
1 if' TX Yl ...:'1 J 'u-u _1
143 post NE add. B per eandem descriptio-
nem et !)er IX XIlrnl I piramidis:
duplcis piranlidis fl I aT: est OT .. 4
I 44 eelua] j SOli'.
J 45 IX: .XI
I 47.-- 0 NE cl cscri bit () IIJ. ..---I
152 N\' () 011/ -1
2 De (;Ur1
J
is slperjiciehlls of Johannes de Tinelnue
493
'r
f
llercforc,
OE
Therefore. OT
Jat surf COl1e descrilJcd by
circle clescribcd by 41C)
(OE circle described l)y =-= C()]' Jat surf Cf)nC ./10!J' dcscril)ed l)y
AE). But the product of and tIle circle dcscrilJcli ])y .-'/0 is a cylinder
which is three times cone al1d tIle pr()duct ()f ()l' al1d the lateral
surface of cone /10E' described by line . -11.;' is equal te) a cylilldcr \vhich is
three times the cone w110se altitude is OT ancl \vh.()sC IJasc circle is equal
to the lateral surface of cone descril1cd by line .11;'. rrherefore,
cone AOE is equal to a cone whose altitude is ()7' and whose base circle
is equal to the lateral surface of COl1e since 1/3 is to 1/3 as 3 is to 3.
Then by an argument similar to that above, triangles and are
regarded as similar since T/7 as "\vell as T .is a right angle and L E' is
common. Therefore, OE"/OT === 1\T[,/. But
EN lat surf cone j\TVE described by line
1\
T
v
7
circle of radius i\rr,/
by the corollary of the first [proposition] of this [work]. Therefore,
OE _ lat surf cone iVr
7
E described by line Th
OT
- I d b d b rf .. ere ore,
cIrc e escrI e y 1\ ,/
(OE circle described by NV) = (OT lat surf described by 4\-.).
But the product of OE and the circle described by .l\rr.
7
is a cylinder
which is three times the double cone by the preceding
description and by [Proposition] XII. 9 [of the Elements]. f\nd the product
of OT and the lateral surface described by NE is a cylinder which is three
times a cone whose altitude is OT and whose base circle is equal to the
lateral surface described by NE, by that same description and by XII.9
[of the Elements]. Therefore, the double cone Nv
7
0, is equal to a
cone whose altitude is OT and whose base circle is equal to the lateral
surface described by NE. But cone AOE was earlier shown to be equal
to the cone whose altitude is OT and whose base circle is equal to the
lateral surface described by Therefore, the cone whose altitude is
OT and whose base circle is equal to the lateral surface described by
AN in rotation, with 0 V remaining fixed, is equal to the body con-
stituted by the difference [in volume] between cone AOE and the double
cone NVE, NVO, i.e., the body which triangle NOA describes when
-4.E is revolved around OE as an axis, by the rule set out earlier. Let
494 Archimedes' De sphaera ,t cy/intiro
stanti, per premissam regulam. Ilia piramis que est equalis huic diffe-
IJ5r rentie I sit G. Ergo si memineris priorum G, S, M piramides sunt
equales medietati corporis poligonii, et earum tres bases sunt equales
curve superficiei medietatis poligonii, et earum altitudo, OT sive 0/
sive OZ, que sunt equales medietati diametri spere que inscribitur
poligonio.
160 Simili demonstrationis progressu probetur alia medietas corporis
poligonii, scilicet AQB, esse equalis tribus piramidibus quarum alti-
tudo sit equalis semidiametro spere inscripte solido, bases vera equales
curve superficiei conice medietatis poligonii. Sit deinde piramis R
fundata super basim circulum LK equalem sex basibus sex piramidum
165 que probate sunt esse equales corpori poligonio. Sit etiam R equalis
altitudinis illis sex piramidibus. Erit ergo piramis R illis sex piramidi-
bus equalis, quia que est proportio piramidis ad piramidem eadem
est basis ad basim, cum sint eiusdem altitudinis, per XI duodecimi.
Erit ergo piramis R mediantibus sex piramidibus equalis corpori
170 solido poligonio, eiusque basis circulus LK equalis conicis superfi-
ciebus corporis, et altitudo R equalis OT linee que est equalis semclia-
metro spere inscripte solido. Relinquitur ergo ratum quod longe cliu-
que venati sumus.
Si tamen poligonium equilaterum et equiangulorum circulo inscri-
175 batur, cuius medietas sit laterum numero imparium, et stanti diametro
circumvoluatur et faciat solidum poligonium, dubium esse potest
utrum illud solidum sit equale piramidi cuius altitudo sit equalis semi-
diametro spere inscripte solido et basis sit circulus equalis conice
superficiei solidi. Quod quia auctor non proposuit, et nos illud inves-
180 tigare omittimus et diligenti relinquimus posteritati*.
I stante C
1 55 S, 1'1 Ir. A
15 6-57 et ... poligonii 011/. A
158 que ./1 quod jjC'
160 demonstrationis ... probetur: rationis
progressu et dCInonstratione consimili
probatur ../1
161 esse 011/ ..
164 basem A
165 poligonii .. 1
166-67 Erit ... equalis onl. A
167 eadem: ea A
168 basem AC
171 corporis 0111 ..
172-73 longe diuque: diu longeque
175 sit laterun1 Ir. rl I stante C'
179-80 auctor ... posteritati: non proposi-
turn ab auctore nos investigare otnit-
tinlus et posteritatis diligentie relin-
quctnus _,,1
* See Section 5 below for the proof by for the \vhere the half-polygon has an
the scribe of i\[anuscript [; of the thcorcnl odd nUIl1bcr of sides.
2 De curvis slpcrficiebll.r of ]ohannes de 495
the cone equal to this difference be (;'. 'Ilhereforc, if you recall tIle earlier
statements, cones G, 11[, and L) are equal lin SUlTI] to 011e half of the
polygonal body, and their three bases are cqllal [in sunl] to the lateral
surface of half that polygonal [body], while their altitude, OT or 0/ or
OZ, is equal to the radius of the spIlcrc il1scribed in thcpolJTgonal [body].
By a similar line of demonstration, let it be pro\red that the other half
of the polygonal body, i.e., ./qQ.B, is equal to three cones each of whose
altitudes is equal to the radius of the sphere inscribed in the solid and
whose bases are equal [in sum] to the conical curved surface of the half
polygonal [body]. Then let there be a cone R* erected on base circle .l-JA.'
equal to the six bases of the six cones which 11ave been proved to be equal
[in sum] to the polygonal body. 1\150 letR be of altitude equal to that
of [each of] the six cones. Therefore, coneR will be equal to these six
cones, for the ratio of cone to cone is the same as that of base to base
when the cones are of the same altitude, by XII.II [of the Elements].
Therefore, cone R by the mediacy of the six cones will be equal to the
solid polygonal body, and its (R's) base circle LK is equal to the conical
surfaces of the body, and R's altitude is equal to line OT, which is [itself]
equal to the radius of the sphere inscribed in the solid. Therefore,
we sought a long time ago remains as established.
If, however, half of the regular polygon inscribed in the circle has an
odd number of sides, it can be doubted whether the solid formed by the
polygon's rotation about a fixed diameter is equal to a cone whose altitude
is equal to the radius of the sphere inscribed in the solid and whose base
is a circle equal to the conical surface of the solid. But since the author
has not proposed it, we shall refrain from investigating it, leaving it to
a diligent posterity.
* R is not actually constructed on the figure.
496 Archimedes' De sphaera et ryJindro
VIII. OMNIS COLUMPNA cmus ALTITUDO DIAMETRO
SPERE ET BASIS MAXIMO CIRCULO IN SPERA FUERINT
EQUALES SEXQUIALTERA EST SPERE, SICUT ET TOTA
SUPERFICIES COLUMPNE SUPERFICIEI SPERE SEXQUIAL-
5 TERA EST.
Ne quis veritati demonstratoris oblatret et demonstrationis tenorem
interrumpat, priusquam propositum aggrediamur, quoddam elemen-
turn ad propositum perutile proponatur, et probetur quod tale est.
Si fuerit proportio primi ad secundum que tertii ad quartum, fueritque
10 id quod fit ex ductu quinti in primum maius eo quod fit ex ductu
sexti in secundum, erit quoque id quod fit ex ductu quinti in ter-
tium maius eo quod fit ex ductu sexti in quartum.
Exemplum. Sit A ad B ut C ad D et fiat ex ductu E in A quantitas
G et ex Fin B quantitas H; sitque G maior quam H[Fig. 72]. Et item
15 ex E in C fiat quantitas ~ et ex F in D quantitas S. Dico quod ~ f
est maior s.
Dispositio. Ducatur E in B et fiat R, et E in D et fiat lV. Ratio.
\ge. Ex E in A fit G; ex E in B fit R; ergo cum productorum et
producentium eadem sit proportio, erit G ad R ut ..t4 ad B. Item ex E
20 in B fit R; ex F in B fit H, ergo que est proportio E ad F eadem est
R ad H. Rursum, ex E in C fit ill; ex E in D fit N, ergo proportio C
ad D est que ill ad N. Item ex E in D fit N; ex Fin D fit S, ergo que
est proportio E ad F eadem est N ad S. Sic ergo collectis premissis,
erit proportio G ad R que Ai ad N et R ad H que N ad S. Ergo per
25 equam proportionem que est proportio G ad H eadem est AI ad S.
Sed G est maior H. Ergo Ai est maio! S. Sic quod cum iam constet,
principali attingamus proposito.
Esto exemplumQilf columpna cuius altitudo lineaQill est equalis
I VIII: sa D Ol)J .riC 11 B 20. J secunda
conclusio !JIg. B ')101111 rccc1Jtiori / IJlg. B
IIIQIIII recentiori: glossum ex Inagna causa
quod (quia ?) includitur notabilis con-
clusio ...
2 in spera A 0111. BC
6-7 tenoren1 interrun1pat ~ 4 Ir. IJC
7 quoddan1 0111 ..c,1
8 perutile: utile -",1
I 3 fiat B fit .4C
14 item: tunc ~ 4
I 5 fiat ./1C oln. B I et onJ. A
17 E2: C ...4
19 producentium et productorum _4 / sit
01)1. /1
22 est 011/. _..~
23 eaden1: ea ...-Ll
2.4 It
2
: }-I C'I N2: ]\1 ~
26 S 0.')/. C' I Sic Ofll. AC
27 attingalTIUr(?) C
28 est 0111. _/1
2 De cun/is sIIperftcicbl1.r of ]ohanncs de 497
VIII. EVERY CYI..IN"DI:R IS 1'0
THE DIJ\l\IETER OF i\ .,,\ND B,\SI': IS "EQU.i-\L
TO THE IN IS
H.t\LVES SPI-lE,RE, JL! S'I' j\5 'I'O'-ri\TI SURF1\CE OF
THE CYLINDER IS f-li\I .. 1'1-lF: OF
SPI-IERE.
Lest anyone carp at t11e soundness of tIle denlonstrator and interrupt
the course of the demonstration, let us-before we undertake that which we
have proposed-posit arId prove a certain principle useful for [proving]
the proposition. [The principle is this:] If the ratio ()f the first [term]
to the second is as that of the t11ird to t11e fourth, and if the product of
the fifth and the first is greater than t11e product of the sixth and the second,
so also will the product of the fifth and the third be greater than the pro-
duct of the sixth and the fourt11.
Exemplification: LetAIB = CID. Let E' = G, and F B == H,
and let G > H [see Fig. 72 ]. And also let E C == and F D == S.
I say that Af > S.
A
B
G
R
H
--
Pig. 72
c
D
M
N
_5_
E
F
Disposition: Let E B = R, and E D = 1\/. Now proceed with the
proof: With E A = G, and E B = R, therefore, since the ratio of the
products and that of the quantities producing the products are the same,
G/R = A/B. Also, with E B= R, and F B=H, thereforeE/F= R/H;
again with E C = M, and E D = N, therefore CID = hllN. Also,
with E D = N, and F D = S, therefore ElF = N/S. Therefore, with
all of these statements set forth together, GIR = MIN, and R/H= N/S.
Therefore, bythe equality of ratios, G/H = M/S. But G > H; therefore
A! > S. Since this is now evident, let us take up the principal proposition.
For example, let there be a cylinder QM whose altitude, line QM, is
45
55
40
115V
498 Archimedes' De sphaera ,t cy/indrfJ
AB diametto spere F et basis eius circulus RS maximo circulo F
30 spere, scilicet circulo ADEC, sit equalis [Fig. 73]. Dico quod colump-
naQMest sexquialtera spere F. Sin autem, sitQ.iV/ sexquialtera maioris
vel minoris, et prima K spere minoris.
Dispositio. Inscribatur ACED circulo poligonium equalium late-
rum et numero parium, circulum H minime contingentium. Deinde
35 a G in E ducatur linea recta EG, et ab 0 centro utriusque circuli
ducatur 01 perpendicularis ad AG. Stanti ergo AE, circumvolvatur
poligonium et fiat corpus conicarum superficierum. Et circumvolvatur
semicirculus ADEfiatque spera F, et HYTsemicirculus fiatque spera
K. Medietas autem corporis conicarum 8uperficierum dicatur P.
Ratio. Age. Quod fit ex ductu AO in circumferentiam ADEC est
duplum circuli ADEC, per I primam Archimenidis. Et quod fit ex
EG in eandem circumferentiam est duplum P per quintam huius.
Ergo que est proportio AO ad EG eadem est circuli ADECad super-
ficiem P. Sed AO est maior 01, cum I sit rectus, et AE maior EG,
cum C cadens in semicirculum sit rectus. Ergo maius est id quod
fit ex ductu AEin AO quam ex 01in EC. Sit ergo OA primum, EC'
secundum, circulus ADEC tertium, P quarturn, AE quintum, 01
sextuffi. Ergo per id quod pauIo ante principale propositum probavi-
mus maius est id quod fit ex AE quinto in ADECcirculum tertium,
50 scilicet que dicta est esse sexquialtera spere K, eo quod
fit ex ductu 01 sexti in P superficien1 quartum. Sed quod fit ex ductu
01 in superficiem Pest triplum semisolidi, per proximam. Ibi enim
probatum est quod tres piramides quarum altitudo est 01, bases vero
sunt equales conice superficiei semipoligonii, sunt equales semipoli-
gonio, et ad illas tres triplum est quod fit ex ductu 01in P superficiem
conicam semipoligonii. Ergo quod fit ex 01 in superficiem P sex-
quialterun1 est tatius solidi. Ergo collectis prioribus columpna Q1.1/,
que est sexquialtera ad speram R.", est maior quam sexquialtera totius
solidi conicarum superficierum. Ergo K subsexquialterum est maius
60 quam solidum, pars suo toto, quod est impossibile. Relinquitur ergo
30 ADEC: ADOE 0.',.1 I quod: quonian1 f1
32 prin10 Ir. _-4 post 111inoris
2
33 ACED: ACDE
39 corporis Ir. _4 post superficicrUll1
42 ante huius del. B lIIIt1; e' habet IIIIln
43 AO: AD ./'1
44 AE: AE est J,4
..d id OIl}. /1
48-49 principale ... proba\rimus pre-
111issin1us B
49 id 0111 ./1 / circulun1 0111. A
54 sunt
l
0111. /1
55 tees tres est lie I tripluffi est fr .6.4. I
quod: cunl quod 13 I ()[: J\I .4 .
58 ll1aior :tTlaius I sexquialtcflHl1 ./1
z De cllrvis sJlperftciebJls of Johanncs de 499
equal to diameter ./1.c' (Jf sphere 3.11d \vhose base circle ./?,Y is equal to the
greatest circle of sphere F', i.e., to circle /1 LJJ:'C-" [scc Fig. 73]. I tllat
cylinder Qjlf is 3/2 sp11ere 1:". f"ar if not, let Q.l! llc 3/ 2 [a spllcre1greater
or less [than F]. III the first place I.let it 11c 3/2] a lesser sphere A-.
Disposition: Let t11ere be il1scribecl in circle ".' a regular polygon
of an even number of sides, wh.ic11 sides clo nc)t tOllCh circle !-l at all.
Then let straig11t line E"C be drawn fr()n1 e; t() ./j', arid let lillC 0/ be drawn
from center 0 of each circle perl)cndicular to ./1 Cr'. With /'1 as an axis,
let the polygon be rotated, foroling a body \vith cOllical surfaces. l\nd let
the semicircle ADE be rotated, forIlling spllere F'; alld let semicircle
HYT be rotated, forming spllere K. JV[oreover, let half of the bodJr with
conical surfaces be designated as P.
Proceed with the proof: (./40 circum 41 DEC) ::::= 2 circle ./1 DEC, by:"
the first [proposition of the illeasttrenJCflt of the Circle] of j\rchimedes. j\nd
(BC circum ADEC) == (2 surface of P), by the fifth [proposition] of
this [work]. Therefore, AO/EG' == circle/.IDEe/surface of P. But _,'0
> 01, since L I is a right angle; and /1 > EG', since L G, falling in a
semicircle, is a right angle. Therefore, (.4E ./':JO) > (0/ EC). Therefore,
let OA be the first term, EC the second, circle the third, [the
surface of] P the fourth, AE the fifth, and 01 the sixth. I-Ience, by that
principle which we proved just before [undertaking] the principal propo-
sition, the product of the fifth term AE and the third term circle
which product is equal to cylinderQilf, itself said to be equal to 3/2 sphere
K, is greater than the product of the sixth term 01 and the fourth term
surface of P. But the product of 01 and the surface of P is three times the
semisolid, by the previous [proposition]. For there it was proved that
three cones each of whose altitudes is 01 and whose bases are [in sum]
equal to the conical surfaces of half the polygonal body are equal to the
[volume of the] half of the polygonal body; and (01 surface of P) =
(3 the three cones). Therefore, (01 surface of P) == (3/2 the whole
solid). Therefore, with all the prior statements brought together, [it is
evident that] cylinder QM, which is 3/2 sphere K, is greater than 3/2 the
whole solid with conical surfaces. Therefore, [sphere] K, which is 2/3
[cylinder Q.M], is greater than the solid, [that is,] the part is greater than
s00 Archimedes' De sphaera et rylindro
quod columpna QM non est sexquialtera spere minoris quam F.
Dieo etiam quod neque'maioris. Sed ne tempus nugis teramus prior
maneat figura. Et esto lineaQM equalis linee HT, diametto spere K,
et circulus RS equalis HYT maximo circulo spere K. Dieo itaque
65 quod columpna,QM est sexquialtera spere K, falsigraphus immo spere
F maioris. Inconcussis omnibus maneat dispostitio que et prius, addito
eo quod AO secetur in Z, ita quod proportio AO ad HO sit tanquam
HOadZO.
Ratio. Age. Que est proportio EG ad AO eadem est superficiei P
70 ad circulum sicut prius probavimus. Et que est AO ad ZO,
id est, AO semidiametri ad HO semidiametrum, duplicata, eadem est
ADEC circuli ad HYT circulum, per primam duodecimi. Ergo per
equam proportionem, que est proportio linee EG ad lineamZo eadem
est superficiei P ad HYT circulum. Sed quod fit ex 01 in EG suum
75 duplum maius est eo quod fit ex THin OZ. Ergo per regulam in
initio huius propositionis probatam, quod fit ex ductu 01 in super-
ficiem Pest maius eo quod fit ex ductu TH diametri in HYT circulum.
Sed quod fit ex ductu 01 in superficiem Pest sexquialterum totius
solidi conicarum superficierum, per proximam. Et quod fit ex HT
80 in circulum HYT est columpnaQJt;!, quam dixit sexquialteram spere
F esse falsigraphus. Ergo maius est sexquialterum solidi conicarum
superficierum quam columpna Qitf sexquialtera spere F. Ergo sub-
sexquialterum subsexquialtero maius, solidum spera F, pars suo toto,
quod est impossibile. Relinquitur ergo columpnam non esse sexqui-
8s alterarn maiori spere vel minori quam illi cuius diameter axi columpne
et maximus circulus basi columpne equatur. Sic ergo proposito non
sumus defraudati.
62 teranlUS: tencamus ...4
63 equalis linee _4 linea equalis BC
64 RS: KS C I circulo fr. _4 ante J-IYT
65 columpna QM A QM conica 13C I est
sexquialtera fr. /1
75 fit 011/ .../''1
75-7
6
in
2
propnsitionis: superius .. -1
77-78 est .... P 0111. _,1
80 circulum I-IYT fr 4
80-81 sexquialteram falisgraphus: falsi-
graphus esse sexquialteran1 spereF A
83 Inaius: lnaius est jJ I spera: spere ..
84 CO]U111pnalTI: colulnpnam G'
S rnai(Jri spcre Jr...--1
86-
8
7 Sic ... defr;ludatc; sic constat pro-
pnsitlltn /'1
2 De curtJis sJperji,-it-1JIIs of Johannes de 'finemue 0 I
the whole, whicll is imp()ssible. It rC111ains, tlleref()rc, that cylinder Q.lf
is not 3/2. of a spllere less tIlan F.
I say also that neither is it [three halves] of one greater [than But
in order not to waste time .ill jdle speecll, let lIS keep tIle prior figure
[Fig. 73]. Let line Qllf be cqllal to line 1.1]-', tIle diameter of sphere R",
and circle RS to m'-'T, the greatest circle of sphere K. i\nd so I say that
cylinder Qivf is 3/2 sphere K, while the pseudographer [says] rather that
cylinder Qj}[ is 3/2 tIle larger spIlere F. \Vith all things unchanged, the
disposition [of quantites and magnitudes] remains as before, it having
been added tIlat .40 is cut at Z so that /JO/HO == HO/ZO.
5
R
f
A
Fig. 73
Note: The figure of the cylinder MQ is rotaded so that altitude klQ stands as a vertical.
Proceed with the proof: BC/AO = surface of P/circle ..:4DEC, as we
proved earlier. And AO/ZO = (AO/OH)2 = circle ADEC/circle mY'T,
by [Proposition] XII.I [of the Elements]. Hence by the equality of ratios
EGjZO = surface of Pjcircle HYT. But with BC = 2 OJ, (OJ EC) >
(TH OZ). Therefore, by the rule proved in the beginning of this propo-
sition, (01 surface of P) > (diameter TH circle m:--T).Ho,"vever,
(01 surface of P) = (3/ 2 the whole solid with conical surfaces), by the
preceding [proposition]; and (HT circle HYT) = cylinder Qilf, which
the pseudographer has said to be 3/2 sphere F. Therefore, 3/2. the solid
with conical surfaces is greater than cylinder QJlf; i.e., greater than 3/2
sphere F. Therefore, 2/3 (3/2 the solid) > 2/3 (3/2 sphere F), and so the
solid is greater than sphere F, i.e., the part is greater than the whole,
which is impossible. It remains, therefore., that a cylinder is not 3/2 a
sphere larger or smaller than the sphere whose diameter is equal to the
axis of the cylinder and whose greatest circle is equal to the base of the
cylinder. And so, therefore, we have not been deceived inour proposition.
'02. Archimedes' De sphaera ,t ry/indro
IX. OMNIS SPERA EST EQUALIS ROTUNDE PIRAMIDI
CUIUS BASIS EQUATUR SUPERFICIEI SPERE ET ALTITIJDO
SEMIDIAMETRO SPERE.
Esto exemplum A piramis rotunda, cuius basis circulus NM sit
equalis superfieiei spere C et AB altitudo A sit equalis DC semidia-
metro C spere [Fig. 74]. Dieo quod spera C est equalis piramidi A.
Dispositio. Sumatur enim piramis E, euius altitudo El sit equalis
AB et eius basis equalis maximo cireulo spere C. Sumatur etiam
columpna cuius basis sit equalis maximo eireulo spere C et GH eius
10 axis sit duplus ad DC.
Ratio. Age. GH eolumpna est duplo altior piramide E et sita est
in equali basi cum E. Ergo columpna GH est sextupla ad E pirami-
dem. Si enim essent eiusdem altitudinis columpna esset tripla ad E
per IX duodecimi. Sed columpna GH sita est in basi PG circulo
15 equali maximo circulo spere C et axis GH est equalis diametro spere
C ex dispositione. Ergo columpna GHest sexquialtera ad speram C,
per proximam. Sed columpna GH erat sextupla ad E. Ergo spera C
est quadrupla ad E. Item ex ductu diametri C spere in circumferentiam
116r maximi circuli C spere, i.e., basis E piframidis, sit curva superficies
20 spere C, per sextam huius, scilicet MN circulus. Et quod fit ex ductu
diametri spere C in circumferentiam maximi circuli spere C est quad-
fuplum ad circulum maximum spere C, per primam Archimenidis de
mensura circuli. Ergo a duplici pari circulus MN est quadruplus basi
piramidis E. Sed E et A piramides sunt eiusdem altitudinis. Ergo A
I IX 0111 ./4C 9
6
DIll B 3
6
] I est eCJualis
rotunde ./4 rotunde est equalis RC
5 DC DIll. /1
7 enim 0111 .1
14 I.X: XI _,,1 / FG: FI-I .-"'1
1 8:1 19 C s[Jere Ir.
Z I <:l 0/1/. -,'1
22. circullllll nlaXlnl11ITl Ir... 1
22-23 per ... ci rcu.li _,I 0///. 1](;'
2. De cllrl)is .rllperjicieb/l.s of Jobannes de t-finelllue 5
0
3
IX. EVERY IS t-ro .. \
IS EQUi\L TO OF j\ND
.1\LTITUDE IS EOU!\L 'l'
I
C) -RJ\D1US ()F
"-
For example, let there be a cone .4'--', \\,llOSC base circle is equal to
the surface of sphere C al1d wllose altitude B is e<'lua1 to radius DC of
sphere C [see Fig. 74]. I say that spllerc C is equal t() cone
Disposition: Let there be .posited cone};", WJ10SC altitude E'l is equal
to AB and whose base is equal to t11c greatest circle of sphere C. 1\150 let
a cylinder be posited whose base is equal to the greatest circle of sphere C
and whose axis GH is 2 DC.
B
A
Fig. 74
Proceed with the proof: Cylinder GHis twice the height of cone E and
is situated on a base equal to that of E. Hence cylinder CH= 6 cone E,
for if the altitudes were the same, the cylinder would be three times E,
by XII.9 [of the Elements]. But cylinder GHis situated on base circle FG
equal to the greatest circle of sphere C, and axis CH is equal to the
diameter of sphere Cby construction. Hence cylinder CH= 3/2 sphere C,
by the preceding [proposition]. But cylinder CH was [equal to] 6 E.
Hence sphere C = 4 E. Also, the product of tIle diameter of sphere C
and the circumference of the greatest circle of sphere C or of the base
of cone E is equal to the surface of sphere C, by the sixth [proposition]
of this [work], i.e., [this product is equal] to circle A/N. And the product
of the diameter of sphere C and the circumference of the greatest circle
of sphere C is four times the greatest circle of sphere C, by the first
[proposition] of Archimedes' Measurement of the Circle. Therefore, by equal-
ity twice, circle MN = 4 base of cone E. But cones E and A are of the
'04 Archimedes' D, sphatra et cyljllfiro
25 piramis est quadrupIa E piramidi per XII. Sed C spera fuerat quad-
rupIa ad E. Ergo A piramis est equalis C spere. Ad quod asttuendum
asplravlmus.
X. CUIUSLIBET SPERE PROPORno AD CUBUM SUI DIr\-
METRI EST TANQUAM PROPORnoUNDECIMAD VIGINTI
UNUM.
Hoc respondet secunde propostitioni Arehimenidis de quadratura
5 cureuli, et ex ea fidem sumit. Sed cum ilia proeesserit per fere, et hee
similiter, unde nee hee nee ilia est vera; sed vulgariter per integra
proeedit.
Esto exemplum D spera et eubus fundatus super EH, quadratum
linee O.iVI equalis AB diametro D spere [Fig. 75]. Dico quod que
10 proportio cubi EH ad speram D eadem est XXI ad XI. Fiat enim
columpna OM, cuius tarn axis quam diameter basis equatur AB.
Ratio. Age. Proportio GF quadrati ad 0 cireulum est sicut XlIII
ad XI, per secundam Archimenidis de quadratura circuli. Sed ex ductu
0.1.1-1 altitudinis in GF quadratum fit cubus, et ex OAf in 0 circulum
15 sit columpna. Ergo cum productorum et producentium eadem sit
proportio, erit proportio cubi ad columpnam tanquam GF basis ad
o circulum. Ergo a pari proportio cubi ad columpnam sicut XlIII
ad XI. Sed proportio columpne ad speram est sciut XXI ad XlIII,
cum columpna sit sexquialtera ad speram, per anteproximam. Sit ergo
20 cubus primum, columpna secundum, XlIII tertium, XI quartuffi,
spera quintum, XXI sextuffi. Ergo per XXIIII quinti Elementorum
in proportione equalitatis erunt quantus cubus ad speram tantus nu-
merus XXI ad numerum XI.
Sicque tiphis noster portum tenet in quem iam dudum vela suc-
25 C spera Ir. ./1
I X 01lJ ./lC 10
8
IIII B 4
8
J
2 proportio 0111. /1
4 I-Iec ..'.'1.
5 ex ... sun1it 0111 ..<1 I sU111mit C / proces-
serit ..4 l)recesserit BC
8 EI-I: GH _4
9 D spere Ir. / que 0'''...-:1
] 0 cubi EJ-[: est cubi C.I-I A / eadell1 est:
que
I I basis 0111 ./-:1
12 quadrati quadranguli BC'
]2-13 XlIII ad XI: 11 ad 14 ...4
20 secundunl: quasi secundum C
21 XXIIII quinti B 23o.
m
lZ
m1
..4 XXlllla
prinli C'
23 numerun1 OIJI. /-1
24-28 Sicque ... ArchiJncludis OHI. }-1
24 typhis F I tiphis noster: tinlba nostra
classis nostra) i.e. navis clasis
nostra) i.e. navis D) I quelll: quam 1:';
ialTI 01)/. /1'-
24- 2 5 _-l/j'j''l) I) I succingerat
B succingserat C' succingcerat_l
2 De curvis Jlperjiciebuj' of Johannes de Tinenlue 50 5
same altitude. Therefore, cone _,/1 4 COI1C by [tIle eleventh proposi-
tion of Book] XII [of the Ele/liel1/s]. But spllcre \\tas 4 E
Y
"fherefore,
cone ..4 = sphere C. f\nd this is tIle parism to wc aspired.
X. Tl-IE RATIO O.F j\NY ClJBF OF ITS DII\-
METER IS i\S THE Ri\ TIO ()F XI TO XXI.
This corresponds to the second pro[losition of i\rchimedes' 011 the
Quadrature of the circle, and it assumes its credence frolll tllat [proposition].
But since that [proposition] proceeded only by approximation, as also
does this one, neither this nor that onc is true, but proceeds only in a
common way by means of integers.
For example, let there be a sphere .D and a cube based on EH \\thich is
the square of line O.Llf, Oilf being equal to diameter B of sphere D [see
Fig. 75]. I say that cube EH/sphere D = 21/1 I. For let there be constructed
A
E F
H
o ......-----+------tM o
8 G
Fig. 75
Note: The figure of the cylinder OM is rotated so that altitude rotates as a vertical.
a cylinder OM, whose axis as well as its base diameter is equal to ..
Proceed with the proof: Square GF/circle 0 = 14/1 I, by the second
[proposition] of Archimedes' QuadratI/re of the Circle. But
(altitude OM square GP) = cube EH, and (Ok/ circle 0) = cylinder Oil I.
Therefore, since the ratios of the products and the quantities producing
the products are the same, cube [EH]/cylinder [OAf] = square GFjcircle o.
Therefore, by equality, cube [EH]/cylinder [OA,!] = 14/11.
cylinder [OM]/sphe.re [D] = 2.1/14, since cylinder [OilfJ = 3/2 sphere [D],
by the next to the last proposition [i.e., Proposition VIII]. Hence let
the cube be the first term, the cylinder the second, 14 the third, I I the
fourth, the sphere the fifth, and 21 the sixth. Therefore, by [Proposition]
V.24 of the Elements, cube/sphere = 21/11.
'06 Archimedes' D, sphaerll ,t r:YlifJliro
-5 cinxerat. Iamque cum bibulis hereat harems anchora Archimenidis
remigii, Johannes navigationis grates ageret summo creatori.
Explicit commentum Johannis de Tinemue in demonstrationes
Archimenidis.
25 bibulis OHI. D I C!lIII lacuna / hereat: lla-
beat D I / post anchora add. BJ simul /
Archimenidis ..4EJF Archimenides
BCID
25-28 anchora .... Architnenidis BCID
anchora remigii Archimenidis. Explicit
eommentum Gervasii de Essexta (As-
sassia E) ...4
26 Johannes: et ] ohannes J / grates age-
ret: grate agit I grates agit DDI / SUll1-
mo fr. Tante grates
27-28 Explicit ... Archimenidis om. JF
27 Tinemue expalldi ex Tin' B Tin C Thin
D Thin
9
DJ TIn I ((Note: Myexpan-
sion is based on the form given in the
lower right margin of the first folio,
I r If, of B.))
28 post ArchiJnenidis ad,{. J J c ~ B "Ion" re-
cenliori super duos libros. hie finis. et
f"g. slIpfri/ls 11 babe! ilIa/Ill recf.nliori Ar-
chirncnidcs. Secundus liber. finis.
2 De curois sltpcrftcieblls of ] oha nnes de 'finemuc, I 57
l\nd so our 1
4
iphys reaclics the 110rt to\,varcl \ylucll he set sail but a short
time ago. f\nd now \vhen t11c UI1ChC)f of _l.\rchillledes tIle ro\\'cr sits fast
in the thirsty sands, let JOhUllllCS extc11l1 tile tllanks ()f navigatiol1 to the
Supreme Creator.
Here ends the comn1elltary of Johanrlcs de 1
4
inemue on the demon-
strations of Archimedes.
COMMENTARY
Proposition I
1-5 "Cuiuslibet ... basis." TIle form of this enuncIatIon was obviously
suggested by the first proposition of the De mens/Ira circuli. This
proposition must be distinguished from, but compared to, those given
by Archimedes in the De sphaera et cylindro (Proposition 14 of Book I)
and the Banii 1\1iisa in the T/erba jiliortlm (Proposition IX). For the
citation of these and the comparable propositions of Pappus and
Leonardo Pisano, see Commentary, Verba jiliortlm, Proposition IX,
page 63. The proof is for a right circular cone.
15-1 7 "Rationis ... admitti." This supposition is comparable to the first
postulate of the Cambridge Version of the De menSllra circrl/i (see
Chapter Three, Section 1, above). These lines, together with lines
18-22, form a rather intrusive comment, which perhaps suggests that
Johannes was commenting on a primitive form of this work rather
than on the De sphaera et cylindro.
23-102 "Triangulus.... proposui." We can represent the spirit of the proof
in an abbreviated form (see Fig. 64), using modern symbols as follows. *
Proof:
(I) To prove: S = F, where S is the lateral surface of a right
circular cone of slant height I and base circumference c, and
F is the area of right triangle such that F = 1(I c).
(2) Either F = S or F =1= S. If F =1= S, then F > S, or F < S.
* The following table relates the symbols used in this commentary to the quantities
given in the figure and text:
I = SZ = slant height BB f = side of polygon ACNP
c = ST = circum of circle ACNP h = altitude of face triangle EAB
Cl = cireum of circle HK
508 Archimedes' D, sphalrll et qJiNJro
(3) Suppose first that F < S, and by the basic postulate F = SI'
where SI is the lateral surface of some cone whose altitude is
the same as that of the cone of surface S, but whose base is
less than that of cone S. Let Cl be the circumference of the
base of SI. Hence, Cl < c.
(4) Now inscribe in C a regular polygon, one of whose sides is t
and whose perimeter is p, such that C > p > Cl and p does not
touch Cl at any place. (Cf. Proposition III of the Verba ftliorum.)
Then construct a pyramid with a polygon of perimeter p as the
base and with an identical altitude as that of cone of surface S.
Let the surface of this pyramid be 52. Let the altitude of one
of its triangular faces be h.
(5) Then 52 = I (h p), since the area of anyone triangle is
1(h t) and the sum of all t's is p.
(6) Hence 52 < F, since F = I (I c) and I > hand c > p.
(7) Therefore 52 < 5I' from (3) and (6).
(8) But 52 was constructed as including SI; hence, in actualit)T
S2 > SI
(9) Since (7) is the contradiction of the fact of (8), the supposition
from which (7) was derived, namely, that F < 5, is false.
(10) Then suppose, if it is possible, that F > S and thus that
F = SI where SI is the surface of a cone of the same altitude
as cone 5 but whose circumference Cl of its base is greater
than c.
(I I) Now circumscribe about C a regular polygon of side t and
perimeter p such that Cl > P > c and p does not touch Cl-
Erect on p a pyramid of surface 52 with the same altitude as
the cone of surface J', and, as before, let h be the altitude of
one of its triangular faces.
(12) Tl1en 2 == i (h p). (Cf. step 5)
(13) Hence S2 > F, since h === I andp > c.
(14) Therefore 52 > Lf I' sil1ce F' == 5 I by l1ypothesis.
(15) But S2 was cOl1structed, in fact, within SI) and so S2 <
(16) Since (14) is contradictory to tIle fact of (15), the Sllpposition
from w11ic11 (14) "ras deri\red, l1anlely, F' > LY, is false.
(17) Hence, since 1-; :1;, L.f and. ]-1' Lf, t11el1 F = (Jf L) == (I- c).
49 "per [41] theorema primi." See Commentary, Cambridge Version of
the De Ille/lS/lr{1 cirellli, Cllal,tcr SCCtiOl1 I, lil1c 3.,.
z De curtJis s/lperjit'iehus (Jf Johannes de IfineJnuc, 11 509
52 "primam secundi." See C()n1r11cntaJ:)r, C:orlllls Christi \rersion, Cllaptcr
Fi Ye, Section 5, lines 66-67.
105-11 7 "Ex.... basis." 1
f
his corollary is iclcntical to Proposition 15 of
Book I of j\rcllirnedes' De .rpbflert/ et (ed. ()f I-Ieiberg, p. 69).
Incidentally, the actual \vording of Johannes' (ILlotati()ll of p[()posi-
tion I differs from that of tI1C Gcrard of C:retTIc)na translatif)n. I would
suspect that, if this were an ()riginal l .. atin comlJosition rather tllan a
translation, Gerard's translation \vould have been quoted rather
exactly, as is usually the case witll later f...atill geometrical treatises.
In short, the somewIlat different forl11 ()f the quotation from Prop-
osition I of the Dc flle/lst/ra cirCl11i may be another indication that \\c
are faced here with a translation rather than an original composition.
Proposition 11
1-22 "Cuiuslibet .... propositum." Cf. the comparable but different theo-
rem of Archimedes' De sphaera et C)'Iindro, Book I, Proposition 13
(ed. of l-Ieiberg, pp. 53-62). The proof is similar to that for the first
proposition and so is merely sketched by tIle author. I use
modern symbols to present the tenor of the proof.
The given rectangle of adjacent sides equal to the axis of the cylinder
and the circumference of its base must be either equal to the lateral
surface S of the cylinder or not equal to it. If it is not equal to ..f,
then it must be equal to the surface SI of some other cylinder vlith
the same axis but with a smaller or larger base. Suppose first that the
quadrangle is equal to the lateral surface 5I of a cylinder of smaller
base. Then inscribe within the base of the cylinder of surface S a
regular polygon whose perimeter is greater than the circumference of
the base of the cylinder of SI and whose sides in no place touch that
circumference. Then construct a prismatic figure within the base
of which figure is the regular polygon previously inscribed. The
lateral surface of this prism can be shown to be at the same time
smaller and larger than the surface 5I' an obvious contradiction
negating the assumption that the surface 5I of a cylinder with a
base smaller than that of the cylinder of surface S is the desired
surface to which the rectangle must be equated. In the second half
of the proof the surface of a similar prism circumscribed around S is
shown to be simultaneously larger and smaller than the surface SI
of a cylinder with the same axis as that of the cylinder of surface S
but whose base is larger. From this contradiction it is apparent that
C
J
:-= CirCU111 of circle )\15
(2nd half of proof)
(4 =-: circuJTI of circle
PI !1criIn of rn1yvon B_/IC
pcrin1 nf
S10 Archimedes' De sphaera 8t cy/inJro
the desired surface SI cannot be of a cylinder of larger base. Since
then SI cannot be the surface of a cylinder of either larger or smaller
base, it must be the surface of a cylinder of the same base as that of
which S is the surface. In short, SI must be identical with S, and so
the given rectangle is equal to S. Q.E.D.
23-40 "Ex.... theoremati." Both corollaries are proved by the applica-
tion of simple proportions.
Proposition III
1-3 5 "Quorumlibet .... sufficienter." For a discussion of the comparable
theorems given by Pappus and the authors of the Verba jiliort"'J, see
the Commentary to Proposition V of the Verba jiliorum in Chapter
Four above. This proposition is patently an auxiliary theorem to be
used later; it does not concern itself with a "curved surface," as do
the other theorems of this treatise. Johannes' proof (see Fig. 65) of
this theorem follows: *
(I) Let d
l
, d
z
be the diameters of circles whose circumferences
are Cl' Cz.
(2) Then either dI/d
z
== CI/CZ or dI/d
z
* CI/CZ. And if dI/d
z
* C
1
/C
2
)
then d
I
/d
2
== C
1
/C
3
where C
3
is either greater or less than Cz.
(3) Suppose first that dI/d
z
== C
I
/C
3
where C
3
is less than C
2
(13) Therefore d
2
/d
I
== C
2
/C
4
\v11cre C
4
< (I
(14) But (13) can be sllown to be falsc by steps similar t() those of
(3) to (8). Hence if (13) is false, tIle Supp()sition from which it
was derived is false, namely, that C
J
> c
2
(15) Since c
3
:} C
z
and C
3
{: c
2
, then C
3
= C
2
and dl/d
z
== C
I
,/C
2
Q.E.D.
The author concludes the proof with the statement that the proposi-
tion can be proved in another way by the application of the third
proposition of the De lJ1CnStlra circllli of I\rchimedes.
14 "primam duodecimi." Although the author of the Ljber de cllrt'is no
doubt precedes the Adelard 11 translation in point of time, in order
to keep uniformity of citation (and since the proposition as giv'en in
Adelard 11 is basically the same as in the Greek text) I shall quote
the Adelard 11 Version (Brit. Add. 34018, 63r): "Omnium
duarum superficierum multiangularum inter duos circulos descripta-
rum est proportio alterius ad alteram tanquam proportio quadratorum
que ex diametris circulorum eas circumscribentium proveniunt." Now
if polygonl/polygon
z
= d
J
2
/d
z
2
[by Proposition XII. I] and if polygon
l
!
polygon
z
= PIZ/PZZ, then it is obvious that d
l
/d
2
= PI /P2, as stated
in step (5) of the argument given in the previous comment.
Proposition IV
1-37 "Quarumlibet .... proposuimus." Again (see Fig. 66) let us restate
Johannes' argument. * In the fourth proposition Johannes will prove
that S2, - SI = 1(/2 - /1) (c2 + Cl) where S2, and S1 are the lateral
surfaces of similar cones and /2 and /1 are their slant heights and
* The following table relates the symbols used in this commentary to the quantities
given in the figure and text:
/1 = IM = SZ "I = zy = cireum of circle MNA
/2 = CB = ST "2 = TP = circum of circle EQB
SI 2 Archimedes' D, sphaerll ,t ty/inJrO
C2. and Cl are the circumferences of their bases. a. Archimedes, De
sphaera et cylindro, Book I, Proposition 16, and VerbaJiliONlIfJ, Proposi-
tion XI; both are cited in the commentary to Proposition XI of the
T/erba Jiliorum in Chapter IV above_ The proof follows:
(I) Let there be a right traingle F2 = 1(/
2
- C2), and thus, by Prop-
osition I of the De curvis, we can say that 52 = F
2
(2) From 1
2
subtract the length I
I
and erect a line x parallel to c
2
-
There will be formed then a triangle F
I
= I
I
- x similer to
triangle F
2
-
(3) Then /2//
1
= c
2
1x since F
I
is similar to F
2
-
(4) Hence x = Cl since (a) /2//1 = d
2
/d
l
by definition of similar
cones, and (b) d
2
/d
l
= C
2
/C
I
by Proposition III of the Dc curvis,
and hence (c) /2//1 = C
2
/C
I
-
(5) Hence F
I
= 5I by Proposition I of the De curvis_
(6) Thus 52 - SI = F
2
- F
I
-
(7) But F
2
- F
I
is a quadrangular area whose base is /2 - /1 and
whose erect sides are c
2
, Cl. This area can be divided into two
triangles with bases respectively C
2
and Cl and with the same
altitude /2 - 1
1
(8) Fz - F
I
= !(/
2
- 1
1
) - (c
2
+Cl) = 52 - SI' by the addition of
the trial1gles formed in (7). Q.E.D.
PropositiOfJ T/
1-117 "Si .... propositum." Cf. De sphaera et cylindro, Book I, Proposition
24 (ed. of Heiberg, 95-97). The fifth proposition is crucial for Johan-
nes' ultimate determination of the surface area of the sphere. This
proposition finds tIle surface area of a solid composed of conoid
segnlents generated by the revollltion of a regular polygon inscribed
ill a circle around one of the diameters of the circle. .L\lthough the
autllor does not stipulate in tIle statement of the proposition the
number of sides of tIle original polygon whose revolution describes
tIle solid in question, like .l\rchimedes he assumes in his proof that
the number of sides of tIlis pOlygOl1 is divisible by four.
To understand wllat Johannes is proving and the nature of his
proof, * let us take an equilateral polygon of 4 lJ sides, each side of
111agnitude t (see Fig. 67). this polygon be inscribed in a circle
* TIle foIlowillg table relates the s)'tn- c == -!1DIJ-I b
l
YI r
l
=::. BY
bols llsed in this comnlentary to tIle quan- (/ _/:1/ b1. ==
tities given in the figure and text: ( ._=- };'ff D,l -_.-: .fl" I DE
z De CllrVis su.pcrjicicb'Is of Johanncs de 1
4
incmuc, V SI 3
of circumference c and djanlcter cl. r'llcn let tile circle witll the in-
scribed polygon be rotated rr11( It-It a llianlctcr of the circle. By this
rotation the circle describes a spllcre and the polygon describes a
figure with conical surfaces (cf. De Spht1er(l, Bo()k I, Proposition 24).
The first part of Jo11anl1cs' proj)()si tiOl1 states that the surface of this
solid S will be given as fol10\\7s: 5 :=.: t (c I +c2 -J- ... +en-I) where
Cl' C
2
, 'C
n
-
I
are the circumferences of the circles described b}T the
vertices of the angles of the pOlygOl1 in the course of its rotation;
t is the side of the polygon.
The second part of the proposition affirms further tl1at the same
surface will also be given by this relationship: 5 = c j, where j is
one of the sides of the right triangles whose hypotenuse is the diam-
eter of the circle, d, and whose other side is a side t of the polygon;
C is the circumference of the circle.
The first part of the proposition is easily proved by adding up the
conical surfaces SI' S2' ,Sn described by n sides of the polygon as it
rotates. These surfaces are, of course, equivalent to the total surface s.
The proof follows:
(I) SI = ! t Cl by De curvis, Proposition I.
(z) S2 = I t (Cl + (
2
) by De curvis, Proposition IV.
S3 = ! t (c
2
+(
3
) by De curvis, Proposition IV.
sn-I = I t (C
n
-
2
+ Cn-I) by De curvis, Proposition IV.
Sn = l t C
n
-
I
by De curvis, Proposition I.
(3) Hence S = t (Cl + C
2
+ ... + Cn-I) by addition. Q.E.D.
The second part of the proposition, namely, S = c j, is proved as
follows (referring to Fig. 67):
(1) hI/r
I
= h
2
/r
l
= h
3
/r
2
= ... h2n-3/rn-I = h
2n
-
2
/ro-
l
= tlf by the
proportional sides of similar triangles.
(z) Now hI + h
2
+ h
3
+h
4
+ ... +hZD-J + h
zn
-
z
= d and
r
I
+ r I + r2 +r2 + +r n- I +r n- I = dI +d2 +... +dn-
I
(3) Thus dJ(d
l
+ d
2
+ + d
n
-
I
) = tlf from (1) and (2) together.
(4) But dl(d
I
+ d
2
+ + dD-I) = cl(c
I
+ (2 + ... +Cn-I) by
De curvis, Proposition Ill.
(5) Hence tlf = cJ(c
I
+C
2
+ +Cn-I)
(6) But S = t (Cl + C2 + + Cn-I) from the first part of this
proposition.
(7) Hence S = c -j . Q.E.D.
An additional proof for a solid generated by the revolution of a
'14 Archimedes' D, sphura ,t tyliNllYJ
semipolygon of odd-numbered sides follows the same form of the
principal proof. It needs no further analysis.
78-79 "penultimam quinti." Although, as I have said, it is improbable
that this work is an original Latin composition and hence the author
had no access to the Adelard 11 version of the Elements, we can cite
the Adelard wording of Proposition V.z4 (Ms. cit., f. 2Ir) for the
sake of uniformity of citation throughout this volume and since the
Adelard reading of this proposition is equivalent to the reading of
the Greek text: "Si fuerit proportio primi ad secundam tanquam
tertii ad quartum, proportio vero quinti ad secundum tanquam sexti
ad quartum, erit proportio primi et quinti pariter acceptorum ad
secundum tanquam sexti et tertii pariter acceptorum ad quartum."
Proposition T/I
1-41 "cuislibet .... propositum." The comparative propositions of Archi-
medes and the Banii Mlisa are noted below in the Commentary to
lines 42-56. Johannes is now prepared to treat the surface area of a
sphere which he finds in this proposition to be equal to a rectangle,
one of whose two adjacent sides is equal to the diameter of the
sphere and the other to the circumference of the sphere. Restating
Johannes' proposition symbolically, it reads S = d c where S is the
surface of the sphere, d and c the diameter and circumference of a
great circle of the sphere. Proof* (see Fig. 69):
(I) Either d c = S, or d c =F S.
(2) If d c = S, then d c = S I where SI < S or 5 I > S (by the
basic postulate).
(3) Let us assume first that d c = 5I where SI < S. Let us further
suppose that SI is the surface of a sphere concentric with S.
We designate the circumferences of great circles of these spheres
Cl and c. Of course c > Cl.
(4) Now inscribe within c an equilateral polygon of side t and of
perimeter p such that c > p > CI and p does not touch Cl. Then
let C revolve about d to produce 5 and similarly Cl to produce
.* following table relates the symbols used in this commentary to the quantities
gIven In the figure and text: .
p == .J4F + P.D + ... + ZA4 " =-=
I = AF .\'1\7J-J
d = J4B q 1: lj
z De curvis superftcie/:JuJ of Johanncs de 1'incmue, VI1 5I
5 I and p to pr()dllCe the surface lf
2
cfJmposcd of a series ()f
conical surfaces.
(5) Tllen d c > q t'" sirlce ,1 ::> (IIJeil1g opposite a right angle.
(6) r-Ience 'S'I > since Ca) (I c -== ,r1 frC)111 (3) and (b) q e ===
by De ctlrvis, Prop(Jsition \'.
(7) But, in fact, S 2 > L\'I by construction.
(8) Since (6) is cOlltrar)' to tIle fact of (7), then (6) is false, and the
assulnption from \llllich it follows is false, Ilanlely, that.\ [ < ..r.
(9) By a similar series of ste!)s .J ()hannes deri ves a contradiction
from SI > .f.
(10) Hence, if J'I :t> J' and I 1:: j', L\ I == .f, alld thus d c == .5". Q.l
42.-5 6 "Ex.... probandum." Tllree corollaries to this proposition are given
and proved from it easily. The first states that the surface of the
sphere is equal to four times the area of a great circle of the sphere.
(For the statement of this by Archimedes and the BanG see the
Commentary to Proposition XIV of the T/-erba jiliortlm in Chapter I\r
above.) From the first proposition of the De HlenStlra eiretlli, Johannes
asserts that the area of a circle is equal to one quarter the product of
the diameter and the circumference. From his own Proposition \,:,,} he
gives the surface of a sphere as the product of the diameter and
circumference; hence the surface of the sphere is four times the area
of a great circle.
The second corollary states that the surface of a sphere is equal to
the lateral surface of a cylinder whose axis and base diameter are
equal to the diameter of the sphere. This corollary is immediately
evident from Proposition 11 of the De curvis taken together with
Proposition VI. Similarly, if we add the area of the two end circles of
such a cylinder to find its total surface, we shall have S = } d c,
as the last corollary asserts.
Description and Proposition V I I
Z-4 "Omne... contineri." Although tllis so-called "description" is phrased
in a very general way, it is used in Proposition VII only to justify
the conclusion that the volume of a right cylinder is equal to the
product of the base and altitude.
"Omne.... sumus." Having in the first six propositions determined
the areas of certain "curved" surfaces including finally that of a sphere,
Johannes is now ready to go on to the problem of the volumes of
the solids bounded by the curved surface areas already discussed, with
t 3 == ./-11\7
./, _.": "DC
1"2 -=- 1)17
ri1. =---=- OZ
riJ OT
I,
I }.-.....;. 1\7]-/
Cl == FD
e
z
::=.:
r
l
:-:-:: J7P
ril Of
516 Archimedes' De sphaer" ,t ey/illdro
the primary objective of determining the volume of a sphere. Before
going to the question of the volume of a sphere, Johannes introduces
this crucial Proposition VII, which seeks the volume of the solid whose
area has been found in Proposition V, i.e., the solid generated by the
the rotation of a regular polygon inscribed in a circle around the
diameter of the circle. This is virtually the same theorem as that
given by Archimedes, De sphaera et cy/indro, Book I, Proposition 26
(ed. of Heiberg, pp. 101-105). Archimedes' proof, however, is differ-
ent from the one presented here by Johannes. Johannes again implies
in this proposition, although he does not state it, that the number of
the sides of the polygon is divisible by four.
Proposition VII states,. and Johannes ventures to prove, that
V = P = i5 r( where V is the volume of the solid formed by
the rotation of a regular polygon of 4 n sides around the diameter of
tile circle in which it is inscribed, P is the volume of an equivalent
cone, 5 is the surface of the solid of volume V, and r, is the radius
of a sphere inscribed in the solid of volume V. Proof* (see Fig. 70):
(I) Construction: Take a quarter of the circle circumscribing the
polygon of 4 n sides. Inscribed in that quarter there will be n
sides (Johannes takes a figure which has 3 sides; I have general-
ized the proof for a figure with n sides), which we designate
t
1
, '
2
, , In. If we connect the midpoints of these sides with
the center of the circle, we shall have equal lines r'I' r
C2
' ... , r'ft'
each of them equal to the radius of a circle inscribed within
the polygon. Then if we connect the center with the extremities
of the sides of the polygon, we shall have equal lines reI' "e2'
... , r
cn
' each equal to the radius of the circle in which the
polygon is inscribed. Now /
1
intersects reI; but extend '
2
by
the line Cl and extend reI by fIe Similarly, extend '
3
until it
joins the extension of reI. Call these extensions C
2
and f2 re-
spectively. 11ake similar exte11sions for tl1e remaining sides. If
we rotate this qllarter of a circle with its appended lines, the
quarter itself forlTIs a l1emisphere, and the quarter of the regular
polygon forms a solid of volllme T//2. side of the polygon
* The following table relates the symbols used in t11is con1mentary to the quantities
given the figure and text:
reI = OC
r
e2
= Of
7
r
cJ
=== ON
r
C4
= 0..;-1
z De curvis sltptrficie/JuJ of Jollanl1cs de Tinenlue, VII 517
describes cOllieal surfaces .rI, J
z
, _) .rn- TIle circles forming tIle
bases of tllcse c()nical surfaces are of areas a I ; (/ J' a2; - On_I' an;
the radius of cl is rI, that ()f a
z
is 1"2' etc. Furthermore, [/"/2 is
composed of a series of special v()lllmes, VI -r- V
2
-t- .. - + t
J
n
;
VI is the volume of tIle double c()ne fornlcd by' the rotation
around reI of the triaJ.1gIc of sides t
1
, reI' and '("2; v
2
is the
volume generated IJy the revolution of the triangle of sides
1
2
, r
e2
, r
e3
And similarly for [,'3 - l)ft.
The following auxiliary volumes sllould be noted:
(a) Vel forlned by the rotation of triallgle with sides el'
reI +11, and r
ez
(b) V
elt2
formed by tIle rotation of the triangle with sides
Cl + 1
2
, reI +11, and r
c3
-
(c) V
e2
formed by the rotation of the triangle of sides ez,
rei +11 +12, and r
e3
-
(d) V
e2t3
formed by the rotation of the triangle of sides '3 + e2'
reI +11 +12, r c4 -
(2) Now VI = 1r(1 SI because (a) t IlrI = rel/r'l by similar triangles;
and (b) Il/r
l
= sl/a
l
by Dc ctlrvis, Corollary to Proposition I;
and thus (c) reI a
l
= r.
1
SI; but (d) rcl 01 = 3 VI Euclid,
Proposition XII.9 (Gr. XII. 10).
(3) And V
2
= 1r'2 S2 because (a) V
2
= V
e1t2
- V
tl
and (b) 1).1'2 =
1r
c2
(Se +S2) by steps like (2) (note: Se is the surface generated
by Cl in its revolution); and (c) Vel = !r'2 S
(4) Similarly v
3
= i
r
(3 S3-
v = 1rill s,..
(5) Hence V = lr, S because (a) r'l = "'2 = r'
J
= ... = r
hl
= r.;
(b) V /2 = VI +V2 + ... +Vn ; and (C) S/2 = SI +s2 + .. +sfI-
Q.E.D.
22,37, 44-45, 63, 83, 142, 145 "IX duodecimi." This is Proposition
XII.IO in the Greek text. Notice that it is XII_9 in both the l\delard
and Arabic texts. For the possible bearing of this fact upon the question
of whether the Liber de eurvis superjieiebus is an original Latin composi-
tion or translation, see note 8 of the Introduction to this section. The
text of the proposition runs in the Adelard 11 Version as follows (ms.
eit., 65V): "Omnis columna rotunda pyramidi sue tripla esse probatur."
50 "primam secundi." See the Commentary, the Corpus Christi Version,
Chapter Three, Section 5, lines 66-67.
518 Archimedes' D, sphalrQ ,t ty/itUJro
9'-113 c'Regula.... insistamus." Here Johannes digresses to prove by
reference to Euclid that the difference between two unequal cones of
the same altitude is equal to a cone of the same altitude whose base is
equal to the difference between the bases of the original cones.
104, 110, 168 "XI duodecimi." Proposition XII. I I in the Adelard 11 Ver-
sion of the Elements runs (ms. cit., 66r): "Omnes duas rotundas pyra-
mides sive columnas eque altas suis basibus proportionales esse ne-
cesse est."
174-80 "Si .... posteritati." The significance of this passage for the ques-
tion of whether this tract is an original composition or transaction is
discussed in note 8 of the Introduction to this section.
r :--=--
{I' .-.- ."' 1J;'
h =---: 01
a
.f
Proposition VIII
1-5 "Omnis .... est." The eighth proposition of the De curvis is the familiar
corollary of Archimedes' De sphaera et cylindro, Book I, Proposition 34
(ed. of Heiberg, pp. 131-33), asserting that a cylinder with an altitude
equal to the diameter of a sphere has a volume 3/2 that of the sphere.
It was also known to the Latin readers of the anonymous Deysoperi-
metris. (See Appendix Ill, paragraph 8.) It should be noted that with
Johannes this is the fundamental theorem regarding the volume of a
sphere, while with Archimedes this proposition is derived from an
earlier more fundamental proposition. Hence there is no direct cor-
respondence between the proofs of Johannes and Archimedes.
6-27 "Ne .... proposito. " Johannes initiates the proof with an elementum
on proportions to the effect that if there are six terms, a through j,
such that a/b = c/dand e (/ > j. b, then e c >..f d.
28-87 "Esto .... defraudati." The proof (see Fig. 73) can be summarized
as follows*: C = ! V, where T/ is the volume of a sphere whose
diameter is d and C is the volume of a cylinder whose altitude and base
diameter both are equal to d.
(1) Either C = ! [,7 or C "* ! r/
T
7tL
X
e
Pl)GLC; TO Be: yeyovEGr
55 sed ... quadrati: eXAA' el apo:, 0 7tEPr.
TETPIXYWVOU TOU eic; TOV XUXAOV
eyyplXepOlJ.Vou OUTOL ol f.LljViOXOL 7tEpt
TOU e;o:ywvou 7tAeupic; elaL TOU ele; '!ov
XUXAov eyypo:ep0lJ.VOlJ.
I 9uadratura... est: Incipiunt demonstra-
tlones de quadratura circuli. Circulum
quadra.re est possible Z Ecce quadra-
cIrculi per lunulas Ha / circuli
aR
a
0111. BV]
quadratus J-la
In eo PI' .
eo z rotra lantur: descnbantur In
3 in e .tn describantur l-Ia
o onl Z/G / . . R" Z /
DC: et D a SInt B] sunt Vi-hltl
4 AID: AD / DC: AC l-Ja
P .. _1
5 AQDI: AQD V AD Z / enim om. V /
AC: AI Ka / est: est per penultimam
primi Euclidis Z per penultimam primi
Euclidis et per propositionem que dicit
quod angulus in semicirculo est rectus
ergo quadratum V
6 diameter: diametrum Ko / AD: AD sed
Ha
7, 8,9, 10 AID: AD Z
7 secundam... Euclidis: I z Euclidis se-
cundan1 Ha I duodecimi: id est duo-
decimi V
9 equalis ... est OHJ. V
10 habent Ha
10-1 I quoddan1 commune: commune
quoddam scilicet V commune Z
I I portioni Ko / que continetl1r: contl
nen
-
temZ Z i
II a ... AQD: ab arCl! et a corda AD
The Quadratura circuli jJer //lIJlliaJ .. 619
double is equal to tile whole circle described on straight line _ ~ l B . .r\nd thus
the circle described on line ./'1.8 is sCluared. '.fhis, Il0\vc\rer, has been falsely
reasoned, since that \\rlucll "ras not u.ni versally dCl110nstrated is taken as
uni,rersally demonstrated. For the quadrature of every lune is nc)t dem-
onstrated but only that of the June \\Thich is stllJtended by the side of an
Iinscribed] square. [1 l1ave fOllnd tllis dcnl011stratioll at Oxford in a
certain docunlent of the lord l..inc()ln.]
[Versi()n 11]
The quadrature of a circle by means of lunes is done in this way: I.Jet
tllere be a circle to be squared whose semicircle is /1 DC[see Fig. 9zal. ./\nd
draw in it two sides of a square inscribable in it, the sides being &4D and
L
A c
Fig. 92
o
(b)
H
DC. Let semicircle AID be described on line ~ D I prove, therefore,
that you know how to square lune AQDI. For AC
2
= 2 ,,:6-1D2. But ~ C
is the diameter of semicircle ADCand AD is the diameter of semicircle
AID. Therefore, by XII.2 [of the Elements] of Euclid, semicircle ADC
= 2 semicircle AID. Therefore, semicircle AIDis equal to sector ADB,
which is one half of semicircle ADC. Therefore, since semicircle AID and
sector ADB have a certain area in common, [namely,] the segment
contained by chord AD and arc AQD, when that segment is subtracted
62.0 Appendix 11
dempta illa portione ab utroque, erit AIDQ equalis triangulo .4.DB.
Sed triangulum scis quadrare; ergo et lunulam.
Supponas ergo quod sicut contingit quadrare lunulam super latus
quadrati descriptam, ita contingat quamlibet lunulam quadrare super
cuiuscunque figure inscriptibilis circulo latus descriptam, ut supra
latus exagoni. Sequetur demqnstrative quod scias quemlibet circulum.
quadrare.
Probatio: Sit, ut positum est, circulus quadrandus cuiuS semicir-
20 culus sit ADC. Et sumatur linea dupla ad eius diametrum, que sit
linea EH[Fig. 9zb] Et super earn fiat semicirculus EFGH. Et in ipso
distinguantur tria latera exagoni, que sint HG, GF, FE. Et super ilia
tria latera describantur tres semicirculi : ENF, FLG, GKH. Cunl
igitur linea EH sit dupla ad linearn AC, erit quadratum linee EH
25 quadruplum ad quadratum linee AC. Ergo cum ea sit proportio cir-
culorum adinvicem que quadrati diametri unius ad quadratum diametri
alterius, per secundam duodecimi Euclidis, erit circulus cuius diameter
12 illa: ista Z / illa portione Ir. V / erit
om. ] / erit AIDQ fr. Ha / AIDQ: lunu-
la AD Z ADIQ V / equalis: quare
equales V
13 post Sed add. V per XXII Vu et per
ultirnarn secundi / triangulum... lunu-
lam: trianguli quadratura scitur per ul-
timam 2
1
Euclidis, quare et lunule Z
trianguli quadratura scitur quare et
lunule Ha / et 0111. V
14-1 9 Supponas ... quandrandus: Suppo-
natur ergo quod sit possibile quadrare
lunulam super latus quadrati descrip-
tarn, et sicut hoc contingit, ita contingit
quadrare quamlibet lunulanl
iuscunque figure circulo inscflptlbll1.S
latis descriptam, ut super latus exagoru.
Que suppositia confirmari potest per
illud principiuffi, quod
panus prima elementorurn EuclldlS, et
quo utitur in demonstrando znnl I zl
Euclidis, quia sicut se habet lunula
super latus quadrati descripta ad lunu-
lam super latus exagoni, ita se habet
quadratum quodcunque ad
allud principium: Quanta est quehbet
magnitudo ad aliquam zunl, tantalTI ne-
A"+- ..... "" ... ". _ .. _ 1 ....,. .... ;'1.." II
clidis facile concludes hoc quadratum
esse equale lunule descripte super latus
exagoni, facilius tamen concludes illud
ex permutata proportionalitate. Hoc
autem presupposito demonstrabitur
quemcunque circulum posse quadrari.
Sit enim circulus quadrandus ut prius Z
14 Supponas: Supponatur HaZ I ergo:
igitur V / lunulam: lunualas l/
15 descriptam: descripti V I contingit
HaKa
16 cuiuscunque: utrumcunque latus f./ldes-
criptarn Z fuerit descripta Bv"f-f0_1 fue-
rit descriptam Ka
19 Sit ut: sicud Ko I quadrandus: quad
31
ne' Ka
20 sit
l
ollJ.Ka
21 fiat: describatur Zl-]a
22 distinguantur: ducantur Z I sint EJ
sunt VJ-IaKaZ I HG, GF, FE: EF, FG,
GHZ
23 ENF: scilicet ENF Z ENG I/'" EF I
FLG, GKH: FRG GHK l/ FC;, (-;1-1
Ka '
25 linee 0/)/. Ka / posl AC add. Z per 4
801
zl
Euclidis et 1Banl 61 eiusdenl "
, igitUf Z I ea sit: sit eaden1 Z
2. 6 rill P' {1ll U ..,..,.L 1,' , 1 __ : 1 _... T,r
The Qlkldrat/lra circuli j)er /un"itls 6Z I
from each, [tllen lune] /1.IDQ be equal to 6 But you know
how to square the triangle; therefore, [you know 11o\v to square] the lune
as well.
You suppose, therefore, that just as it is possible to square the lune
described on the side of a square, so one may square any lune described
on the side of any figure il1scribable in a circle, as for example on the side
of a hexagon. It will follow demonstratively that you know how to square
any circle.
Proof: As has been posited, let there be a circle to be squared whose
semicircle is ADC. l\nd let t11ere be taken a line double its diameter,
namely, line EH[see Fig. 9zb]. i\nd let semicircle EFGH be constructed
on it. And in that semicircle let three sides of a hexagon be determined,
the sides HG, GF, and FE. Then upon these three sides let there be
described the three semicircles E1VF, FLC, and GKH. Therefore, since
line EH= zline AC, EH2 = 4 Therefore, since the ratio of circles
to each other is as that of the squares of their diameters, by XII.2 of Euclid,
621 Appendix n
est EHquadruplus ad circulum cuius diameter est AC. Ergo et semi-
circulus EFGHest quadruplus ad semicirculumADC. Sed unusquis-
so que semicirculorumENF, FLG, GKHest equalis semicirculo ..4 DC.
quia omnium illorum diametri sunt equales. Ergo quatuor semicirculi
ADC, ENF, FLG, GKH sunt equales semicirculo EFGH. Ergo
demptis tribus portionibus EMF, FOG, GPH, que sunt communes
tribus semicirculis ENF, FLG, GKH et semicirculo EFGH, relin-
S5 quitur quod semicirculus ADCcum tribus lunulis, que sunt El\/"Fi.lf)
FLGO, GKHP, sit equalis illi quod residuum est de semicirculo
EFGH post demptionemtriumportionumcommunium. Et est illud re-
siduumfigura quadrilatera que continetur quatuor reetis lineis EF, PG)
GH, HE. Sed illam figuram quadrilateram scis quadrare. Ergo et
40 eius equale scis quadrare. Sed eius equale sunt semicirculus ADC et
lunule diete. Ergo ipsis simul iunctis scis quadratum equale designare.
z8 est' om. Ka EH: EH est Z I diameter
om. ] I Ergo oln. Z
29 EFGH: EFG V I est quadruplus Jr. Z I
post ADC add. per I 5 m 5I Euclidis Z
30 semicirculorum Ha] circulorum
BVKaZ
3I illorum: istorum semicirculorum Z I
quatuor om. Z
32 GKH om. V / EFGH:
3
2
-33 Ergo demptis: demptls 19ltur Z
3
2
-34 Ergo ... EFGH onl. Ha
33 EMF: EMG V / FOG: FTG Z / in/oco
communes habet V laCllnafJl
34 semicirculis: circulis V
34-35 relinquet Ko
35 cum... lunulis: et tres lunule Z / que
sunt onJ. Z
35-3
6
ENFlvf, FLGO, GKHP: ENF,
FLG GKI-I Z
3
6
sit sunt equales Z / residuum
est Ir. Z
37 portionum 0111. Z / communium V
37-3
8
Et ... residuum: Estautem resIduum
illud Z
3
8
quatuor: a quatuor Z / rectis 0./11. Z
_ __ .......... ,.-_ I 11 "r'"'":' ..... 1""IIo.""I,e' r'l11.'l_
dratura scitur quare Ha / illam... qua-
mare: quadratum illius figure scitur per
ultimam 2
1
Euclidis, quare et quadra-
turn ei equale Z
40 scis quadrare om. VHa I eius equale B]
eius equales V equales Z
4I lunule dicte: tres lunule predicte Z /
Ergo: igitur Z I ipsis: hiis V
4
1
-45 scis .... lunulas: scimus equale qua-
dratum posse signare. Sed tres lunule,
ut prehabitum est, possunt quadrari,
quare et totus circulus cuius dyameter
consequentia ultima patet: Si
enlnl trlbus lunulis per se est dare tria
quadrata equalia, quibus divisis in 6
triangulos datur unum quadratum e-
quale per demonstrationem ultin1e 2
1
dempto ergo isto quadrato
trlbus lunulis de quadrato tr)tali
cquah lunulis ipsis et senlicirculc) l\DC
residuull1, quod est equale senlicirculo,
ren1anet Jigura rectilinea J\(= et per
consequens talia quadrata ut docetur
super ultilTlan1 secundi L
4 I, 42., 43, 4,4 scis: scin1us /la
The Quadratura circlJli per IUllu!as 623
the circle whose diameter is EI-I will be quadruple the circle whose diam-
eter is AC. Therefore, sen1icirclc = 4 semicircle .4 DC. But
anyone of the semicircles El\7F, and C'K.H is equal to semicircle
...4 DC, since the diameters of all of them arc equal. "Therefore, the four
semicircles ADC, Bl'lF, FIJG', (r'KH are [toget11er] equal to tile semi-
circle EFGH. Therefore, wllen tIle three segments .EilfP', FOG', G"pH,
which are common to tIle three semicircles E",\,TI:, FLC, GKEI and to
semicircle EFGH, have been subtracted, the result is that the semicircle
J.4DC, plus the three lunes E'j\TFllf, FIJCO, and G'KHP, is equal to that
which remains out of semicircle EFGI-f after the subtraction of the three
common segments. And that remainder is tIle quadrilateral figure contained
by the four straight lines BF, FG, C'H, and l-IE. But you know hov." to
square its equal, and its equal is the sum of semicircle L1 DCand the said
lunes. Therefore, you know how to construct a square equal to that sum.
62.4 Appendix 11
Sed ipsas tres ut suppostitum est et videtur probatum, scis
quadrate. Ergo et quartum scis quadrate. Ergo semicirculo ADC
scis equale quadratum facere; igitur et toti circulo. Hec igitur est
45 quadratura pet lunulas.
42 ipsas 011/. J-Ia / suppositum est et 0"1.
/ et: et ut Ko
43 Ergo
l
quadrare: Et scis subtrahere
quadrata tribus lunulis equalia, et quod
relictum erit quadratum semicirculi et
positi prima. Et illud quadratum scis
duplare; ergo et quadratun1 'V I Ergo
2
:
quare Ha
44 igitur BJ ergo VaI-faKa
44-45 Hec ... lunulas: et per consequens
seqllitur intentum quod quadrare cir-
CUlUlTI est possi11ile Ka
44 igitur est: est ergo
The Qlladra/llr(/ circ/lli per IIIIIU!rl,f 62
But you [also] knO\V hovl to square these tllfce Illnes, as has been supposed
and seems to llave ])een l1ro\red. ]'herefc)re, y()U know to square the
fourtll term. Therefore, you to construct as square equal to
semicircle /:IDC', and therefore [a square equal] to tIle whole circle. This,
therefore, is the quadrature by 11lcans of lunes.
COMMENTARY
T/ersion I
13 "XII ... Elen1entoruffi." The reference is to Proposition XlI.z of the
Elemel1ts. See the Commentary, Appendix I, Section I, line 5.
52-5 5 "Hoc.... quadrati." This admonition by Simplicius of the falseness
of proceeding from a proof concerning a particular lune to all lunes
\vas, as I have said, omitted by the author of Version 11.
55 "sed... quadrati." It will be noticed by consulting the variant reading
for this sentence that the Greek text adds the following phrase:
these lunes [considered here] are upon the sides of a hexagon described
in tIle circle."
T/ersion 11
6, 27 "per ... Euclidis." See above, the Commentary to Version I, line 13.
14-18 "Supponas .... quadrare." The reader should note (variant readings,
lines 14-19) that the author of the copy of\'ersion 11 appearing in Z
attempts to prove the case of quadrature of a lune on the side of a
hexagon in the following way: "Therefore, let it be supposed that it is
possible to square a lune described on the side of a square and, just as
this is so, that it is possible also to square any lune described on the
side of any figure inscribable in a circle, as for example on the side of a
hexagon. This supposition can be confirmed by that principle which
Campanus postulates in the first book of the Elements of Euclid and
which he uses in demonstrating XII.2 of Euclid. For just as the lune
described on the side of a square is related to the lune described on the
side of a hexagon, so any square is related to some other square, by
that principle, [which is this:] 'Any magnitude is to some second
magnitude as any third magnitude is to a fourth' [cf. ed. of the Ele-
ments, Basel, 1546, p. 3]. And then you easily deduce by V.7, V.I2, and
626 Appendix 11
V. ZI of Euclid that this square is equal to the lune described on the side
of a hexagon; however you more easily deduce that by the use of
alternate ratios. With this [quadrature of the lune on the side of a hexa-
gon] presupposed, it will be demonstrated that any circle can be
squared." The author of this copy of Version 11 apparently feels that
this so-called proof justifies the phrase "videtur probatum" appear-
ing in line 42 of the pristine form of Version 11. It is evident that
this added comment constitutes not a "construction" proof but only an
"existence" proof. Briefly we can say that the author, following Cam-
panus, holds that for any ratio of lunes (L1/L
z
), where L
1
is the lune
on the side of a square and L
z
is the lune on the side of a hexagon, there
must exist an equal ratio of squares (QI/QZ)' whereQI is any given square
and Qz is some other square, or L1/L
z
== QI/QZ. By the alternation of
ratios, L1/QI = Lz/Qz. But in the first part of the tract it was proved that
there is aQI equal to L
1
; t11erefore, there must be aQz equal to L
2
But
it should be clear that we are not told how to construct such a squareQz.
The basic similarity of this added comment in Z to the "proofs" given
in Section I of l\ppendix I should be e,rident.
Appendix 111 I
Some Medieval Latin Citations
of Archimedes
I have included in this appendix some further references to l\rchimedean
ideas beyond those already included in the various \\"orks edited in the
course of this volume. .i\11 but those in passage number 9 appear in ,,:orks
that were translated in the twelfth or thirteenth century and all appear in
tracts which circulated fairly widely with the corpus of f\rabo-Latin mathe-
matical works.
1. Tlvelfth century. Anaritius, 111 decem libros priores ElenJelllorll'" conJnJen-
tarii, the translation of Gerard of Cremona, edited by ~ I Curtze as a
SupplementuflJ to J. L. Heiberg and H. 11enge, Euclidis opera OH/Ilia (Leipzig,
1899), p. 5, lines 21-23: ".l\c si veIlet dicere illud, quod [\ximethes (Ed,
aximetes corr ex. Eximetes in Vr) I intellexit, hoc est : 'bre\rior climensio, que
coniungit (Vr, contingit in Bd) illud, quod est inter duo puncta.'" ("_r\nd
if he means that which Archimedes understands [as to the definition of a
straight line], it is this :'the shortest measure that joins the interval bet\\geen
two points.' ") While the form of this statement makes it appear as if the
actual words of Archimedes are being used, it is evident on consulting the
second citation below that the author is merely paraphrasing Archimedes'
assumption in the On the Sphere and the Cylinder that the straight line is the
least of all lines having the same extremities. On definitions of a straight
line, consult T. L. Heath, Euclid, The Elements, vol. I (l\nnapolis, 1947),
pp.
16
5-69.
2. Twelfth century. Anaritius, Ope cit., p. 6, lines 1-5: "Et ideo diffinivit
earn Asamithes (Bd, assamites in Vr) dicens: 'Linea recta est brevior lineis,
I The variant readings in parentheses are
from Vat. Reg. suev. 1268, 4 ~ r (abbre-
viated Vr), and were very kindly supplied
to me by John Murdoch.
628 Appendix III
quarum extremitates sunt eedem,' et vult dicere, quod sit (Bd, fit in Vr)
brevio! linea, que coniungit, quod (Bd, que in Vr) est inter duo puncta."
("And therefore Archimedes has defined it, saying: 'A straight line is the
least line among those whose extremities are the same,' and he means that
it is the least line that joins the interval between two points.") Compare
Archimedes, De sphaera et cylindro, Opera omnia, ed. of J. L. Heiberg, vol. I
(Leipzig, 1910), p. 8. Actually, Archimedes' statement is. not a definition
but an assumption (see the reference to H. G. Zeuthen in Chapter Three,
Section I, note 2).
3. Tlpelfth ce1ztllry. Anaritius, Ope cit., p. 24, lines 29-3 I: "Supra hoc
Sambelichius: Figure iste vocantur trapezie (Bd, trapetie in Vr), eo quod
sunt (Bd, sint in Vr) inordinate, quas Asamithes (Bd, assamites in Vr)
similiter nominavit." ("In regard to this, Simplicius says: These figures
are called trapezie because they are irregular. Archimedes has similarly
named them.") Compare Archimedes, De sphaera et cylindro, ed. cit., p. 36,
line I 5, and elsewhere.
4. Tll
J
elfth century. Anaritius, Ope cit., p. 28, lines 16-26: "Et hec radix aut
erit impossibilis, sicut illud, quod Asamithes (Bd, assamites in Vr) pre-
nlissit et petiit, ut concederetur ei, scilicet, ut esset extra mundum (dixit
enim, quod, si illud [Bd, istud in Vr] concederetur ei, ipse ostenderet,
quod moveret terram, ubi dixit: 'Puer concede mihi, quod sit possibile,
me elevari et manere extra mundum, et ego faciam te videre, quod ego
movebo terram'). Et hoc fuit, cum iactavit se invenisse 'virtutem geome-
tricam.' Et petiit, ut premitteretur istud, et poneretur sic esse, licet sit
impossibile." ("Or the principle will [sometimes] be impossible, as in the
case where Archimedes has premised and postulated that it be conceded
to him that he would be outside of the world-for he has said that if that
were conceded to him he would prove that l1e could move the world. His
statement is this: 'Boy, concede to file that I can be lifted up and remain
outside of the world, and I shall [then] make you see that I could2 move
the vlorld.' And this was wllen he had boasted that he had found a 'geo-
metric power.' I\nd [for the sake of proof] he postulated that 'if that ~ e r e
permitted' and 'if it were posited to be so,' even though it is impossible.")
Tl1is famous story associated witl1 l\rcllimedes is gi'len by' tIle author to
illustrate tIle practice sometinles followed in n1athelnatics ()f postlllating
what is known to be impossible. The story appears in l)lutarcll (_lfl.lrfelltl.f,
14)-"if tllere were another \vorld and he could go t() it, 11c \\T()llld m o ~ c
Z Following the subjuncti,re in the Ara- the rJhrase in I-..tltin in spitt" nf the use of
bie text; this is also the e\rident sense of the tutu re.
Medieval I.Jatin of l\rchinlcdcs
this one"-and in Papplls (C'OI/fC/io, cd. ()f !-Iultscll., val. ), p. 1060, lines
1-4)-"Givc me a IJlace tC) stancl ()n al1d Tshall 111() vc the cartll." Note tllat
tile p11rase "geonletric 11ower" translates the l\ralJic (cf. R. o.
Besthorn and J. I.J. I-Icibcrg, C'o(le>:: .1JcideIJsi.r 399. I , Part J, Fasc. 1 lCc)pen-
hagen,
18
93], p. 12). Sinlplicius 110 d()llbt ()rigiJlally .had the Greek \vord
dyna"Jis, by which tile five basic machines (.il1cluding tIle lever) were kno\\n.
5. TUJelfth centfll)l. .l\naritius, Ope cit., p. 162, lines 23--2 4: "l\samithcs(J.:;a,
assamites in T-/"r) vero vocat eas [quantitates hc)nl0geneasl quantitates, qua-
rum alie aliis conlparantur." ("\X!llilc i\.rchimcdes calls them quantities
which are mutually' compared.") I do not believe that /\rchimedes gi,es a
definition of "homogenous" magnitudes, but presumably it is just such
magnitudes that are involved in the fifth of the lanJball0nJef/tl, or postulates,
in the Dc sphaera et cylindro, ed. cit., p. 8.
6. T11)elfth centtlfY. Anletus filius Iosephi, de proportione et propor-
tionalilate (see the text of this passage edited in 1\1. Clagett, The of
l"tfechanics in the 111iddle Ages [11adison, 1959], pp. 69-70 , on the basis of
BN late 9335, 66r; cf. Curtze's text, based on Vienna, Nat. bible cod. 52 77,
30 9''(l; a critical text of the whole treatise has been prepared by my student,
j\/Iiss Dorothy Schrader): "r\rsamides quoque ponderum proportionalita-
tern diffinivit dicens: 'Pondera proportionalia diversa sunt, que uno pon-
derantur angulo.' Per quod voluit intelligi, ut, cum primum ponderum
ponitur in lance trutine et secundun1 eorum in altera lance, et suspenditur
trutina suspensoria suo, erit angulus quem circumdat statera et suspen-
sorium trutine unus ad tertium et quartum cum tertium fuerit positum
in loco primi et quartum in loco secundi, et similiter si quintum in loco
primi et tertii ponatur et sextum in loco secundi et quarti. Et cum primum
etiam et secundum in duabus lancibus .ponuntur, et terium et quartum fn
duabus lancibus alterius trutine, et quintum et sextum in duabus lancibus
trutine tertie, anguli qui sunt inter suspensoria trutinarurn et stateras earum
sunt etiam uni. Per hoc autem quod in verbis eius in\renitur, scilicet ex
diversis, voluit intelligi quod, cum primum ponderum fuerit equale se-
cundo, statera trutine erit cum suspensoria ipsius coniuncta, neque erit
inter ea angulus. Yrinus autem diffinivit proportionalitatem dicens: 'Pon-
dera proportionalia diversa sunt ea que, cum appensa fuerint, erunt linee
ordinate unicuique antecedenti earum et consequenti super equales angulos
superficiei orizontis.' Quod etiam in nullo separatur ab eo secundum quod
Arsamides ponderum proportionalitatem diffinivit." ("Archimedes also
defined the proportionality of weights, saying: 'Diverse proportional
weights are those which are weighed at the same angle.' By this he meant
630 Appendix III
that when the first of the weights is placed in a pan of the balance and
the second of them in the other pan with the balance suspended by a sus-
pension cord, the angle between the suspension cord and the needle is
the same as when, in the case of a third and fourth weight, the third weight
is substituted for the first and the fourth for the second, and similarly if
the fifth is substituted for the first and third and the sixth for the second
and the fourth. And also when the first and second are placed in two pans
[of one balance], the third and fourth in the two pans of a second balance,
and the fifth and sixth in the two pans of a third balance, the angles made
by the suspension cords of the balances and their needles are also the same.
When he uses the expression 'diverse' he wants it to be understood that
when the first of the weights is equal to the second, the needle of the bal-
ance will coincide with its suspension cord and there will be no angle
between them. Hero also defined proportionality, saying: 'Diverse pro-
portional weights are those which, when suspended, will respectively
orient the balance beam in equal angles with the plane of the horizon.' This
does not differ from Archimedes' definition of the proportionality of
weights.") I am unable to find either the definition of Archimedes or that
of Hero in any of their extant works. Perhaps Archimedes' definition
appeared in his lost work On Balances. Incidentally, the Arabic author goes
on to show the basic identity of the two definitions, as the fuller quotation
from the passage in The Science of llfechanics reveals.
l-\nother reference to Archimedes by Ametus (BN late 933 5, 68r, C. 2)
is most general and seems to reflect no particular Archimedean passage:
"Et .i\rsamides in proportione que est aliarum in superficiebus et corpo-
ribus ad alias ostendit illud quo probatio constat non indigens positi-
one." The purport of this passage with what goes before seems to be
that Archimedes demonstrated propositions regarding the ratios of
surfaces and volumes. And indeed I\rchimedes does this in most of his
works.
7. Thirteenth centtllY. Anonymous, De ysoperinletris, translated from the
Greek, Bodleian ~ f S j\uct. F.5 .28, Io6v, ex Proposition VI: "Quoniam
vero quod sub ea que ex centra et perimetro circuli duplum circuli demon-
stratum est i\rchimenidi in mensuratione circuli; demonstravit enim quo-
niam omnis circulus eqllalis est trigona orthogonio, CUillS (lue e centra
equalis est uni earum que circa rectum, reliqua verc) perin1etro circuli."
("That the product of the radius and the circumference of a circle is double
the circle has been dem()nstrated l)y /\rcllin1ecles in t11e .1 r,..l(IJtlrl'!J/cI,t ~ f the
Circle, for he has demonstrated tl,at e,rcry circle is equal to a rigllt trial1gle,
1Icdieval Citations of j\.rchimedcs 63
1
one of \\T}1ose sides about tIle right a11glc is equal to the radius \\l,ilc the
ot11er is equal to t11e circumfereJ1Ce of the circle.")
8. Ibid., ex Proposition \'Il: "lntelligatur pri111un1 solidun1 contentum
sub conicis superficiebus sicut sumcl)atur et ill eis llLlC l\rchimenidi, cuius
generatio erat poliganii inscrilJti i11 circulo, cuius latera sub tetrados men-
surantur, et delati circa l11anenten1 circuli cliametrum.... i\cliaceat igitur
circulus equalis superficiei solidi .-'1/3 et intelligatur ab B COllUS altitudi-
nem habens earn que ex centra inscripte solido spere. est ergo
solido. Hoc enim demol1stratul11 est /\rchinlcnidi. ... l-.:t est C'DT conus
equalis spere, velud colligitur ex eis que l\rchimenidi.... Quaniam vero
conus basim habens circulun1 equalem superficiei spere, altitudinemque
equalem ei que e centra sperc equalis est spere colligitur ex eis que f\rchi-
menidi ita. Quaniam enim demonst.ravit quod chilindrus basim habens
maximum circulum altituclinemque diametrum spere sexquialter est spere,
talis ,rero chilindrus sexcuplus est coni basim quidem habenris eandem,
altitudinem vero eandem que e centra, quadrupla erit spera taIis coni, est
auten1 et eiusdem quadruplus et conus quidem altitudinem habens eandem,
basim vero superficiei spere equalem, sub eadem enim altitudine existentes
adinvidem sunt sicut bases. Superficies autem spere quadrupla est
circuli. Quare equalis spera dicto cona." ("Let the first solid be under-
stood as one contained by conical surfaces, like the one assumed in the
statements of Archimedes [in the On the Sphere and the Cylinder, passim,
Propositions 1.23-1.35]. The generation of this solid was by means of the
rotation about a fixed diameter of a polygon inscribed in a circle, a polygon
the number of whose sides is divisible by four [On the Sphere and the Cy-
linder, Proposition 1.23] .... Therefore, let there be a circle equal to the sur-
face of solid AB, and AB is to be understood as a cone having as its alti-
tude the radius of the sphere inscribed in the solid. Therefore, it is equal
to the solid. For this has been demonstrated by i\rchimedes [On the Sphere
andthe Cylinder, Proposition 1.26] .... And cone GDTis equal to the sphere,
as is inferred fram the statements of Archimedes .... That a cone-having
as its base a circle equal to the surface of a sphere and an altitude equal to
the radius of the sphere-is itself equal to the sphere is inferred thus from
the statements of Archimedes. Since he has demonstrated that a cylinder
having as its base the greatest circle [of the sphere] and an altitude equal
to the diameter of the sphere is three halves of the sphere [On the Sphere
and the Cylinder, Proposition 1.34, Cor.], while such a cylinder is six times
a cone having the same base and an altitude equal to the radius [of the
sphere], [hence] the sphere will be quadruple such a cone, and also the
632 Appendix III
cone having the same altitude but a base equal to the surface of the sphere
will be quadruple it-for those things having the same altitude are related
as their bases. Moreover, the surface of the sphere is quadruple the greatest
circle [of the sphere] [On the Sphere and the Cylinder, Proposition 1,33].
Therefore, the sphere is equal to the said cone. ") As the references in
brackets indicate, the author of this tract has used the On the Sphere and the
Cylinder, giving the results of material that extends approximately from
Proposition 1.26 through the Corollary of Proposition 1.34. Let me em-
phasize that although this work was translated from the Greek, it appears
in many of the codexes that contain mathematical works of the Arabo-
Latin tradition; hence the inclusion of these references in this volume.
9. Fourteenth or fifteenth century. Anonymous, De inquisieione eapacitatis
ftgurarum, ed. of M. Curtze, Abhandlungen zur Gesehiehte der Mathematik,
8 Heft (1898), Proposition 18, lines 44-45 : "Dato circulo duplum circulum
depingere. Sit circulus abed, cuius dyameter ae, cui per 7&m quarti circum-
scribatur quadratum efgh. Item per 9
8m
quarti Euclidis eidem quadrato efgh
transcribam circulum efgh. Quia igitur quadratum lineaef h, quae est dyam-
eter circuli maioris, per penultimam primi est duplum ad quadratum lineae
.fg, quae est aequalis dyametro circuli minoris: ergo per 2
am
duodecimi
circulus, cuius dyameter estfh, est duplus ad circulum, cuius dyameter est
ca." ("To draw a circle double a given circle. Let there be circle abed, whose
diameter is ae. By IV.7
3
[of the Ele!nents] let square efgh be circumscribed
about it. Also, by IV.9
4
of Euclid, I shall describe about this same square
efgh circle efgh. Hence, because, by the penultimate
S
[proposition] of the
first [book of the EleI71ents], the square of line f h, which is the diameter of
the larger circle, is double the square of linefg, which is equal to the diam-
eter of the lesser circle, therefore, by XII. 2
6
[of the Elements], the circle
whose diameter is f h is double the circle whose diameter is ca"). This
proposition is equivalent to Lemma VII of the Liber asstlmptortlnJ (or LCI,,-
Inata) attributed to r\rchimedes, which exists only in an Arabic text (see
Archimedes, Opera Oml1itl, ed., of J. L. I-Ieiberg, vol. 2 [Leipzig, 1913], pp.
517-18). However, there is 110 evidence that this work was translated into
Latin, and in fact the work in its present forn1 can scarcely be by i\rchi-
medes, whom it quotes. Furthermore, it is m.ost doubtful tllat this partic-
1vledieval Citation8 of .Archimcdes 633
ular lemma is based on all original pr()position of j\ rchimcde. Still, for the
sake of completel1ess I ha\;e includcti it in this apI)cndix.
10. Two otl1er citations of i\rcll.itTIccles may be nlel1tioned, altllc)ugll
neither constitutes a fragmel1t. first alJpears t() be a simple c()nfusion
with a certain Basilidcs of Tyre nOle.ntioncd by J-fypsicles in his preface to
Book XI\! of the E"leIJlenf.r. 'fIle custolTIary preface (as translated by Thomas
Heath, the E'ICIJlfI1t.r, val. I, 1). 5) (Jl)cns: "Basilidcs of Trye, 0 [)ro-
tarchus, when he canlC to 1\ lexandria and met nlY father, spent the greater
part of his sojourn with l1ilTI on account of their common interest..r\nd
once, wIlen examining the treatise written by J\pollollius abc)ut the com-
parison between the dodecahedron and the icosalledron inscribed in the
same spllere, (s110wing) what ratio they have to one another, they thought
that Apollonius had not expounded this matter properly, and accordingly
they emended the exposition, as I was able to learn from my father .... " In
the manuscript containing the medieval Latin translation from the Greek
of the Elements (Bibl. Nat. lat. 7373, I67v), discovered by John
there is added a version of Book XlV, containing a preface which opens as
follows: "Acefalus in commento super euclidem de archimede siro scribit:
dum esset alexandrie in studio forte ad manus eius pen;enisse duos apol-
lonii tibros de habitudine figurarum ad invicem in eadem spera construc-
tarum (constructarunt, MS), quos cum sumo affectu pertractaret ...." How-
ever interesting this statement is for the Euclid text, it obviously has little
significance for the knowledge of Archimedes in the .L-\ges. Note
the "Greek" spelling "archimede" rather than the customary " ... r\rchi-
menide."
The second reference to Archimedes occurs in the Latin translation of
Alhazen's Liber de speet/lis eombt/rentibus and is the attribution to .r\rchimedes
of the invention of a burning mirror that would concentrate the rays at
a point so that combustion would be stronger: "et ex eis fuerunt quidam,
qui assumpserunt specula plurima sperica, quorum radii con,\Terterentur ad
punctum unum, ut combustio fortior esset, et illi, qui invenerunt specula
ista, famosi fuerunt, sicut Archimenides et Anthimus et alii ab istis duobus"
(ed. of J. L. Heiberg and E. Wiedemann in Bibliotheeailfathematica, 3. Folge,
vol. IO [190 9-10], p. 219).
11. Finally, we can briefly refer to the medieval survival of an experiment
on refraction that may well go back to Archimedes. This experiment is
most fully described in Ptolemy's Optics, V, 5, translated into Latin from
the Arabic by Eugene the Amir (A. Lejeune, L'Optique de Claude Ptolemie,
Louvain, 1956, p. 225): "[5] Quod autem est apparens et manifestum, pos-
634 Appendix In
sibile est nobis intelligere per se ex nummo qui fit in vase quod vacatur
baptistir. Visus enim cum steterit fixus in loco quo radius qui transit per
m.arginem vasis, efficitur sublimior nummq, et manente situ in statu suo,
effundetur aqua in vase moderate, quousque radius qui transit per margi-
nem vasis frangatur ad interiora et ceciderit super nummUffi, accidit inde
res que prius non videbantur, videri tunc super lineam rectam protraetam
a visu ad locum subliorem vera loco, et eDstimabitur radius non esse
refractus ad eas, sed quod ipse natent et eleventur ad radium. Et hac de
causa apparebunt tunc secundumrectitudinemvisibilis radii, et ex all a parte
apparebunt secundum perpendicularem cadentem super aque superficiem,
iuxta principia que prius explicavimus." ("That this is apparent and mani-
fest is possible for us to understand immediately from a coin placed in a
vessel called a baptistir. For when the line of sight has been fixed position-
ally by a ray which transits the edge of the vessel so that the line of sight
is higher than the coin, then, with the coin remaining in its place, let the
vessel be carefully filled with water until the ray which transits the edge of
the vessel is bent to the interior and falls on the coin. Thus is happens that
things which were not seen before are seen on a straight line projected
from the sight to the position higher than the true position [of the objects],
and it will be judged that the ray will not be refracted to the objects but
rather that they float and are lifted to the ray. And so for this reason they
will appear along the straight path of the visible ray, and in another direc-
tion they will appear along the perpendicular falling on the surface of the
water, following the principles which we have explained before.") Briefer
descriptions of this same experiment were also available in Latin to medieval
readers in theQtlaestions naturales (1, vi, 5) of Seneca and in the sixth postu-
late of the popular Pseudo-Euclidian Catoptrics (De spcculis). For the asso-
ciation of this experiment witll r\rchimedes and reference to it by Greek
authors, see A. Lejeune, op. cit., p. 225 n, and A. Lejeune, Recherches stir la
catoptriquegrccqlJC (Brussels, Paris, 1957), pp. 55,143,153.
[12. In the final stages of printing, there came to light an additional brief
citation of Archimedes in .i\.verroes' commentar)T on \ristotle's De caelo,
Bk. 11, text no. 112 (Junta e.d., Venice, 1562, f. 172r, D): "et ex mensura
maximi circuli inveniunt mensuram sphaerae secundum 1\ rchimenidem"
("and from the measure of tIle largest circle they find the n1eaSllre of the
sphere, according to Archimedes").]
I Appendix IV I
A Medieval Treatment of Hero's
Theorem on the Area of a Triangle
The theorem for the area of a triangle as a function of its sides (namely,
i\. = VI(s-a) (s-b) (s-c), \vhere s is the semiperimeter and tl, b, c, are the
has had a long history since its enunciation by I-Iero of L\lexandria.
I
"The most important early study of this history \vas done by F. I-Iultsch in
1864.2 1Jluch of the recent historical investigation of this theorem \\-as sum-
marized succinctly by S. Gandz.J In brief, we can note that this theorem
was given without proof by the author of the (ca. 150);4
by one of the agrimensores (ca. 400?), also without proof;5 by the Indian
mathematician Brahmagupta (ca. 628),6 who extends it to a quadrilateral
but has no proof; by the Banu 11iisa accompanied by a proof (see Chapter
I Hero of Alexandria, .Afe/rica, I, viii,
ed. of H. Sch6ne in Heronis AJexandrini
.opera ... o1l,nia, vol. J (Leipzig, 193), pp.
18-24; Diop/ra, xxix, ibid., pp. 280-84;
Geometrica, ed. of J. L. Heiberg, ibid., vo1.4
(Leipzig, 1912), p. 248. Incidentally, al-
Biriini (see note 7 below) assigns the theo-
rem to Archimedes. While we have no
antique evidence of this, it certainly makes
sense that the theorem is earlier than Hero.
2 F. Hultsch, "Der Heronische Lehr-
satz iiber die Plache des Dreieckes als
Function der drei Seiten," Zeitschrift fiir
Ma/hematik und Physile, vol. f) (1864), pp.
225-49
J S. Gandz, ed., Mishnat ha-Jl1idJot,
Quellen una Studien zur Geschichle Jer Mathe-
nJa/ile, A sJronoH/ie una A:
QJleJ'en, val. 2 (193 2 ), p. 45, note 40.
4 Ibid., pp. 45-46.
5 1\1. Cantor, Die romischen ..4grimensores
und ihre S /eJJN1Ig in dtr Geschich/e Jer FeIJ-
mess!eJlnst (Leipzig, 1875), p. 107. See the
text of the theorem by Marcus Junius Nip-
sus in his so-called Podismus, F. Blume,
K. Lachmann, and A. Rudorff, Die Schrif-
ten der romischen FeJdmesser, vol. 1 (Berlin,
18
4
8
), pp. 30-31.
6 H. T. Colebrooke, Algebra llJith Arith-
me/ic and Mensura/ioll from the Sanscrit of
Brahmegupta and Bhascara (London, 1817),
pp. 72., 295-96. Cf. Hultsch, Ope cit. in note
2. above, p. 2.39. Other later Indian authors
took up the theorem.
Appendix IV
Four, Proposition VII); by that superb polymath al-Biriini (ca. 1000),7 who
assigns the enunciation to Archimedes and takes his proof from one Abii.
'Abdallah al-Shanni; by al-Karkhi (ca. 1020);8 by Savasorda (twelfth cen-
tury) without proof;9 by Leonardo of Pisa, froIIl the Banii 1\fiisa;lo by
Luca Pacioli in 1494 with a proof from Leonardo;II by Widmann without
proof in 1489;12. by Leonardo of Cremona in the same century, again with-
out proof;13 and in the sixteenth century b)T- Pierre de la Ramee
l4
(with a
proof similar to that of the Banu Miisa), and no doubt by others in that
century. Incidentally, while the theorem itself is not given by Campanus,
its possibility of development is suggested by the thirteenth-century mathe-
matician in his commentary on the Elements (see note 22. below).
As I pointed out in Chapter Four, the first contact of Latin scholars
with a proof of the theorem came with the translation by Gerard of
Cremona of the Verba ftliorum of the Banii Miisa, and it was this proof tllat
was reflected in the subsequent treatments by Leonardo of Pisa, Pacioli,
and Pierre de la Ramee. A quite different proof of this theorem also circu-
lated during the lvliddle Ages, a proof associated with the name of J0[-
danus. It is this proof, somewhat closer to the proof by Hero, that is the
object of our discussion in this appendix. It existed in two versions, both
of which have here been edited.
The first of these two versions was previously published by Curtze on
7 H. Suter, "Das Buch der Auffindung
der Sehnen im Kreise von Abii 'l-Raihan
Muh. el-Biriini," Bibliotheca .Alathemaiica,
3. Folge, vol. I I (19 10-1 I), pp. 39-40 , 70.
s Gandz, 1oc. cit. in note 3 above.
9 "Der 'Liber embadorum' des Savasor-
da in der Obersetzung des Plato van Ti,ro-
li," in 11. Curtze, Urktfnden zur Geschichte
der A1athenJatik illl !lfittelalter IInd der Re-
naissance, Abhol1dl/fl1gel1 ZII' Geschichle der
InathenJatischen Wissenschaften, 12. Heft
(Leipzig, 1902), p. 72
10 Practica geolJlelric, in Scrilli di
Pisano, ed. by B. Boncompagnj, ,Tal. 2
(ROlne, 1862), pp. 4-4
2
.
11 Hultsch, Ope cit. in note 2 above, pp.
24
2
-4
6
, gi\res the citation to Pacioli's
Sun/lno, and h.e translates and cliscusses the
proof given by Pacioli.
12 See the note l)y G. Enestrom, IJiblio-
1_ _ _ ll.l.' .
p. 311 .
13 "Die 'Practica geometriae' des Leo-
nardo Mainardi aus Cremona," in M.
Curtze, Ope cit. in note 9 above, 1 j. Heft,
pp. 386- 87.
14 P. de la Ramee. Seholartlm IIJothelJJO-
tiearl/ln libri un/Is et triginta (Frankfort,
1599), p. 31 3. Ramee's proof is substan-
tially t11e same as that of the BanG I\Iusa.
He appears to claim that the proof conles
from Jordanus and Tartaglia and t11at it is
lacking in lc)gic. 1\1y guess is that he f(Junci
the proof in a v/ork of Tartaglia, \\rho per-
haps got it from Pacioli. I suspect that
Tartaglia also saVi the different proof
circulated with the De ratione pondfris ot
Jordanus and that perhaps he mentioned
suel1 a proof \vit110ut reproducing it, re-
producing rather the l)rnof of the
J\,1f'1sa as given by l)acioli.
Hero's Tl1eorcln on the .L\rea of a Triangle 637
tIle basis of a si!lgle manllscript, nan1ely, 1;15 11is suggestion as to author-
ship ","as based 011 a table of CCJ11tents at the beginning ()f the manuscript,
where we read TheorefJl0ta Cratili.
16
I-re tl10ught tllat the theorem migllt be
one of those included under that title, IJllt as to wIlo Cratilus ",-as, Curtze
had no idea. This proof, discoverccl by Curtzc, was associated for the first
tinle \\Tith tile natne of Jordanus by l).ierre Duhenl fc)[ the follo\ving rea-
sons :]7 (1) The theorem alJpears in the n1anuscripts ill close proximity to
(or even as a part of) works attributed to Jordanus.
18
(2) There is a refer-
ence in the Vatican nlanuscript to tIle effect that the theorem "is a
part of the phyloteigni and ougllt to be joined to it" (cf. Version I, variant
reading to line I); but Jordanus refers in his ElcHJe!Jla deponderiblls to a
work of his entitled Philotegl1i, a work which can now confidently be iden-
tified \vith his De triafJglllis.
19
Still, the accuracy of this marginal reference
may well be questioned since none of the four copies of the De triang'Ilis
that I have examined contains the proof in question, while in manuscript I
the proof presented here is separated from the De triangll/is by more than
one hundred folio pages. Furthermore, manuscripts andQ of \Tersion I
of the theorem say that "this rule is said to have been written in I\rabic"
(cf. Version I, lines 7-9), while Yo, the unique manuscript of \Tersion 11,
IS M. Curtze, "Ober eine Handschrift
der Konigl. offentl. Bibliothek zu Dresden,
Zeilschrift fur Mathen/afik /lnd Physik, vol.
28(1883), Hist.-lit. Abt., pp. 5-6,78.
16 Ibid., pp. 4, 6. The hand giving this
table of contents is that of Valentinus
Thaus (Thaw) and is dated 158o (see p. I).
Incidentally, it is Thaus' hand that adds
the combined Greek and Latin marginal
note opposite the theorem under consider-
ation (see Version I, variant readings,
line I).
17 P. Duhem, "Un ouvrage perdu cite
par Jordanus de Nemore: le Philotech-
nes," Bibliot4eca Mathematica, 3. Folge, vol.
J (1904), pp. 3
z
3-
2
5
18 In manuscript Q(40v) it comes at the
end of the Liber de ratione ponderis attrib-
uted to Jordanus and actually precedes
the explicit of that work (40V): "Explicit
liber quartus Iordani de ponderibus." In
manuscript Xa it follows two folios after
the Liber de ratione ponderis, which occupies
folios 5V. In manuscript I there are
a number of works attributed to J ordanus,
including the De /riangulis v), an
Ari/hme/ica (6IV-IIOV), Elell/en/a tk ponde-
ribus (I 86r-1 87V), De forma spere in piano
(224r-22 5v), De nUlI/eris dotis (2z8r-z42v),
De ratione ponderis (z43r-249v). Our theo-
rem is not particularly close to any of these,
occupying folios 178r-v. But the associa-
tion of the theorem with ] ordanus, or at
least with one of the tracts De pondtribus,
is suggested by a statement in Leonardo
de Cremona's Prac/ica gtomltriae (td. cif. in
note I 3 above, p. 386), where he notes that
he has found the theorem in a book of
mechanics (Iibro de "'echanici). This could
very possibly have been a manuscript of
one of the tracts De ponderibuJ attributed
to Jordanus, as Curtze asserts.
19 See E. A. Moody and M. Clagett, Th,
Medieval Science of Weights, zd printing
(Madison, 1960), pp. 130, 134-36, 379,
381. Note further that in MS Bruges,
Stadsbibliotheek 530, Iv-8v, the De trian-
glllis is specifically entided Phylotegni Jordan;
de trianguus liber pri1lllls (IV; cf. 8v).
638 Appendix IV
states more categorically: "this rule concerning the triangle was written
in Arabic" (cf. Version 11, line ISO).
These remarks seem to throw some doubt on Jordanus' authorship of
the theorem. But let us examine them more closely, speculating as to their
meaning. At least three possibilities suggest themselves, the first of which
is incompatible with the idea of Jordanus as the original author of the
theoren1. The first interpretation of the remarks is that the whole theorem
(enunciation and proof) was composed in Arabic and merely translated into
Latin. In support of such a theory we recognize that the proof, unlike that
of the Banii Miisa, was fairly close to an Arabic version of Hero's proof
that circulated in the Middle Ages,20 although to be sure we can readily
see that the Arabic version was not itself the text from which our proof Vlas
translated in spite of the general similarity of the two. Supposing this
interpretation to be the correct one, then, if Jordanus had any connection
at all with the theoren1, it was merely to transmit it or possibly to modify
if somewhat. We know that Jordanus did on occasion take certain theorems
almost verbatim from other authors, as for example when he drew the
theorems and proofs concerning the trisection of an angle and the finding
of two mean proportionals from the Banii Miisa (see Appendixes V and VI).
A second possible interpretation of the remarks on the Arabic writing
of this theorem is that they refer only to the enunciation and not to the
proof. This seems to have been Duhem's opinion.
2I
In support of this
theory is the fact that the comment follows immediately after the enuncia-
tion in manuscripts Xa and Q and that it is added in manuscript Ya only
in connection with the full, formal enunciation as it is given at the end.
But one could object to this interpretation (and as a matter of fact to the
first one as well) by pointing out that the remark in Xa and Q is by no
means an assertive statement. If tIle autllor of that remark really knew that
this rule was written in Arabic (and translated therefrom), why did he use
the rather tentative verb dicittlr ("is said"). This objection, of course, does
not hold for the statement in },Ta, which flatly asserts that the rule was
written in r\rabic. Still, there is considerable evidence that Version 11 is
merely a rewrite of Version I in tIle oA)(a tradition. Hence, the change
in tone in the remark as found ill }7([ OlIght perhaps to I,ave no significance.
A third interpretation would den)T tile /\rabic origil1 of either enuncia-
20 This version of Hero's proof acld- des J\1usa ben Schakir," l/ibliolhfca Jffllbr-
ed to the end of al-TGsi's edition of the IlIa/ict1, 3. Folge, vnl. } (1902), pp. 271-72.
geometry of the BanG I\'fCtsa (AIqjlll/7, ,,1- 21 DuhC111, op. (it. in l1
C
)tC 17 allo\"e.. pp.
Rasa 'if, vo!. 2 [Hyderabad, 1940]). ..1-1. 3l3-!4.
Suter, "Ober die Geo111ctrie cler Si.>hne
Hero's TheorelTI on the Aica of a 'frianglc 639
tion or proof. It would 1101d that the rcnlark is ()Jlly a vague, general state-
ment that tIle same rtlle can be fOUIld ill \vriting of [\ral)ic origin (as, for
example, in the J"Terba jiiiorl//JJ, kl10\Vn t<J be of J-\rabic origin), but that
both the enunciation and l)foof as prCScllted here are illdependent of
.t\rabic sources. That is, they arc eitllcr Greek it1 origin ()[ original with
Jordanus Of sonlC other J-Jatin geonlcter. '-l'llere is n() sure way to decide
between these varying inter11retations alld T suspect that 110 decision can
be made until further evidence apl)cars.
"'fhe line of argument followed in both of the versions is clearly enough
indicated tllfougll the accompanying translations to demand little addi-
tional comment. As I indicated earlier, it resembles the proof of the theo-
rem given in Hero's ilfetrica and Dioptra (see note I) more than it does that
found in the Verba jiliortl1Jl of the BanG l\[iisa. It is evident, however, that
the medieval proof is less economical than J-Iero's proof. This is sharply
brought out by contrasting Version 11 with Hero's proof, since Version 11
has added geometrical steps lacking in Version I. But even in \rersion I
the author takes an excessive nun1ber of steps to draw his obvious con-
clusions after showing the similarity of triangles P_-'IC and DBF and that
of triangles DFH and CPQ. I do not know when the elaboration repre-
sented by Version II was composed, but its unique manuscript dates from
the fifteenth century. It seems probable to me that it was composed from
some copy of Version I that was closer to the tradition of manuscripts ..'(0
andQ than I, since many of the variant readings of ..,.:\.a andQ ha\re been
incorporated in Version 11. That Version 11 postdated Campanus' com-
mentary on the Elements of Euclid is possible since in Version 11 the enun-
ciation is changed to a form similar to that found in Campanus' commen-
tary.22 Incidentally, the only author cited in either version is Euclid, and
he is cited only once in Version 11 (line 94)-a very general citation to
Book XI.
~ text of Version I has been constructed on the bais of the three
manuscripts listed under Version I in the Sigla below. It is clear from an
11 Thaw points out in a comment on the tem et penultimam primi quod cognitis
margin of manuscript I opposite the theo- lateribus omnis trianguli, cognoscitur area
rem (see variant readings, Version I, line I) ipsius, et auxiliantibus tabulis de chorda
that there is another way of proof in Cam- et arcu, cognoscitur omnis eius angulus."
panus' treatment of Proposition n. I 3 of Compare line I of Version 11, where the
the Elements, a remark that puzzled Curtze long enunciation of Version I has been
since he could find no such reference. abandoned in favor of a short problematic
However, in the edition of Basel, I 546, statement of the theorem, in the manner
p. ~ I, we read after the proof of 11. 13 : of the brief statement of Campanus.
"Notandum autem per hanc et preceden-
~ p ~ m x I V
exanlination of the variant readings that Xa andQ again and again agree
with each other against I, but sometimes circwnstances of style and mean-
ing have de1llanded that I follow I and sometimes Xa andQ. As between
Xa and Q, Xa is to be preferred since on occasion Q omits necessary
material (e.g., see variants to lines 46-48 and 61-63) and often alters cor-
rect forms (e.g., see medietasque instead of mediatatisquc in lines 1-2, super-
additus L instead of Sed super ACin line 32, and so on). Xa has no :figure.
The bottom part of the triangle is missing in the figure in I, as are the
lines R, S, and T; but solids X and Y are represented as rectangular
parallelopipeds. My text of Version IT follows Ya with only an occasional
change, the pristine readings having been included in the variant readings.
The marginal folio numbers for Version I refer to manuscript I, those for
Version IT to manuscript Ya.
Sigla of Alanuscripts
VERSION I
I = Dresden, Sachs. Landesbibliothek, Db. 86, 178r-v, early 14C. Cf. the
text of j\.f. Curtze, cited in footnote 15.
Xa = Rome, Vat. Reg. suev. 1261, 57v-5 8r, ca. 1350-75.
Q = Paris, BN late 7378A, 4or-v, I4C.
VERSION 11
Ya = Munich, Bay. Staatsbibliothek, cod. 234, lo5V-I08v, I5c.
[I have published the Latin text of both of these versions in S. Prete,
ed., Didascaliae (New York, 1961), pp. 79-95.]
[The Area of a Triangle
Measured in Terms of Its Three Sides]
Appendix IV
[Area trianguli tribus lateribus mensurata]
[Versio 1]
178r / SI TRIA TRIANGULI LATERA COACERVEN'TUR, 1\1E-
DIETATISQUE COMPOSITI AD SINGULA LATERA DIFFE-
RENTIE SUMANTUR, PRIMAQUEIN SECUNDAMDUCATUR
ET IN PRODUCTUM TERTIA, ITEMQUE QUOD INDE PRO-
5 VENIT IN PREDICTAM MEDIETATEM, ILLIUS
PRODUCTI RADIX ERIT AREA TRIANGULI.
[Regula hec in arabico conscripta dicitur, in qua quoniam tertia
multiplicatio, videlicet linee in solidum, que in continuis non habetur,
rationem in ea sumere oportet numerorum.]
10 Sit itaque datus triangulus ABC[Fig. 93] et medietas coacervati ex
lateribus ipsius sit linea KLM, differentieque ipsius sint ad AB linea
T, et ad ACS, et ad BC R. Sitque solidum quod continetur R, 5, T
designaturn nota Z. Intelligamus itaque in dato triangulo circulum
contingentem latera notis F, G, E, cuius centrum D, a quo prodeant
15 ad puncta contactus linee DF, DE, DG singulis lateribus perpendi-
culares, atque inter se equales. Sed et a D ad tres angulos linee pro-
I mg. Xa Hec est pars Phyloteigni et
debet ei subiungi / nlg. 16c Ill. IaepciAl)pov
6e:oopl)(J.cx. vide hac de re Campanuo1
Prop. 13, lib. 2, Euclidis aliter idem /
tria trianguli Ir.
1-2 medietasque Q
4 quod 0111. I
,provenit ..\PaQ productum I
5 Ilhus ultimo 0"'. I
6 producti radix ;-;: I
7-9 [Regula ... nUOlerorum1 Olll. I
10 itaque XaQ onI. I
I I -que I 0111 ..tJ(oQ / lineaz onl. )("'0
1 Z et
1
Olll. Q / S: scilicet (?) / et! 0111. Q /
Sitque ..t\Pa;Q sed I / continetur ..\oQ
cOl1tinent I I R, S, T iciest I
13 itaque ..:\Pa..Q igitur I / triangulo ..\-aQ
trigona I
14 latera r011/ ..t\W'a..Q .. ,
I 5 ante ad add. A\{lQ D I DC; 1 GD ..\t1Q /
latcrihus lineis I
Hero's Theorem 011 the j\rca of a 1-irianglc
[The Area of a Triangle Measured in Terms
of Its Three Sides]
[Version I]
IF TI-IE THREE SIDES OF 1\ t\DDED TO-
GETHER, AND THE EXCESSES OF I-Il\LF OF
OVER EACI-I OF Tl-IE INDIVIDUJ\L SIDES ,\RE Tl\KEN,
THE FIRST EXCESS IS j\;fULTIPLIED BY THE SECOl\;D, :\ND
THE TI-llRD IS 11ULllPLIED BY Tl-nS PRODUCT, r\ND THEN
THE RESULT OF TI-llS IS 1
/
IULTIPLIED BY THE .L\FORES:\ID
HALF THE ROOT OF THE FIN\L PRODlTCT
\VILL BE THE AREA OF THE TRII\NGLE.
[This rule is said to have been written in Arabic. Since in the rule the
third multiplication, being of a line by a solid, is one which is not had
among continua, it is necessary to assume in it the nature of numbers.]
And so let the given triangle be ABC [see Fig. 93] and let one half the
A
p
8
Fig. 93
N
o
l
R
M
T
s
sum of its sides be line KLA1, and let KLJi/ - AB = T, and KLllf - AC
= S, and KLM - BC = R. Let R S T = solid Z. And so let a circle
be.imagined as in the given triangle, and let it be tangent to the sides at
pOUlts F, G, and E. Let the center of the circle be D, and from D let
DF, DE, DC, perpendicular to the separate sides, proceed to the
pOInts of tangency, and they will be mutually equal. But also from Diet
644 Appendix IV
trahantur, singulos angulos per equa partientur, quorum omnium
medietates quoniam equantur uni recto et quia angulus DBFet angu-
lus BDF equantur recto, erit angulus BDF tanquam angulus D.L4.F
fzO et angulus GCD. Ducatur itaque linea PQDH ita ut angulus HDF
equatur 3.ngulo DAF, eritque angulus HDA rectus, et similiter an-
gulus QDA, et ob id etiam angulus GDQ equalis angulo G.:4D,
et reliquus, scilicetQDC, equalis angulo DBH, quoniam totus angu-
lus GDC est equalis duobus, scilicet GAD et DBE. Erigatur itaque
!Z5 perpendicularis a C donec concurrat cum linea HDQP, que sit CP,
et continuetur P cum A. Deinde, quoniam AF est equalis AG, et
BF equalis BB, atque CB equalis CG, linee enim ab eodem puncta
exeuntes usque ad contactus circuli sunt equales, tunc ...AF et FB et
CB sunt tanquam tres relique. Erunt ergo medietas trium laterum
go companentque lineam KLM, sitque K equalis AF et L equalis FB
et A/I equatur CB. 11anifestum est etiam quod KLM addit super AB
quantum est AI, quare M equalis est T. Sed super ACaddit L; quare
L equatur S. Atque super BC addit K, itaque K est equalis R. Sint
etiam linee 1'.l et 0 equales perpendicularibus, quarum una D F, soli-
35 dumque sub lineis KLll,{ et N et 0 contentum sit Y. Quia item anguli
ADP et ACP sunt recti et equales, puncta A, D, C, P in eadem
semicirculo consistent; quare anguli PACet PDCsunt equales. Erunt
ergo anguli PAC et DBF equales, itaque trianguli PAC et DBF
1,8v sunt similes, I eritque BFadFD sicut ACadCP. SedetiamFDadFH
40 sicut PC ad CQ, quoniam trianguli DFHet CPQ sunt similes. Itaque
BF ad FHtanquam ACadQC. Ergo coniunctim BF et ACad FH
18 medietas Q / uni I cum XaQ / DBF I
BDF XaQ
19 BDFI I DBS XaQ / BDF2 I DBF
20 GCD I DCG Xlt.-Q / itaque XaQ ergo I
2 I equatur IQ equetur Xa
22 id etiam I hoc / GDQ Xa QDG
QGQDI
23 QDC ."YaI QDEQ
24 GDC XaQ QDC I / duobus scilicet I
angulo XaQ
25 HDQP I HDPQ
27-28 enim... exeuntes I siquidem exeun-
tes ab eodem puncto Xa
28 contactus I contactum AYa..Q
30 -que A,raQ ergo I
3I equatur I cquetur
2 eaualis est I est etluale ..\....0.0 / Sed super
AC Xa superadditus L Q sed et simi-
liter AC I I quare
2
I itaque XaQ
33 LIB I super similter I I ita-
que I ergo XaQ / equalis I equale XaQ/
R IY .)(aQ
34
0
ID XaQ
35 item ..1(a idem I tunc Q I anguli I trian-
guli ./YaQ
3
6
et equales I DIll .fYa.Q
37 consistent I consistunt ..YaQ I quare I
et 1I.\(aQ
38 DBFt J\raQ FBD I / P et DBF
FBD J
40 PC J\aQ PO (?) J I I PQC .\ra
IJA(: Q
4
1
J i liP J
Hero's Theorem on the Area of a Triangle 645
lines be drav/n to tIle three angles, thus bisecting the illdividual angles.
Since the halves of all the angles [together] equal one right angle, and
since L DBF + L == I rigllt angle, therefore L BDF == L D.-JF
+ L CeD. J\nd so let line ]JQDl-Ibe drawn so tllat L I-lDF=-= L D./IF,
and L HD/1 will be a rigllt angle, aIld Sill1ilarly L QIJ/J will be a right
angle. Consequently L G'PQ =-= L-. G'.:-1D, and LQIJC === L DBJ-Isince
the whole angle G'DC = L G D -f- L DBE. * And so from C let a
perpendicular be erected until it meets line H.DQP, and thisperpenclicular
is CP. Let P be joined witll TIlen, since :== _4G', andBF' = BE,
and CB = CC-for lines proceeding from the same point [outside of a
circle] which are tangent to the circle are equal-tIlen /1-" + F B +CE=
A G +BE + CC. Therefore, (AP + BF + CE) equals half the sum of
the three sides and [so] comprises line KLill. i\nd let K === ..,.1J-:, L === FE,
and M = CE. Also it is evident that - /lB === ill, and so 1/ = T.
But KLAf - ...4C = L, and so L = 5; and KLi.lf - BC = K, and
so K = R. Further, let lines i\-r and 0 be equal to the perpendiculars, of
which one is DF. r\nd let KLJ11 ]\r 0 = Y. i\lso, since angles DP and
* Since L GDC + L GCD = I right angle, and L GAD + L DBE + L GCD =
I right angle.
646 Appendix IV
et CQ sicut BFad FH. Sed FHest tanquamQG propter triangulos
similes et quia FD equalis est DG, [et itaque FHetQCsunt tanquam
GC.] Itemque BFet ACsunt tanquam KLkf. Est ergo KLA-f ad GC
45 sicut BFad FH. Sed proportio BFad FHaggregatur ex proportione
BF ad DF et ex proportione DF ad FH. Sed AFad FD tanquam
FD ad FH. Proportio ergo BF ad FH, constat ex proportionibus
BF ad DF et AFad DF. Sed proportia BF ad DF tanquam linee
S ad N, et AF ad DF sicut differentie R ad 0 proportio. Itaque
50 KLM ad T aggregatur ex proportione S ad N et R ad o. Quia igitur
solidi Y ad solidum Z aggregatur proportio ex proportionibus KLil!
ad T et N ad S et 0 ad R, et proportiones N ad S et 0 ad R faciunt
proportionem T ad KLA,f, erit solidum Y equale solido Z. Producit
autem KLkf in 0 superficiem equalem triangulo data. Divisus est
55 enim triangulus ABCin tres triangulos ADB et BDC et ADC. Sed
ex dimidio .L4B in DFfit equale triangulo ADB et ex dimidio ACin
DCequum est trigono ADCet quod ex dimidio BCin DEest equale
triangulo BDC. Et quia omnes perpendiculares sunt equales linee 0,
ideo quod fit ex dimidio omnium laterum, et ipsum est KLilf, in 0 est
60 tanquam area trianguli ABC. Cum ergo solidum Y habeat tria latera
J.V, 0, KLA/f, et ex 0 in KLlv! fiat area trianguli, tunc N ducta in ean-
dem aream perficit solidum Y. Quare cum 0 sit equalis Al, erit area
trianguli inter lineam KLJl,1 et solidum Y [medium] proportionale;
quare inter eandem et solidumZ. Si ergo, ut proponitur, KLlv! ducatur
65 in Z, radix producti erit area trianguli.
42 FH2 correxi ex BF IXa et BH BFQ
43 post similes add. XaQ FDB, DGQ / DG
1 GD .>(aQ
43-44 [et ... GC] stlpplevi
44 Itemque: tuncque Q / sunt Ionl. )('oQ
46 ex Ionl. XaQ
4
6
-4
8
tanquanl ... DF2 0111. Q
47 Proportio ergo Ir. / proportioni-
bus: proportione )('0
48 DFI: FD
5I aggregatur proportio Ir.
54 equale.ffi ... data I data triangulo equa-
X.aQ I Divisus I quia divisus .YaQ
55 I 01"J(aQ I ADB I scilicet
J\aQ / et
l
, 2 I 0111.
56 fit / sit .-\'-a.Q I triangul; I trigollo I
ADB: ABDQ
57 est
l
Iom. XaQ / est equale I equum est
XaQ
58 BDC I DBC XaQ I sunt ... O llinee 0
sunt equales .LYa:Q
59 fit I fit P )(aQ / ipsum I ipse .LYaQ I
in 0 Ir. I ante et
60 ergo I igitur ..YaQ I habeat tria ..YaQ
habet I
6IN, ;\raQ 0, N J
61-
6
3 tunc ... trianguli 0/11. ,Q .
62 perficit I producit Xa / cquahs XN
equale 1
63 ln1cdi un1] sIIP/)/fl'i
64 proponitllr I prnpnnatur .Y{lq
6 t rianl!U1i t r 1 n f111" (. '\ n 1icit.\ &'1
Hero's Theorem on the Area of a 'triangle 647
__ ,,CP are right angles al1d equal, points D, C, and P \\till lie on the
same semicircle. Therefore, L P./4C =-= L PDC. * T'herefore, L P./1C =
L DBF.** And so 6. similar to /\ .DBF, and BF'jFD ==
But also FD /FH = PCj(:Q since .. is similar to CPQ. *** l\nd
so BF/PH = r1C/CQ [by invertil1g tIle last proportion and divicling
it into the first proportiol1]. Therefore, (BP /1C)/(FH + CQ) =
BFI FH. But FH = QC because of the similarity of triangles and because
FD = DC. [And so PH + CQ == C7'C',] and also + ./'IC == KLllf.
Therefore, KLllf/GC = BP/PH. But B.F/FH == (BF/DF) (DF/FH),
and _4F/FD = FDjFJ-J [by similar triangles]. Therefore, B.F/FH =
(BF/DF) (r1F/DF). But BF/ = S/lV, and ./IF/DP' == RIO. And so
[G'C being equal to T], KLllf/T== (Lf/L\r) (R/O). Therefore, since }I'IZ =
(KL.J/IT) (l\T/S) (O/R), and T/KLjJ[ == (L\7/J') (0/R), therefore, solid
}T = solid Z. Further, KLilf 0 == the given triangle. For 6 ..t/lBC has been
divided into three triangles: ADB, BDC, and ADC. But =
1 (_4B DF), and 6 ADC== I DC), and 6 BDC = i (BC DE).
And since all the perpendiculars [DF, DC', DE] are [each] equal to line
0, hence 6 ABC = KLll1 O. tlence, since solid }? = ","",.,.. 0 KLilI and
KLAf = area of triangle, then (i\"r" area triangle) = solid Y. Hence,
since 0 = N, KLMjarea triangle = area triangle/Ye Therefore, KL.J.lf/area
triangle = area trianglejZ. If, therefore, KLllf is multiplied by Z, as is
proposed, the square root of the product will be the area of the triangle.
* Since they are angles on a circumference subtended by the same chord (PC).
** Since L PDCis identical with LQDC, and LQDC = L DBE = L DBF.
*** Since L HDF = L DAF, DFHis similar to 6. DAH, and DAHis
similar to 6. ADQ. But ADQ is similar to 6. CPQ. Therefore, 6. DFHis similar
to
Appendix IV
[Versio 11]
I05V I Cognitis tribus lateribus cuiusque trianguli eius aream invenire.
Propositum est cognitis tribus lateribus trianguli invenire quanta
l06r sit superficies que ab eis ambitur. Ad huius itaque I exemplum ponam
ut sint latera trianguli ABGpropostiti nota [Fig. 94], et per hoc in,e-
5 niatn eius aream. Inscribam autem intra propositum triangulum cir-
cuIum CFE supra centrum D et a centra ducam lineas tres ad tria
puncta in quibus circulus contingit latera trianguli, que sint DC, DF,
DE, et ab eodem centra ducam lineas tres ad tres angulos eius, que
sunt DA, DB, DG. Ex hoc igitur declaratur nobis quod quilibet illo-
10 rum angulorum divisus est in duos angulos equales, propter hoc quod
latera trianguli ADE sunt equalia lateribus trianguli ADC, et latera
trianguli BDC lateribus trianguli BDF, et similiter latera trianguli
GDFlateribus trianguli GDE. Cum igitur tres anguli trianguli ABG
sint equales duobus:rectis,tres medietates eorum, que sunt anguli D/1E,
15 DBF, et DGE, erunt equales uni recto. Set angulus DGEcum angulo
EDG valet unum rectum, quoniam tertius, scilicet GED, est rectus.
Ergo duo anguli DGE et EDG sunt equales tribus angulis qui sunt
DAE, DBF, et DGE. Ergo remota angulo DGEremanebit angulus
EDG equalis duobus angulis DAB et DBF. Ergo ipse erit maior
!l0 angulo DAE. Faciam itaque ipsum sibi equalem et protraham lineam
H D que cum ED faciat angulum equale angulo DAE, quam etiam
producam in continuum usque ad P, et ponam notamQ ubi interse-
cabit lineam AB. Et quoniam medietas trium laterum cuiusque trian-
14 anguli corr. ex angulus
16 valet co,.,.. ex ,ralent
22 prodllcalll corr. e.'X," }lfOductal11
Hero's Theorem on the l\rca of a Triangle
[Version 11]
With three sides of any triangle kl1()\Vl1, to find its area.
It has been proposed-\vit11 tl1rec sides of a triangle kno\vn, to find 110\\'
great is the area enclosed by tIlem..L\nd so for the exemplification of this,
I posit that tIle sides of the proposed trial1g1e "llle; are kno\vn [sce Fig. 94],
and by means of this I shall find its area. J\J()fCOVer, I shall inscribe \llitIun
the proposed triangle a circle C".f''L' about center 1). .1\nd from the center
I shall dra\v tllree lines to tIle three points where t11e circle touches the
sides of the triangle; these lines we let be ]JC', .1.)l ~ I and .DE". r\nd from
the same center I shall draw three lines to its three angles, the lines being
A
N
o
K
v,x
M
T
R
s
DA, DB, DG. Therefore, from this it is evident to us that each of those
angles is bisected, since the sides of 6. ADCare equal to the sides of 6 ..:4DE,
and the sides of 6 BDC to the sides of 6 BDF, and similarly the sides
of 6 GDF to the sides of 6 GDE. Since, therefore, the three angles of
6 ABG are equal to two right angles, then their three halves, which are
L DAB, L DBF, L DGE, will be equal to one right angle. But L DGE
+ L EDG = I right angle, since the third angle, i.e., GED, is a right
angle. Hence, L DGE + L EDG = L DAE + L DBF + L DGE.
Therefore, with L DGE subtracted [from each side], L EDG =
L DAB + L DBF. Therefore, L EDG > L DAB. And so I shall
make an angle equal to it [i.e., make an angle equal to DAE], and [to
do so] I shall draw line HD, which with ED forms an angle equal to
L DAB. I shall also extend this line [HD] continuously to P. And I
shall mark pointQ where it will intersect line AB. And since half of the
three sides of any triangle is greater than anyone of its sides, the whole
l06v
650 Appendix IV
gull est maior quolibet latere ipsius, erit tota linea AGcum BFmaior
.5 quolibet latere propositi trianguli, nam ABest medietas ABet AC,
et EG est medietas BG et GF, et FB est lIledietas BF et BC. Ergo
A G et FB simul sunt medietates omnium laterum / predieti trianguli.
Sit itaque linea KLM, quod agregatur ex AG et FB, et sumatur dif-
ferentia eius ad quodlibet trium laterum. Et sit eius differentia ad latus
go quidem AG T et ad latus AB sit S et ad latus BG sit R. Manifestum
est igitur quod T erit equalis CB, eo quod medietas trium laterum
excedit AGin CB,et S erit equalis GB quoniam medietas trium late-
rum excedit AB in GB, et R erit equalis ABquoniam medietas trium
laterum excedit BG in AB. Sit itaque solidum quod fit ex T, S, et R
35 solidumZ. Sumantur etiam due linee equales perpendiculari DE, que
sunt N et 0, et fiat ex eis et linea KLlll solidum Y. Dico igitur tunc
quod solidum Y est equale solido Z, quod sic ostendam.
Angulus HDB est equalis angulo DAB. Set angulus DAB cum
angulo BD.L4. valet unum rectum quoniam tertius est rectus. Ergo
40 angulus HDB cum angulo BDA valet unum rectum. Ergo totus
angulus ADH est rectus. Ergo etiam reliquus ADP erit rectus,
propter hoc quod linea HDP est linea una. Ergo ipsi sunt ambo equa-
les. Si igitur ab eis demantur duo anguli ADCet ADB, qui propter
hoc quod reliqui duo sunt equales reliquis duobus remanebit angulus
45 EDHequalis angulo CDQ. Et iterum quoniam anguli DACet DBC
et DGB sunt equales uni recto, eo quod ipsi sunt medietas trium
angulorum trianguli, et angulus QDC est equalis angulo DAC, erunt
tres anguliQDC, DBC, et DGB equales uni recto. Set etiam anguli
CDB et CBD equantur uni recto propter quod alter est rectus. Ergo
50 tres anguliQDC, CBD, et DGE equantur duobus qui sunt CDB et
CBD. Quare demptis duobus qui suntQDCet CBD remanebitQDB
equalis DGB. Producam itaque a puncta B perpendicularem a linea
AB / et protraham ipsam quousque concurrat cum HQP et ponam P
in loco concursus. Concurrent autem quoniam angulus BQD est maior
55 recto, eo quod ipse est extrinsecus ad ,-QCD, qui est rectus. Ergo
reliquus BQP est minor recto et PBQ est rectus. Ergo isti duo simul
sunt minores duobus rectis. Igitur in eandenl partern protracte con-
current. Deinde a puncta P ducam lineam ad punctllffi .. 1 super eUffi.
Igitur describam semicirculllffi supra quem Sllnt ..,Ll,l), B, P; et quo-
26 BC cor,.. ex FC
34 corr. ex scilicet
48 angulj2 corr. ex angulus
I QDI3 cor,.. f..X
52 Prnclucan1 (0,.,.. 11rndllctan1
Hero's Theorem on the .L\rca of a Triangle I
line _./-'1 G plus BF is greater than any ()ne side of the proposed triangle;
for _4.E = l (...4E' + a11d == ! (EC; -t- G'F), and ==
! (BF + BC). I-fence, LLICT' + J-t"n the scmiperimeter of the aforesaid
triangle. And so let there be a line f, Wllich is nladc up from .. -1 G
and FB, and let the excess of it over cacll of tIle three sides be taken; and
let KLllf - === T, KIJ:,l! - /".B ,\', and l<"I-J/lf -BC == R. It is
ev'ident, therefore, that Twill l)e equal to r B l)ccausc the semiperimeter
exceeds ...4 G' by CB, and tl,at .. f \vilI be equal t() since the semiperimeter
exceeds .L.:1B by G'E, and tIlat It \vill equal since the semiperimeter
exceeds BC by . .I\nd so let T If solid Z. l\lso, let two lines,
leach] equal to perpendicular be taken, namely, lines and 0, and let
i\T. 0 KLlll = solid }T. I say, therefore, that solid }/' === solid Z, which
I shall demonstrate as follows.
L HDE = L D/:1E. But L -t- L E'.D./1 == I right angle, since
t11e third angle is a right angle. Therefore, L HDE" + L ED..4 == 1 right
angle. Therefore, the whole angle is a right angle. Therefore, the
adjacent angle J:4DP will be a right angle since line HDP is a single
straight line. Therefore, these angles are equal to each other. If, therefore,
the two angles ADCand ADE are subtracted from them [respectiv'ely],
the angles ADC and ADE being equal because the other two angles
[of each triangle] are equal [respectively], thus L EDH == L CDQ. .:\nd
since L DAC + L DBC + / DGE = I right angle, because
they are [together] half of the three angles of the triangle and L QDC
= L DAC, [hence] L QDC + L DBC + L DGE = I right angle.
But also L CDB + L CBD = 1 right angle, because the third angle
is a right angle. Therefore, L QDC + L CBD + L DGE = L CDB
+ L CBD. Therefore, with anglesQDC and CBD subtracted, L QDB
= L DGE. And so I shall draw from point B a perpendicular to line
oA4B, extending it until it meets HQP, and I shall place P in the point of
meeting. Moreover, the lines will meet since L BQD is greater than a
right angle. This is so because L BQD is extrinsic to L QeD, which
is a right angle. Therefore the other angle, BQP, is less than a right angle,
while L PBQ is a right angle. Therefore, these two angles together are
less than two right angles. when the two lines are extended
in the same direction, they will meet. Then I shall dra,,' a line from point P
to point A. Therefore, I shall describe a semiciJ:cle, on which [points]
A, D, B, and P lie. And since it [i.e., line AP] is opposite right L ABP
65 z Appendix IV
60 niam. ipsa opponitut angulo recto qui est ABP et angulo recto qui est
ADP, erit uterque illorum in circumferentia semicirculi descripta
supra earn. Ergo puncta A, D, B, et P sunt in circumferentia eiusdem
circuli. Propter hoc igitur erit angulus PDB equalis angulo P44B,
eo quod ambo sunt super unam portionem circuli que est PB. Qua-
65 propter angulus PABest equalis angulo DGE, erunt igitur duo trian-
guli APB et DGE equianguli et eorum latera proportionalia. Set et
similiter erunt duo trianguli PQB et DQC, quoniam angulus DQC
est equalis angulo PQB quia sunt contra se positi et reliquus utriusque
est rectus; et quia triangulusQDCfuit equiangulus et equilaterus cum
70 triangulo HDE, erit HDE similisQPB et eorum latera proportiona-
lia. Erit itaque proportio AB ad BP sicut proportio GE ad ED. Set
etiam proportio PB ad BQ est sicut proportio DE ad EH. Ergo a
prima proportio AB ad BQ est sicut proportio GE ad HE. Ergo
coniunctitn proportio AB et GE simul ad BQ et HE simul est sicut
75 proportio GE ad HE. Set HE est equalis QC, ut ostensum est prius.
Ergo proportio ./4B et GE simul ad BQ et CQ simul ita quod CQ
accipiatur loco HE est sicut proportio GE ad HE. Set AB et GB
I07V simul est equalis KLAl, eo quod ipsa est medietas trium laterum; / et
BC est equalis T, quoniam T fuit differentia medietatis trium laterum
80 ad latus AG. Ergo proportio KL.iV! ad T est sicut proportio EG' ad
HE. Proportio autem EG ad HE est agregata ex duplici proportione,
scilicet GE ad ED et DE ad EH. Set proportio DE ad EHest sicut
proportio AEad ED, propter hoc quod ab angulo ADHrecto cadit
DE perpendiculariter super latus quod opponitur recto angulo. Ergo
85 facit duos triangulos similes sibi invicem. Et totalis ergo proportio
GE ad EH est agregata ex proportione GE ad ED et AB ad ED.
Sed ian1 fuit proportio KLiV! ad T sicut GE ad EH. Ergo proportio
KLllf ad Test agregata ex proportione G'E ad ED et AEad E'D. Set
GE est equaIis 5 et ED est equalis 1'/, et iterum AB est equalis R, et
go ED est equalis O. Ergo proportio KLilf ad Test agregata ex propor-
tione 5 ad Net R ad O. Ergo everse proportio T ad KLllf est agregata
ex proportione N ad 5 et 0 ad R. Set rursus proportio solidi Y ad
solidum Z est agregata ex proportione laterum suorUffi, sicut paret
per undecin1um Euclidis. Ex proportione itaque KLJ! ad T et LYad
63 PDB corr. ex PDP / PI\.B corr. ex Pr\P
91 !JIg. C.2 1071) add. }7"a Esto nlenl0r poncrc
ut sit unUl11 latus 21 et aliucl 20 et ter-
tiUITI 19 et tunc sit area trianguli fere
172 l)artes quadrate guarum longitudo
et latidudo erit seCUnclUlTI 111agnitudinjs
uni us 11arti LI 111 l)ositarunl.
92 corT. {':h
4
X
I-Iero's on the J\rea of Cl 653
and opposite rigllt a11glc ..:<1. DP, hence each of t11esc angles will lie on the
semicircle described on lil1C ./IP. points _/1, .D, .B, and Pare
in the circumference of the saOle circle. l\ccordingly, PDB:=.: P../1B,
since both [are on the same circunlfercnce ul1dl arc sllbtended IJy the sanle
segment of the circle, natnely,PB. Since L P/1/3 == 1_ DC'.E, therefore
triangles /1PBand DG'Eare equiangular, ancl their sides arc proportional.
But this is true in the same \vay ()f triangles PQB and PQC, since L
= L PQB, these angles beil1g vertical and another angle of each
triangle is a right angle..l\nd since .Q.DC is similar to L H then
6 H DE is similar to 6 ,QPB alld their sides are proportional. i\nd so
AB/BP === GE/ED. But also PB/BQ === l.JE/E--.H. Therefore, [inverting
the last proportion and dividing it into the first] ./-"1 B/ BQ = GB/HE.
Tllerefore, (AB + CE)/(BQ + .HE) === GEjHE. But HE = QC, as
was before. Therefore, (AB + GE)/(BQ + CQ) = GE/HE. But
AB + GE = KLhf, because KLA-f is the semiperimeter; and BC = T,
since Twas the excess ofthe semiperimeter over side .. G'. Hence, KL.!ll/T =
EC/HE. Further, EC/HE = (GEjE.D) (DE/EH). But DE.."E'H =
AB/ED, since DE descends perpendicularly from right angle A DH
to the side which is opposite the right angle. Therefore, it produces two
mutually similar triangles. Therefore, GB/EH = (G'E/ED)
But KLA1/T = GB/EH. Therefore, KLllf/T = (GE/ED) (..4E/ED).
But GE = S, and ED = N, and further AE = R and ED = O. Hence
KLM/T=(S/N) (R/O). Hence, by inversion, T/KLilf = (lV/S) (O/R).
But, further, the ratio of solid Y to solid Z is compounded of the ratios
of their various sides, as is evident [by Book] XI of Euclid. And so,
YjZ = (KLA1IT) (NIS) (OIR). But we saw that (OIR) =
T/KLM. Therefore, Y/Z = (KLM/T) (T/KLAf). Since this ratio is
IOOV
120
654 Appendix IV
S et 0 ad R fit proportio solidi Y ad solidum Z. Set iam fuit proponio
N ad S dueta in proportionem 0 ad R sicut proportio T ad KL.:'\/.
Ergo proportio solidi Y ad solidum Z fit ex proportione KL.AI ad T
et T [ad] KLM. CUlD itaque fiat ex proportione primi ad secundum et
secundi ad pritnum., ipsa erit proportio equalitatis. Ergo solidum }r
100 est equale solido Z. Quare cum sit solidum Z notuffi quia omnia eius
latera sunt / nota, erit propter hoc solidum Y notum.
Set ex ductu medietatis laterumin perpendicularem fit area trianguli,
quonianl ex ductu AEinED fit superficies quedam dupla ad triangu-
lurn AED propter quod ipse est orthogonius. Ergo ipsa superficies
105 est equalis toti superficiei ACDE. Et similter ex ductu GEin DEfit
quedam superficies equalis GEDF. Et ex ductu BF in FD, que est
equalis CD, fit superficies equalis BFDC. Ergo ex ductu medietatis
trium laterum in perpendicularem fit area trianguli. Ergo ex ductu
KLMin N fit area trianguli. Set ex ductu 0 in hoc productum fit soli-
110 dUlll Y. Ergo ex ductu perpendicularis in aream trianguli fit solidum
Y; ergo et solidumZ. Ponam itaque ut area trianguli sit V et accipiam
aliam sibi equalem que sit X et aceipiam [N] in loco 0 propter hoc
quod ipse sunt equales. Dieo ergo quod ex ductu N in KLAf fit 1/,
quod est ipsa area trianguli, et ex duetu N, quod est 0, in X, quod
115 etiam est area trianguli, fit solidum Y. Hie una et eadem quantitas,
scilicet N, multiplicat duas, videlicet KLM et X. Ergo eadem est
proportio multiplicatorum et productorum. Ergo que est proportio
KLhf ad X eadem V ad Y. Set que est KLM ad X eadem est KLllf
ad T/, eo quod X et V sunt equalia. Ergo que est proportio KLAI ad
V eadem est V ad Y. Ergo Vest medio loco proportionalis inter
lineam KLilf et solidum }T. Set solidum Y est equale solido Z. Ergo
area trianguli est medio loco proportionalis inter KLllf et Z, quod
est, inter medietatem trium suorum laterum et solidum quod fit ex
tribus differentiis medietatis trium laterun1 ad tria latera. Ergo quod
125 fit ex ductu medietatis laterum [in] illud solidum valet illud quod fit ex
ductu aree in se. Si igitur coacervemus tria latera trianguli et agregati
sumpserimus medietatem et illius ad tria eius latera sumpserin1us dif-
ferentias et multiplicaverimus primam in secundam et tertiam in pro-
ductum fiet solidum I illlld inter quod et n1edietatem laterllm est area
130 trianguli proportio11alis, et si in iPSU111 n1ultiplicaverimus medietatell1
illorum trium laterum quod pro\renerit erit eqLlale ei qLIOd fit ex dllctll
loSr
108-10 Ergt) .... trianguli 1I1g. Ya
Hero's Theoren1 on the J\rea of a Triangle 6, 5
compounded of a ratio of the first to the second and a ratio of the second
to the first, it will IJe a ratio of equality. Therefore, solid Y = solid Z.
Therefore, since solid Z is knOW11 because all of its sides are known, so
accordingly will solid Z be known.
But the product of the semiperimeter and a perpendicular equals the
area of the triangle, sillce _i"IE ED == 2 6 /lED, tIle triangle being a
right triangle. f-Ience, 2 6 = ./1CDE. Similarly, DE =
GEDF, and BF FD :::= BFDC, F'D being equal to CD. Therefore,
the product of the semiperimeter and a perpendicular equals the area of
the triangle. Hence, KJ-Jilf .N == area of triangle. But KLllf 0 =
solid Y. Hence, the product of the area of the triangle and a perpendicular
equals solid Y, and therefore it equals solid Z. I\nd so I posit that the area
of the triangle is V, and I assume another area equal to it, namely, .AY. And
I assume N in place of 0 since they are equal. I say, hence, that i\T. KLllf
= V, V being the area of the triangle, and that 1.'/ X = solid }/Y, .i.\"r being
equal to 0, and X to the area of the triangle. Hence this same quantity
N is multiplied by two quantities, namely, and X. Therefore, since
the ratios of the multipliers and their products are the same, =
V/Ye But KLhl/ X = KLlllJ f/, X and T,T being equal. Hence, KL.l! 'I. T =
V/Ye Therefore, is the mean proportional between KLill and solid Y.
But solid Y= solid Z. Therefore, the area of the triangle is the mean pro-
portional between KLM and Z, i.e., between the semiperimeter and the
product of the excesses of the semiperimeter over [each of the] three sides.
Therefore, the multiplication of the semiperimeter by that product is equal
to the square of the area. Therefore, if we add the three sides of the triangle
together, then take half of that sum, then take the excesses of the semi-
perimeter over [each of] the three sides, multiplying the first excess by
the second, and then their product by the third, a solid results such that
the area of the triangle is the mean proportional between this solid and
the semiperimeter. And if we multiply the semiperimeter by that solid,
that which results will be equal to the square of the area. Therefore, if we
145
6,6 Appendix IV
aree in se. Si igitur illius sumpseritnus radicern, ipsa area trianguli et
hoc est quod voluitnus demo[n]strare.
Est etiam alter modus inveniendi per hanc eandem demo[n]stratio-
135 nelIl in cognitione aree trianguli suppositis notis lateribus. Demo[n]-
stratum enim est quod solidum quod fit ex tribus differentiis que sunt
medietatis laterum ad tria latera valet solidum quod fit ex medietate
trium laterutn in perpendicularem vel in: semidiametrum circuli in-
scripti et ex ductu eiusdem semidiametri in productum. Item demo[n]-
stratu1l1 est quod illud quod fit ex semidiametro in medietatem mum
laterutn est equale aree trianguli. Si ergo semidiameter circuli esset
nobis nota cum medietas trium laterum sit nota quia omnia latera
nota, multiplicaremus semidiametrum in illam medietatem laterum et
fieret productum area trianguli. Set semidiameter sic fiet nota. Solidum
quod fit ex tribus differentiis in se divide per medietatem laterum et
exibit superficies que fit ex semidiametro in se. Quare ergo illius
radicem [sume], et ipsa erit semidiameter, quam multiplica in medie-
tatem laterum et habebis aream. Et iste modus est omnino idem cum
priori.
Hec autem regula de triangulo fuit scripta in arabico: Si tria latera
trianguli coacerventur, medietatisque compositi ad singula latera dif-
ferentie sumantur, primaque in secundam ducatur et in productum
tertia, itemque quod inde provenerit in predictam medietatem, illius
ultimo producti radix erit area trianguli.
140 medietatem cor,.. ex medietate
147 [sume] sJpplelJi
15 2 post procluctUI11 babtl }ra el de/f.I.'i in
154 l)r()clucti (or,.. c:x; procltlcta
Hero's Theorenl on the Area of a Triangle 657
take the root of that, it will be tIle area of the triangle, and this is \vhat
wished to demonstrate.
There is also anotller method, by lTICanS of this same demonstration, of
finding the area of a triangle whetl the sides are known. For it has been
demonstrated that the solid arising from the nlutual multiplication of the
three excesses of the semipcrimcter over [each of] the three sides is equal
to the solid arising from t11c rnllltiplication of the scmiperimeter by a per-
pendicular, i.e., by the radills of an inscribed circle, and the multiplication
of that product by the radius. 1\lso it has been demonstrated that the
product of the radius and the semiperimeter is equal to the area of the
triangle. If, therefore, the radius of the circle were known to us since the
semiperimeter is [also] known by the fact that all of the sides are known,
we would multiply the radius by that semiperimeter and the resulting
product would be the area of the triangle*. But the radius may be known
in the following way. Divide the product arising from the mutual mul-
tiplication of the three excesses by the semiperimeter, and the quotient is
equal to the square of the radius. Therefore, take the root of this and it
will be the radius, which you multiply by the semiperimeter and you will
have the area. And this method is completely the same as the preceding one.
This rule for a triangle was written in Arabic: If the three sides of a
triangle are added together, and the excesses of one half of this sum over
each of the individual sides are taken, and the first excess is multiplied by
the second, and the third is multiplied by the product, and the result of
this is multiplied by the aforesaid half [perimeter], the root of the final
product will be the area of the triangle.
* We can illustrate the procedure of this second method by utilizing the
employed in the first part of the proof: We know that NO KLM = area of tnangle.
Knowing the sides, we know KLM. But we can also find NO as follows. Y = Z, or
R S T = N N KLM. Thus N = V(R S D/KLM.
Appendix V
A Version ofPhilo's Solution of the
Problem of Two Mean Proportionals
In Propositions XVI and XVII of their Verba ftliorum, the Banu
presented two of the antique solutions of the problem of finding two con-
tinually proportional means between two given quantities. These were the
solutions ascribed to Archytas and Plato by Eutocius (see the Commentary
to Propositions XVI and XVII in Chapter Four). Both of these solutions
were taken over by Leonardo Pisano in his famous Practica geometrie,1 and
the first of them appeared in the Liber de triangulis of Jordanus de Nemore.
2
In addition, each of these thirteenth-century mathematicians included
another solution of the problem not present in the Verba jiliortlm. This
additional solution is the one that Eutocius in his commentary to j\rchi-
medes' On the Sphere and the Cylinder assigns to Philo of Byzantium.
3
It is
essentially the same as the solution given by Hero in his llfechanica and his
Belopoeica (and repeated by Eutocius and Pappus).4 It also bears close re-
semblance to the solution attributed to Apollonius by Eutocius.
5
Since
the only known source of the solution by Philo is the Eutocius commen-
tary, it is probable that the source of the Latin text we are here considering
was ultimately the commentary of Eutocius. Whether the \vas
I Scritti di Leonardo Pisa/lo, ed. oEB. Bon-
compagni, vol. 2 (Rome, 1862), pp. I 53-5 5.
2 Jordanus de Nemore, Geol1Jctria vel de
triangulis libri il" ed. of 1\1. Curtze, },,1illci-
lungen des Copperl1iclIs- Verein flir Wissen-
schaft und Kt/nst Z" 1'horn, 6. Heft (Thorn,
188
7), pp. 40 -41
3 Archimedes, Opera oHJllia, ed. of J. L.
Heiberg, va!. j (Leipzig, 191 5), pp. 60-62.
Cf. note 7 below.
4 Ibid., pp. 58-60 (for the Eutocius rc-
production of Hero). For the citations to
the A1eehanica and tile Belopoeica of Hero
and to Pappus, see I. Thomas, Greek .JIa-
thell/alieal 1t-
7
orks, val. I (London, I9 I),
pp. 266-71, who gives the Greek text
(fro01 Pappus) and an English translation.
S Gp. eit. in note 3 a110\rc, pp. 64-66.
Incidentall \r in addition to this solution
associated the natTIC of Apollnnius
there is another proof based on the ('onifs
included by ibn cOn1ar abii
Philo on 1Iean PropcJrtjonals 6 9
familiar in Arablc or in Greek t() th.c author (or translator) of tIlis piece
is not certainly kno\vn. I am n(Jt sure of the existence of an .\rabic
text of the whole of comnlel1tary, the section on the problem
of the mean proportionals is cxtant,6 al1d it appears to huv"e been the source
of tIle "Platonic" solution of the problclTI given by the BanG (see
the Commentary to Chapter FOUf, Proposition X\'II, above). One pos-
sible indication that our Latin piece stenlS fronl the t\rabic rather than
from the Greek is tllat tIle letters C1111110yed on the diagram and in the text
to mark magnitudes differ tnarkedly frC)nl the Greek,7 thus suggesting the
Greek text had gone tllrougll the j\ral)ic befc)re being turned into Latin.
It will be evident to the reader that the texts of the solution presented
by Jordanus and Leonardo are virtually the same, although the Jordanus
text in the four copies I 11ave read omitted one crucial phrase (added by
'I-Path al-Isfahani in his Talkhis of the
Conics in II; 9 (cf. the Latin translation of
Abraham Ecchellensis, Florence, 166I :
Lemma VII, pp. 30-3 I), and by al-1'usi in
his version of the On the Sphere and the
Cylinder, Bk. IT, Proposition I (Arabic edi-
tion of Hyderabad, 1940, pp. 80-82). So
far as I know, al-Tiisi's version of this
proof has not beeri hitherto noted. He
remarks that most of the methods of
finding the proportional means involve
the moving of instruments or devices (al-
alit), while this is a theoretical method
"based on some of the elements of Apol-
lonius mentioned in the Book of Conics."
Actually, Pappus mentions that Apollo-
mus composed a proof based on conic sec-
tions (Collee/io, ed. of Hultsch, vo!. Ill, 2 I,
p. 56), and apparently the Arabic mathe-
maticians had recourse to some version of
it, as the existence of the two above-
mentioned versions of the proof based on
the use of an hyperbola seems to indicate.
Note that Paul Vet Eecke has given a
French rendering of Abraham Ecchellen-
sis' Latin text of the proof (Les Coniqlles
d'Apollonius de Perge, Bruges, I 9z3, p. 4z5n).
Cf. T. L. Heath, Apol'oniuJ of Perga... ,
pp. cxxv-cxxvii.
6 See the specimen from and description
of the Eutocius commentary in Arabic
manuscript, Escurial 960, Z2.V-38v, given
by F. J. Carmody The Astronomical Works
o.fThabil B.Qllrra, pp. 219, 220. I have not
had a chance to examine this manuscript
but I would judge from the specimen given
by Carmody that it starts off immediately
with the section on the solutions of the
problem of the proportional means. Cf.
Instanbul, Fatih Library, Ar.
341 4, 6ov-66v, 73r-Y, which appears to
be a similar extract. See Krause
"Stambuler Handschriften islamischer
thematiker," Qlltl'en und Studitn Zllr Gt-
schich/e der J.lfo/henJotik, Aslrono!1,it /lnJ
Physik.. Abt. B, vol. j (1936), p. 441.
7 The Greek text \\l'as translated in 11.69
by \Villiam ivloerbeke, and \ve can
his translation of Philo's solution for the
sake of comparison with the text being here
treated (IvIS Vat. Ottob. late 1850, 36v):
"Ut Filion bisanteus. Sint date due recte
que ...4B, BC, quarunl oportet duas medias
proportionales invenire. Iaceant ita ut rec-
tum angulum contineant qui apud B, et
copulata ...4Cdescribatur circa ipsam semi-
circulus qui ...4BEC, et ducantur ad rectos
angulos ipsi quidem BA que AD, ipsi
autem BG que GZ, et secusponatur regula
que moveatur apud B secans lineas AD,
GZet sit mota circa B quidemdonec utique
que a B ad D equalis fiat ei que ab E ad Z,
hoc est, intermedie periferie circuli et ip-
sius GZ. Intelligatur igitur canonium
habens positionem qualem habet que
DBEZ, ipsa DB equali existente, ut dic-
T
itaque quod equedistantibus existentibus
ipsis B..4, Z1-- angtllus qui apucl est rectus
et circulus AEGcompletus transibit et per
T. Quonianl igitur egualis est que DB ipsi
EZ, ergo et quod sul) El).l] est equale ci
660 Appendix V
me to lines 11-12). It may be that this phrase was in the original version
of Jordanus but somewhere along the line was dropped out of the text
(since none of my copies of the Jordanus text appears to be earlier than
the fourteenth century). At any rate, I would hesitate to say that Jordanus
copied the text from Leonardo, omitting the necessary phrase. But if he
did take our present piece from Leonardo, he made certain alterations,
such as replacing Leonardo's peculiar use of ex in the statements of ratios
by ad (see the various uses of ad in lines 13, 14, and I 5 in the Jordanus text
and compare them with the corresponding usage of ex in the Leonardo
text). On the whole, I think it likely that both authors copied from some
original piece that circulated separately. It is perhaps such a piece that is
present in two manuscripts that are in great part devoted to translations
made by Gerard of Cremona. The first of these, manuscript Zm (see Sigla),
includes the proof among several propositions added to the end of the text
of the Verba ftliorum of the Banii Miisa. It occupies a similar position in
manuscript S. In neither case is an author mentioned; nor is it given as
a part of a treatise but rather as an isolated proposition. It is thus quite
possible that the text of the proposition, which agrees very closely with
Leonardo's version of the proof, was translated from the Arabic by Gerard
of Cremona and that it was the source of both Jordanus' and Leonardo's
versions, with Leonardo copying it more faithfully. Of course, it must be
granted that both manuscripts are much later than the time of the compo-
turn est, ipsi EZ. Dieo quod que AD, GZ quod sub BZE. Sed quod quidem sub
sunt medie proportionales ipsarurn _4B, EDB est equale ei quod sub TDA; u-
BG. Intelligantur enirn eduete que DA, trumque enim est equale ei quod eontin-
ZG et eoneidentes apud T; manifestum gente a D. Quod autem sub BZE est
D B Z equale ei quod sub TZC; utrulnque enim
similiter est equale ei quod a contingente
a Z. Quare et quod sub TDA est equale
ei quod sub lZG, et propter hoc est ut
que DT ad 7Z ita que GZ ad Sed
ut que TD ad TZ ita que BC ad G'Z et que
DA ad AB; trigoni enim Dl-Z ipsi qui-
dem DT equedistanter protracta est que
BC, ipsi autem TZ equedistanter que
Est ergo ut que BC ad GZ que GZ ad 1)...4
et que DJ.4 ad ..4B, quod quidem pr()po-
situm erat dem()nstrate." Notice that
son1etjn1es I\loerbeke preserves the syn-
c()patecl Greek forms ()f writing quantities
\\,ith a con1111on letter (e.g., f()r
1)8: fnr R7 etC'_)_
Philo on Two :rv[ean Proportionals 6Gl
sition of tIle Prtlctita J!)eoIIJfj/rit: ()f T.. conarclc) and thus they might ha\c llsed
the Practica. I tllinl{ tllis less likely since) as I have noted, IJeonardo, and
Jordanus as well, did extract wllole l)!Opositions from the r rer/;tl jiliorll/J/
and both authors nlig]lt easily 11av'e found this proposition in the manu-
scripts of tile jilior//nJ whicll tllCY \vcre using.
11y extract from tIle Jordanus text is l1ased on manuscript 00, nlanu-
script E, Curtze's edition J (E'(I), and nlanuscript In Curtze's edition
the extract is fOUIld in Proposition 22 of the fourth book. In manuscript E',
where the propositions are collected in three books, our piece comes from
the thirty-fourth proposition of the tllird book. But in manuscript SI,
all the propositions are numbered successively, the proposition is num-
bered 67. The propositions are not numbered in Oa. The extract from
Leonardo is taken from Boncompagni's edition. I have added ,,ariant
readings from the aforementioned Gerardus manuscripts, Zm and 5.
Since both extracts are virtually the same, I have translated only the
first of them. The drawing is identical for both extracts and is as giv'en
in E and I(Ed) of the Jordanus text as well as in the Boncompagni edition
of the Leonardo text (except for the letter B omitted from the Leonardo
edition). The drawing is badly made in SI and O.
Sigla of A/ant/scripts
JORDANUS PROOF
I(Ed) = Dresden, Sach. Landesbibliothek Db. 86, 60f, early 14C. I have
used Curtze's edition cited in note 2, above, pp. 41-42.
Oa = Paris, BN. late 7434, 86r-v, 14C.
SI = London, Brit. Sloane 28 5, 91r, 14c.
E = London, Brit. Museum, Harleian 625, 129v, 14C.
For other manuscripts of the De triangulis, see the Sigla of Appendix I,
Section I.
LEONARDO PROOF
Bd = B. Boncompagni, Seritti di Leonardo Pisano, vol. 2 (Rome, 1862),
Nac. 10010, p. 154
Zm = Madrid, Bibl. Nac. 10010, 83v-84I, 14C.
5 = Oxford, Bodl. Libr., Digby 168, 122r (old page 12Ir), 14C.
662 Appendix V
[Probatio ex libro Jordani de triangulis]
86r / Aliter ad idem. Sint due linee AB, BC [Fig. 95], et angulus ea.rum
sit rectus. Deinde continuabo ACet faciam super lineam ACtrianguli
ABCcirculum ABHC, fiatque perpendicularis ADa puncta A super
lineam AB et ex puncto C fiat perpendicularis DC super BC. Et
5 protraham utramque, hanc in Z et iliam in E. Deinde facialIl transire
regulam que moveatur super punctum B et non separetur ab eo et
abscindat duas lineas DZ, DE et non cesset maveri donec ilia pars
regule que est inter Z et B sit equalis illi parti regule que est inter arcum
BG et E. Sit ergo illud in hoc situ, ut sit regula EHBZ, et sit EH
10 equalis BZ. Ergo quod fit ex ZHin ZB est equum ei quod fit ex BE
in HE. \Terum EB in HE equalis est DE in GB [et HZ in ZB est
equalis DZ in Ergo DZ est in ZA sicud DE in BG. Ergo
proporcio DE ad DZ est sicud AZ ad GB. Sed proporcio DE ad
DZ est sicud BA ad AZ. Ergo proporcio BA ad AZ est sicud pro-
15 porcio AZ ad GB et est etiam sicud proporcio GB ad GB. Stat ergo
propositum.
Probatio Jordani
I et ... earum: quarum angulus B E
z, 5 Deinde: demum ICEd)
2 AG E on/. SI/(Ed)Oa
3 ABHG corr. ex ABGH in ... MS5
5 hanc 0"1. Od / et 011/. Oa
6 separatur E
7 abscindat 00/(Ed) abscindet E alJcin-
dit SI
8 illi E ei S//(Ed)Oa / est 0"/. /(E-'dj
9 ergo: igitur E hie et IIbiq'Ie / hc}c: 1-1 Ed /
In IJJorg.
10 est equum Ir. E
I I Verum... est
l
I(Ed) (if. Leon.) que est
eqtlalis ei quod fit E et que est SI I
equalis: equum Oa
11-12 [et ... ZA] s'Ipplel
J
i (if. Leon.)
13 DEI: D Lf/ ED E I DE2 I(Ed) EO
EOa,fl
14 ./\.ZI: Z Lf/Oa
15 AZ: .5'/C){/ I est etian1 Ir. 0(1 ! etiam
Olll. ]] I Stat: cc lI1S tat
Philo on Two 1:Iean Proportionals
[The Solution from Jordanus' Book on Triangles]
The same thing [can be f()und] in al10ther way. I.. et there be two lines
AB, BG [Fig. 95], joined at a right angle. '"[hen I shall draw .LJG and
construct circle ..:"1BHG'* on line ./'lG' of ."JBG. Let perpendicular ./'1D
be constructed on line .,1B from point 4-1 and perpendicular DC' on line
z
Fig. 95
BC from point G. I shall extend each of them [i.e., DC and .-'4D] to E
and Z respectively. Then I shall lay out a rule to be moved about point B
without ever being separated from it, to intersect the two lines DZ and
DE, and to continue to be moved until that part of the rule between Z
and B is equal to that part of the rule between the arc BC and E. There-
fore, let the rule be in this position so that it is EHBZ, EH being equal
to BZ. Therefore, ZH ZB = BE HE. Now BE HE= DE GE**
[and HZ ZB = DZ ZA]. Therefore, DZ Z.-4. = DE BC. Therefore,
DEjDZ = AZjGE. But DEjDZ = [by similar triangles].
Hence BAjAZ= AZjGE= GEl GB. Hence that which was proposed
stands [AZ and GEbeing the mean proportionals between BA and GB].
* Strictly speaking H is not in fact introduced until later. Hence in proper mathe-
matical procedure we should have ABG(cf. Leonardo text, line 5). But all manuscripts
have ABHGand thus this seems to be Jordanus' error.
** This can be easily proved by using Proposition TI.I z of the Elements. See the proof
of Hero summarized by T. L. Heath in connection with Proposition ill.8 of the Elements
(Euclid, the Elements, vo!. 2 [Anapolis, 1947], p. 20).
[Probatio ex Leonardi practica geometrieJ
Ostendam aliter qualiter inveniam inter duas lineas duas lineas,
ita ut continuentur omnes secundum proportionem unam. Ponam
ergo duas lineas AB, BC; et angulus earom sit rectus. Deinde con-
tinuabo AC; et faciatn super lineam AC trianguli ABC circulum
5 ABC. Deinde prottaham ex puncto A perpendicularem AD super
lineam AB; et ex puncto C super BC perpendicularem DC; et pro-
trahatn utramque secundum reetitudinem usque ad Z et E. Deinde
faciam transire regulam, que moveatur super punctum B, et non
separetur ab eo, et sic abscidens duas lineas DA et DE, et non cesset
10 moveri donee sit illud quod cadit ex eis inter Z, B equale ei quod cadit
inter E, H. Ergo linea ZBest equalis linee EH. Ergo multiplicatio
ZH in ZB est equalis multiplicationi BE in HE: verum EB in HE
est equalis DEin GE; et HZ in ZB est equalis DZin ZA. Ergo mul-
tiplicatio DZ inZA est sicut multiplicatio DEinEG. Ergo proportio
15 DE ex DZ est sicut proportio AZ ex GE. Sed proportio ED ex DZ
est sicut proportio BA ex AZ; et proportio BA ex AZ est sicut
proportio AZex GE, et etiam sicut proportio GE ex BG. Et illud est
quod demonstrare volumus.
Probatio Leonardi
1 Ostendam aliter Bd Vola ostendere
Z1J'S
4 AG om. ZI1JS
~ _ABG Ed super quem sit ABGH ZIIJS
9 DA E'd DZ Zn,S / DE E'd ED Z11,J'
11 E, H Bd arcum BH et E Zo,S / Ergo
Bd Sit ergo illud ita ergo ZOJS
J 5 ex
l
: ad Z,,/
J 5, J 6, J 7 pro ex IIbiqllf habet Lf ad
17 etiam ~ est ctian1 Z'IIL-f I BG Ed C;B
Z,IJS
Philo on Two 1vfcan l?roportionals
[The Solution from Leonardo's
Handbook of Geometry
[Virtually the same as the above Jordanus text]
Appendix VI
Jordanus and Campanus
on the Trisection of an Angle
I. Jordanus' Solution
In the Verba ftliorum of the Banii Miisa presented in Chapter Four, we
noticed that Proposition XVIII outlined a mechanical method of solving
the net/sis problem to which the trisection of an angle had been reduced,
a method equivalent to tracing a conchoid referred to a circular base. I
While we have no sure evidence of this particular method having been
employed in antiquity, it is well known that Nicomedes and others treated
conchoids of a line (rather than of a circle) and used them specifically to
solve problems that reduce to neuseis.
2
Of particular interest to us is the
I The conchoid of a circle (called by 1960], p. 889).
Roberval the of Pascal) has the l For a brief history of neusis problems
general equation in rectangular coordi- and their connections with the trisection
nates of (Xl +y2 - 20X)l = b
2
(Xl +)1
2
) of an angle in antiquity, see T. L. Heath,
[or in polar coordinates, r = b + 2a cos a]. A History of Greek Mathematics, vo!. I
This curve is described as follows: when (Oxford, 1921), pp. 235-41. See his more
a rod of length 2b moves in such a way that extended treatment in The Works of Archi-
its midpoint describes a circle of diameter nJedes (Cambridge, 1897), pp. c-cxxii. In
20 while the rod is always directed to a connection with the neusis involved in the
fixed point on the circle, the ends of t11e Banii 11iisa proposition, we should note
rod will describe the conchoid of the circle. the statement defining and illustrating 11eu-
Theparticularconchoid traced byt11e n1ove- sis given by Pappus (Heath, ibid., p. c):
ment of the rule in the BanG Miisa propo- "Two lines being given in position, to
sition is such that a = b (see Fig. 96 for place between them a straight line gi,ren
such a conchoid). Roberval used this con- in length and verging towards a given
choid for the solution of the trisection point. If there be given in position (1) a
problem (see "Curves, Special," semicircle and a straight line at right angles
paedia Rritan/lica, 14th ed., ,rol. 6 [Chicago, tC) the ]Jase, or (2) t\V() semicircles \\'ith
I Jordanus' Solution 667
reduction of trisection to a lIt'lI.fis [()Ul1d in the cigllth lemma of the Liber
aSSUNJptortlm (or lJcIIJIIJtlia), existirtg 0111y ill ,\rabic but attributed to:\.rchi-
medes. \Vhile there is little doubt that tIle extant I-Jiber asst"nptorIJm was
not composed b)T r\rchinlcdes, l-Iciberg anel l-Ieath think it reasonable that
this particular lenll11a is derived ultinlatcly from /\rchimedes, since the
netlsis to which the trisectiol1 is re(luced in this lemma is exactly similar to
the net/seis assumed as possilJlc ill l].ropositions VI and \'11 of the On .spiral
Lines of .t\rclumedes.
3
Because of its similarities with the solution found
in the Verba jiliortlnJ, let us examine tllis lemma in more detail. \'(le can
c
H
translate it as follows:
4
"If we let line AB be led everywhere in the circle
and extended rectilinearly [see Fig. 96], and if BC is posited as equal to
the radius of the circle, and C is connected to the center of the circle D,
and the line (CD) is produced to E, arc .:1 will be triple arc BF. There-
fore, let us draw BC parallel to AB and join DB and DC. And because
the two angles DEC, DGE are equal, L GDC = 2 L DEC. And be-
their bases in a straight line, to place be-
tween the two lines a straight line given
in length and verging towards a corner
(gonion) of a semicircle." It is the first case,
with the perpendicular a radius and the
given line equal to a radius, that is involved
in the Banii Miisi proposition. Note that
most of the pertinent passages from Pro-
clus, Pappus, and Eutocius on net/sis prob-
lems have been collected together and dis-
cussed by M. Curtze, Re/iql/oe Copernieana,
(Leipzig, 1875), pp. 7-2.1.
3 Heath, The Works of Arehimedes, pp. ci-
ell; J. L. Heiberg, ArehimeJis opera omnia,
val. 2 (Leipzig, 1913), p. 518.
4 Heiberg, ibid.
668 Appendix VI
cause L BDC= L BCD and L CEC = LACE, L CDC = z L CDR
and L BDC = 3 L BDC, and arc BC = arc AE, and arc AB = 3 arc
BF; and this is what we wished."
This proposition shows, then, that if one finds the position of line .L4BC'
such that it is drawn through A, meets the circle again in B, and its ex-
tension BC equals the radius, this will give the trisection of the angle. It
thus demonstrates the equivalence of a neusis and the trisection problem-
but without solving the neusis. This proposition can be related to the Banii
Miisa solution if we draw the line DM perpendicular to DC [Fig. 96].
Then the point K is equivalent to point S in the Banii Miisa proof and
AKis equal to the radius (or TS in the Banii Miisa proof). Point A can
be found by finding C', and C' can be found by the intersection of an outer
part of the conchoid with the extension of DC. If then line C'ABwere
extended so that BC also equals the radius, the neusis in the form here
presented is solved. That is to say, if we had an undetermined line AIH
(equivalent to ZH in the Banii 11iisa proof) on which was laid in one
direction segment A!P equal to the radius and in the other direction seg-
ment AIP' also equal to the radius, and M continually moved on the cir-
cumference of the circle while line piMPH always passed through point B,
then the motion of P would trace the inner loop of the conchoid whose
intersection with DM determines point K and the motion of pi would
trace the outer part of the conchoid whose intersection with the extension
of DC determines point C'.
Although it is evident, as we have seen, that no solution of the neusis
was given in the Libcr assumptorum, a procedure similar to that employed
by the Banii Miisa was attributed by a later Arabic author to an Ancient
(i.e., a Greek).5 Whatever its origin, the technique of the Banii 1.fiisa was
not without influence among the Arabic mathematicians.
6
But our partic-
ular concern in this section is its use by Jordanus in the Latin West. If the
reader examines the proposition here presented from the Liber de triangrl/is,
he will notice that actually Jordanus presents three "solutions" of the
trisections (all reducing to the same ne'/sis): (1) the solution taken sub-
stantially from the T/erba ftliortllJl (see text below, lines 1-26); (2) a slight
modification of that solution (lines 27-3 I) where, instead of the mobile
line being ZQH and point Z mO'Ting to its final position at T [Fig. 97],
an equivalent line LONmoves from the contrary direction so that L comes
to the same final position at T: in either case the line 7:fE (with TJ equal
5 E. Woepcke, d'OllJt1r ../-11- 6 Ibid., p. I 17--
26
. C:f. C:llrtzc, Ope ril. in
khoy)'dlJJi (Paris, 185 I), p. I 20. note 2 above, l)age 2 .
I Jordanus' Solution 669
to the radius) is tIle ol)jectivc; and (3) a solution \vhere the required line
TSE is constructed according t() the 111eth()d gi\TCn in Pfc)position \'. 19
of a "'ork entitled Per.rpeetit'" (sce liJ1CS 32-47). III i\lhazen's Optics, which
had already IJeen translated il1tO Proposition \T.
34
giv"es a solution
of a net/sis of tIle kirld rer'fcsentcd by the c()nstruction of Tf/j',' and I
suspect it is to this proposiric)n that Jordanus is referring in spite of the
difference in proposition nunlbers. Illcidcntally, ,\lhazen's solution is one
based on conic sections and would clearly appeal t() a geometer more than
the mechanical solution of the f-Jencc we are nfJt surprised
at Jordanus' preference for the third solution.
j\s in f\ppendix V, my text of the Jordanus prop()sition is based on four
copies: I(Ed), E', Oa, and SI, and the same procedures for the establishment
of Iny text used there were followed here. I have had to depend on Curtze
for the reading of I (since I did not have films of the part of the Dresden
manuscript containing the Jordanus work). Sometimes I ha\re questioned
the reading of Curtze by adding a question mark in the variant readings
where it seemed likely that Curtze had misread the manuscript (e.g., where
he reads demum \vhen all the other manuscripts hav'e deinde). I ha\l'e made
only one addition to the text, namely, the insertion of lIon before ponam
in line 6, since the whole point of the mechanical procedure used depends
on line ZH being indeterminate in length so that, regardless of where
point Q is, ZH will still pass through point E. The non was in the BanG
text (Chapter Four, Proposition XVIII, line 9), and so we must
assume either that all of our manuscripts stem ultimately from a copy
which had carelessly omitted the non present in the Jordanus text or that
Jordanus in the preparation of his text from the Banu 1Iiisa original had
omitted it.
Manuscripts SI and Oa have three figures, one for each of the three
solutions. Manuscripts I has two (at least Curtze reproduces only figures
for the first and third solutions), and manuscript E economically combines
all three figures. Since all three solutions reduce to precisely the same
neusis, for the sake of economy I have followed E in combining all three
7 Alhazen, OptictJe thesaurus (Basd, 1572),
Book V, Proposition 34, p. 144: "A punc-
to peripheriae circuli extra datam dia-
metrum dato, ducere lineam reetam, ita
sectam data diametro, ut segmentum inter
diametrum et punctum peripheriae dato
puncta appositum, aeqlJetur datae rectae,
minori circuli diametto."
670 Appendix VI
figures in a single figure (Figure 97).
8
The marginal folio references are
to manuscript I, as given by Curtze.
Sigla of Manuscripts
I(Bd)= Dresden, Sach. Landesbibliothek, Db. 86, 59r-v, early I4C. Bd.
cit. in note z above of Appendix V, pp. 38-39.
Oa = Paris, BN. late 7434, 85v- 86r, I4C
SI == London, Brit. Museum, Sloane 285, 9or-v, I4c.
B -== London, Brit. Museum, Harleian 625, I29r, I4c.
8 In SI, Oa, and J(Ed) the first figure is
silnply tny Figure 97 withc)ut line fJOJ.V
and l)()int F'. The seconcl figure consists
only of scolicircle DZI--l wit11 lines l / l ~
nz, and J-,ON dra\vn in a manner sinlilar
to their disp()sition on Fig. 97. And the
thir(l figure is essentially tny Figure 97
without lines ZlI aocl LON.
Proposition IV.20
from Jordanus' On Triangles
Appendix VI
[Propositio IV.2o
ex libro Jordani de triangulis]
I QUEMLIBET ANGULUM RECTILINEUM IN TRIA EQUA
DIVIDERE.
Sit angulus ABG acutus in tria dividendus [Fig. 97]. Super B
sumpto centro describatur circulus DZM et protrahatur DB in L,
5 erigaturque BZ perpendicularis ad DL, protrahamque lineam ZE in
H. Et (non) ponam linee ZH finem determinatam, et resecabo de
ZH, ZQ equalem DB semidiametro. Ymaginemur igitur quod linea
ZEHmoveatur versus L, ita quod Z motu suo non recedat a circum-
ferencia et linea ZH non cesset transire super E sed semper inhereat
10 puncto E, et non cesset Z moveri quousque Q sit super BZ; sitque
terminus illius motus T; erit ergo et quasi pars linee ZH, vel ut aliter
dicam ZH, iacebit super TE. Eritque TS equalis ZQ sive BD semi-
diametro. Dico autem TL esse terciam arcus DE. Protrahamus a
puncto B BAf equedistantem TE linee, et protraham / BM in K, et
15 coniungantur puncta T, .NI. Age: T5 equalis est lv!B et equedistans;
ergo AfT, BS sunt equales et equedistantes; et BZ est perpendicularis
I rectilineum: rectum Oa
4 et E 0111. I(Ed)OaS/
5 ad DL: super BL E / a11te linean1 add.
SIZ
6 <non) SlIpplctJi; sed if. Verba ft/jortllJI,
Prop..YVIII, linea 9 / detern1inatuI11
Oa
7 Yalnginelnur EOa in1aginelTIUr SI in1a-
ginemus I(Ed)
8 LE' A I(EdJOa,f/
9 E: E quiescens
10 et non: neque E I 1110veri: 1110tU (?)
l(Ed)
1 I terminus motus: Z illius motus in Oa
11-12. erit TE: ita iaceat ZH
quasi super lineam TB E
13 autetTI: igitur E' / terciam: terciam par-
tern
14 equidistanten1 habet Oa hie et ubiqlle /
B1\f: !vIB
15 Age: cum igitur E argue (?) I(Ed)
16-1 7 erg{) ... ergo
1
: igitur E ergo SI
1 GBS ()a BG I(E'c/)
I Jordanus' Solution
[Proposition IV. 20
from Jordanus' On Triangles]
TO DIVIDE j\N\" RI2C1ILINE.l\R ANGLE INTO THREE
EQUAL Pi\RTS
Let the acute L /1BG' be the one to be trisected [see Fig. 97]. With B
assumed as the center let circle .DZilf* be described. Let DB be extended
to L, and let BZ be erected as a perpendicular to DL. Then let line ZE
be extended to H. And I do not pose any determined limit to line ZH.
And I shall cutZQ equal to radius DB fromZH. Therefore, let us imagine
G
H
A
Fig. 97
that line ZEHis moved toward L in such a way that Z during its motion
is not separated from the circumference and line ZH continues to pass
through and adhere to E, and Z continues to be moved until Q falls
on BZ. And let the terminus of the motion [of Z] be T. Therefore, a part
of line ZH-or in other words ZH-will coincide with TE, and TS
= ZQ = radius BD. I say, moreover, that arc TL = 1/3 arc DE. From
point B let us draw BMparallel to line TB, extending BAf to K, and let
points T and Mbe connected. Proceed: TS = hlB and the two lines are
* Points Z and M are in fact to be determined later. It is not good geometrical form
to use these points to designate the circle. Cf. the better procedure of the Banii Miisi
in Proposition XVIII of their Verba ftljorum.
674 Appendix VI
ad DL, ergo MT secat DL ad angulos rectos. Ergo DL secat MT
cordam in duo equa. Ergo ML, LT arcus sunt equales. Item ML,
DK arcus sunt equales, quia MK, DL sese intersecantes in centro B
RO faciunt angulos ad invicem equales. Ergo a duplici pari KE arcus ad
DK est dupIus. Ergo angulus KBE ad KBD est dupIus. Diviso ergo
KBEin duo equa erit angulus propositus ABGin tria equalia divisus.
Si vera proponatur angulus maior acuto in tria equalia dividendus,
dividatur prima ille in duas medietates, quarum utraque pars erit
angulus acutus. Deinde dividatur utraque illarum medietatum in tria
equa secundum dictu.rn modum. Constat ergo propositum.
Paululum quoque apercius idem probabitur, hoc solo variato, quod
pro HZ protrahatur LEN; et cum LBZ sit rectus, sit OL equalis BL
linee. Ymaginemur ergo ]\lL sic moveri versus Z ut LNsemper per-
30 transeat super E, moveaturque NL quousque 0 sit in BZ, et cetera ut
pnus.
De divisione anguli in tres partes equales mihi nequaquam sufficit
dicta demonstracio, eo quod nihil in ea certum reperio. Ut autem mihi
me sufficientem faciam, hoc idem sic demonstro. Datus angulus acutus
35 sit .L4.BG. Igitur in B posito pede circinij describatur circulus et pro-
trahatur ABad L in periferia, et a centra super DL extrahatur perpen-
dicularis BZ, et a puncto E per BZ semidiametrum ducatur linea per
figuram 19 quinti perspective, ut TS sit equalis semidiametro BL.
Ducatur ergo BAf equedistanter linee TSE, et protrahatur ad K. Quia
17 post rectos add. 00 per 29 primi / Ergo
z
:
propter h()c quod ZB ita facit igitur E
18 cordam 0111. E / equa: equalia E / post
equa add. 00 per tercian1 tercii et 4 pri-
mi et 27 tercii I Ergo: quare et E' I
Item: Sed et E
19 quia: eo quod E / centrc): puncta E'
20 Ergo: igitur E / KE: KL l(Ed)
.2 I Ergo: igitllf 13 / KBD: anguIum DBK
E I est onl. E I durIus fr. E' (/llle ad /
ergo
2
: igitur !
22 equa: equalia Oa
23 l)roponatur: ponatur }-:"
24 ille 0111. Oa
25 Deinde: denlun1 (r) I(E'd)
26 Constat crgl): et constat E'
27 qu()que: quiden1 Ort I jden1: hoc Oa I
pr()batur If I solurTI
., R rLl I T T ()"'.."i
E I OL: omni Oa
29 Ymaginemur OaE imaginemur SI in1a-
ginemus (?) l(Ed) I ergo: igitur E I
ut I(Bd) et OaS'1 quod E
Z9-30 pertranseat: transeat E
30 mo\'eaturque: et moveatur E mo\reatur
Oa / NL: LN I(Ed) / et E, 0111. J(Ed)
OaJ'I/ ut: sicud E
32 --33 De ... demonstracio 0111. Oa
33 eo quod: ita quod 5' / in ea certun1 I
certunl in eo I(Ed)
35 Igitur ... circini: Pnsito igitur centro in
B E' / dcscribatur I(E'd) SI circun1scri-
batur EGo
36 a Oa, Ol.i/. ,)' c J(.F.:d)
3
8
'T
1
S ST jj'lS 011
39-47 I)ucatur ... f
,ro
I)()situnl: et cetera
sicud IJrius
, n istanter OriJ'I J(EdJ
I Jordanus' Solution 675
parallel. Therefore, 1llT an<i IJ.Y 3.re equal and parallel. i\nd BZ js perpen-
dicular to DL. Thercfore, .'1/1' \vill CLlt at rigllt angles. Therefore,
DL will bisect chord and LT are equal. i\lso,
arcs ilfL and DK are equal because, ilIA" and DI-J' intersecting eacll other
at the center B, forn1 mutually equal [vertical] angles. 1-1herefore, by
equality twice, arc KE' == 2 arc l)K. rfllcrefore, L KEl] = 2 L K Bl:J.
Therefore, when / KBE' has been bisected, the proposed J:-IBG' will
have been trisected.
Now if an obtuse angle is to be trisected, let it first be bisected so that
each of its halves will be an acute angle. Then let each of these halves be
trisected by the said method. Therefore, that \vhich was proposed is clear.
The same thing will also be proved a little more clearly with only one
cllange made, namely, that instead of HZ, let line LEi.\T be drawn.
since LBZ is a right angle, let OL == line EL. Therefore, let us imagine
that l\':L is so moved toward Z t11at it always passes through E and that it
continues to move until 0 falls on BZ, and so on as before.
The said demonstration concerning the trisectjon of an angle does not
at all suffice for file, for I can find no certainty in it. To make it suffice
for me, I demonstrate the same thing as follows. Let the gi\Ten acute angle
be ABG. Hence, with the foot of a compass placed at B, let a circle be
described, and let AB be extended to L in the circumference. ..:-\nd from
the center let BZ be erected as a perpendicular to DL. Then by Proposition
V.I9 of the Perspective* let a line be drawn from point E through radius
BZ so that TS = radius BL. Hence let B.L'lf be drawn parallel to line TSE,
and [then] extended to K. Since Bill and TS are equal and parallel, BS
and MTwi11 be equal and parallel. Therefore, since L LBZis a right angle,
* For a discussion of this work, see the Introduction to the text.
676 Appendix VI
40 ergo BM, TS sunt equales et equedistantes, erunt BS et AfTequales et
equedistantes. Ergo, CUlD angulus LBZ sit rectus, erit BFT rectus.
Ergo AfT secatur per lineam. BF per equalia. Ergo arcus TM est
dupIus ad arcum ML. Sed arcus MT est equalis arcui KE propter
equedistantes. Ergo arcus KE est dupIus ad arcum. ML, ergo et ad
45 arcum DK. Dividatur ergo KE per equalia, habetur propositum. Si
fuerit angulus maior acuto, dividatur in duos acutos, et utriusque
sumatur pars tercia, et habetur propositum.
40 crg<): igitur I(E'd)
4I post rectus.! add. Oa pcr 29 l?rin1i eu-
clidis
4
2
post BF add. 0(/ per terciam tercii eucli-
dis
43 posl .. add. Ot! per 27 tercii cuclidis
44 equedistantcs Oa,fl equedistanciam
I(J3d)
45 hal)ctur ,II et hal1ctur Oa habebitur
1
4
6
a CC'1t r u .fl
47 haLcbitur I(l:",I)
I Jordanus' Solution 677
L BFT will be a right angle. 'T"herefore, ~ f T will be bisected by line BP.
Therefore, arc Till ==- 2 arc J.lflJ. But arc 11lT === arc }(E, because of the
parallels. Therefore, arc }(E' =.:- 2 arc J.l1L. Therefore, arc KE == 2 arc DK.
Therefore, if KE is bisected, that whicll was proposed is had. If the angle
is obtuse, let it be bisected into two acute angles, and let a third part of
each be taken, and then that \vhich was proposed is had.
678 Appendix VI
2. The Solution Attributed to Campanus
In the editioprinceps of Campanus' version of the Elements of Euclid (Venice,
1482) there is added to the end of the fourth book (no pagination, but see
signature d2 v) a solution of the trisection probletn that seems to stem
from Jordanus' treatment ofthe problem, andthat probablyarises fromwhat
we have called the third solution of Jordanus.
1
While I have not been
able to. find this solution in four manuscript copies of the Campanus com-
mentary available to me (Columbia Univ. Plimpton 11S. 156; Vat. reg.
suev. 126I ; Vat. Urb. late 506 ; Vat. Urb. late 507), it is present in one
1l1anuscript recendy examined,
2
and so for the present we can hold to the
Campanus attribution. It does, however, have a serious geometrical defect,
as Copernicus recognized in a note to his personal copy of the editio prin-
ceps.3 For Campanus loosely tells us to construct from point E "a line
equal to CB in such a way that it cuts the circumference of the circle in
point F" [see Fig. 98]. It is only after this has been done that he adds the
instruction to extend the line from E to A. Thus the 11eusis is not properly
stated, for the nctlsis must include the requirement that the intercept be-
tween CD and the circumference of the circle be on a line verging towards
A as well as the requirement that the intercept be equal to the radius. It
should be further noted that if Campanus did draw this proof from the third
solution of Jordanus, he not only completely altered the lettering but also
omitted reference to the proposition in the Perspective that would permit
the solution of the neusis. It may be, of course, that the future discovery
I I have suggested its possible origin in
Jordanus' third solution, because, like that
solution, it assumes the nct/sis as done and
thus d()es not contain tIle mobile lines
( J-IZ or LN) used in the first two solu-
tions to solve the flcusis.
z As this volume \vent to press, Ivrr. John
11urdocll inforn1ccI n1C that Naples, Bib!.
Naz. VIII. C. 2 I (I 5c ?), contains tIle pro-
position relati,re to the trisection of an
angle in the nlargin at the end of Book IV
of tlle Can1panus E'lIclid (f. lav). I have
c(JlIated this nlanuscript witll Jny text and
it agrees exactly \\rith it except that eqlli-
dislanles is slJelled tllroug]10ut as Cq"f-
diJitJlllfS ancl the scri be has \vrittcn and
in line 6, obviously arising from homoeo-
teleuton.
J M. Curtze, Reliq/lae Copernicanae (Leip-
zig, 1875), p. 6. Copernicus' note reads:
"Datum angulum (intellige, qui non fuerit
maior recto) trifari urn secare et in linea cd
etc. Id aptius explanatum fuisset hoc modo:
Et ducatur recta linea ac( scans cd in e et
circulnferentiatn in.f, ita- ut if aequalis sit
ipsi rb. De quo qide Nicomedem de con-
choicli11us." OIle is not to infer from the
last sentence that Copernicus had access
to Niconledes' tract, long since lost, but
rather that he had learned fronl Pappus
th;l r N icolnedcs l1ad cl11]11oyecl a conchoid
for tri:3ccriLn of
2. Solution j\ttributed to Campanus 679
of manuscript copies of this Campanus solution will contain such a
reference.
I have drawn the text of this p.roposition almost completely from the
editio princeps, only correcting it in two places by references to a later
edition (Ed
z
, Basel, 1546, 11. 586).
680
Appendix VI
[Ex Commentario
Campani in libros elementarum]
DATUM ANGULUM IN TRIA EQUA DIVIDERE
Sit angulus datus C [Fig. 98]. Volo ipsum dividere in tres equales
angulos, quod sic facio. Pono primo C centrum circuli describendo
circulum qualitercunque contingat, et protraho latera continentia da-
5 turn angulum usque quo secent circumferentiam in punctis A et B.
Tunc a puncto C, quod est centrum circuli, duco lineam CD perpen-
diculariter ad lineam CB, et in linea CD assigno punctum E, a quo
cluco lineam ad equalitatem CB usque quo secet circumferentiam cir-
culi in puncto F. Et produco E usque ad A. Deinde protraho lineam
10 CHequidistantem F.4, que scilicet CH transeat per centrum; et cluco
lineam FC equidistantem linee EC; et protraho lineam CB in conti-
nuum et directum usque ad L, que secat lineam FC orthogonaliter in
puncto 0 et per equalia. Dico ergo quod arcus LQ est equalis arcui H B
propter hoc quod angulus LCGest equalis angulo HCB cum sint con-
15 tra se positi. Cum igitur arcus FG sit dupIus arcui LG, erit etiam
dupIus arcui HB. Sed arcus FG est equalis arcui HA cum sint inter
duas lineas equidistantes, que sunt FA et GH. Ergo arcus H ~ ~ est
dupIus arcui HB; ergo et angll1us ACH est duplus angulo HCB.
Dividam ergo angulum ~ ~ H per equalia per lineam Ci11, et patet
20 propositum.
16 111\ j-.'(I! Al f l:'rl [cC 1i.'IClIIII J 7]
Solution Attributed to Can1panus
[From the Commentary
of Campanus on the Ele1nents]
681
TO .1\ i\NGl-4E IN'-rfO Pi\RTS
Let the given angle be C' [see Fig. 98]. T wjsh to divide it into three
equal angles, which I do in this \vay. First I posit C as the center of a
circle by describing a circle of any sort, and I extend the sides containing
the given angle until they cut the circumference in points 41 and B. Then
from point C, which is the center of the circle, I draw line CD perpen-
dicular to line CB. And in line CD I assign point E, from which I draw
a line equal to CB in such a way that it cuts the circumference of the circle
in point F. And I extend [the line from] E to J\. Then I draw line G'H
parallel to FA, CH evidently passing through the center...-\nd I draw
G
H
Fig. 98
line FG parallel to line BC, and I extend line CB continuously and in a
straight line to L, which extension cuts line FG orthogonally in point 0
and [hence] bisects it. I say, therefore, that arc LG is equal to arc
since L LCG= L HeB, the angles being vertical angles. Since, therefore,
arc FG = 2 arc LG, also arc FG = 2 arc HB. But arc FG = arc HA,
since they are between two parallel lines, FA and GH. Therefore, arc
HA = 2 arc HB. Therefore, L ACH = 2. L HCB. Therefore, I shall
bisect L ACHby line CM, and that which was proposed is evident.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
and INDEXES
Bibliography
This bibliography is primarily of works bearing on ancient and medieval mathe-
matics. It does not include the manuscript catalogues cited in the introductory
section or the standard Greek texts of non-mathematical authors like Aristotle and
his commentators which are occasionally cited in the footnotes and commentaries.
Abraham bar tJ:iyya. Liber e111badorunJ. Latin translation of Plato of Tivoli. Ed. of
M. Curtze in Abhandlungen zur Geschichte der mathematischen Wissenschaften, 12.
Heft (Leipzig, 1902), pp. 1-183-
Albert of Saxon)r. Questio de quadratura circuli. (Text and English translation in
Chapter Five, Section 3.)
Albert of Saxony (?or Nicole Oresme?), Utrumt!yameteralicuiusquadratisitcofJl/IJcn-
surabilis costae eiusdem. Ed. by H. Suter in Zeitschrift filr Mathematik und Pf?ysik,
vol. 32. (1887), Hist.-lit. Abt., pp. 43-54.
AIgazel. See al-Ghazzali.
Alhazen. Opticae thesaurus. Basel, 1572.
Ametus filius Iosephi (Ahmad ibn Yusuf).Epistola de proportione et proportio:lalitate.
Latin translation of Gerard ofCremona. MS Paris, BN late 9335, 64r-75v. See
forthcoming edition of Dorothy Schrader. Arabic text in MS Cairo, Bibl. Nat.,
no. 39 mathematique M.
Anaritius (al-Nairizi). In deCCIIJ libros priores ElcfJJenlorUfll COmllJentarii. Ed. of M.
Curtze as Supplementum to Euclid, Opera oJJlnia, Leipzig, 1899. See also the
Arabic text edited by R. (). Besthorn, J. L. Heiberg, G. Junge, ]. Raeder, and
w. Thomson, Codex IJeidensis }99.I, Copenhagen, 1893-1 93 2
AnOn)Tffious. De illfjtlisiciol1e ctlpacitatir jigllrarUfJJ. Ed. of M. Curtze in Abhandlllngen
ZII,. Geschichte der A'fathelllatik, 8..Heft (1898). Cf. MS Vienna, Nat.-bibli. 5
2
77,
101r-lI0r.
De)IS0perilllelris. MS Oxford, Bodl. Auct. F. 5. 28, I05V-I06v.
---. il1ish11ot ha-Aliddol. Ed. of S. Gandz in Otlelfell tllld J'tlldicl1 ZII,. Ge..rchichte
der A1atIJell/otik, Astrollolllie lf11d P0!Jik, A : Quellen, vol. 2 (1932)'
pp. 1-96.
Practic."a l\fS Vat. Ref!. SUC'T. 1261.
Bibliograpl1Y
68
5
Apollonjus of Perga. Opera qUl1e Cratce e........:slallt. Ed. of J. L. I-Ieiberg, Leipzig,
18
9
1
-93.
---. ApollotJillJ of Perga: The l'rca/ise Oli Conic Sections. 1-ir . of T. L. Heath,
Cambridge, 1896. Reprinted 196I.
---. Les COl1iqucs d'J(lpollollills dr. Perge. Tr. of IJaul ver Eecke, Bruges, 192 3.
Reprinted 1961.
Arcrumedes. De quadralllra parl1bole.r et a/itl opera. In translation of .l\ntomo de
Albertis, MS Vienna, Nationalbibliothek, cod. 171. (See Chapter One,
note 30.)
---. De fllel1sura circ"li. In medieval l.atin versions of Plato of Tivoli and
Gerard of Cremona. (See Chapter Two for manuscripts and Chapters Three
and Five for paraphrases and emendations.)
---. De sphaera et cylindro. In a medieval Latin fragment. (See Chapter Six,
Section I.)
---. Monull/el1la oIl/ilia Illo/henJalica quae extanl. In translation of F. Maurolicus,
Palermo, 1685.
---. Opera nonulla in latinulJJ conversa. Translation with commentaries by F. Com-
mandino, Venice, 1558.
---. Opera omnia. In the medieval Latin translation of William of Moerbeke,
MS Rome, Vat. Ottob. late 1850, 1Ir-60r.
---. Opera on/nia. In the modern edition of J. L. Heiberg, 2d ed., 3 vols.,
Leipzig, 1910-15.
---. Opera quae quideo/ exstant omnia. Basel, 1544. First Greek edition with
translation of Jacobus Cremonensis.
---. The Works of .4rchimedes. Translated and paraphrased by T. L. Heath,
Cambridge, 1897 (reissued by Dover Publications, New York, 1950).
---. See also Dijksterhuis and Gaurico.
Archimedes (pseudo-). De insidenlibus in humidum (or De ponderibus). For Latin
text and English translation, see Moody and Clagett, The .Jtfeditval Scie11ce of
IFeights, Madison, 195 2.
Aristotle, Physica. In the medieval nova Irans/a/io of Moerbeke, published with
Walter Burley's COR/men/aria on the Physics (Venice, 1589), and with the exposi-
tion of Aquinas on the Physics (Rome, 1954).
Bachon Alardus. In 10 Euclidis. (See Chapter Five, Section z, note I.)
Bacon, Roger. ComRJunia ma/hema/ica. Ed. of R. Steele, Oxford, 1940.
---. Compendium studii philosophiae. In Opera quaedam hactenus inedita, ed. of J. S.
Brewer, London, 1859.
BanG MGsa. Verba filiorufIJ (Liber de geometria). Translation of Gerard of Cremona.
(For new edition, see Chapter Four, where comments are made on the older
edition of Curtze [Halle, 1885].)
Becker, O. "Eudoxus-Stuclien 11,"Quellen undSfudien zur Geschichte tier Ma/he/na/ile,
Astronomie und Physik, B. StudieD, vol. 2. (1933), pp. 369-
8
7.
686 Bibliography
Bernardus Pitoiensis. G'o11letrie lib".. MS Brit. Mus. Addit. 174%0, Ir-30r.
al-Biriini. See Suter, H.
Bjornbo, A. A., and S. VagI. "Alkindi, Tideus, und Pseudo-Euklid," AbhanJ-
lungln z"r Geschichte tier mathematischen WissBnschajten, .16. Heft(19IZ), pp.
'cHandschriften-Beschreibung," pp. 123-47.
---. "Gerhard van Cremonas 'Obersetzung von Alkhwarizmis Algebra undo
von Euklids Elementen," Bib/iotheca Mathematica, 3. Folge, vol. 6 (190 5),PP.
.139-4
8
_--. With Latin commentary of Campanus, Venice, 1482; also ed. of Basel,
154
6
.
---. The Ele/llen/s. English translation of T. L. Heath, 3 vols., 2d ed., Cam-
bridge, 192.6; reprinted Annapolis, 1947.
Eutoeius. Com1llentarius in di,lJensioneln circuli. Ed. of J. L. Heiberg in Archimedes,
Opera o1Jlnia, vo!. 3, Leipzig,
Francischus de Ferraria. Questio de proportionibus. MS Oxford, Bodl. Canon. Mise.
22.6, 58r-
6
3
r
.
Franco of Liege. De quadratura circuli. Ed. by Dr. Winterberg, Abhandlungen zur
Geschichte tier Mathematik, 4. Heft (1882), pp. 137-90.
Galilei, Galileo. Opere. Ed. Naz. 23 vols., Florence, 1891- 199.
Gaurico, L., ed. TetragonisHJus, id est circuli quadratura, per Call1panUfII, ArchimetU11I
SyraclISonum a/que Boetillm.. adinventa. Venice, 1503.
688 Bibliography
al-Ghazzali. AlgazeJ's Metaphysics. Medieval Latin translation, ed. by J. T. Muckle,
Toronto, 1933-
Gerard of Brussels. Liber de motu. See M. Clagett.
Gordanus. Compi/acio quorundam canonum in practicis astronomie et geometrie. MS Vat.
Pal. late 1389- (See Chaptet Three, Section 4.)
Grabmann, M. CI/glie/fllo Moerbeke, O.P. i/ traduttore delle opere di Ari.stotek. Rome,
194
6
443; mentioned, 4
l-lippocrates of C:hios, 6 I I
horn angle, 403, 423-25, 4;0-3 I
J-Iugo, 446n
I-Iugh of St. Victor, 22.4
Hultsch, F., 35?, 359, 629, 635---36n, 659
n
Hunt, Ro, x, XXIV
hydrostatics, 2, 164
Hypsicles, 63 3
Iamblicus, 608
Iannelius, C., xix
(=Alhazen), 560,633,669
Improbatlo (=refutation), 444
including and included figures, 63-64, 68,
172.-74,402
inertia, In
658n-59n
Islam, 223
IsoperioJeters, see Deysoperimetris
Jacobus Cremonensis, 12.
James, M. R., A1{V
J ohannes de Muris, 6, 10, 12., 162., 369n
J ohannes de Tinemue: his De cl/rvi! !uper-
jiciebus, 6, 63, 65, 169n, 191, 225n, 363-
65, 558- 6o, and see Chap. 6, Sects. 2.- 5,
pasn/II; quadrature tract attributed to,
I 5n, 576--77
Johannes Gervasius, 443, andsee Gervasius
de Essexta
Jordanus de Nemore: Hero's formula for
area of triangle and, 636-38; his De
trianguns, 96n-970 , 224-25, 366, 387,
5
6
7, 57
2
-75, 637, 65
8
-
6
3, 670-77; his
Philo/egni, 637; on quadrature, 15 n, 33,
567-75, 577; on trisection of an angle,
668-77, 678; Philo's solution of mean
proportionals problem and, 366, 560,
658, 660-63 ; statics of, 9-I I ; mentioned
141, 5
61
, 637
n
Juliacensis, Johannes Caesarius, 5810, 587
Junius Nipsus, Marcus, 6350
kalashie, 444
aJ-Kharkhi, 636
al-Kindi, 2z6, zz8n, 433
kinematics, 9-10, 32
Krause, 6590
Krisrcller, 0., 14
/anJbtlIlOlllflltJ, 629
I.Jachmann, Ko, 635 0
Ao, xxiii, 633-34
I_el/Inlaid, sec lJber fiSSllnJplorUl11
Leonardo da Vinci I
Leonardo IJisano: Philo's solu-
tion proportionals problem
an.d, 660-61, 664-6 ; his Praclica oe.eO/lJe-
IrJe, 224, 357-58,363-66,519,636,
65
8
-
61
,664-65; mentioned, 7, 560-61
Leonardo of Cremona, 636-370
lever, law of, 9, 628-29
Liber assuIIlp/orJim, 4, 224, 367, 632,
667-68
Liber de curl,is sJlperociebuJ, Lbapo 4, Sec.
2, and Jee Johannes de Tinnemue
Liber en/badorunJ, 170
Liber IrillnJ .(ra/run/ (= Vtrba JiJiorunl), see
BanG
Libri, Go, xxiv-xxv, 443
666
logic and medival geometry, 62, 144-45,
16
9, 193-95, 388, 398-99,
8;
Lull, Raman, I Sn- I 6n
lunes, 62, 65, 81, 92n, 94, 165, 169,
569n, 610-26 passim, and Itt lunula in
Selective Index
al-Ma'miin, 216
Macray, G. D., xx, xxiii-xxiv
Macrobius, 59, 64, 74, 79
Madan, F., xx, xxv
Mahumed, xxi
Mainardi, s" Leonardo of Cre-
mona
Maurolico, Francesco, 13
means: single proportional, 15 n, 62, 169,
186-88 two continuously proportional,
7,
12
4, 335-45, 3
6
5-
66
, 519-
60
, 65
8
-
6
5
mechanical methods: in solution of prob-
lem of mean proportionals, 334-35,
366, 658-65 in solution of problem of
trisection of an angle, 344-48, 366, 666-
81
S3, 3
6
5-
66
Menge, HI, 6Z7
7
18
Meyerhof, M., 226n
Michael Ephesius, 42 7
Migne, L'Abbe, 607
Mileus, see Menelaus
Millas Vallicrosa, J. M., xxix, 16n-170
Minio-Paluello, L., 607n
Mishtlat ha-Middot, 635
Moerbeke, William of, 4, 6-8, I 1-13, 29,
63,165,167,219, 3
6
9
n
, 433, 443, 53
1n
,
55 8, 563, 6070, 608
Molinier, A., xxv
Moody, E., 8n-9n, 445 n, 637n
Muckle, J. T., 167
Munich, 143n
Munich Version of De mensura circuli: cited
in comparison, 60, 98, 387, 399, 429,
561; text and translation of, 193-222
Murdoch, ]., x, 37, 60n-61n, 139, 369,
4
02n
, 4
2
9,43
1
, 627n, 633, 67
8n
Miisa ibn Shakir, 7, 226, and see Banii Miisa
226
al-Nadim, 365, and see Fihrist
Naples Version of De mens/Ira circuli: cited
in comparison, 59, 62,144, 164-65, 220-
2I, 387, 42 , 429; text and translation of,
80-9
1
Nasir aI-Din al-Tiisi, see al-Tiisi
Neugebauer, 0., 442n
neusis, 366- 67, 559-60, 666-69, 678
New Testament, 442
Nicholaus, 1\1agistcr, xxiv
Nicomedes, 608, 666, 678n
Nix, L., 166n, 441n-42n
numerals: IndcJ-Arabic, 18, 36, 65, 97;
Roman, 18,65,98
numbers, their use to sin1plify argulnent,
144,
16
4
O'Donnell, ]. R., 428
Orcsnlc, Nicole, 12, 140,399,445, 561
Oxford, 610
Pacioli, Luca, 636
Pallas, 442
jlappus, 357, 363, 510, 629, 65 90, 666n--
67
11
, 678n
Paris: J\rchin1cdcs at, 1 1-1 2. ; s ta ries at;; J () ;
t11entioned, 398-- 99
l)ascal, 66Gn
pentagon, 374-77, 390 - 93
Geperal Index
per illlpossibill, 444, and see impossibile i"
Selective Index
Perspective, 669, 675, 67
8
Philo of Byzantium, 65
8
-
6
5
Philoponus,]ohn,4
2
7-
28
philosophy and geometry, 5
61
-
62
pi: determination of by Banii Miisa, 97
0
,.
223-24, 264-79, 358-59; in Florence
version, 95-96, 112-34, 13
8
, 5
60
; in
Tivoli's translation, 17, 25-27, 29; in
Gerard's translation, 48-55, 4
02
; other
versions of Prop. III of De mensura cir-
culi and, 80n, 96n-97n, 140-41 ; rhetori-
cal expression of, 224, 322- 25, 364; v'a-
lue of in Gordanus' Compilacio, 143-44n ;
in Campanus' tract, 584; mentioned, 6,
441, 520, 559
Pines, S., x
Plato, 224, 559, 65 8
Plato of Tivoli: as possibile translator of
De mensura circuli, 4, 16-2 9, 4ov, 358;
as translator of Liber enJbadorl/nJ, 17,
63
6n
Plutarch, 628
polygon: area of regular, 168, 174-77,
246--49, 35
6
, 370--7
1
, 374-79, 39
0
-94,
4
1
, 4
1
4-1 7; area and volume of solid
formed by rotation of, 469-79,483-95,
5
12
-
1
7,547-57,63
1
polyhedron, volume of regular, 248-49,
35
6
Poole, R. L., 58 In
Porphyry, 608
portillflCJlla, 62., 145, 1 64, 169, alld see Selec-
tive Index
postulates: betweenness, 369 for various
,rersions of De RJCnSllra circllli, 6,-64, 68,
90, 137, 143
n
, 166--68, 170 -72, 368- 69,
402,416--19, 562 ; other, 62.8-Z9; use of
physical, 166, 562
po\ver, geometric (= mechanical ad\tan-
tage), 628-29
/Jroctictl geolJJetrie, anol1ymous, 3
6
Prcte, S., 640
IJris111, 434, 437-3 8
l)rnclus, 4 28, 667
n
prf)pl)rtionals, 1)[()lJ}eJl1 l) J11ean: set' n1eans
/)Ji:/
llf1
o.gr.. '1j)/JOJ., I 9, and see
Pl.nlC111Y: ()f, 195, 2.10-1 I,
7 ., 379n 8 I, 387; OpI irs, 633--34
l,yranlid, Y ()lu.ne ()f, 2.49, 434, 35
6
General Index
Pythagorean theorem, 78, 9711, and see t111/k
Pythagoreans, 608
al-Qifti, 4n
quadrature of a circle: in ArchilTIcdean
sense, 7, 224, 25
6
-79, 324-2 5, 3 7-59,
3
8z
-
8
7, 394-97, 39
8
-43
2
, 63 0 -3 1 ,andue
Chaps. 2, 3, 4, (prop. I-VI), 5, alld Ap-
pendixes I and II,pnssiIlJ; in the sense of
quartering a circle, 400, 409; a/Id see
quadratura ill Selective Index
Rarnee, Pierre de la, 636
Ratdolt, E., 220-21
ratio (=apodeixis), 444
rectification ( = the equation of curved and
straight lines), 63-64, 69, 143n, 166, 168,
17,371,378-79,411,413
reduction to absurdity, 80, 90, 95, 144-45,
444, 45 5, 561, and see per ill/possibile
refraction, 633-34
Regiomontanus, 12
Renaissance, 3, 12-14, Z24
Roberval, 666n
Roman balance, 9
Rome,606n
roots: cube, 349-5 1, 367 square, 95, 139-
4
2
Rudorff, A., 635n
Ruska, J., zz6n
Sambelichius (=Simplicius), 6z8
Sarton, G., 43411
Savasorda, 17, 359, 63 6
Schone, H., 5,357
scholastic proofs, 59-60, 194
Schum, W., xxii
Scott, E. ]. L., xxvii
Seneca, 634
separando, 529
serrati/e, 434, 437
Sextus Pithagoricus, 608
Shrader, D., 629
Simplicius, 16n, 61, 426-27, 608, 610-2.6,
628
Simson, R., 530
specific gravity, 8, 10
sphere: area and volume of, 213-2 5, 3
1
7-
35, 437-39, 479-
8
3, 497-5
0
7,
518-20; segment of, 53 1, 53
1
-4
1
,544-
4
6
, 5
60
statics, 8--J 1, 562) 629-30
Stce)c, 225 n
steelyard, 9
J/ereOflJclry, see f- Iero of Alexandria
Sturn1, 1\., 82.0
Suter, l-I., xxviii, 30, 70, 17n, 226n-28n,
344",3
6
5, 5
82n
, 587,610, 63 8n
Tanner, T., 443n
Tannery, P., xxvi, 1 n, 22.7n, 568
Tartaglia, Niccolo, 13, 636n
Thabit ibn Qurra: his Liher learaslonis, 9,
563; his translation of i\1eaSllrelf,en/ of
Circle, I7n, 29; other tracts and transla-
tions of, 38, 226
Thaus, Valentinus, 637n
Themistius, 426-28
Theodosius, 228n, 292V, 363
Thomas, I., 365-66, 608, 6 8n
Thorndike, L. , xx-xxi, xxvi-xxvii
Thornson, S. H., 610n
Tinemue (or Tinnenie), 440, and Stt Johan-
nes de Tinemue
tiphis ( = Tiphys), 442 , 57
Torre, A. della, 14
trapezium, 628
triangle, area of, 3 43, 356, and paJnnl,
and see Hero of
trisection of an angle, 7, 224, 344-49, 366-
67, 560,666-81
Troianus, Curtius, 13
al-Ttisi: his version of the Jleasurtl1Jent of
the Circle, 17, 29, 38, and see Chap. 2, Sec.
2 (Arabic variants) passim; his version
of the Verba ji/iorum, 23 1-33,
361- 63, 638n, and see Chap. 4 (Arabic
variants) paSSillJ; on mean proportionals,
659
n
Vacca, G., 583n
Van Ryzin, Sister St. Martin, 228n
Venatorius, Thomas Gechauff, 120
Verba filiorum, see Banii
Vienna, 143
n
, 39
8
Viterbo, 443
VogI, S., xxiii, xxvi, xxviii, 30n
volume, see polygon; polyhedron, volume
of regular; pyramid, volume of; sphere;
,fe.
Widmann, Johannes, 636
72.0
Wiedemann, E., 3n, 40, 366, 633
Willis, J., 79
Winterberg, Dr.., I 5n
Winton, 443
Witelo, 443
Woepcke, E., 668n
Wiistenfeld, F., 30, 223n
General Index
Yapya ibn Abi a n ~ i i r 22.6
York, 443
Yrinus (=Hero), 629
Zeuthen, H. G., 63n, 628
Zoubov, V. P., 399
n
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA
Page xxix: line 11. For Millas read Milhis.
Page 5: line 26. For page 605 read page 60.
Page 12: line 14. After Cylinder insert
Floating Bodies. Note 21, add Oresme
made numerous citations to Moerbeke's
translation of the genuine Floating
Bodies, presumably from MS Vat.
Ottob. late 1850, in his Questiones in
libros de caelo (MS Erfun, Amplon. Q.
299, 47v-48v). These citations will be
discussed in Volume Two.
Page 287: line 6. For trianle equals to read
triangle equals.
Page 369: line 10 of note. For property
read property of.
Page 442: line 23. For sources. read
sources, although there is an English
canonist, Johannes de Tynemuth, or
Tinemue, who died about 1221 and who
could have had something to do with
the translation or rewriting of the text
(see A. B. Emden, A Biographical Regis-
ter of the University of Oxford to A.D.
1500, val. 3, Oxford, 1959, p. 1923).
The possibility of his authorship of rhe
De curvis superftciebus will be discussed
in Volume Two.
Page 443: line 9. For Winton read Win-
chester; fOr 1261 read 1262. Line 11, fOr
1261 read 1262. Note 15, befOre Th.
Tanner add A. B. Emden, A Biographical
Register ofthe University o/OxfOrd10 A.D.
1500, vo!. 2, Oxford, 1958, p. 757.
Page 467: Note to Figure 66. Note should
appear under Figure 67, page 471.
Page 531: line 32. For DEF read DLF.
Page 541: line 1. For two, surfaces read
two surfaces.
Page 611: line 17. For DZa read Z.
Page 648: numbered line 4. For propostiti
read propositi.
Page 692. For adhere read adherere.
Page 713. For Alverny, M.-T. dread
Alverny, M.-T. d
l